Document:

<PAGE>

                                                                    EXHIBIT 10.2

                                DREYFUS PROTOTYPE

                           BASIC PLAN DOCUMENT NO. 01

                   DREYFUS PROTOTYPE DEFINED CONTRIBUTION PLAN

<PAGE>

                                TABLE OF CONTENTS

      DEFINITIONS..........................................................  1
            1.1   "Account"................................................  1
            1.2   "Act"....................................................  1
            1.3   "Actual Deferral Percentage".............................  1
            1.4   "Adoption Agreement".....................................  1
            1.5   "Affiliated Employer"....................................  1
            1.6   "Anniversary Date".......................................  1
            1.7   "Annuity Starting Date"..................................  1
            1.8   "Average Actual Deferral Percentage".....................  1
            1.9   "Average Contribution Percentage"........................  2
            1.10  "Beneficiary" or "Beneficiaries".........................  2
            1.11  "Board of Directors" ....................................  2
            1.12  "CODA"...................................................  2
            1.13  "Code"...................................................  2
            1.14  "Committee"..............................................  2
            1.15  "Compensation"...........................................  2
            1.16  "Contribution Percentage"................................  4
            1.17  "Contribution Percentage Amounts"........................  4
            1.18  "Early Retirement Age"...................................  4
            1.19  "Earned Income"..........................................  4
            1.20  "Easy Retirement Plan"...................................  4
            1.21  "Effective Date".........................................  4
            1.22  "Elective Deferrals".....................................  5
            1.23  "Eligible Employee"......................................  5
            1.24  "Eligibility Year(s) of Service".........................  5
            1.25  "Employee"...............................................  6
            1.26  "Employer"...............................................  7
            1.27  "Employment Commencement Date"...........................  7
            1.28  "Entry Date".............................................  7
            1.29  "Excess Aggregate Contributions".........................  7
            1.30  "Excess Contributions"...................................  7
            1.31  "Excess Elective Deferrals"..............................  7
            1.32  "Family Member"..........................................  7
            1.33  "Fund"...................................................  7
            1.34  "Highly Compensated Employee"............................  7
            1.35  "Hour of Service"........................................  9
            1.36  "Integration Level"...................................... 10
            1.37  "Matching Contribution".................................. 10

                                        i
<PAGE>

            1.38  "Net Profits"............................................ 10
            1.39  "Non-Highly Compensated Employee"........................ 10
            1.40  "Normal Retirement Age".................................. 10
            1.41  "Owner-Employee"......................................... 11
            1.42  "Participant"............................................ 11
            1.43  "Participating Employer"................................. 12
            1.44  "Period of Severance".................................... 12
            1.45  "Plan"................................................... 12
            1.46  "Plan Year".............................................. 12
            1.47  "Prototype Plan"......................................... 12
            1.48  "Qualified Matching Contributions"....................... 12
            1.49  "Qualified Nonelective Contributions".................... 12
            1.50  "ReEmployment Commencement Date"......................... 12
            1.51  "Regular Account" ....................................... 13
            1.52  "S-Corporation".......................................... 13
            1.53  "Self-Employed Individual"............................... 13
            1.54  "Service"................................................ 13
            1.55  "Service Break".......................................... 14
            1.56  "Severance from Service Date"............................ 14
            1.57  Shareholder-Employee".................................... 14
            1.58  "Sponsor"................................................ 15
            1.59  "Taxable Wage Base"...................................... 15
            1.60  "Thrift Contributions"................................... 15
            1.61  "Total and Permanent Disability"......................... 15
            1.62  "Trustee" or "Custodian"................................. 15
            1.63  "Trust Agreement" or "Custodial Agreement"............... 15
            1.64  "Valuation Date"......................................... 15
            1.65  "Voluntary Contributions"................................ 16
      PARTICIPATION........................................................ 16
            2.1   Membership............................................... 16
            2.2   Excluded Employees....................................... 16
            2.3   Reemployment............................................. 16
            2.4   Change in Employment Status.............................. 17
            2.5   Limitations on Participation of Owner-Employees.......... 17
      CONTRIBUTIONS AND CREDITS TO MONEY PURCHASE PLANS.................... 18
            3.1   Employer Contributions................................... 18
            3.2   Forfeitures.............................................. 18
            3.3   Credit to Participants................................... 19
      CONTRIBUTIONS AND CREDITS TO PROFIT SHARING PLANS.................... 21
            4.1   Limits on Employer Contributions......................... 21
            4.2   Forfeitures.............................................. 22

                                       ii
<PAGE>

            4.3   Employer Discretionary Contributions..................... 22
            4.4   401(k) Cash or Deferred Arrangements ("CODA")/Thrift
                  Contributions............................................ 25
            4.5   Maximum Amount of Elective Deferrals..................... 28
            4.6   Average Actual Deferral Percentage Tests................. 29
            4.7   Average Contribution Percentage Tests.................... 34
            4.8   Non-Hardship Withdrawals................................. 38
            4.9   Distribution on Account of Financial Hardship............ 39
            4.10  Special Distribution Rules............................... 42
      CONTRIBUTIONS AND CREDITS TO TARGET BENEFIT PLANS.................... 42
      CONTRIBUTION AND ALLOCATION LIMITS................................... 43
            6.1   Timing of Contributions.................................. 43
            6.2   Deductibility of Contributions........................... 43
            6.3   Return of Employer Contributions......................... 43
            6.4   Limitation on Allocations................................ 44
            6.5   Separate Accounts........................................ 53
            6.6   Valuation................................................ 53
            6.7   Segregation of Former Participant's Account.............. 54
      VESTING.............................................................. 54
            7.1   Vested Interest.......................................... 54
            7.2   Vesting of a Participant................................. 55
            7.3   Amendment of Vesting Provisions.......................... 55
            7.4   Forfeitures.............................................. 56
      BENEFITS ON RETIREMENT AND SEPARATION FROM SERVICE................... 57
            8.1   Commencement of Benefits................................. 57
            8.2   Automatic Annuity Requirements........................... 60
            8.3   Profit Sharing Plans: Exception from Automatic
                  Annuity Requirements..................................... 64
            8.4   Transitional Rules Applicable to Joint and Survivor
                  Annuities................................................ 64
            8.5   Required Payment of Benefits............................. 66
            8.6   Available Forms of Distribution.......................... 73
            8.7   Certain Distributions.................................... 73
            8.8   Forfeitures.............................................. 74
      DEATH BENEFITS....................................................... 74
            9.1   Payment to Beneficiary................................... 74
            9.2   Method of Payment........................................ 74
      PARTICIPANT CONTRIBUTIONS; ROLLOVERS................................. 75
            10.1  Voluntary Contributions.................................. 75
            10.2  Voluntary Tax-Deductible Contributions................... 75
            10.3  Transfers From Other Trusts.............................. 76
      INSURANCE POLICIES................................................... 77

                                      iii
<PAGE>

            11.1  Policy Procurement....................................... 77
            11.2  Rules and Regulations.................................... 77
            11.3  Transfer of Policies..................................... 78
            11.4  Payment Upon Death....................................... 79
            11.5  Plan Provisions Control.................................. 79
      LOANS................................................................ 79
            12.1  Loans to Participants.................................... 79
            12.2  Provisions to be Applied in a Uniform and
                  Nondiscriminatory Manner................................. 81
            12.3  Satisfaction of Loan..................................... 81
            12.4  Loans to Owner-Employees or Shareholder-Employees........ 81
      TOP-HEAVY PROVISIONS................................................. 82
            13.1  Definitions.............................................. 82
            13.2  Vesting Schedules........................................ 85
            13.3  Minimum Allocation....................................... 86
            13.4  Adjustment to Defined  Benefit  Fraction and Defined
                  Contribution Fraction under section 6.4.................. 87
      THE COMMITTEE........................................................ 87
            14.1  Creation of a Committee.................................. 87
            14.2  Committee Action......................................... 87
            14.3  Authorized Signatory..................................... 88
            14.4  Powers and Duties........................................ 88
            14.5  Nondiscrimination........................................ 88
            14.6  Records and Reports...................................... 88
            14.7  Reliance on Professional Advice.......................... 88
            14.8  Payment of Expenses...................................... 88
            14.9  Limitation of Liability.................................. 89
            14.10 Payment Certification to Trustee......................... 89
            14.11 Claims Procedure......................................... 89
      GENERAL PROVISIONS................................................... 90
            15.1  No Right of Continued Employment......................... 90
            15.2  Nonalienation of Interest................................ 90
            15.3  Incompetence of Participants and Beneficiaries........... 90
            15.4  Unclaimed Benefits....................................... 91
            15.5  Separate Employer Trusts Maintained...................... 91
            15.6  Governing Law............................................ 91
            15.7  Severability............................................. 91
            15.8  Gender and Number........................................ 91
            15.9  Titles and Headings...................................... 92
            15.10 Failure of Employer's Plan to Qualify.................... 92
            15.11 Exclusive Benefit........................................ 92

                                       iv
<PAGE>

            15.12 Action by Employer....................................... 92
      AMENDMENT AND TERMINATION............................................ 92
            16.1  Amendment................................................ 92
            16.2  Termination and Partial Termination...................... 93
            16.3  Plan  Merger and  Consolidation  or Transfer of Plan
                  Assets................................................... 94
            16.4  Amended and Restated Plans............................... 94
            16.5  Participating Employers.................................. 95
      PAIRED PLAN PROVISIONS............................................... 96
            17.1  Compliance With Section 415(e) of the Code............... 96
            17.2  Adjustment of Combined Plan Fractions Under Section 415
                  of the Code for Top-Heavy Ratio in Excess of Ninety
                  Percent (90%)............................................ 96
            17.3  Top-Heavy Minimum Benefits and Contributions............. 96
            17.4  Integration of Paired Plans.............................. 97

                                       v

<PAGE>

                  DREYFUS PROTOTYPE DEFINED CONTRIBUTION PLAN
                           BASIC PLAN DOCUMENT NO. 01

                                   ARTICLE I.
                                   DEFINITIONS

1.1   "Account" shall mean any one of the accounts maintained by the Committee
      for each Participant in accordance with Section 6.5.

1.2   "Act" shall mean the Employee Retirement Income Security Act of 1974, as
      amended.

1.3   "Actual Deferral Percentage" shall mean the ratio (expressed as a
      percentage) of Elective Deferrals (including Excess Elective Deferrals),
      Qualified Matching Contributions, and Qualified Nonelective Contributions
      paid over to the Fund on behalf of an Eligible Participant for the Plan
      Year to the Eligible Participant's Compensation for the Plan Year. The
      Actual Deferral Percentage of an Eligible Participant who does not make an
      Elective Deferral, and who does not receive an allocation of a Qualified
      Matching Contribution or a Qualified Nonelective Contribution, is zero.

1.4   "Adoption Agreement" shall mean the document executed by the adopting
      Employer which contains all the options which may be selected and which
      incorporates this Prototype Plan by reference.

1.5   "Affiliated Employer" shall mean any corporation which is a member of a
      controlled group of corporations (as defined in section 414(b) of the
      Code) which includes the Employer; any trade or business (whether or not
      incorporated) which is under common control (as defined in section 414(c)
      of the Code) with the Employer; any organization (whether or not
      incorporated) which is a member of an affiliated service group (as defined
      in section 414(m) of the Code) which includes the Employer; and any other
      entity required to be aggregated with the Employer pursuant to regulations
      under section 414(o) of the Code.

1.6   "Anniversary Date" unless otherwise defined in the Adoption Agreement,
      shall mean the first day of the Plan Year. If the initial Plan Year is
      less than a 12 month period, the Anniversary Date shall mean the first day
      of the 12 consecutive month period designated as the Plan Year in the
      Adoption Agreement.

1.7   "Annuity Starting Date" shall mean the first day of the first period for
      which an amount is paid as an annuity or any other form.

                                       1
<PAGE>

1.8   "Average Actual Deferral Percentage" shall mean the average (expressed as
      a percentage) of the Actual Deferral Percentages of the Eligible
      Participants in a group.

1.9   "Average Contribution Percentage" shall mean the average (expressed as a
      percentage) of the Contribution Percentages of the Eligible Participants
      in a group.

1.10  "Beneficiary" or "Beneficiaries" shall mean one or more persons designated
      as such by a Participant to receive his interest in the Fund in the event
      of the death of the Participant.

1.11  "Board of Directors" shall mean the Board of Directors of the Employer if
      the Employer is an incorporated business entity.

1.12  "CODA" shall mean a cash or deferred arrangement qualified under section
      401(k) of the Code.

1.13  "Code" shall mean the Internal Revenue Code of 1986, as amended.

1.14  "Committee" shall mean the person or persons appointed by the Employer to
      administer the Plan in accordance with Article XIV. If the Plan is an Easy
      Retirement Plan or if no such Committee is appointed by the Employer, the
      Employer shall act as the Committee.

1.15  "Compensation", unless otherwise specified in the Adoption Agreement,
      shall mean, in the case of an Employee other than a Self-Employed
      Individual, his wages as defined in section 3401(a) of the Code and all
      other payments of compensation to the Employee by the Employer (in the
      course of the Employer's trade or business) for which the Employer is
      required to furnish the Employee a written statement under sections
      6041(d) and 6051(a)(3) of the Code, determined without regard to any rules
      under section 3401(a) of the Code that limit the remuneration included in
      wages based on the nature or location of the employment or the services
      performed, which are actually paid during the applicable period. In the
      case of a Self-Employed Individual, Compensation shall mean his Earned
      Income. Unless otherwise specified in the Adoption Agreement, the
      applicable period shall be the Plan Year. If elected by the employer in
      the Adoption Agreement, Compensation shall also include Employer
      contributions made pursuant to a salary reduction agreement with an
      Employee which are not currently includible in the gross income of the
      Employee by reason of the application of sections 125, 402(e)(3),
      402(h)(1)(B) or 403(b) of the Code. Compensation shall include Excess
      Contributions which are recharacterized in accordance with Section 4.6(d)
      to the extent that Elective Deferrals are included in Compensation.

      Solely for purposes of determining Actual Deferral Percentages and
      Contribution Percentages, Compensation, if the Plan is a non-standardized
      plan, shall be determined

                                       2
<PAGE>

      without regard to any exclusions which may be elected in the Adoption
      Agreement. Solely for purposes of determining Actual Deferral Percentages
      and Contribution Percentages, the applicable period for determining the
      amount of an Employee's Compensation shall be limited to the period during
      which the Employee was an Eligible Participant.

      For Plan Years beginning on or after January 1, 1989, annual Compensation
      shall not include amounts in excess of $200,000, as adjusted by the
      Secretary of the Treasury at the same time and in the same manner as under
      section 415(d) of the Code except that the dollar increases in effect on
      January 1 of any calendar year is effective for Plan Years beginning in
      such calendar year and the first adjustment to the $200,000 limitation is
      effective on January 1, 1990.

      For Plan Years beginning on or after January 1, 1994, the annual
      Compensation of each Participant taken into account for determining all
      benefits provided under the Plan for any Plan Year shall not exceed
      $150,000, as adjusted for increases in the cost-of-living in accordance
      with section 401(a)(17)(B) of the Code. The cost-of-living adjustment in
      effect for a calendar year applies to the applicable period beginning in
      such calendar year.

      If an applicable period consists of fewer than 12 months, the annual
      Compensation limit is an amount equal to the otherwise applicable annual
      Compensation limit multiplied by a fraction, the numerator of which is the
      number of months in the short applicable period, and the denominator of
      which is 12.

      In determining Compensation for purposes of the annual Compensation limit,
      the family member rules of Section 414(q)(6) of the Code shall apply
      except that in applying such rules, the term "family" shall include only
      the Employee's spouse and any lineal descendants who have not attained age
      19 before the close of the Plan Year. If, as a result of the application
      of such family member rule the annual compensation limit is exceeded, then
      (except for purposes of determining the portion of Compensation up to the
      Integration Level if this Plan is integrated with Social Security), the
      annual compensation limit shall be prorated among the affected individuals
      in proportion to each such individual's Compensation as determined under
      this Section prior to the application of such limitation.

      If Compensation for any prior applicable period is taken into account in
      determining a Participant's allocations for the current Plan Year, the
      Compensation for such prior applicable period is subject to the applicable
      annual Compensation limit in effect for that prior period. For this
      purpose, in determining allocations in Plan Years beginning on or after
      January 1, 1989, the annual Compensation limit in effect for applicable
      periods beginning before that date is $200,000. In addition, in
      determining allocations in Plan

                                       3
<PAGE>

      Years beginning on or after January 1, 1994, the annual Compensation limit
      in effect for applicable periods beginning before that date is $150,000.

1.16  "Contribution Percentage" shall mean the ratio (expressed as a percentage)
      of an Eligible Participant's Contribution Percentage Amounts to the
      Eligible Participant's Compensation for the Plan Year.

1.17  "Contribution Percentage Amounts" shall mean the sum of the Thrift
      Contributions (including amounts recharacterized in accordance with
      Section 4.6(d)), Voluntary Contributions and Matching Contributions under
      the Plan on behalf of an Eligible Participant for the Plan Year. Such
      Contribution Percentage Amounts shall not include Matching Contributions
      that are forfeited either to correct Excess Aggregate Contributions or
      because the contributions to which they relate are Excess Elective
      Deferrals, Excess Contributions, or Excess Aggregate Contributions. Such
      Contribution Percentage Amounts shall include forfeitures of Excess
      Aggregate Contributions or Matching Contributions allocated to the
      Eligible Participant's Employer Matching Contribution Account, which shall
      be taken into account in the year in which such forfeiture is allocated.

1.18  "Early Retirement Age" shall mean the date a Participant satisfies the age
      and service requirements for early retirement, if any, specified in the
      Adoption Agreement. Upon reaching his Early Retirement Age, a
      Participant's right to his account balance shall be nonforfeitable,
      notwithstanding the Plan's vesting schedule. If a Participant separates
      from service before satisfying the age requirement for early retirement,
      but has satisfied the service requirement, the Participant will be
      entitled to elect to receive an early retirement benefit upon satisfaction
      of such age requirement.

1.19  "Earned Income" shall mean the annual net earnings from self-employment in
      the trade or business with respect to which the Plan is established,
      provided that personal services of the individual are a material
      income-producing factor. Net earnings will be determined without regard to
      items not included in gross income and the deductions allocable to such
      items. Net earnings are reduced by contributions by the Employer to a
      qualified plan to the extent deductible under section 404 of the Code. Net
      earnings shall be determined with regard to the deduction allowed to the
      Employer by section 164(f) of the Code for taxable years beginning after
      December 31, 1989.

1.20  "Easy  Retirement  Plan" shall mean a Plan  established  under Dreyfus
      Easy  Standardized/Paired  Prototype  Money Purchase  Retirement  Plan
      No. 01005, Dreyfus Easy  Standardized/Paired  Prototype Profit Sharing
      Retirement  Plan No. 01006, or Dreyfus  Standardized/Paired  Prototype
      Defined Benefit Plan No. 02001.

                                       4

<PAGE>

1.21  "Effective  Date" shall mean the date specified in the Adoption Agreement.

1.22  "Elective Deferrals" shall mean any Employer contributions made to the
      Plan at the election of the Participant, in lieu of cash compensation, and
      shall include contributions made pursuant to a salary reduction agreement
      or other deferral mechanism. With respect to any taxable year, a
      Participant's Elective Deferrals are the sum of all Employer contributions
      made on behalf of such Participant pursuant to an election to defer under
      any CODA, any simplified employee pension cash or deferred arrangement as
      described in section 402(h)(1)(B), any eligible deferred compensation plan
      under section 457, any plan as described under section 501(c)(18), and any
      Employer contributions made on behalf of a Participant for the purchase of
      an annuity contract under section 403(b) pursuant to a salary reduction
      agreement. Elective Deferrals shall not include any deferrals properly
      distributed as an Excess Amount pursuant to Section 6.4(d).

1.23  "Eligible Employee" shall mean each Employee who is not excluded from
      eligibility to participate in the Plan under the Adoption Agreement. If
      the Plan is an Easy Retirement Plan, Eligible Employee shall mean each
      Employee who is not (i) included in a unit of Employees covered by a
      collective bargaining agreement between the Employer and employee
      representatives, if retirement benefits were the subject of good faith
      bargaining, or (ii) a nonresident alien who received no income from the
      Employer which constitutes income from sources within the United States.
      For purposes of the preceding sentence, "employee representatives" does
      not include any organization more than half of whose members are Employees
      who are owners, officers, or executives of the Employer.

1.24  "Eligibility Year(s) of Service" shall mean the twelve (12) consecutive
      month period commencing on an Employee's Employment Commencement Date and
      anniversaries thereof, during which the Employee worked at least one
      thousand (1,000) Hours of Service (or such lesser number of Hours of
      Service specified in the Adoption Agreement).

      In the case of an Employee in the maritime industry whose compensation is
      determined based on days of service, 125 days of service shall be treated
      as 1,000 Hours of Service (or such lesser number of Hours of Service as
      specified in the Adoption Agreement). For purposes of the preceding
      sentence "maritime industry" shall mean that industry in which Employees
      perform duties on board commercial, exploratory, service or other vessels
      moving on the high seas, inland waterways, Great Lakes, coastal zones,
      harbors and noncontiguous areas, or on offshore ports, platforms or other
      similar sites.

      In the case of a Participant, who does not have any nonforfeitable right
      to the account balance derived from Employer contributions, Eligibility
      Year(s) of Service before a period of consecutive one (1) year Service
      Breaks will not be taken into account in

                                       5
<PAGE>

      computing Eligibility Years of Service, if the number of consecutive one
      (1) year Service Breaks in such period equals or exceeds the greater of
      five (5) or the aggregate number of Eligibility Years of Service before
      such break. Such aggregate number of Eligibility Years of Service will not
      include any Eligibility Year of Service disregarded under the preceding
      sentence by reason of prior Service Breaks.

      Notwithstanding the above, if the Adoption Agreement provides for full and
      immediate vesting upon completion of the eligibility requirements and an
      Employee has incurred a one (1) year Service Break before satisfying the
      Plan's eligibility requirements, all Eligibility Year(s) of Service before
      such Service Break will not be taken into account.

      If the elapsed time method of crediting service is specified in the
      Adoption Agreement, an Employee shall receive credit for Service, except
      for credit which may be disregarded under this Section or Section 2.3, for
      the aggregate of all time periods commencing on his Employment
      Commencement Date or Re-Employment Commencement Date and ending on his
      Severance from Service Date. An Employee shall also receive credit for any
      Period of Severance of less than twelve (12) months. Fractional periods of
      a year shall be expressed in terms of days.

1.25  "Employee" shall mean an Owner-Employee, a Self-Employed Individual, a
      Shareholder-Employee and any other person employed by the Employer or any
      Affiliated Employer.

      A "leased employee" shall also be treated as an Employee. The term "leased
      employee" means any person (other than an employee of the recipient
      employer) who pursuant to an agreement between the recipient employer and
      any other person ("leasing organization") has performed services for the
      recipient employer (or for the recipient employer and related persons
      determined in accordance with section 414(n)(6) of the Code) on a
      substantially full-time basis for a period of at least one year, and such
      services are of a type historically performed by employees in the business
      field of the recipient employer. Contributions or benefits provided a
      leased employee by the leasing organization which are attributable to
      services performed for the recipient employer shall be treated as provided
      by the recipient employer.

      Notwithstanding the preceding paragraph, a leased employee shall not be
      considered an employee of the recipient employer if: (i) such employee is
      covered by a money purchase pension plan providing (1) a nonintegrated
      employer contribution rate of at least ten percent (10%) of compensation,
      as defined in section 415(c)(3) of the Code, but including amounts
      contributed pursuant to a salary reduction agreement which are excludable
      from the employee's gross income under section 125, section 402(a)(8),
      section 402(h) or section 403(b) of the Code, (2) immediate participation,
      and (3) full and immediate

                                       6
<PAGE>

      vesting; and (ii) leased employees do not constitute more than twenty
      percent (20%) of the recipient employer's non-highly compensated
      workforce.

1.26  "Employer" shall mean the corporation, partnership, proprietorship or
      other business entity which shall adopt the Plan or any successor thereof.

1.27  "Employment Commencement Date" shall mean the first date with respect to
      which an Employee performs an Hour of Service.

1.28  "Entry Date", unless otherwise specified in the Adoption Agreement, shall
      mean the first day of the Plan Year and the first day of the seventh month
      of the Plan Year. The initial Entry Date shall not precede the original
      effective date of the Plan.

1.29  "Excess Aggregate Contributions" shall mean, with respect to any Plan
      Year, the excess of the aggregate Contribution Percentage Amounts taken
      into account in computing the numerator of the Contribution Percentage,
      actually made on behalf of Highly Compensated Employees for such Plan
      Year, over the maximum Contribution Percentage Amounts permitted by the
      Average Contribution Percentage tests of Section 4.7 (determined by
      reducing contributions made on behalf of Highly Compensated Employees in
      order of their Contribution Percentages, beginning with the highest of
      such percentages).

1.30  "Excess Contributions" shall mean, with respect to any Plan Year, the
      excess of the aggregate amount of Elective Deferrals, Qualified
      Nonelective Contributions, and Qualified Matching Contributions actually
      taken into account in computing the Actual Deferral Percentage of Highly
      Compensated Employees for such Plan Year, over the maximum amount of such
      contributions permitted under the Average Actual Deferral Percentage tests
      of Section 4.6 (determined by reducing contributions made on behalf of
      Highly Compensated Employees in order of their Actual Deferral
      Percentages, beginning with the highest of such percentages).

1.31  "Excess Elective Deferrals" shall mean a Participant's Elective Deferrals
      for a taxable year in excess of the adjusted dollar limitation of section
      402(g) of the Code.

1.32  "Family Member" shall, with respect to a five percent (5%) owner or top
      ten Highly Compensated Employee described in section 414(q)(6)(A) of the
      Code, include the spouse and lineal ascendants and descendants of an
      Employee or former Employee and the spouses of such lineal ascendants and
      descendants. The determination of who is a Family Member will be made in
      accordance with section 414(q) of the Code.

1.33  "Fund" shall mean all property received by the Trustee or Custodian for
      purposes of the

                                       7
<PAGE>

      Plan, investments thereof and earnings thereon, less payments made by the
      Trustee to carry out the Plan.

1.34  "Highly Compensated Employee" shall include highly compensated active
      employees and highly compensated former employees.

      A highly compensated active employee includes any Employee who performs
      services for the Employer or any Affiliated Employer during the
      determination year and who, during the look-back year: (i) received
      Compensation from the Employer or any Affiliated Employer in excess of
      $75,000 (as adjusted pursuant to section 415(d) of the Code); (ii)
      received Compensation from the Employer or any Affiliated Employer in
      excess of $50,000 (as adjusted pursuant to section 415(d) of the Code) and
      was a member of the top-paid group for such year; or (iii) was an officer
      of the Employer or any Affiliated Employer and received Compensation
      during such year that is greater than fifty percent (50%) of the dollar
      limitation in effect under section 415(b)(1)(A) of the Code. The term
      Highly Compensated Employee also includes: (i) an Employee who is
      described in the preceding sentence if the term "determination year" is
      substituted for the term "look-back year" and the Employee is one of the
      100 most highly compensated Employees of the Employer or any Affiliated
      Employer during the Plan Year; and (ii) an Employee who is a five percent
      (5%) owner of the Employer or any Affiliated Employer at any time during
      the look-back year or determination year.

      If no officer has satisfied the compensation requirement of (iii) above
      during either a determination year or look-back year, the highest paid
      officer for such year shall be treated as a Highly Compensated Employee.

      For this purpose, the determination year shall be the Plan Year, and the
      look-back year shall be the twelve (12) month period immediately preceding
      the determination year unless the Employer has elected to use the calendar
      year ending with or within the determination year as the look-back year
      for purposes of its employee benefit plans. If the Employer has so elected
      to use such calendar year as the look-back year for its employee benefit
      plans, the determination year shall be the "lag period," if any, by which
      the applicable determination year extends beyond such calendar year.

      A highly compensated former employee includes any Employee who terminated
      employment (or was deemed to have terminated) prior to the determination
      year, performs no service for the Employer or any Affiliated Employer
      during the determination year, and was a highly compensated active
      employee for either the separation year or any determination year ending
      on or after the Employee's 55th birthday.

                                       8
<PAGE>

      If an Employee is, during a determination year or look-back year, a Family
      Member of either a five percent (5%) owner who is an active or former
      Employee or a Highly Compensated Employee who is one of the 10 most Highly
      Compensated Employees of the Employer or any Affiliated Employer during
      such year, then the Family Member and the five percent (5%) owner or
      top-10 Highly Compensated Employee shall be aggregated. The Family Member
      and five percent (5%) owner or top-10 Highly Compensated Employee shall be
      treated as a single Employee receiving Compensation and Plan contributions
      equal to the sum of Compensation and contributions of the Family Member
      and five percent (5%) owner or top-10 Highly Compensated Employee.

      The determination of who is a Highly Compensated Employee, including the
      determinations of the number and identify of employees in top-paid group,
      the top 100 employees, the number of employees treated as officers and the
      compensation that is considered, will be made in accordance with section
      414(q) of the Code and the regulations thereunder.

1.35  "Hour of Service" shall mean:

      (a)   Each hour for which an Employee is compensated by the Employer, or
            is entitled to be so compensated, for services rendered by him to
            the Employer. These hours will be credited to the Employee for the
            computation period in which the duties are performed; and

      (b)   Each hour for which an Employee is compensated by the Employer, or
            is entitled to be so compensated, on account of a period of time
            during which no services are rendered by him to the Employer
            (regardless of whether the Employee shall have ceased to be an
            Employee) due to vacation, holiday, illness, incapacity (including
            disability), layoff, jury duty, military duty or leave of absence.
            No more than five hundred and one (501) Hours of Service shall be
            credited pursuant to this subparagraph (b) on account of any single
            continuous period during which an Employee renders no services to
            the Employer (whether or not such period occurs in a single
            computation period). Hours under this paragraph will be calculated
            and credited pursuant to section 2530.200b-2 of the Department of
            Labor Regulations which are incorporated herein by this reference;
            and

      (c)   Each hour for which back pay, without regard to mitigation of
            damages, has been awarded or agreed to by the Employer. The same
            Hours of Service shall not be credited both under subparagraph (a)
            or subparagraph (b), whichever shall be applicable, and also under
            this subparagraph (c). The hours will be credited to the Employee
            for the computation period or periods to which the award or
            agreement pertains rather than the computation period in which the
            award,

                                       9
<PAGE>

            agreement or payment is made.

            Hours of Service will be credited for employment with an Affiliated
            Employer. Hours of Service will also be credited for employment with
            a predecessor employer if the Employer maintains the plan of such
            predecessor or the Employer so elects in the Adoption Agreement.

            Hours of Service will also be credited for any individual considered
            an Employee under sections 414(n) or 414(o) of the Code or the
            regulations thereunder.

            Solely for purposes of determining whether a Service Break, as
            defined in Section 1.54, for participation and vesting purposes has
            occurred in a computation period, an individual who is absent from
            work for maternity or paternity reasons shall receive credit for the
            Hours of Service which would otherwise have been credited to such
            individual but for such absence, or in any case in which such hours
            cannot be determined, eight (8) Hours of Service per day of such
            absence. For purposes of this paragraph, an absence from work for
            maternity or paternity reasons means an absence (1) by reason of the
            pregnancy of the individual, (2) by reason of a birth of a child of
            the individual, (3) by reason of the placement of the child with the
            individual in connection with the adoption of such child by such
            individual, or (4) for purposes of caring for such child for a
            period beginning immediately following such birth or placement. The
            Hours of Service credited under this paragraph shall be credited (1)
            in the computation period in which the absence begins if the
            crediting is necessary to prevent a Service Break in that period,
            (2) in all other cases, in the following computation period.

            Hours of Service shall be credited on the basis of actual hours
            worked unless another method has been specified in the Adoption
            Agreement. Hours of Service shall not be counted if the elapsed time
            method is specified in the Adoption Agreement, except to determine
            an Employee's Employment Commencement Date or Re-Employment
            Commencement Date.

1.36  "Integration Level" shall mean the Taxable Wage Base or such lesser amount
      elected by the Employer in the Adoption Agreement.

1.37  "Matching Contribution" shall mean Employer contributions made to this
      Plan or any other defined contribution plan by reason of Thrift
      Contributions or Elective Deferrals under this Plan.

1.38  "Net Profits" shall mean current and accumulated earnings of the Employer
      before Federal and State taxes and contributions to this and any other
      qualified plan.

                                       10

<PAGE>

1.39  "Non-Highly Compensated Employee" shall mean an Employee of the Employer
      who is neither a Highly Compensated Employee nor a Family Member.

1.40  "Normal Retirement Age" shall mean the age specified in the Adoption
      Agreement. Upon reaching his Normal Retirement Age, the Participant's
      right to his retirement benefit shall be nonforfeitable, notwithstanding
      the Plan's vesting schedule. In the event the Employer imposes a mandatory
      normal retirement age, the Normal Retirement Age may not exceed such
      mandatory normal retirement age.

      Notwithstanding any other provision of this Plan, the Employer, in
      accordance with the provisions of the Age Discrimination in Employment
      Act, shall have no right to compel a Participant to retire, except as
      otherwise provided herein, if in the calendar year or the preceding
      calendar year, the Employer has twenty (20) or more employees for each
      work day in each of twenty (20) or more calendar weeks. The Employer may
      retire a Participant who for the two (2) year period prior to retirement
      is employed in a bona fide executive or high policy-making position if (1)
      he has attained age sixty-five (65); (2) he has attained his Normal
      Retirement Date; and (3) his annual retirement benefit from the pension,
      profit sharing, savings or deferred compensation plans maintained by the
      Employer equals, in the aggregate, at least forty-four thousand dollars
      ($44,000). This Section shall be deemed to be automatically amended to
      reflect any subsequent Federal legislation or regulations.

1.41  "Owner-Employee" shall mean a sole proprietor or a partner who owns more
      than ten percent (10%) of either the capital interest or profits interest
      of a partnership.

1.42  "Participant" shall mean an Eligible Employee who enters the Plan pursuant
      to Section 2.1 of the Plan.

      (a)   "Active Participant" shall mean a Participant who is credited with
            one thousand (1,000) or more Hours of Service (or such lesser number
            of Hours of Service specified in the Adoption Agreement) in the Plan
            Year. Unless otherwise specified in the Adoption Agreement, it is
            not necessary that the Participant be employed on the last day of
            the Plan Year in order to be deemed an Active Participant and share
            in the Employer contribution, if any. If the elapsed time method of
            crediting service is specified in the Adoption Agreement, Active
            Participant shall include all Participants, unless otherwise
            specified in the Adoption Agreement.

            Notwithstanding the foregoing paragraph, if the Plan is a
            standardized plan, "Active Participant" shall mean, for each Plan
            Year beginning on or after January

                                       11
<PAGE>

            1, 1990, each Participant other than a Participant who is not
            employed on the last day of the Plan Year and is credited with more
            than 500 Hours of Service in the Plan Year. If the elapsed time
            method of crediting service is specified in the Adoption Agreement,
            "Active Participant" shall mean all Participants.

            If the elapsed time method of crediting Hours of Service is
            specified in the Adoption Agreement, Active Participant shall mean a
            Participant who is credited with three (3) consecutive calendar
            months of service.

      (b)   "Eligible Participant" shall mean an Employee who is eligible under
            the terms of the Plan to make Thrift Contributions, Elective
            Deferrals or Elective Deferrals and Thrift Contributions, combined
            ("Combined Contributions") made on his behalf.

1.43  "Participating Employer" shall mean any Affiliated Employer which has
      adopted the Plan in accordance with Section 16.5.

1.44  "Period of Severance" shall mean a continuous period of time during which
      the Employee is not employed by the Employer. Such period begins on the
      Employee's Severance from Service Date and ends on the Employee's
      Re-Employment Commencement Date.

1.45  "Plan" shall mean this Prototype Plan, the Trust Agreement or Custodial
      Agreement and the Adoption Agreement of the adopting Employer, as from
      time to time amended.

1.46  "Plan Year" shall mean the calendar year, unless another twelve (12)
      consecutive month period is specified in the Adoption Agreement.

1.47 "Prototype Plan" shall mean the basic plan document described herein.

1.48  "Qualified Matching Contributions" shall mean Employer contributions to
      the Plan which are allocated to Participants' accounts by reason of
      Elective Deferrals, which are at all times subject to the distribution and
      nonforfeitability requirements of section 401(k) of the Code.

1.49  "Qualified Nonelective Contributions" shall mean Employer contributions
      (other than Matching Contributions or Qualified Matching Contributions)
      which are allocated to Eligible Participants' accounts, which such
      Participants may not elect to receive in cash until distributed from the
      Plan and, which are at all times subject to the distribution and
      nonforfeitability requirements of section 401(k) of the Code.

1.50  "ReEmployment Commencement Date" shall mean the first day on which the
      Employee

                                       12
<PAGE>

      is credited with an Hour of Service for the performance of duties after
      the first eligibility computation period in which the Employee incurs a
      one (1) year Service Break.

      In the case of any Participant who has a one (1) year Service Break,
      Eligibility Year(s) of Service before such break will not be taken into
      account until the Employee has completed one (1) Eligibility Year of
      Service after returning to employment. Such Eligibility Year of Service
      shall be measured by the twelve (12) consecutive month period beginning on
      the Employee's Reemployment Commencement Date and, if necessary,
      subsequent twelve (12) consecutive month periods beginning on
      anniversaries of the Re-Employment Commencement Date.

      If a former Participant completes an Eligibility Year of Service in
      accordance with this provision, such Participant's participation will be
      reinstated as of the Re-Employment Commencement Date.

1.51  "Regular Account" shall mean the account to which Employer contributions
      are credited with respect to the Dreyfus prototype money purchase and
      target benefit plans (Plan Numbers 01001, 01004, and 01005).

1.52  "S-Corporation" shall mean an Employer who has made an election for its
      taxable year of reference under section 1362(a) of the Code, or any other
      applicable section pertaining thereto.

1.53  "Self-Employed Individual" shall mean an individual who has Earned Income
      for the taxable year from the unincorporated trade, or business or
      partnership with respect to which the Plan is established; also, an
      individual who would have had Earned Income but for the fact such trade,
      business or partnership had no net profits for the taxable year.

1.54  "Service" shall mean any twelve (12) consecutive month period identical to
      the Plan Year during which the Employee completes at least one thousand
      (1,000) or more Hours of Service (or such lesser number of Hours of
      Service specified in the Adoption Agreement). Periods of time to be
      excluded, if any, shall be stipulated in the Adoption Agreement.

      In the case of Employees in the Maritime Industry, 125 days of service
      shall be treated as 1,000 Hours of Service (or such lesser number of hours
      of Service as specified in the Adoption Agreement).

      Service will be credited in accordance with the rules set forth above for
      any employment, for any period of time, for any Affiliated Employer.
      Service will also be credited for any individual required to be considered
      an Employee, for purposes of this Plan under section

                                       13
<PAGE>

      414(n) or (o) of the Code, of the Employer or any Affiliated Employer.

      If the elapsed time method of crediting service is specified in the
      Adoption Agreement, an Employee shall receive credit for Service, except
      for Service which may be disregarded under Sections 7.2(b), for the
      aggregate of all time periods commencing on his Employment Commencement
      Date or Re-Employment Commencement Date and ending on his Severance from
      Service Date. An Employee shall also receive credit, for vesting purposes,
      for any Period of Severance of less than twelve (12) consecutive months.
      An Employee will receive a year of Service for vesting purposes for each
      twelve (12) months of Service. Fractional periods of a year shall be
      expressed in terms of days.

1.55  "Service Break" shall mean:

      (a)   For purposes of calculating Eligibility Years of Service, any twelve
            (12) consecutive month period commencing on an Employee's Employment
            Commencement Date or anniversaries thereof during which the Employee
            is credited with five hundred (500) Hours of Service or less. In the
            case of Employees in the Maritime Industry, 62 days of service or
            less.

      (b)   For purposes of calculating years of Service, any Plan Year during
            which the Employee is credited with five hundred (500) Hours of
            Service or less, where such Service Break shall be measured from the
            first day of such Plan Year. In the case of Employees in the
            Maritime Industry, 62 days of service or less.

      (c)   If the elapsed time method of crediting service is specified in the
            Adoption Agreement, a Service Break shall mean a Period of Severance
            of at least twelve (12) consecutive months; provided, however, that
            in the case of an Employee absent for maternity or paternity reasons
            (as defined in Section 1.35), the Period of Severance shall not
            commence for this purpose until the twenty-four (24) month
            anniversary of the first date of such absence.

      (d)   A Service Break shall not be deemed to have occurred as a result of
            absence due to service in the armed forces of the United States,
            provided the Employee makes application for resumption of work with
            the Employer following discharge, within the time specified by then
            applicable laws.

1.56  "Severance from Service Date" shall mean the earlier of

      (a)   the date on which an Employee quits,  retires,  is discharged or
            dies; or

      (b)   the twelve (12) month anniversary of the date an Employee is first
            absent (with or

                                       14
<PAGE>

            without pay) for reason other than quit, retirement, discharge or
            death (such as vacation, holiday, sickness, disability, leave of
            absence or layoff).

1.57  Shareholder-Employee" shall mean a Participant who owns (or is considered
      as owning) more than five percent (5%) of the outstanding stock of an
      S-Corporation on any day during the taxable year of reference of such
      S-Corporation. In determining the percent of a Participant's ownership of
      the outstanding stock, the family attribution rules of section 318(a)(1)
      of the Code, or any other applicable section of the Code pertaining
      thereto shall apply.

1.58  "Sponsor" shall mean The Dreyfus Corporation.

1.59  "Taxable Wage Base" shall mean, except for purposes of Article V, the
      contribution and benefit base in effect under Section 230 of the Social
      Security Act at the beginning of the Plan Year.

1.60  "Thrift Contributions" shall mean contributions made by a Participant
      which are included in the Participant's gross income in the year in which
      made.

1.61  "Total and Permanent Disability" shall mean the inability to engage in any
      substantial gainful activity by reason of any medically determinable
      physical or mental impairment that can be expected to result in death or
      which has lasted or can be expected to last for a continuous period of not
      less than twelve (12) months. The permanence and degree of such impairment
      shall be supported by medical evidence satisfactory to the Committee.
1.62  "Trustee" or "Custodian" shall mean the individual or individuals, or
      institution appointed in the Adoption Agreement by the Employer to act in
      accordance with the provisions of the Trust Agreement or Custodial
      Agreement.

      If the contributions will be made to a Custodian, references herein to the
      "Trustee" shall be deemed to refer to the "Custodian" and the term "Trust
      Fund" shall be deemed to refer to the "Custodial Account."

1.63  "Trust Agreement" or "Custodial Agreement" shall mean:

      (a)   for "Trust Agreement" shall mean the agreement between the Employer
            and the Trustee if the Plan is established under Dreyfus
            Standardized/Paired Prototype Money Purchase Plan No. 01001, Dreyfus
            Nonstandardized Prototype Profit Sharing Plan No. 01002, Dreyfus
            Standardized/Paired Prototype Profit Sharing Plan No. 01003, or
            Dreyfus Standardized/Paired Prototype Target Benefit Pension Plan
            No. 01004.

                                       15

<PAGE>

      (b)   for "Custodial Agreement" shall mean the agreement between the
            Employer and the Custodian under which the Plan is funded if the
            Plan is established under Dreyfus Easy Standardized/Paired Prototype
            Money Purchase Retirement Plan No. 01005 or Dreyfus Easy
            Standardized/Paired Prototype Profit Sharing Retirement Plan No.
            01006. Such Plans are hereinafter referred to as "Easy Retirement
            Plans."

1.64  "Valuation Date" shall mean the last day of the Plan Year and such other
      dates as may be determined by the Committee.

1.65  "Voluntary Contributions" shall mean contributions previously made by a
      Participant which were included in the Participant's gross income in the
      year in which made.

                                   ARTICLE II.
                                  PARTICIPATION

2.1   Membership

      Each Eligible Employee shall become a Participant on the Effective Date or
      the Entry Date coincident with or next following the completion of the age
      and service requirements set forth in the Adoption Agreement.

2.2   Excluded Employees

      The Adoption Agreement may exclude Employees from participation in the
      Plan based upon minimum age and service requirements or the inclusion of
      such Employees in certain ineligible classifications.

      In the event an Employee who is not a member of the eligible class of
      Employees becomes a member of the eligible class, such Employee will
      participate immediately if such Employee has satisfied the minimum age and
      service requirements and would otherwise have previously become a
      Participant.

      In the event a Participant is no longer a member of an eligible class of
      Employees and becomes ineligible to participate, but has not incurred a
      Service Break, such Employee will participate immediately upon returning
      to an eligible class of Employees. If such Participant incurs a Service
      Break, eligibility to participate will be determined under the rules of
      Section 1.24 of the Plan.

                                       16
<PAGE>

2.3   Reemployment

      (a)   A former Participant will become a Participant immediately upon
            returning to the employ of the Employer if such former Participant
            had a nonforfeitable right to all or a portion of the account
            balance derived from Employer contributions at the time of
            termination from service.

      (b)   A former Participant who did not have a nonforfeitable right to any
            portion of the account balance derived from Employer contributions
            at the time of termination from service will be considered a new
            Employee, for eligibility purposes, if the number of consecutive one
            (1) year Service Breaks equal or exceed the greater of five (5) or
            the aggregate number of years of Service before such Service Breaks.
            If such former Participant's years of Service before termination
            from service may not be disregarded pursuant to the preceding
            sentence, such former Participant shall participate immediately upon
            reemployment.

      (c)   Any former Employee who was never a Participant and is reemployed as
            an Employee will be eligible to participate subject to the
            provisions of Section 2.1.

2.4   Change in Employment Status

      In the event that a Participant who was credited with a year of Service
      for the preceding Plan Year, at the request of the Employer, enters
      directly into the employ of any other business entity, such Participant
      shall be deemed to be an Active Participant. If such Participant returns
      to the employ of the Employer or becomes eligible for benefits pursuant to
      Articles VIII or IX, without interruption of employment with the Employer
      or other business entity, he shall be deemed not to have had a Service
      Break for such period. However, if such Participant does not immediately
      return to the employ of the Employer upon his termination of employment
      with such other business entity or upon recall by the Employer, he shall
      be deemed to have terminated his employment for all purposes of the Plan
      as of the Anniversary Date following the date of transfer.

2.5   Limitations on Participation of Owner-Employees

      Notwithstanding the above, Plans which allow Owner-Employees to
      participate must satisfy the following additional requirements:

      (a)   If this Plan provides contributions or benefits for one or more
            Owner-Employees who control both the business for which this Plan is
            established and one or more other trades or businesses, this Plan
            and the plan established for other trades or businesses must, when
            looked at as a single plan, satisfy sections 401(a) and (d)

                                       17
<PAGE>

            of the Code for the Employees of this and all other trades or
            businesses.

      (b)   If the Plan provides contributions or benefits for one or more
            Owner-Employees who control one or more other trades or businesses
            the employees of the other trades or businesses must be included in
            a plan which satisfies sections 401(a) and (d) of the Code and which
            provides contributions and benefits not less favorable than provided
            for Owner-Employees under this Plan.

      (c)   If an individual is covered as an Owner-Employee under the plans of
            two or more trades or businesses which are not controlled and the
            individual controls a trade or business, then the contributions or
            benefits of the employees under the plan of the trades or businesses
            which are controlled must be as favorable as those provided for him
            under the most favorable plan of the trade or business which is not
            controlled.

            For purposes of the preceding paragraphs, an Owner-Employee, or two
            or more Owner-Employees, will be considered to control a trade or
            business if the Owner-Employee, or two or more Owner-Employees
            together:

            (1)   own the  entire  interest  in an  unincorporated  trade or
                  business, or

            (2)   in the case of a partnership, own more than fifty percent
                  (50%) of either the capital interest or the profits interest
                  in the partnership.

            For purposes of the preceding sentence, an Owner-Employee, or two or
            more Owner-Employees shall be treated as owning any interest in a
            partnership which is owned, directly or indirectly, by a partnership
            which such Owner-Employee, or such two or more Owner-Employees, are
            considered to control within the meaning of the preceding sentence.

                                  ARTICLE III.
               CONTRIBUTIONS AND CREDITS TO MONEY PURCHASE PLANS

                  (The provisions of this Article shall apply only with respect
                  to Money Purchase Plans)

3.1   Employer Contributions

      For each Plan Year the Employer's contribution to the Fund shall be
      determined in

                                       18
<PAGE>

      accordance with the Adoption Agreement. Such contribution shall not exceed
      an amount equal to twenty-five percent (25%) of each Participant's
      Compensation.

3.2   Forfeitures

      Unless otherwise specified in the Adoption Agreement, any forfeitures
      which occur will reduce Employer contributions for the next Plan Year. If
      the Adoption Agreement specifies that forfeitures are to be allocated to
      the Accounts of other Participants, the Plan shall continue to be designed
      to qualify as a money purchase pension plan for purposes of sections
      401(a), 402, 412 and 417 of the Code.

3.3   Credit to Participants

      (a)   If the Plan is not integrated with Social Security, the Employer's
            contribution (as specified in the Adoption Agreement) for any Plan
            Year (and any forfeitures, if forfeitures are allocated to Active
            Participants in accordance with Section 3.2) shall be allocated to
            the Regular Account of each Active Participant in the ratio in which
            each Active Participant's Compensation for the Plan Year bears to
            that of all Active Participants for such Plan Year.

      (b)   If the Plan is integrated with Social Security:

            (i)   Subject to the overall permitted disparity limits, if under
                  Article XIII, the Plan is Top-Heavy for the Plan Year and the
                  minimum Top-Heavy contribution is made under the Plan, then
                  Employer Discretionary Contributions plus forfeitures shall be
                  allocated to the Account of each Participant who either
                  completes more than 500 Hours of Service during the Plan Year
                  or is employed on the last day of the Plan Year as follows:

                  Step One:   Contributions and forfeitures will be
                              allocated to each Participant's Account in the
                              ratio that each Participant's total Compensation
                              bears to all Participants' total Compensation, but
                              not in excess of 3% of each Participant's
                              Compensation.

                  Step Two:   Any contributions and forfeitures remaining
                              after the allocation in Step One will be allocated
                              to each Participant's Account in the ratio that
                              each Participant's Compensation for the Plan Year
                              in excess of the integration

                                       19
<PAGE>

                              level bears to the excess compensation of all
                              Participants, but not in excess of 3% of each
                              Participant's Compensation. For purposes of this
                              Step Two, in the case of any Participant who has
                              exceeded the Cumulative Permitted Disparity Limit
                              described below, such Participant's total
                              Compensation for the Plan Year will be taken into
                              account.

                  Step Three: Any contributions and forfeitures remaining
                              after the allocation in Step Two will be allocated
                              to each Participant's Account in the ratio that
                              the sum of each Participant's total Compensation
                              and Compensation in excess of the Integration
                              Level bears to the sum of all Participants' total
                              Compensation and Compensation in excess of the
                              Integration Level; however, the allocation cannot
                              exceed the product of (a) the Permitted Disparity
                              Percentage specified in the Adoption Agreement
                              multiplied by (b) each Participant's total
                              Compensation and Compensation in excess of the
                              Integration Level. For purposes of this Step
                              Three, in the case of any Participant who has
                              exceeded the Cumulative Permitted Disparity Limit
                              described below, two times such Participant's
                              total Compensation for the Plan Year will be taken
                              into account.

                  Step Four:  Any remaining Employer contributions or
                              forfeitures will be allocated to each
                              Participant's Account in the ratio that each
                              Participants's total Compensation for the Plan
                              Year bears to all Participants' total Compensation
                              for that year.

            The Integration Level shall be equal to the Taxable Wage Base or
            such lesser amount elected by the Employer in the Adoption
            Agreement.

            (ii)  Subject to the overall permitted disparity limits, if the Plan
                  is not Top Heavy for the Plan Year, Employer Discretionary
                  Contributions plus forfeitures shall be allocated to the
                  Account of each Participant who either completes more than 500
                  Hours of Service during the Plan Year or is employed on the
                  last day of the Plan Year as follows:

                  Step One:   Contributions and forfeitures will be
                              allocated to each Participant's Account in the
                              ratio that the sum of each Participant's total
                              Compensation and Compensation in excess of the
                              Integration Level bears to the sum of all
                              Participants' total Compensation and Compensation
                              in

                                       20

<PAGE>

                              excess of the Integration Level; however, the
                              allocation cannot exceed the product of (a) the
                              Permitted Disparity Percentage specified in the
                              Adoption Agreement multiplied by (b) each
                              Participant's total Compensation and Compensation
                              in excess of the Integration Level. For purposes
                              of this Step One, in the case of any Participant
                              who has exceeded the Cumulative Permitted
                              Disparity Limit described below, two times such
                              Participant's total Compensation for the Plan Year
                              will be taken into account.

                  Step Two:   Any remaining Employer contributions or
                              forfeitures will be allocated to each
                              Participant's Account in the ratio that each
                              Participants' total Compensation for the Plan Year
                              bears to all Participants' total Compensation for
                              that year.

            The Integration Level shall be equal to the Taxable Wage Base or
            such lesser amount elected by the Employer in the Adoption
            Agreement.

      Overall Permitted Disparity Limit

            Annual Overall Permitted Disparity Limit: Notwithstanding section
            4.3(b)(i) and (ii) above, for any Play Year this Plan benefits any
            Participant who benefits under another qualified plan or simplified
            employee pension, as defined in section 408(k) of the Code,
            maintained by the Employer that provides for permitted disparity (or
            imputes disparity), Employer contributions and forfeitures will be
            allocated to the Account of each Participant who either completes
            more than 500 Hours of Service during the Plan Year or is employed
            on the last day of the Plan Year in the ratio that such
            Participant's total Compensation bears to the total Compensation of
            all Participants.

            Cumulative Permitted Disparity Limit: Effective for Plan Years
            beginning on or after January 1, 1995, the Cumulative Permitted
            Disparity Limit for a Participant is 35 total cumulative permitted
            disparity years. Total cumulative permitted years means the number
            of years credited to the Participant for allocation or accrual
            purposes under this Plan, any other qualified plan or simplified
            employer pension plan (whether or not terminated) ever maintained by
            the Employer. For purposes of determining the Participant's
            cumulative permitted disparity limit, all years ending in the same
            calendar year are treated as the same year. If the Participant has
            not benefited under a defined benefit or target benefit plan for any
            year

                                       21
<PAGE>

            beginning on or after January 1, 1994, the Participant has no
            cumulative disparity limit.

                                   ARTICLE IV.
               CONTRIBUTIONS AND CREDITS TO PROFIT SHARING PLANS

               (The  provisions of this Article shall apply only with respect to
                     Profit Sharing Plans)

4.1   Limits on Employer Contributions

      Employer contributions for each Plan Year (including, if applicable,
      Elective Deferrals) shall be determined in accordance with the Adoption
      Agreement, but shall not exceed the maximum amount which shall constitute
      an allowable deduction under section 404(a) of the Code. Unless otherwise
      specified in the Adoption Agreement, Employer contributions may only be
      made out of Net Profits. If the Adoption Agreement provides that one or
      more Employer contributions may be made without regard to Net Profits, the
      Plan shall continue to be designed to qualify as a profit sharing plan for
      purposes of the Code.

4.2   Forfeitures

      Unless otherwise specified in the Adoption Agreement, forfeitures, if any,
      will be allocated to Participants' Accounts in the following manner:
      Forfeitures of Employer Discretionary Contributions will be allocated in
      the same manner as are such contributions. Forfeitures of Matching
      Contributions will be allocated to the Matching Contribution Account in
      the same manner as are such contributions. Forfeitures of Matching
      Contributions that are forfeited to the extent they relate to Excess
      Elective Deferrals, Excess Contributions or Excess Aggregate Contributions
      will be allocated to the Matching Contribution Account in the same manner
      as are such Matching Contributions, except no such forfeitures shall be
      allocated to any Highly Compensated Employee.

4.3   Employer Discretionary Contributions

      The following provisions shall apply if the Employer has elected in the
      Adoption Agreement to make Employer Discretionary Contributions.

      (a)   If the Plan is not integrated with Social Security, the Employer
            Discretionary

                                       22
<PAGE>

            Contribution for any Plan Year (and any forfeitures, if forfeitures
            are reallocated to Active Participants in accordance with Section
            4.2) shall be allocated to the Employer Discretionary Contribution
            Account established for each Active Participant in the ratio in
            which each Active Participant's Compensation for the Plan Year bears
            to that of all Active Participants for such Plan Year.

      (b)   If the Plan is integrated with Social Security:

            (i)   Subject to the overall permitted disparity limits,if under
                  Article XIII, the Plan is Top-Heavy for the Plan Year and the
                  minimum Top-Heavy contribution is made under the Plan, then
                  Employer Discretionary Contributions plus forfeitures shall be
                  allocated to the Account of each Participant who either
                  completes more than 500 Hours of Service during the Plan Year
                  or is employed on the last day of the Plan Year as follows:

                  Step One:   Contributions and forfeitures will be
                              allocated to each Participant's Account in the
                              ratio that each Participant's total Compensation
                              bears to all Participants' total Compensation, but
                              not in excess of 3% of each Participant's
                              Compensation.

                  Step Two:   Any contributions and forfeitures remaining
                              after the allocation in Step One will be allocated
                              to each Participant's Account in the ratio that
                              each Participant's Compensation for the Plan Year
                              in excess of the integration level bears to the
                              excess compensation of all Participants, but not
                              in excess of 3% of each Participant's
                              Compensation. For purposes of this Step Two, in
                              the case of any Participant who has exceeded the
                              Cumulative Permitted Disparity Limit described
                              below, such Participant's total Compensation for
                              the Plan Year will be taken into account.

                  Step        Three: Any contributions and forfeitures remaining
                              after the allocation in Step Two will be allocated
                              to each Participant's Account in the ratio that
                              the sum of each Participant's total Compensation
                              and Compensation in excess of the Integration
                              Level bears to the sum of all Participants' total
                              Compensation and Compensation in excess of the
                              Integration Level; however, the allocation cannot
                              exceed the product of (a) the Permitted Disparity

                                       23
<PAGE>

                              Percentage specified in the Adoption Agreement
                              multiplied by (b) each Participant's total
                              Compensation and Compensation in excess of the
                              Integration Level. For purposes of this Step
                              Three, in the case of any Participant who has
                              exceeded the Cumulative Permitted Disparity Limit
                              described below, two times such Participant's
                              total Compensation for the Plan Year will be taken
                              into account.

                  Step Four:  Any remaining Employer contributions or
                              forfeitures will be allocated to each
                              Participant's Account in the ratio that each
                              Participants's total Compensation for the Plan
                              Year bears to all Participants' total Compensation
                              for that year.

            The Integration Level shall be equal to the Taxable Wage Base or
            such lesser amount elected by the Employer in the Adoption
            Agreement.

            (ii)  Subject to the overall permitted disparity limits,if the Plan
                  is not Top- Heavy for the Plan Year, Employer Discretionary
                  Contributions plus forfeitures shall be allocated to the
                  Account of each Participant who either completes more than 500
                  Hours of Service during the Plan Year or is employed on the
                  last day of the Plan Year as follows:

                  Step One:   Contributions and forfeitures will be
                              allocated to each Participant's Account in the
                              ratio that the sum of each Participant's total
                              Compensation and Compensation in excess of the
                              Integration Level bears to the sum of all
                              Participants' total Compensation and Compensation
                              in excess of the Integration Level; however, the
                              allocation cannot exceed the product of (a) the
                              Permitted Disparity Percentage specified in the
                              Adoption Agreement multiplied by (b) each
                              Participant's total Compensation and Compensation
                              in excess of the Integration Level. For purposes
                              of this Step One, in the case of any Participant
                              who has exceeded the Cumulative Permitted
                              Disparity Limit described below, two times such
                              Participant's total Compensation for the Plan Year
                              will be taken into account.

                  Step Two:   Any remaining Employer contributions or
                              forfeitures will be allocated to each
                              Participant's Account in the ratio that each
                              Participant's total Compensation for the Plan Year
                              bears to all Participants' total Compensation for
                              that year.

                                       24
<PAGE>

            The Integration Level shall be equal to the Taxable Wage Base or
            such lesser amount elected by the Employer in the Adoption
            Agreement.

            Overall Permitted Disparity Limits

            Annual Overall Permitted Disparity Limit: Notwithstanding section
            4.3(b)(i) and (ii) above, for any Plan Year this Plan benefits any
            Participant who benefits under another qualified plan or simplified
            employee pension, as defined in section 408(k) of the Code,
            maintained by the Employer that provides for permitted disparity (or
            imputes disparity), Employer contributions and forfeitures will be
            allocated to the Account of each Participant who either completes
            more than 500 Hours of Service during the Plan Year or who is
            employed on the last day of the Plan Year in the ratio that such
            Participant's total Compensation bears to the total Compensation of
            all Participants.

            Cumulative Permitted Disparity Limit: Effective for Plan Years
            beginning on or after January 1, 1995, the Cumulative Permitted
            Disparity Limit for a Participant is 35 total cumulative permitted
            disparity years. Total cumulative permitted years means the number
            of years credited to the Participant for allocation or accrual
            purposes under this Plan, any other qualified plan or simplified
            employer pension plan (whether or not terminated) ever maintained by
            the Employer. For purposes of determining the Participant's
            cumulative permitted disparity limit, all years ending in the same
            calendar year are treated as the same year. If the Participant has
            not benefited under a defined benefit or target benefit plan for any
            year beginning on or after January 1, 1994, the Participant has no
            cumulative disparity limit.

4.4   401(k) Cash or Deferred Arrangements ("CODA")/Thrift Contributions

      (1)   Elective Deferrals

            If elected in the Adoption Agreement, the Employer may make
            contributions under a CODA.

            (a)   Allocation of Deferrals. The Employer shall contribute and
                  allocate to each Participant's Elective Deferral Account an
                  amount equal to the amount of a Participant's Elective
                  Deferrals.

                  (1)   Elective Deferrals Pursuant to a Salary Reduction
                        Agreement. To the extent provided in the Adoption
                        Agreement, a Participant may

                                       25

<PAGE>

                        elect to have Elective Deferrals made under this Plan.
                        Elective Deferrals shall include both single-sum and
                        continuing contributions made pursuant to a salary
                        reduction agreement.

                        (i)   Commencement of Elective Deferrals. A Participant
                              shall be afforded a reasonable period at least
                              once each calendar year, as specified in the
                              Adoption Agreement, to elect to commence Elective
                              Deferrals. Such election shall become effective as
                              soon as administratively feasible, but not before
                              the time specified in the Adoption Agreement.

                        (ii)  Modification and Termination of Elective
                              Deferrals. A Participant's election to commence
                              Elective Deferrals shall remain in effect until
                              modified or terminated. A Participant shall be
                              afforded a reasonable period at least once each
                              calendar year, as specified in the Adoption
                              Agreement, to modify the amount or frequency of
                              his or her Elective Deferrals. A Participant may
                              terminate his or her election to make Elective
                              Deferrals at any time.

                  (2)   Cash bonuses. If permitted in the Adoption Agreement, a
                        Participant may also base Elective Deferrals on cash
                        bonuses that, at the Participant's election, may be
                        contributed to the CODA or received by the Participant
                        in cash. A Participant shall be afforded a reasonable
                        period at least once a year to elect to defer such
                        amounts to the CODA. Such election shall become
                        effective as soon as administratively feasible, but not
                        before the time specified in the Adoption Agreement.

                  (3)   Elective Deferrals shall be contributed and allocated to
                        the Fund as soon as practicable (but in no event later
                        than 90 days) following the close of the applicable pay
                        period.

            (2)   Thrift Contributions

                  Starting for Plan Year(s) beginning January 1, 1987, if
                  permitted under the Adoption Agreement, Participants may make
                  Thrift Contributions which shall be allocated to a Thrift
                  Account for each such Participant.

                  (a)   A Participant shall always be one hundred percent (100%)
                        vested in his Thrift Account.

                                       26
<PAGE>

                  (b)   Unless specified otherwise in the Adoption Agreement,
                        Thrift Contributions shall take effect on the
                        Anniversary Date coincident with or next following the
                        Participant's election to make Thrift Contributions.
                        Elections to change the amount of the Thrift
                        Contribution shall take effect on the Change Date
                        specified in the Adoption Agreement which is coincident
                        with or next following the date the Participant's
                        election is received by the Committee. Notwithstanding
                        this provision, a Participant's revocation of an
                        election to make Thrift Contributions shall take effect
                        as soon as administratively feasible.

                  (c)   Thrift Contributions shall be made to the Fund as soon
                        as practicable (but in no event later than 90 days)
                        following the close of the applicable pay period.

                  (d)   Notwithstanding any other provisions of this Section
                        4.4(2), distributions or withdrawals from a
                        Participant's Thrift Account shall be made in accordance
                        with the rules applicable to Voluntary Contributions
                        under Section 10.1 However, if the Employer has elected
                        to make Matching Contributions with respect to Thrift
                        Contributions, any Participant who withdraws any amount
                        from his Thrift Account, shall be precluded from making
                        Thrift Contributions until the next permitted Change
                        Date specified in the Adoption Agreement which is at
                        least six (6) months after the date of withdrawal.

                  (e)   Thrift Contributions shall be subject to the
                        Contribution Percentage tests and the rules applicable
                        to Excess Aggregate Contributions set forth in Section
                        4.7.

            (3)   Matching Contributions

                  (a)   If elected by the Employer in the Adoption Agreement,
                        the Employer will make Matching Contributions to the
                        Plan. The amount of such Matching Contributions shall be
                        calculated by reference to each eligible Participant's
                        Elective Deferrals or Thrift Contributions or Combined
                        Contributions as specified by the Employer in the
                        Adoption Agreement.

                  (b)   Separate Account. Matching Contributions shall be
                        allocated to

                                       27
<PAGE>

                        each eligible Participant's Employer Matching
                        Contribution Account.

                  (c)   Vesting. Matching Contributions will be vested in
                        accordance with the Employer's election in the Adoption
                        Agreement and the terms of this plan. Notwithstanding
                        anything in the Plan to the contrary, Matching
                        Contributions shall be forfeited to the extent they
                        relate to Excess Elective Deferrals, Excess
                        Contributions or Excess Aggregate Contributions, and
                        shall not be taken into account for purposes of Section
                        4.7(a).

                  (d)   Forfeitures. Forfeitures of Matching Contributions other
                        than Excess Aggregate Contributions shall be made in
                        accordance with the forfeiture provisions pursuant to
                        Section 4.2 of the Plan.

                  (e)   Matching Contributions shall be subject to the
                        Contribution Percentage tests and the rules applicable
                        to Excess Aggregate Contributions set forth in Section
                        4.7.

            (4)   Qualified Matching Contributions

                  (a)   If elected by the Employer in the Adoption Agreement,
                        the Employer will make Qualified Matching Contributions
                        to the CODA. The amount of such Qualified Matching
                        Contributions shall be calculated by reference to each
                        eligible Participant's Elective Deferrals or the
                        Elective Deferral portion of Combined Contributions, as
                        specified in the Adoption Agreement.

                  (b)   Separate Account. Qualified Matching Contributions shall
                        be allocated to each Participant's Qualified Nonelective
                        Contribution Account.

                  (c)   Vesting. Qualified Matching Contributions shall be fully
                        vested and nonforfeitable at all times.

                  (d)   Distributions. Qualified Matching Contributions and
                        income allocable thereto shall be distributable only in
                        accordance with Section 4.10.

            (5)   Qualified Nonelective Contributions

                                       28
<PAGE>

                  (a)   The Employer may elect to make Qualified Nonelective
                        Contributions under the Plan on behalf of Employees as
                        provided in the Adoption Agreement.

                        The Qualified Nonelective Contributions will be
                        allocated to each eligible Participant's Qualified
                        Nonelective Contribution Account in the ratio in which
                        each eligible Participant's Compensation for the Plan
                        Year bears to the total Compensation of all eligible
                        Participants for such Plan Year.

                  (b)   Separate Account. Qualified Nonelective Contributions
                        shall be allocated to each Eligible Participant's
                        Qualified Nonelective Contribution Account.

                  (c)   Vesting. Qualified Nonelective Contributions shall be
                        fully vested and nonforfeitable at all times.

                  (d)   Distributions. Qualified Nonelective Contributions and
                        income allocable thereto shall be distributable only in
                        accordance with Section 4.10.

4.5   Maximum Amount of Elective Deferrals

      (a)   General Rule. A Participant's Elective Deferrals are subject to any
            limitations imposed in the Adoption Agreement and any further
            limitations under the Plan. No Participant shall be permitted to
            have Elective Deferrals made under this Plan or any other CODA
            maintained by the Employer or an Affiliated Employer, during any
            calendar year beginning after 1986, in excess of the adjusted dollar
            limitation of section 402(g) of the Code. Other dollar limitations
            may apply under section 402(g) of the Code to the extent that a
            Participant makes Elective Deferrals to arrangements other than
            CODAs (see also sections 402(h)(1)(B), 403(b), 457, and 501(c)(18)
            of the Code).

      (b)   Distribution of Excess Elective Deferrals. A Participant may
            allocate to the Plan any Excess Deferrals made during a calendar
            year by notifying the Committee on or before the date specified in
            the Adoption Agreement of the amount of the Excess Elective
            Deferrals to be assigned to the Plan. A Participant shall be deemed
            to notify the Committee of any Excess Elective Deferrals that arise
            by taking into account only those Elective Deferrals made to this
            Plan and any other plans of the Employer. Notwithstanding any other
            provision of the Plan, Excess Elective Deferrals, plus any income
            and minus any loss allocable thereto, shall be

                                       29
<PAGE>

            distributed no later than April 15 to Participants to whose accounts
            Excess Elective Deferrals were allocated for the preceding year and
            who claim Excess Elective Deferrals for such taxable year no later
            than the date specified in the Adoption Agreement.

      (c)   Determination of Income or Loss. Excess Elective Deferrals shall be
            adjusted for income or loss for the taxable year. Unless indicated
            otherwise by the Committee, the income or loss allocable to Excess
            Elective Deferrals is the income or loss allocable to the
            Participant's Elective Deferral Account for the taxable year
            multiplied by a fraction, the numerator of which is such
            Participant's Excess Elective Deferrals for the year and the
            denominator is the Participant's account balance attributable to
            Elective Deferrals without regard to any income or loss occurring
            during such taxable year. If the Committee selects another method in
            order to compute the income or loss, the method selected must not
            violate the requirements of Code section 401(a)(4) and must be used
            consistently for all Plan participants and for all corrective
            distributions under the Plan for the taxable year.

4.6   Average Actual Deferral Percentage Tests

      (a)   General Rule. The Average Actual Deferral Percentage for Eligible
            Participants who are Highly Compensated Employees for each Plan Year
            beginning on or after January 1, 1987 and the Average Actual
            Deferral Percentage for Eligible Participants who are Non-Highly
            Compensated Employees for the same Plan Year must satisfy one of the
            following tests:

            (1)   The Average Actual Deferral Percentage for Eligible
                  Participants who are Highly Compensated Employees for the Plan
                  Year shall not exceed the Average Actual Deferral Percentage
                  for Eligible Participants who are Non-Highly Compensated
                  Employees for the Plan Year multiplied by 1.25;

                  or

            (2)   The Average Actual Deferral Percentage for Eligible
                  Participants who are Highly Compensated Employees for the Plan
                  Year shall not exceed the Average Actual Deferral Percentage
                  for Eligible Participants who are Non-Highly Compensated
                  Employees for the Plan Year multiplied by 2.0, provided that
                  the Average Actual Deferral Percentage for Eligible
                  Participants who are Highly Compensated Employees does not
                  exceed the Average Actual Deferral Percentage for Eligible
                  Participants who are Non-Highly Compensated Employees by more
                  than two (2) percentage points.

                                       30
<PAGE>

                  (b)   Special Rules.

                        (1)   The Actual Deferral Percentage for any Participant
                              who is a Highly Compensated Employee for the Plan
                              Year and who is eligible to have Elective
                              Deferrals (and, if applicable, Qualified
                              Nonelective Contributions or Qualified Matching
                              Contributions, or both) allocated for his account
                              under two or more CODAs, that are maintained by
                              the Employer, shall be determined as if such
                              Elective Deferrals (and, if applicable, such
                              Qualified Nonelective Contributions and Qualified
                              Matching Contributions, or both) were made under a
                              single arrangement. If a Highly Compensated
                              Employee participates in two or more CODAs that
                              have different Plan Years, all CODAs ending with
                              or within the same calendar year shall be treated
                              as a single arrangement.

                        (2)   In the event that this Plan satisfies the
                              requirements of sections 401(a)(4), 401(k) or
                              410(b) of the Code only if aggregated with one or
                              more other plans, or if one or more other plans
                              satisfy the requirements of such sections of the
                              Code only if aggregated with this Plan, then this
                              Section shall be applied by determining the Actual
                              Deferral Percentage of Eligible Participants as if
                              all such plans were a single plan. For Plan Years
                              beginning after December 31, 1989, plans may be
                              aggregated in order to satisfy section 401(k) of
                              the Code only if they have the same Plan Year.

                        (3)   For purposes of the Average Actual Deferral
                              Percentage of an Eligible Participant who is a 5
                              percent owner or one of the 10 most highly-paid
                              Highly Compensated Employees, the Elective
                              Deferrals (and, if applicable, Qualified
                              Nonelective Contributions or Qualified Matching
                              Contributions, or both) and Compensation of such
                              Participant shall include the Elective Deferrals
                              (and, if applicable, Qualified Nonelective
                              Contributions and Qualified Matching Contributions
                              or both), and Compensation for the Plan Year of
                              Family Members.

                                       31
<PAGE>

                              Family Members, with respect to Highly Compensated
                              Employees, shall be disregarded as separate
                              employees in determining the Actual Deferral
                              Percentage both for Eligible Participants who are
                              Non-Highly Compensated Employees and for Eligible
                              Participants who are Highly Compensated Employees.

                        (4)   Notwithstanding anything in this Plan to the
                              contrary, Qualified Nonelective Contributions and
                              Qualified Matching Contributions used to meet the
                              Average Actual Deferral Percentage tests may be
                              made at any time before the last day of the twelve
                              (12) month period immediately following the Plan
                              Year to which the contributions relate.

                        (5)   The determination and treatment of the Elective
                              Deferrals, Qualified Nonelective Contributions,
                              Qualified Matching Contributions and the Actual
                              Deferral Percentage of any Eligible Participant
                              shall satisfy such other requirements as may be
                              prescribed by the Secretary of the Treasury.

                        (6)   The Employer shall maintain adequate records to
                              demonstrate compliance with the Average Actual
                              Deferral Percentage tests, including the extent to
                              which Qualified Nonelective and Qualified Matching
                              Contributions are taken into account.

                  (c)   Distribution of Excess Contributions. Notwithstanding
                        any other provision of the Plan except Section 4.6(d)
                        below, Excess Contributions, plus any income and minus
                        any loss allocable thereto, shall be distributed no
                        later than the last day of each Plan Year to
                        Participants to whose accounts Excess Contributions were
                        allocated for the preceding Plan Year. The amount of
                        Excess Contributions to be distributed shall be reduced
                        by the amount of any Excess Contributions
                        recharacterized in accordance with Section 4.6(d) below.
                        Distributions of Excess Contributions shall be made to
                        Highly Compensated Employees on the basis of the
                        respective portions of the Excess Contributions
                        attributable to each Highly Compensated Employee. Excess
                        Contributions shall be allocated to Participants who are
                        subject to the family member aggregation rules of
                        section 414(q)(6) of the Code in the manner prescribed
                        by the regulations. [If such excess amounts are not]

                                       32
<PAGE>

                        distributed or recharacterized (in accordance with
                        Section 4.6(d) below) within 2 1/2months after thE last
                        day of the Plan Year in which such excess amounts arose,
                        then section 4979 of the Code imposes a ten percent
                        (10%) excise tax on the Employer maintaining the Plan
                        with respect to such amounts.] Excess Contributions of
                        Participants who are subject to the Family Member
                        aggregation rules described in Section 4.6(b)(3) shall
                        be allocated among the Family Members in proportion to
                        the Elective Deferrals (and amounts treated as Elective
                        Deferrals) of each Family Member that is combined to
                        determine the combined Actual Deferral Percentage.

                        (1)   Determination of Income or Loss. Excess
                              Contributions shall be adjusted for income or loss
                              for the Plan Year. Unless indicated otherwise by
                              the Committee, the income or loss allocable to
                              Excess Contributions is the income or loss
                              allocable to the Participant's Elective Deferrals
                              (and, if applicable, Qualified Nonelective
                              Contributions or Qualified Matching Contributions
                              or both) for the Plan Year multiplied by a
                              fraction, the numerator of which is such
                              Participant's Excess Contributions for the year
                              and the denominator is the Participant's account
                              balance attributable to Elective Deferrals (and,
                              if applicable, Qualified Nonelective Contributions
                              or Qualified Matching Contributions or both)
                              without regard to any income or loss occurring
                              during such Plan Year. If the Committee selects
                              another method in order to compute the income or
                              loss, the method selected must not violate the
                              requirements of Code section 401(a)(4) and must be
                              used consistently for all Plan participants and
                              for all corrective distributions under the Plan
                              for the Plan Year.

                        (2)   Accounting for Excess Contributions. Excess
                              Contributions shall be distributed first from the
                              Participant's account balance attributable to
                              Elective Deferrals and (to the extent used in the
                              Average Actual Deferral Percentage tests)
                              Qualified Matching Contributions in proportion to
                              the Participant's Elective Deferrals and Qualified
                              Matching Contributions for the Plan Year. Excess
                              Contributions shall be distributed from the
                              Participant's Qualified Nonelective Contribution

                                       33
<PAGE>

                              Account only to the extent that such Excess
                              Contributions exceed the Participant's account
                              balance attributable to Elective Deferrals and
                              Qualified Matching Contributions.

                  (d)   Recharacterization of Excess Contributions. If the Plan
                        provides for Thrift Contributions by Participants and if
                        permitted in the Adoption Agreement, each Participant to
                        whom Excess Contributions are allocable may elect, in
                        lieu of distribution under Section 4.6(c) above, that
                        all or a portion of such Excess Contributions be
                        recharacterized as Thrift Contributions no later than
                        the later of (i) 2 1/2months after the last day of the
                        Plan Year in which such excess amounts arose or (ii)
                        October 24, 1988. Recharacterization is deemed to occur
                        no earlier than the date the last Highly Compensated
                        Employee is informed in writing of the amount
                        recharacterized and the consequences thereof.

                        In no event may the amount of Excess Contributions
                        recharacterized for any Plan Year exceed the amount of
                        Elective Deferrals for such Plan Year. Excess
                        Contributions may not be recharacterized as Thrift
                        Contributions to the extent that, in combination with
                        the Thrift Contributions actually made for the Plan
                        Year, they exceed the maximum amount of Thrift
                        Contributions permitted under the Plan (prior to the
                        application of the Contribution Percentage tests of
                        Section 4.7).

                        Recharacterized Excess Contributions shall be treated as
                        Thrift Contributions for purposes of the Contribution
                        Percentage tests of Section 4.7.

                        However, no matching Employer contribution shall be made
                        with respect to Recharacterized Contributions. In
                        addition, recharacterized Excess Contributions shall be
                        reported to the Internal Revenue Service and the
                        Participant as employee contributions in accordance with
                        such rules as the Internal Revenue Service may prescribe
                        and shall be accounted for as Voluntary Contributions
                        for purposes of sections 72 and 6047 of the Code.
                        Recharacterized Excess Contributions will be taxable to
                        the Participant for the Participant's taxable year in
                        which the Participant would have

                                       34
<PAGE>

                        received them in cash. Recharacterized Excess
                        Contributions will be taxable to the Participant for the
                        Participant's taxable year in which the Participant
                        would have received them in cash. Recharacterized Excess
                        Contributions shall remain non-forfeitable and shall
                        continue to be treated for all other purposes, including
                        the limitations on distributions of section 401(k), the
                        deduction limitations of section 404 of the Code, the
                        contribution limitations of section 415 of the Code and
                        the top heavy rules of section 416 of the Code, as
                        Elective Deferrals, except that Recharacterized Excess
                        Contributions which relate to Plan Years beginning
                        before January 1, 1989 shall be treated as employee
                        contributions for purposes of section 401(k)(2) of the
                        Code. Recharacterized Excess Contributions shall be
                        allocated to the Participant's Elective Deferral
                        Account.

4.7   Average Contribution Percentage Tests

      (a)   General Rule. The Average Contribution Percentage for Eligible
            Participants who are Highly Compensated Employees for each Plan Year
            beginning on or after January 1, 1987 and the Average Contribution
            Percentage for Eligible Participants who are Non-Highly Compensated
            Employees for the same Plan Year must satisfy one of the following
            tests:

            (1)   The Average Contribution Percentage for Eligible Participants
                  who are Highly Compensated Employees for the Plan Year shall
                  not exceed the Average Contribution Percentage for Eligible
                  Participants who are Non-highly Compensated Employees for the
                  Plan Year multiplied by 1.25; or

            (2)   The Average Contribution Percentage for Eligible Participants
                  who are Highly Compensated Employees for the Plan Year shall
                  not exceed the Average Contribution Percentage for Eligible
                  Participants who are Non-highly Compensated Employees for the
                  Plan Year multiplied by two (2), provided that the Average
                  Contribution Percentage for Eligible Participants who are
                  Highly Compensated Employees does not exceed the Average
                  Contribution Percentage for Eligible Participants who are
                  Non-highly Compensated Employees by more than two (2)
                  percentage points.

      (b)   Multiple Use Test.

            (1)   Effective for Plan Years beginning on or after January 1,
                  1989, if one or more Highly Compensated Employees participate
                  in both a CODA and a plan subject to the Average Contribution
                  Percentage tests maintained by

                                       35
<PAGE>

                  the Employer and the sum of the Average Actual Deferral
                  Percentage and Average Contribution Percentage of those Highly
                  Compensated Employees subject to either or both tests exceeds
                  the "Aggregate Limit" (as defined in (2) below), then the
                  Average Contribution Percentage of those Highly Compensated
                  Employees who also participate in a CODA will be reduced
                  (beginning with such Highly Compensated Employee whose
                  Contribution Percentage is the highest) so that the limit is
                  not exceeded. The amount by which each Highly Compensated
                  Employee's Contribution Percentage Amounts is reduced shall be
                  treated as an Excess Aggregate Contribution. The Average
                  Actual Deferral Percentage and Average Contribution Percentage
                  of the Highly Compensated Employees are determined after any
                  corrections required to meet the Average Actual Deferral
                  Percentage and Average Contribution Percentage tests.
                  Notwithstanding the foregoing, the Multiple Use limitations of
                  Section 4.7 (b) do not apply if the Average Actual Deferral
                  Percentage of Eligible Participants who are Highly Compensated
                  Employees does not exceed 1.25 multiplied by the Average
                  Actual Deferral Percentage of all other Eligible Participants
                  and the Average Contribution Percentage of Eligible
                  Participants who are Highly Compensated Employees does not
                  exceed 1.25 multiplied by the Average Contribution Percentage
                  of all other Eligible Participants.

            (2)   For this purpose, "Aggregate Limit" shall mean the greater of
                  the limit produced by (A) or (B) below:

                  (A)   the sum of (i) one hundred twenty-five percent (125%) of
                        the greater of the Average Actual Deferral Percentage of
                        the Non-Highly Compensated Employees eligible to
                        participate in the CODA for the Plan Year or the Average
                        Contribution Percentage of the Non-Highly Compensated
                        Employees eligible to participate under the Plan subject
                        to section 401(m) of the Code for the Plan Year
                        beginning with or within the Plan Year of the CODA, and
                        (ii) two (2) plus the lesser of such Average Actual
                        Deferral Percentage or Average Contribution Percentage
                        (however, this amount shall not exceed two hundred
                        percent (200%) of the lesser such Average Actual
                        Deferral Percentage or Average Contribution Percentage).

                  (B)   the sum of (i) one hundred twenty-five percent (125%) of
                        the lesser of the Average Actual Deferral Percentage of
                        the Non-Highly Compensated Employees eligible to
                        participate in the

                                       36
<PAGE>

                        CODA for the Plan Year or the Average Contribution
                        Percentage of the Non-Highly Compensated Employees
                        eligible to participate under the Plan subject section
                        401(m) of the Code for the Plan Year beginning with or
                        within the Plan Year of the CODA, and (ii) two (2) plus
                        the greater of such Average Actual Deferral Percentage
                        or Average Contribution Percentage (however, this amount
                        shall not exceed two hundred percent (200%) of the
                        greater of such Average Actual Deferral Percentage or
                        Average Contribution Percentage).

      (c)   Special Rules.

            (1)   For purposes of this Section 4.7, the Contribution Percentage
                  for any Participant who is a Highly Compensated Employee and
                  who is eligible to have Contribution Percentage Amounts
                  allocated to his account under two or more Plans described in
                  section 401(a) of the Code, or CODAs, that are maintained by
                  the Employer or an Affiliated Employer, shall be determined as
                  if the total of such Contribution Percentage Amounts was made
                  under each Plan. If a Highly Compensated Employee participates
                  in two or more CODAs that have different Plan Years, all CODAs
                  ending with or within the same calendar year shall be treated
                  as a single arrangement.

            (2)   In the event that this Plan satisfies the requirements of
                  sections 401(a)(4), 401(m) or 410(b) of the Code only if
                  aggregated with one or more other plans, or if one or more
                  other plans satisfy the requirements of such sections of the
                  Code only if aggregated with this Plan, then this Section
                  shall be applied by determining the Contribution Percentages
                  of Participants as if all such plans were a single plan. For
                  Plan Years beginning after December 31, 1989, plans may be
                  aggregated in order to satisfy section 401(m) of the Code only
                  if they have the same Plan Year.

            (3)   For purposes of determining the Contribution Percentage of an
                  Eligible Participant who is a 5-percent owner or one of the 10
                  most highly-paid Highly Compensated Employees, the
                  Contribution Percentage Amounts and Compensation of such
                  Participant shall include the Contribution Percentage Amounts
                  and Compensation for the Plan Year of Family Members. Family
                  Members, with respect to Highly Compensated Employees, shall
                  be disregarded as separate employees in determining the
                  Average Contribution Percentage both for Eligible Participants
                  who

                                       37
<PAGE>

                  are Non-Highly Compensated Employees and for Eligible
                  Participants who are Highly Compensated Employees.

            (4)   For purposes of the Contribution Percentage tests, Voluntary
                  Contributions and Thrift Contributions are considered to have
                  been made in the Plan Year in which contributed to the Fund.
                  Notwithstanding anything in this Plan to the contrary,
                  Matching Contributions will be considered made for a Plan Year
                  if allocated to such year and made no later than the end of
                  the twelve (12) month period beginning on the day after the
                  close of the Plan Year.

            (5)   The determination and treatment of the Contribution Percentage
                  of any Participant shall satisfy such other requirements as
                  may be prescribed by the Secretary of the Treasury.

            (6)   The Employer shall maintain adequate records to demonstrate
                  compliance with the Average Contribution Percentage tests.

      (d)   Distribution of Excess Aggregate Contributions. Notwithstanding any
            other provision of this Plan, Excess Aggregate Contributions, plus
            any income and minus any loss allocable thereto, shall be forfeited,
            if forfeitable, or if not forfeitable, distributed no later than the
            last day of each Plan Year to Participants to whose accounts such
            Excess Aggregate Contributions were allocated for the preceding Plan
            Year. [If such excess amounts are distributed more than 2 1/2
            months] after the last day of the Plan Year in which such excess
            amounts arose, then section 4979 of the Code imposes a ten percent
            (10%) excise tax on the Employer maintaining the Plan with respect
            to such amounts]. Excess Aggregate Contributions of Participants
            who are subject to the Family Member aggregation rules described
            in Section 4.7(c)(3) shall be allocated among the Family Members
            in proportion to the Thrift Contributions, Voluntary Contributions,
            and Matching Contributions (or amounts treated as Matching
            Contributions) of each Family Member that is combined to determine
            the combined Actual Contribution Percentage.

            (1)   Determination of Income or Loss. The Excess Aggregate
                  Contributions shall be adjusted for income or loss for the
                  Plan Year. Unless indicated otherwise by the Committee, the
                  income or loss allocable to Excess Aggregate Contributions is
                  the income or loss allocable to the Participant's Voluntary
                  Contribution Account, Thrift Account and Employer Matching
                  Contribution Account for the Plan Year multiplied by a
                  fraction, the numerator of which is such Participant's Excess
                  Aggregate Contributions for the year and the denominator is
                  the Participant's account balance(s)

                                       38

<PAGE>

                  attributable to Contribution Percentage Amounts without regard
                  to any income or loss occurring during such Plan Year. If the
                  Committee selects another method in order to compute the
                  income or loss, the method selected must not violate the
                  requirements of Code section 401(a)(4) and must be used
                  consistently for all Plan participants and for all corrective
                  distributions under the Plan for the Plan Year.

            (2)   Treatment of Forfeitures. Forfeitures of Excess Aggregate
                  Contributions shall be allocated to Participants' Accounts or
                  applied to reduce Employer contributions, as elected by the
                  Employer in the Adoption Agreement, under Section 4.2. If
                  forfeitures are reallocated to the accounts of Participants
                  under Section 4.2, forfeitures of Excess Aggregate
                  Contributions shall be allocated in the same manner as
                  Matching Contributions, except that no such forfeitures shall
                  be allocated to any Highly Compensated Employee.

            (3)   The determination of the Excess Aggregate Contributions shall
                  be made after first determining the Excess Elective Deferrals
                  pursuant to Section 4.5, and then determining the Excess
                  Contributions pursuant to Section 4.6.

4.8   Non-Hardship Withdrawals

      (a)   If Employer Discretionary Contributions are not integrated with
            Social Security and a Participant's Employer Discretionary
            Contributions and Matching Contribution Accounts are 100% vested at
            the time of distribution, and if permitted by the Adoption
            Agreement, a Participant may make withdrawals from his Employer
            Discretionary Contributions and Matching Contribution Accounts, for
            any reason, after attainment of age fifty-nine and one-half (59
            1/2).

      (b)   If permitted by the Adoption Agreement, a Participant may make
            withdrawals from his Elective Deferral Account or Qualified
            Nonelective Contribution Account, for any reason, after attainment
            of age fifty-nine and one-half (59 1/2).

      (c)   A withdrawal under (a) or (b) above may be made at such time as the
            Committee shall designate, but not more than quarterly during a Plan
            Year provided that no single withdrawal shall be less than five
            hundred dollars ($500) and a withdrawal by a Participant prior to
            his separation from service may never exceed the smaller of the
            actual amount contributed to the account or the adjusted value of
            the account.

                                       39
<PAGE>

      (d)   If the Plan is subject to the Automatic Annuity Rules of Section
            8.2, the written consent of the Participant's spouse (consistent
            with the requirements for a Qualified Election under Section 8.2)
            must be obtained with respect to any withdrawal.

4.9   Distribution on Account of Financial Hardship

      (a)   If elected by the Employer in the Adoption Agreement, distributions
            may be made from a Participant's Elective Deferral, Qualified
            Nonelective Contribution Account, vested portion of the
            Participant's Employer Discretionary Contribution Account, or the
            vested portion of the Employer Matching Contribution Account on
            account of financial hardship if the distribution is necessary in
            light of the immediate and heavy financial needs of the Participant.

            Effective for Plan Years beginning on or after January 1, 1989,
            distributions on account of financial hardship with respect to
            Elective Deferrals shall be limited to the amount of the
            Participant's Elective Deferrals and income allocable to such
            contributions credited to the Participant's Elective Deferral
            Account as of the end of the last Plan Year ending before July 1,
            1989; neither the income allocable to Elective Deferrals credited to
            a Participant's Elective Deferral Account after the end of the last
            Plan Year ending before July 1, 1989 nor a Participant's Qualified
            Non-elective Contribution Account shall be available for such
            distributions.

      (b)   A distribution on account of financial hardship shall not exceed the
            amount required to meet the immediate financial need created by the
            hardship. With respect to the Elective Deferral Account, and the
            Qualified Nonelective Contribution Account, the determination of the
            existence of financial hardship, and the amount required to meet the
            immediate financial need created by the hardship shall be made by
            the Committee, in accordance with the criteria specified in (c)
            below.

            With respect to the Employer Discretionary Contribution Account and
            the Employer Matching Contribution Account, the determination of the
            existence of financial hardship, and the amount required to meet the
            immediate financial need created by the hardship shall be made by
            the Committee, in accordance with the criteria specified in (d)
            below.

            If the Plan is subject to the Automatic Annuity Rules of Section
            8.2, the written consent of the Participant's spouse (consistent
            with the requirements for a Qualified Election under Section 8.2)
            must be obtained with respect to any withdrawal on account of
            financial hardship.

                                       40
<PAGE>

            The Committee shall establish written procedures specifying the
            requirements for distributions on account of hardship, including the
            forms to be submitted. Distributions of amounts under this Section
            shall be made as soon as administratively feasible.

      (c)   (1)  Immediate and Heavy Financial Need. Hardship distributions will
                 be allowed only on account of:

                  (i)   Expenses for medical care (described in section 213(d)
                        of the Code) incurred by the Employee, the Employee's
                        spouse, or any dependents of the Employee (as defined in
                        section 152 of the Code) or necessary for these persons
                        to obtain such care;

                  (ii)  Purchase (excluding mortgage payments) of a principal
                        residence for the Employee;

                  (iii) Payment of tuition and related educational fees for the
                        next 12 months of post-secondary education for the
                        Employee, the Employee's spouse, children or dependents;

                  (iv)  The need to prevent the eviction of the Employee from
                        his principal residence or foreclosure on the mortgage
                        of the Employee's principal residence; or

                  (v)   Such other financial need which the Commissioner of
                        Internal Revenue, through the publication of revenue
                        rulings, notices and other documents of general
                        applicability, deems to be immediate and heavy.

            (2)   Distribution Necessary to Satisfy Financial Need. A
                  distribution shall not be made on account of a financial need
                  unless all of the following requirements are satisfied:

                  (i)   The distribution is not in excess of the amount of the
                        immediate and heavy financial need (including amounts
                        necessary to pay any federal, state or local income
                        taxes or penalties reasonably anticipated to result from
                        the distribution) of the Employee;

                  (ii)  The Employee has obtained all distributions, other than
                        hardship distributions, and all nontaxable loans
                        currently available under all

                                       41
<PAGE>

                        plans maintained by the Employer;

                  (iii) Elective contributions and employee contributions
                        under this Plan and all other qualified and nonqualified
                        deferred compensation plans maintained by the Employer
                        (other than mandatory contributions to a defined benefit
                        plan) shall be suspended for at least twelve (12) months
                        after receipt of the hardship distribution. For this
                        purpose, the phrase "qualified and nonqualified deferred
                        compensation plans" includes stock option, stock
                        purchase and similar plans, and cash or deferred
                        arrangements under a cafeteria plan, within the meaning
                        of Section 125 of the Code. It does not include health
                        or welfare benefit plans; and

                  (iv)  The Plan, and all other plans maintained by the
                        Employer, provide that the Employee may not make
                        elective contributions for the Employee's taxable year
                        immediately following the taxable year of the hardship
                        distribution in excess of the applicable limit under
                        section 402(g) of the Code for such next taxable year
                        less the amount of such Employee's elective
                        contributions for the taxable year of the hardship
                        distribution.

                        An Employee shall not fail to be treated as an Eligible
                        Participant for purposes of the Actual Deferral
                        Percentage tests of Section 4.6 merely because his
                        Elective Deferrals are suspended in accordance with this
                        provision.

      (d)   Immediate and Heavy Financial Need. The determination of whether an
            immediate and heavy financial need exists shall be made by the
            Committee in a uniform and nondiscriminatory manner. The criteria
            may include the events described in Section 4.9(c) of this plan.

      (e)   If a distribution is made pursuant to this Section when the
            Participant has a nonforfeitable right to less than 100 percent of
            his Account balance derived from contributions made by the Employer
            and the Participant may increase the nonforfeitable percentage in
            the account:

            (1)   A separate account will be established for the Participant's
                  interest in the Plan as of the time of the distribution, and

            (2)   At any relevant time the Participant's nonforfeitable portion
                  of the separate account will be equal to an amount ("X")
                  determined by the formula:

                                       42
<PAGE>

                        X = P(AB + (R x D)) - (R x D)

      For purposes of applying the formula: P is the nonforfeitable percentage
      at the relevant time, D is the amount of the distribution and R is the
      ratio of the Account balance AB at the relevant time to the Account
      balance after distribution.

4.10  Special Distribution Rules

            Except as provided in the Adoption Agreement, Elective Deferrals,
            Qualified Nonelective Contributions, Qualified Matching
            Contributions and income allocable thereto are not distributable to
            the Participant, or the Participant's Beneficiary, in accordance
            with the Participant's or Beneficiary's election, earlier than upon
            separation from service, death, or Total and Permanent Disability.
            Distribution (if elected in the Adoption Agreement) upon termination
            of the Plan without the establishment or maintenance of a successor
            plan, the Employer's sale of substantially all of the assets of a
            trade or business or the sale of the Employer's interest in a
            subsidiary may only be made, after March 31, 1988, in a lump sum
            distribution within the meaning of section 401(k)(10)(B) of the
            Code.

            Unless the Plan is a Profit Sharing Plan exempt from the Automatic
            Annuity rules of Section 8.2 pursuant to Section 8.3, all
            distributions that may be made pursuant to one or more of the
            foregoing distributable events are subject to the spousal and
            Participant consent requirements contained in sections 401(a)(11)
            and 417 of the Code.

                                   ARTICLE V.
               CONTRIBUTIONS AND CREDITS TO TARGET BENEFIT PLANS

                 [All provisions regarding target benefit plan]
                  contributions are in the Adoption Agreement
                   for Dreyfus Standardized Prototype Target
                           Benefit Plan No. 01004].

                                       43
<PAGE>

                                   ARTICLE VI.
                       CONTRIBUTION AND ALLOCATION LIMITS

6.1   Timing of Contributions

      Contributions under Sections 3.1, 4.1, 4.4(3), 4.4(4), 4.4(5) and 5.1
      shall be made no later than the time prescribed by law (including any
      extensions thereof) for filing the Employer's federal income tax return
      for the Plan Year for which they are made.

6.2   Deductibility of Contributions

      All contributions made by an Employer shall be conditioned upon their
      deductibility by the Employer for income tax purposes; provided, however,
      that no contributions shall be returned to an Employer except as provided
      in Section 6.3.

6.3   Return of Employer Contributions

      Notwithstanding any other provision of this Plan, contributions made by an
      Employer may be returned to such Employer if:

      (a)   the contribution was made by reason of a mistake of fact and is
            returned to the Employer within one year of the mistaken
            contribution, or

      (b)   the contribution was conditioned upon its deductibility by the
            Employer for income tax purposes, the deduction was disallowed and
            the contribution is returned to the Employer within one year after
            the disallowance of the deduction, or

      (c)   the contribution was conditioned upon initial qualification of the
            Plan, the Plan was submitted to the Internal Revenue Service for a
            determination as to its initial qualification within the time
            prescribed by law for filing the Employer's return for the taxable
            year in which the Plan was adopted or such later date as the
            Secretary of the Treasury may prescribe, the Plan received an
            adverse determination, and the contribution is returned to the
            Employer within one year after the date of the adverse
            determination.

      Employer contributions may be returned even if such contributions have
      been allocated to a Participant's Account which is fully or partially
      nonforfeitable and it is necessary to adjust said Account to reflect the
      return of the Employer contributions. The amount which may be returned to
      the Employer is the excess of the amount contributed over the amount that
      would have been contributed had there not occurred the circumstances

                                       44
<PAGE>

      causing the excess. Earnings attributable to the excess contribution may
      not be returned to the Employer, but losses thereto shall reduce the
      amount to be so returned. Furthermore, if the withdrawal of the amount
      attributable to the excess contribution would cause the balance of the
      individual Account of any Participant to be reduced to less than the
      balance which would have been in the Account had the excess amount not
      been contributed, then the amount to be returned to the Employer shall be
      limited to avoid such reduction.

6.4   Limitation on Allocations:

      (a)   If the Participant does not participate in, and has never
            participated in another qualified plan or a welfare benefit fund, as
            defined in section 419(e) of the Code, maintained by the Employer,
            or an individual medical benefit account, as defined in section
            415(l)(2) of the Code, maintained by the Employer, or a simplified
            employee pension, as defined in section 408(k) of the Code,
            maintained by the Employer which provides an Annual Addition, the
            amount of Annual Additions which may be credited to the
            Participant's Accounts for any Limitation Year will not exceed the
            lesser of the Maximum Permissible Amount or any other limitation
            contained in this Plan. If the Employer contribution that would
            otherwise be contributed or allocated to the Participant's Accounts
            would cause the Annual Additions for the Limitation Year to exceed
            the Maximum Permissible Amount, the amount contributed or allocated
            will be reduced so that the Annual Additions for the Limitation Year
            will equal the Maximum Permissible Amount.

      (b)   Prior to the determination of the Participant's actual Compensation
            for a Limitation Year, the Maximum Permissible Amount may be
            determined on the basis of the Participant's estimated annual
            compensation for such Limitation Year. Such estimated annual
            compensation shall be determined on a reasonable basis and shall be
            uniformly determined for all Participants similarly situated.

      (c)   As soon as administratively feasible after the end of the Limitation
            Year, the Maximum Permissible Amount for such Limitation Year shall
            be determined on the basis of the Participant's actual Compensation
            for such Limitation Year.

      (d)   If, pursuant to Subsection (c) above or as a result of the
            allocation of forfeitures, there is an Excess Amount with respect to
            a Participant for a Limitation Year, such Excess Amount shall be
            disposed of as follows:

            (1)   First, any deferrals made pursuant to a salary reduction
                  agreement or other deferral mechanism and Thrift/Voluntary
                  Employee contributions, to the extent that the return would
                  reduce the Excess Amount, shall be

                                       45
<PAGE>

                  returned to the Participant.

            (2)   Unless otherwise specified in the Adoption Agreement, if after
                  the application of paragraph (1) an Excess Amount still
                  exists, and the Participant is covered by the Plan at the end
                  of the Limitation Year, the Excess Amount in the Participant's
                  Accounts will be used to reduce Employer contributions
                  (including any allocation of forfeitures) for such Participant
                  in the next Limitation Year, and each succeeding Limitation
                  Year if necessary.

            (3)   If after the application of paragraph (1) an Excess Amount
                  still exists, and the Participant is not covered by the Plan
                  at the end of the Limitation Year, the Excess Amount will be
                  held unallocated in a suspense account. The suspense account
                  will be applied to reduce future Employer contributions
                  (including allocation of any forfeitures) for all remaining
                  Participants in the next Limitation Year, and each succeeding
                  Limitation Year if necessary;

            (4)   If a suspense account is in existence at any time during the
                  Limitation Year pursuant to this Section, it will not
                  participate in the allocation of the Trust's investment gains
                  and losses. If a suspense account is in existence at any time
                  during a particular Limitation Year, all amounts in the
                  suspense account must be allocated and reallocated to
                  Participants' Accounts before any Employer or any employee
                  contributions may be made to the Plan for that Limitation
                  Year. Excess Amounts may not be distributed to Participants or
                  former Participants.

      (e)   Subsections (e), (f), (g), (h), (i) and (j) apply if, in addition to
            this Plan, the Participant is covered under another qualified master
            or prototype defined contribution plan maintained by the Employer or
            a welfare benefit fund, as defined in section 419(e) of the Code,
            maintained by the Employer or an individual medical benefit account,
            as defined in section 415(l)(2) of the Code, maintained by the
            Employer, or a simplified employee pension maintained by the
            Employer which provides an Annual Addition, during any Limitation
            Year. The Annual Additions which may be credited to a Participant's
            Accounts under this Plan for any such Limitation Year will not
            exceed the Maximum Permissible Amount reduced by the Annual
            Additions credited to a Participant's account under the other
            qualified master or prototype defined contribution plans, welfare

                                       46
<PAGE>

            benefit funds, individual medical accounts, and simplified employee
            pensions for the same Limitation Year. If the Annual Additions with
            respect to the Participant under other qualified master or prototype
            defined contribution plans, welfare benefit funds, individual
            medical accounts, and simplified employee pensions maintained by the
            Employer are less than the Maximum Permissible Amount and the
            Employer contribution that would otherwise be contributed or
            allocated to the Participant's Accounts under this Plan would cause
            the Annual Additions for the Limitation Year to exceed this
            limitation, the amount contributed or allocated will be reduced so
            that the Annual Additions under such plans and welfare benefit funds
            for the Limitation Year will equal the Maximum Permissible Amount.
            If the Annual Additions with respect to the Participant under such
            other qualified master or prototype defined contribution plans, and
            welfare benefit funds, individual medical accounts, and simplified
            employee pensions in the aggregate are equal to or greater than the
            Maximum Permissible Amount, no amount will be contributed or
            allocated to the Participant's Accounts under this Plan for the
            Limitation Year.

      (f)   Prior to determining the Participant's actual Compensation for the
            Limitation Year, the Employer may determine the Maximum Permissible
            Amount based on the Participant's estimated annual compensation in
            the manner described in Subsection (b).

      (g)   As soon as administratively feasible after the end of the Limitation
            Year, the Maximum Permissible Amount for such Limitation Year shall
            be determined on the basis of the Participant's actual Compensation
            for such Limitation Year.

      (h)   If pursuant to Subsection (g) above or as a result of the allocation
            of forfeitures, a Participant's Annual Additions under this Plan and
            all such other plans result in an Excess Amount for a Limitation
            Year, the Excess Amount will be deemed to consist of the Annual
            Additions last allocated, except that Annual Additions attributable
            to a simplified employee pension will be deemed to have been
            allocated first, followed by Annual Additions to a welfare benefit
            fund or individual medical account, regardless of the actual
            allocation date.

      (i)   If an Excess Amount was allocated to a Participant on an allocation
            date of this Plan which coincides with an allocation date of another
            plan, the Excess Amount attributed to this Plan will be the product
            of:

            (1)   the total Excess Amount allocated as of such date, times,

            (2)   the ratio of (A) the Annual Additions allocated to the
                  Participant for the Limitation Year as of such date under this
                  Plan, to (B) the total Annual Additions allocated to the
                  Participant for the Limitation Year as of such date under this
                  Plan and all other qualified Master and Prototype defined
                  contribution plans.

                                       47
<PAGE>

      (j)   Any Excess Amounts attributed to this Plan shall be disposed of as
            provided in Subsection (d).

      (k)   If the Participant is covered under another qualified defined
            contribution plan maintained by the Employer which is not a Master
            or Prototype plan, Annual Additions which may be credited to the
            Participant's Accounts under this Plan for any Limitation Year will
            be limited in accordance with Subsections (e), (f), (g), (h), (i)
            and (j) as though the other plan were a Master or Prototype plan
            unless the Employer provides other limitations in the Adoption
            Agreement.

      (l)   If the Employer maintains, or at any time maintained, a qualified
            defined benefit plan (other than the Sponsor's paired plan number
            02001, covering any Participant in this Plan, the sum of the
            Participant's Defined Benefit Fraction and Defined Contribution
            Fraction will not exceed one (1.0) in any Limitation Year. Unless
            the Employer elects otherwise in the Adoption Agreement, this
            limitation will be met by freezing or reducing the rate of benefit
            accrual under the qualified defined benefit plan.

      (m)   For purposes of this Section 6.4, the following definitions shall
            apply:

            (1)   "Annual Additions" shall mean the sum of the following
                  credited to a Participant's account for the Limitation Year:

                  (A)   All Employer contributions,

                  (B)   All forfeitures, and

                  (C) All Employee contributions.

                  All excess deferrals as described in section 402(g) of the
                  Code, all excess contributions as defined in section
                  401(k)(8)(B) of the Code, (including amounts recharacterized),
                  and all excess aggregate contributions as defined in section
                  401(m)(6)(B) of the Code, regardless of whether such amounts
                  are distributed or forfeited, shall continue to be treated as
                  Annual Additions.

                  For purposes of the above, amounts reapplied to reduce
                  Employer contributions under Subsections (d) and (j) shall
                  also be included as Annual Additions.

                                       48
<PAGE>

                  Amounts allocated, after March 31, 1984, to an individual
                  medical benefit account, as defined in section 415(l)(2) of
                  the Code, which is part of a pension or annuity plan
                  maintained by the Employer, are treated as Annual Additions to
                  a defined contribution plan. Also, amounts derived from
                  contributions paid or accrued after December 31, 1985, in
                  taxable years ending after such date, which are attributable
                  to post-retirement medical benefits allocated to the separate
                  account of a Key Employee, as defined in section 419A(d)(3) of
                  the Code, under a welfare benefit fund, as defined in section
                  419(e) of the Code, maintained by the Employer, are treated as
                  Annual Additions to a defined contribution plan, and
                  allocations under a simplified employee pension.

      (2)   Unless specified otherwise in the Adoption Agreement, for purposes
            of this Section, Compensation shall have the same meaning as
            described in Section 1.15 of the Plan. One of the following
            definitions of Compensation may be elected by the employer in the
            Adoption Agreement.

                  (1)   Information required to be reported under section 6041,
                        6051, and 6052, (Wages, Tips and Other Compensation Box
                        on Form W-2). Compensation defined as wages as defined
                        in section 3401(a) and all other payments of
                        compensation to an employee by the employer (in the
                        course of the employer's trade or business) for which
                        the employer is required to furnish the employee a
                        written statement under section 6041(d) and 6051(a)(3)
                        of the Code. Compensation must be determined without
                        regard to any rules under section 3401(a) that limit the
                        remuneration included in wages based on the nature or
                        location of the employment or the services performed
                        (such as the exception for agricultural labor in section
                        3401(a)(2)).

                  (2)   Section 3401(a) wages. Compensation is defined as wages
                        within the meaning of section 3401(a) for the purposes
                        of income tax withholding at the source but determined
                        without regard to any rules that limit the remuneration
                        included in wages based on the nature or location of the
                        employment or the services performed (such as the
                        exception for agricultural labor in section 3401(a)(2).

                  (3)   415 safe-harbor compensation. Compensation is defined as
                        wages, salaries, and fees for professional services and
                        other amounts received (without regard to whether or not
                        an amount is paid in cash) for personal services
                        actually rendered in the course of

                                       49
<PAGE>

                        employment with the employer maintaining the plan to the
                        extent that the amounts are includable in gross income
                        (including, but not limited to, commissions paid
                        salesmen, compensation for services on the basis of
                        percentage of profits, commissions on insurance
                        premiums, tips, bonuses, fringe benefits, and
                        reimbursements or other expense allowances under a
                        nonaccountable plan (as described in 1.62-2(c)), and
                        excluding the following:

                        (a)   Employer contributions to a plan of deferred
                              compensation which are not includable in the
                              employee's gross income for the taxable year in
                              which contributed, or employer contributions under
                              a simplified employee pension plan to the extent
                              such contributions are deductible by the employee,
                              or any distributions from a plan of deferred
                              compensation;

                        (b)   Amounts realized from the exercise of a
                              non-qualified stock option, or when restricted
                              stock (or property) held by the employee either
                              becomes freely transferable or is no longer
                              subject to a substantial risk of forfeiture;

                        (c)   Amounts realized from the sale, exchange or other
                              disposition of stock acquired under a qualified
                              stock option; and

                        (d)   Other amounts which received special tax benefits,
                              or contributions made by the employer (whether or
                              not under a salary reduction agreement) towards
                              the purchase of an annuity contract described in
                              section 403(b) of the Code (whether or not the
                              contributions are actually excludable from the
                              gross income of the employee).

                        For any self-employed individual compensation will mean
                        earned income.

                  For limitation years beginning after December 31, 1991, for
                  purposes of applying the limitations of this article,
                  compensation for a limitation year is the compensation
                  actually paid or made available during such limitation year.

                  Notwithstanding the preceding sentence, compensation for a
                  participant in

                                       50
<PAGE>

                  a defined contribution plan who is permanently and totally
                  disabled (as defined in section 22(e)(3) of the Internal
                  Revenue Code) is the compensation such participant would have
                  received for the limitation year if the participant had been
                  paid at the rate of compensation paid immediately before
                  becoming permanently and totally disabled; such imputed
                  compensation for the disabled participant may be taken into
                  account only if the participant is not a highly compensated
                  employee (as defined in section 414(q) of the Code) and
                  contributions made on behalf of such participant are
                  nonforfeitable when made.

                  (3)   "Defined Benefit Fraction" shall mean a fraction, the
                        numerator of which is the sum of the Participant's
                        Projected Annual Benefits under all the defined benefit
                        plans (whether or not terminated) maintained by the
                        Employer, and the denominator of which is the lesser of
                        one hundred twenty-five percent (125%) of the dollar
                        limitation determined for the Limitation Year under
                        sections 415(b) and (d) of the Code or one hundred forty
                        percent (140%) of the Highest Average Compensation
                        (which shall mean the average compensation for the three
                        consecutive years of Service with the Employer that
                        produces the highest average), including any adjustments
                        under section 415(b) of the Code. A year of Service with
                        the Employer is the twelve (12) consecutive month period
                        defined in Section 1.54 of the Plan.

                  Notwithstanding the above, if the Participant was a
                  Participant as of the first day of the first Limitation Year
                  beginning after December 31, 1986, in one or more defined
                  benefit plans maintained by the Employer which were in
                  existence on May 6, 1986, the denominator of this fraction
                  will not be less than one hundred twenty five percent (125%)
                  of the sum of the annual benefits under such plans which the
                  Participant had accrued as of the close of the last Limitation
                  Year beginning before January 1, 1987, disregarding any
                  changes in the terms and conditions of the Plan after May 5,
                  1986. The preceding sentence applies only if the defined
                  benefit plans individually and in the aggregate satisfied the
                  requirements of section 415 of the Code for all Limitation
                  Years beginning before January 1, 1987.

            (4)   "Defined Contribution Fraction" shall mean a fraction, the
                  numerator of which is the sum of the Annual Additions to the
                  Participant's Account under all the defined contribution plans
                  (whether or not terminated) maintained by the Employer for the
                  current and all prior Limitation Years (including the Annual
                  Additions attributable to the Participant's

                                       51
<PAGE>

                  nondeductible Voluntary Contributions to all defined benefit
                  plans, whether or not terminated, maintained by the Employer
                  and the Annual Additions attributable to all welfare benefit
                  funds, as defined in section 419(e) of the Code, and
                  individual medical benefit accounts as defined in section
                  415(l)(2) of the Code, and simplified employee pensions,
                  maintained by the Employer) and the denominator of which is
                  the sum of the Maximum Aggregate Amounts for the current and
                  all prior Limitation Years of Service with the Employer
                  (regardless of whether a defined contribution plan was
                  maintained by the Employer). The Maximum Aggregate Amount in
                  any Limitation Year is the lesser of one hundred twenty-five
                  percent (125%) of the dollar limitation in effect under
                  section 415(c)(1)(A) of the Code or thirty-five percent (35%)
                  of the Participant's Compensation for such year.

                  If the Employee was a Participant as of the end of the first
                  day of the first Limitation Year beginning after December 31,
                  1986, in one or more defined contribution plans maintained by
                  the Employer which were in existence on May 6, 1986, the
                  numerator of this fraction will be adjusted if the sum of this
                  fraction and the Defined Benefit Fraction would otherwise
                  exceed one (1.0) under the terms of this Plan. Under the
                  adjustment, an amount equal to the product of (A) the excess
                  of the sum of the fractions over one (1.0) times (B) the
                  denominator of this fraction, will be permanently subtracted
                  from the numerator of this fraction. The adjustment is
                  calculated as of the end of the last Limitation Year beginning
                  before January 1, 1987, and disregarding any changes in the
                  terms and conditions of the Plan made after May 5, 1986, but
                  using the section 415 limitation applicable to the first
                  Limitation Year beginning on or after January 1, 1987.

                  The Annual Additions for any Limitation Year beginning before
                  January 1, 1987 shall not be recomputed to treat all Employee
                  contributions as Annual Additions.

            (5)   "Employer" shall mean the Employer that adopts this Plan and
                  all members of a controlled group of corporations (as defined
                  in section 414(b) of the Code and as modified by section
                  415(h) of the Code) which includes the Employer; any trade or
                  business (whether or not incorporated) which is under common
                  control (as defined in section 414(c) and as modified by
                  section 415(h) of the Code) with the Employer; any
                  organization (whether or not incorporated) which is a member
                  of an affiliated service group (as defined in section 414(m));
                  and any other entity

                                       52
<PAGE>

                  required to be aggregated with the Employer under Section
                  414(o) of the Code.

            (6)   "Excess Amount" shall mean the excess of the Participant's
                  Annual Additions for the Limitation Year over the Maximum
                  Permissible Amount.

            (7)   "Limitation Year" shall mean the calendar year, unless another
                  twelve (12) consecutive month period is elected in the
                  Adoption Agreement. All qualified plans maintained by the
                  Employer must use the same Limitation Year. If the Limitation
                  Year is changed by amendment, the new Limitation Year must
                  begin on a date within the Limitation Year in which the
                  amendment is made.

            (8)   "Master or Prototype Plan" shall mean a plan the form of which
                  is the subject of a favorable opinion letter from the Internal
                  Revenue Service.

            (9)   "Maximum Permissible Amount" shall mean the lesser of:

                  (A)   thirty-thousand dollars ($30,000) (or, if greater,
                        one-fourth (1/4th) of the defined benefit dollar
                        limitation set forth in section 415(b)(1) of the Code as
                        in effect for the Limitation Year), or

                  (B)   twenty-five percent (25%) of the Participant's
                        Compensation for the Limitation Year.

                  The compensation limitation referred to in paragraph (B) above
                  shall not apply to any contribution for medical benefits
                  (within the meaning of section 401(h) or section 419A(f)(2) of
                  the Code) which is otherwise treated as an Annual Addition
                  under section 415(l)(1) or 419A(d)(2) of the Code.

                  If a short Limitation Year is created because of an amendment
                  changing the Limitation Year to a different twelve (12)
                  consecutive month period, the Maximum Permissible Amount will
                  not exceed the defined contribution dollar limitation set
                  forth in paragraph (A) above multiplied by the following
                  fraction:

                        NUMBER OF MONTHS IN THE SHORT LIMITATION YEAR

                                          12

                                       53

<PAGE>

            (10)  "Projected Annual Benefit" shall mean the annual retirement
                  benefit (adjusted to an actuarial equivalent straight life
                  annuity if such benefit is expressed in a form other than a
                  straight life annuity or Qualified Joint and Survivor Annuity)
                  to which the Participant would be entitled under the terms of
                  the Plan assuming:

                  (A)   The Participant will continue employment until the
                        Normal Retirement Date under the Plan (or current date,
                        if later) and

                  (B)   the Participant's Compensation for the current
                        Limitation Year and all other relevant factors used to
                        determine benefits under the Plan will remain constant
                        for all future Limitation Years.

6.5   Separate Accounts

      The Committee shall maintain the following separate Accounts, as are
      applicable, with respect to each Participant:

      (a)   a Regular Account (as described in Article III),

      (b)   an Elective Deferral Account (as described in Article IV),

      (c)   a Qualified  Nonelective  Contribution  Account (as described in
            Article IV),

      (d)   a Thrift Account (as described in Article IV),

      (e)   a Matching Contribution Account (as described in Article IV),

      (f)   a Voluntary Account (as described in Article X),

      (g)   a  Voluntary  Tax-Deductible  Account (as  described  in Article
            X),

      (h)   a Rollover Account (as described in Article X),

      (i)   an Employer  Discretionary  Contribution  Account (as  described
            in Article IV), and

      (j)   a Transfer Account (as described in Article X).

      Each such Account shall be credited with the applicable contributions,
      forfeitures, earnings losses, expenses, and distributions. The maintenance
      of separate Accounts is only for accounting purposes and a segregation of
      the Trust Fund to each Account shall

                                       54
<PAGE>

      not be required.

6.6   Valuation

      (a)   Except as otherwise provided in subsection (b) below, or as directed
            by the Committee subject to approval by the Trustee, the assets of
            the Trust Fund shall be valued at their current fair market value as
            of each Valuation Date, and the earnings and losses of the Trust
            Fund since the immediately preceding Valuation Date shall be
            allocated to the separate Accounts of all Participants and former
            Participants under the Plan in the ratio that the fair market value
            of each such Account as of the immediately preceding Valuation Date,
            reduced by any distributions or withdrawals therefrom since such
            preceding Valuation Date, bears to the total fair market value of
            all separate Accounts as of the immediately preceding Valuation
            Date, reduced by any distributions or withdrawals therefrom since
            such preceding Valuation Date; provided, however, that if
            Participant-directed investments have been elected in the Adoption
            Agreement, the earnings and losses of each separate Account shall be
            allocated solely to such Account.

            Notwithstanding any other provision of the Plan, the Committee may,
            in its sole discretion, on any date other than the last day of the
            Plan Year, determine the value of an Account. If such a
            determination is made, the date of such determination shall be
            considered to be a Valuation Date.

      (b)   If the plan is an Easy Retirement Plan, the dividends, capital gain
            distributions, and other earnings or losses received on any share or
            unit of a regulated investment company or collective investment
            fund, or on any other investment, that is specifically credited to a
            Participant's separate Accounts under the Plan and/or held under the
            Custodial Agreement shall be allocated to such separate Accounts
            and, in the absence of investment directions to the contrary,
            immediately reinvested, to the extent practicable, in additional
            shares or units of such regulated investment company or collective
            investment fund, or in such other investments.

6.7   Segregation of Former Participant's Account

      The Committee may segregate any portion of a former Participant's account
      balance which is retained in the Fund after his death or separation from
      service in an interest-bearing account and debited or credited only with
      income and charges attributable directly.

                                       55
<PAGE>

                                  ARTICLE VII.
                                     VESTING

7.1   Vested Interest

      Each Participant shall at all times have a fully vested interest in his
      Elective Deferral Account, Qualified Nonelective Account, Voluntary
      Account, Voluntary Tax-Deductible Account and Thrift Account. Each
      Participant's Regular Account, Employer Discretionary Contribution
      Account, and Employer Matching Contribution Account shall vest in
      accordance with the vesting schedule elected in the Adoption Agreement.

      If a Participant is not already fully vested in his Regular Account,
      Employer Discretionary Contribution Account, and Employer Matching
      Contributions Account, he shall become so upon reaching Normal Retirement
      Age or Early Retirement Age, or upon his death or Total and Permanent
      Disability.

7.2   Vesting of a Participant

      Except in the case of Plans subject to full and immediate vesting, a
      Participant's vested amount shall be calculated by multiplying his Regular
      Account balance, Employer Discretionary Contribution Account balance, and
      Employer Matching Contribution Account balance, if any, as determined on
      the Valuation Date following his termination of employment by his vested
      interest as determined under Section 7.1.

      In order to determine the vested interest of a Participant after a Service
      Break, the following rules shall apply:

      (a)   Subject to (b) below, a former Participant who had a nonforfeitable
            right to all or a portion of the account balance derived from
            Employer contributions at the time of the Participant's termination
            will receive credit for all years of Service prior to a Service
            Break if the Participant completes a year of Service after returning
            to the employ of the Employer.

      (b)   In the case of a Participant who have five (5) or more consecutive
            one (1) year Service Breaks, all Service after such Service Breaks
            will be disregarded for the purpose of vesting the Employer-derived
            account balance that accrued before such Service Breaks. Such
            Participants' pre-Service Break Service will count in vesting the
            post-Service Break Employer-derived account balance only if (1) such
            Participant has any nonforfeitable interest in the account balance
            attributable to

                                       56
<PAGE>

            Employer contributions at the time of separation from service, or
            (2) upon returning to service the number of consecutive one (1) year
            Service Breaks is less than the number of years of Service. Separate
            accounts will be maintained for the Participant's pre-Service Break
            and post-Service Break Employer-derived account balance. Both
            accounts will share in the earnings and losses of the Fund.

7.3   Amendment of Vesting Provisions

      No amendment to the vesting provisions pursuant to Section 7.1 shall
      deprive a Participant of his nonforfeitable rights to benefits accrued to
      the date of the amendment. Further, if the vesting provisions of the Plan
      are amended, or the Plan is amended in any way that directly or indirectly
      affects computation of a Participant's nonforfeitable percentage or if the
      Plan is deemed amended by an automatic change to or from a top-heavy
      vesting schedule, each Participant with at least three (3) years of
      Service may elect, within a reasonable period after the adoption of the
      amendment, to have his nonforfeitable percentage computed under the Plan
      without regard to such amendment. For Participants who do not have at
      least one Hour of Service in any Plan Year beginning on or after January
      1, 1989, the preceding sentence shall be applied by substituting "five (5)
      years of Service" for "three (3) years of Service." The period during
      which the election may be made shall commence with the date the amendment
      is adopted and shall end on the later of (1) sixty (60) days after the
      amendment is adopted; (2) sixty (60) days after the amendment becomes
      effective; or (3) sixty (60) days after the Participant is issued written
      notice of the amendment by the Employer or Committee.

7.4   Forfeitures

      (a)   If a Participant terminates employment with the Employer and the
            value of the Participant's vested account balance derived from
            Employer and Employee contributions (other than accumulated
            deductible employee contributions) is not greater than $3,500, the
            Employee shall receive a distribution of the value of the entire
            vested portion of such account balance, and the nonvested portion
            will be treated as a forfeiture. For purposes of this Section 7.4,
            if the value of a Participant's vested account balance is zero, the
            Participant shall be deemed to have received a distribution of such
            vested account balance. A Participant's vested account balance shall
            not include Voluntary Tax-Deductible Contributions for Plan Years
            beginning before January 1, 1989.

      (b)   If a Participant terminates employment with the Employer, and elects
            (with his or her spouse's consent) in accordance with Article VIII
            to receive the value of his or her vested account balance, the
            nonvested portion will be treated as a forfeiture. If the
            Participant elects to have distributed less than the entire vested

                                       57
<PAGE>

            portion of the account balance derived from Employer contributions,
            the part of the nonvested portion that will be treated as a
            forfeiture is the total nonvested portion multiplied by a fraction,
            the numerator of which is the amount of the distribution
            attributable to Employer contributions and the denominator of which
            is the total value of the vested Employer derived account balance.

      (c)   If a Participant terminates employment with the Employer but does
            not receive a distribution described in (a) or (b) above, the
            non-vested portion of his account balance will be treated as a
            forfeiture upon the occurrence of a Service Break of five (5)
            consecutive years.

      (d)   If a Participant who receives a distribution pursuant to this
            Section 7.4 resumes employment, the Participant's Employer-derived
            account balance will be restored to the amount on the date of
            distribution if the Participant repays to the Plan the full amount
            of the distribution attributable to Employer contributions before
            the earlier of (i) five (5) years after the Participant's
            Re-Employment Commencement Date or (ii) the date the Participant
            incurs five (5) consecutive one (1) year Service Breaks following
            the date of distribution. If a Participant is deemed to receive a
            distribution pursuant to this Section, and the Participant resumes
            employment covered under this Plan before the date the Participant
            incurs five (5) consecutive one year Service Breaks, upon the
            reemployment of such Participant, the Employer-derived account
            balance of the Participant will be restored to the amount on the
            date of such deemed distribution.

                                  ARTICLE VIII.
              BENEFITS ON RETIREMENT AND SEPARATION FROM SERVICE

8.1   Commencement of Benefits

      (a)   Any Participant who terminates employment with the Employer for any
            reason (including Total and Permanent Disability as defined in
            Section 1.61 of the Plan) shall be entitled to receive the value of
            the vested portion of his Accounts (determined as of the Valuation
            Date coincident with or immediately subsequent to his termination
            with employment) as soon as administratively feasible after the date
            of his termination of employment. If the value of the Employee's
            vested account balance derived from Employer and Employee
            contributions (excluding, for Plan Years beginning before January 1,
            1989, accumulated Voluntary Tax-Deductible Contributions) is greater
            than (or at the time of any prior distribution was greater than)
            $3,500, then no such amount shall be distributed

                                       58
<PAGE>

            prior to Normal Retirement Age (or age sixty-two (62), if later)
            unless the Participant consents to the distribution. If the Plan is
            subject to the Automatic Annuity rules of Section 8.2, then the
            consent of the Participant's spouse shall also be required to a
            distribution in any form other than a Qualified Joint and Survivor
            Annuity (as defined in Section 8.2).

            In the case of the Dreyfus Easy Retirement Plans (Plan Numbers
            01005, and 01006), Participants who attain the Plan's Normal
            Retirement Age shall be entitled to receive the value of the vested
            portion of their Accounts. With respect to the Dreyfus standardized
            and non-standardized prototype profit-sharing plans (Plan Numbers
            01002 and 01003) if permitted under the Adoption Agreement,
            Participants who attain the Plan's Normal Retirement Age shall be
            entitled to receive the value of the vested portion of their
            Accounts.

            The Committee shall provide the Participant with a written
            explanation of the material features and relative values of the
            optional forms of benefit available under the Plan. Such notice
            shall also notify the Participant of the right to defer distribution
            until a future date specified by the Participant (not permitted in
            the case of the Dreyfus Easy Retirement Plans -- Plan Numbers 01005
            and 01006) or until Normal Retirement Age (or age sixty-two (62), if
            later), and if the Plan is subject to the Automatic Annuity Rules of
            Section 8.2, shall be provided during the period beginning ninety
            (90) days before and ending thirty (30) days before the Annuity
            Starting Date.

      (b)   If the value of the Participant's vested account balance derived
            from Employer and Employee contributions (excluding, for Plan Years
            beginning before January 1, 1989, accumulated Voluntary
            Tax-Deductible Contributions) is not greater than $3,500, the
            Employee shall receive a distribution of the value of the entire
            vested portion of such account balance. However, no such
            distribution shall be made after the Annuity Starting Date unless
            the Participant and his or her spouse (or the Participant's
            surviving spouse) consent in writing to such distribution.

      (c)   Unless the Participant elects otherwise, distribution of benefits
            shall commence no later than the sixtieth (60th) day after the close
            of the Plan Year in which the latest of the following events occurs:

            (i)   the Participant reaches his Normal Retirement Age (or age
                  sixty-five (65), if earlier),

            (ii)  the tenth (10th) anniversary of the year in which the
                  Participant commenced participation in the Plan, or

                                       59
<PAGE>

            (iii) the Participant terminates employment with the Employer.

            The failure of a Participant or surviving spouse to consent to a
            distribution shall be deemed to be an election to defer commencement
            of benefit distributions sufficient to satisfy this Section.

      (d)   Neither the consent of the Participant nor the Participant's spouse
            shall be required to the extent a distribution is necessary to
            satisfy section 401(a)(9) or section 415 of the Code.

      (e)   This Article applies to distribution made on or after January 1,
            1993. Notwithstanding any provision of the plan to the contrary that
            would otherwise limit a distributee's election under this Article, a
            distributee may elect, at the time and in the manner prescribed by
            the Committee, to have any portion of an eligible rollover
            distribution paid directly to an eligible retirement plan specified
            by the distributee in a direct rollover.

             Definitions:

                  (i)   Eligible rollover distribution: An eligible rollover
                        distribution is any distribution of all or any portion
                        of the balance to the credit of the distributee, except
                        that an eligible rollover distribution does not include:
                        any distribution that is one of a series of
                        substantially equal periodic payments (not less
                        frequently than annually) made for the life (or life
                        expectancy) of the distributee or the joint lives (or
                        joint life expectancies) of the distributee and the
                        distributee's designated beneficiary, or for a specified
                        period of ten years or more; any distribution to the
                        extent such distribution is required under section
                        401(a)(9) of the Code; and the portion of any
                        distribution that is not includible in gross income
                        (determined without regard to the exclusion for net
                        unrealized appreciation with respect to employer
                        securities).

                  (ii)  Eligible retirement plan: An eligible retirement plan is
                        an individual retirement account described in section
                        408(a) of the Code, an individual retirement annuity
                        described in section 408(b) of the Code, an annuity plan
                        described in section 402(a) of the Code, or a qualified
                        trust described in section 401(a) of the Code, that
                        accepts the distributee's eligible rollover
                        distribution. However, in the case of an eligible
                        rollover distribution to the

                                       60
<PAGE>

                        surviving spouse, an eligible retirement plan is an
                        individual retirement account or individual retirement
                        annuity.

                  (iii) Distributee: A distributee includes an Employee or
                        former Employee. In addition, the Employee's or former
                        Employee's surviving spouse and the Employee's or former
                        Employee's spouse or former spouse who is the alternate
                        payee under a qualified domestic relations order as
                        defined in section 414(p) of the Code, are distributees
                        with regard to the interest of the spouse or former
                        spouse.

                  (iv)  Direct rollover: A direct rollover is a payment by the
                        Plan to the eligible retirement plan specified by the
                        distributee.

8.2   Automatic Annuity Requirements

      The provisions of Section 8.2 through 8.4 shall take precedence over any
      conflicting provisions in this Plan.

      (a)   Applicability of Automatic Annuity Requirements.

            Except as provided in Section 8.3 with respect to certain Profit
            Sharing Plans, the provisions of this Section shall apply to any
            Participant who is credited with at least one (1) Hour of Service
            with the Employer on or after August 23, 1984, and such other
            Participants as provided in Section 8.4.

            Qualified Joint and Survivor Annuity. Unless an optional form of
            benefit is selected pursuant to a Qualified Election within the
            ninety (90) day period ending on the Annuity Starting Date, a
            married Participant's Vested Account Balance shall be paid in the
            form of a Qualified Joint and Survivor Annuity and an unmarried
            Participant's Vested Account Balance will be paid in the form of a
            life annuity. The Participant may elect to have such annuity
            distributed upon attainment of the Earliest Retirement Age.

            Qualified Pre-Retirement Survivor Annuity. Unless an optional form
            of benefit has been selected within the Election Period pursuant to
            a Qualified Election, if a Participant dies before the Annuity
            Starting Date then the Participant's Vested Account Balance shall be
            paid in the form of a Qualified Pre-Retirement Survivor Annuity. The
            Surviving Spouse may elect to elect to have such annuity distributed

                                       61
<PAGE>

            within a reasonable period after the Participant's death.

            Definitions.  For purposes of this  Section  8.2, the  following
            words shall have the following meanings:

            (i)   "Earliest Retirement Age" shall mean the earliest date on
                  which, under the Plan, the Participant could elect to receive
                  retirement benefits.

            (ii)  "Election Period" shall mean the period which begins on the
                  first day of the Plan Year in which the Participant attains
                  age thirty-five (35) and ends on the date of the Participant's
                  death. If a Participant separates from service prior to the
                  first day of the Plan Year in which age thirty-five (35) is
                  attained, with respect to benefits accrued prior to
                  separation, the Election Period shall begin on the date of
                  separation.

                  A Participant who will not yet attain age thirty-five (35) as
                  of the end of any current Plan Year may make a special
                  Qualified Election to waive the Qualified Pre-Retirement
                  Survivor Annuity for the period beginning on the date of such
                  election and ending on the first day of the plan year in which
                  the Participant will attain age thirty-five (35). Such
                  election shall not be valid unless the Participant receives a
                  written explanation of the Qualified Pre-Retirement Survivor
                  Annuity in such terms as are comparable to the explanation
                  required under Section 8.2(b). Qualified Pre-Retirement
                  Survivor Annuity coverage will be automatically reinstated as
                  of the first day of the Plan Year in which the Participant
                  attains age thirty-five (35). Any new waiver on or after such
                  date shall be subject to the full requirements of this Section
                  8.2.

            (iii) "Qualified Election" shall mean a Participant's waiver of a
                  Qualified Joint and Survivor Annuity or a Qualified
                  Pre-Retirement Survivor Annuity. Any such waiver must be
                  consented to in writing by the Participant's Spouse. The
                  Spouse's consent must: designate a specific Beneficiary
                  (including any class of Beneficiaries or any contingent
                  Beneficiaries, which may not be changed without spousal
                  consent) or expressly permits designations by the Participant
                  without any further spousal consent; acknowledge the effect of
                  the election; and be witnessed by a member of the Committee or
                  a Notary Public. Additionally, a Participant's waiver of the
                  Qualified Joint and Survivor Annuity shall not be effective
                  unless the election designates a form of benefit payment which
                  may not be changed without spousal consent (or the Spouse
                  expressly permits designations by the Participant without any
                  further spousal consent). Notwithstanding this

                                       62
<PAGE>

                  consent requirement, if the Participant establishes to the
                  satisfaction of a member of the Committee that there is no
                  Spouse or the Spouse cannot be located, a waiver will be
                  deemed a Qualified Election. Any spousal consent (or deemed
                  spousal consent) obtained under this provision will be valid
                  only with respect to such Spouse. A consent that permits
                  designations by the Participant without further consent by
                  such Spouse must acknowledge that the Spouse has the right to
                  limit consent to a specific Beneficiary and, where applicable,
                  a specific form of benefit, and that the Spouse voluntarily
                  elects to relinquish either or both of such rights. A
                  revocation of a prior waiver may be made by a Participant
                  without the consent of the Spouse at any time before the
                  commencement of benefits. The number of revocations shall not
                  be limited. No consent obtained under this provision shall be
                  valid unless the Participant has received notice as provided
                  in paragraph (b) below.

            (iv)  "Qualified Joint and Survivor Annuity" shall mean an immediate
                  annuity for the life of the Participant with a survivor
                  annuity for the life of the Spouse which is fifty percent
                  (50%) of the amount of the annuity which is payable during the
                  joint lives of the Participant and the Spouse and which is the
                  amount of benefit which can be purchased with the
                  Participant's Vested Account Balance.

            (v)   "Qualified Pre-Retirement Survivor Annuity" shall mean an
                  annuity for the life of the Participant's surviving spouse
                  purchased with the Participant's Vested Account Balance.

            (vi)  "Spouse (Surviving Spouse)" shall mean the Spouse or Surviving
                  Spouse of the Participant, provided that former spouse will be
                  treated as the Spouse or Surviving Spouse to the extent
                  provided under a qualified domestic relations order as
                  described in section 414(p) of the Code.

            (vii) "Vested Account Balance" shall mean the aggregate value of the
                  Participant's vested account balance derived from employer and
                  employee contributions (including rollovers), whether vested
                  before or upon death, including the proceeds of insurance
                  contracts, if any, on the Participant's life. The provisions
                  of this Section 8.2 shall apply to a Participant who is vested
                  in amounts attributable to employer contributions, employee
                  contributions (or both) at the time of death or distribution.

      (b)   Notice Requirements

                                       63
<PAGE>

            QUALIFIED JOINT AND SURVIVOR ANNUITY. In the case of a Qualified
            Joint and Survivor Annuity as described above, the Committee shall
            provide each Participant within the period beginning ninety (90)
            days before and ending thirty (30) days before the Annuity Starting
            Date a written explanation of: (i) the terms and conditions of a
            Qualified Joint and Survivor Annuity; (ii) the Participant's right
            to make and the effect of an election to waive the Qualified Joint
            and Survivor Annuity form of benefit; (iii) the rights of a
            Participant's Spouse; (iv) the right to make, and the effect of, a
            revocation of a previous election to waive the Qualified Joint and
            Survivor Annuity; and (v) the right, if any, to defer the
            commencement of benefits.

            QUALIFIED PRE-RETIREMENT SURVIVOR ANNUITY. In the case of a
            Qualified Pre-Retirement Survivor Annuity as described above, the
            Committee shall provide each Participant with a written explanation
            of the Qualified Pre-Retirement Survivor Annuity in such terms and
            in such manner as would be comparable to the explanation provided
            for meeting the requirements applicable to explaining a Qualified
            Joint and Survivor Annuity within whichever of the following periods
            ends last:

            (i)   The period beginning on the first day of the Plan Year in
                  which the Participant attains age thirty-two (32) and ending
                  with the close of the Plan Year preceding the Plan Year in
                  which the Participant attains age thirty-five (35).

            (ii)  A reasonable period ending after a Participant enters the
                  Plan.

            (iii) A reasonable period ending after Section 8.3 ceases to apply
                  to a Profit Sharing Plan.

            (iv)  A reasonable period after Section 8.2 first applies to a
                  Participant.

            Notwithstanding the foregoing, notice must be provided within a
            reasonable period ending after termination of employment in the case
            of a Participant who terminates employment before attaining age 35.

            For purposes of applying the preceding paragraph, a reasonable
            period ending after the enumerated events described in (ii), (iii),
            and (iv) is the end of the two-year period beginning one year prior
            to the date the applicable event occurs, and ending one year after
            that date. In the case of a Participant who terminates employment
            before the Plan Year in which age thirty-five (35) is attained,
            notice shall be provided within the two-year period beginning one
            year prior to

                                       64
<PAGE>

            termination and ending one year after termination. If such a
            Participant thereafter returns to employment with the Employer, the
            applicable period for such Participant shall be redetermined.

            If a distribution is one to which sections 401(a)(11) and 417 of the
            Code do not apply, such distribution may commence less than 30 days
            after the notice required under section 1.411(a)-11(c) of the Income
            Tax Regulations in given, provided that:

                  (1)   the Plan Administrator clearly informs the Participant
                        that the Participant has a right to a period of at least
                        30 days after receiving the notice to consider the
                        decision of whether or not to elect a distribution (and,
                        if applicable, a particular distribution option), and

                  (2)   the participant, after receiving the notice,
                        affirmatively elects a distribution.

8.3   Profit Sharing Plans: Exception from Automatic Annuity Requirements

      Unless otherwise specified in the Adoption Agreement, the provisions of
      Sections 8.2 and 8.4 shall be inoperative in the case of a Profit Sharing
      Plan if the following two (2) conditions are met: (1) the Participant
      cannot or does not elect payments in the form of a life annuity, and (2)
      on the death of the Participant, the Participant's Vested Account Balance
      (as defined in Section 8.2) will be paid to the Participant's Surviving
      Spouse (as defined in Section 8.2), but if there is no Surviving Spouse,
      or, if the Surviving Spouse has already consented in a manner conforming
      to a Qualified Election to a waiver of a Qualified Pre-Retirement Survivor
      Annuity (under Section 8.2), then to the Participant's Beneficiary.

      However, the foregoing shall not be operative with respect to a
      Participant if it is determined that this Profit Sharing Plan is a direct
      or indirect transferee of a defined benefit plan, money purchase pension
      plan (including a target benefit plan), stock bonus, or profit-sharing
      plan which is subject to the survivor annuity requirements of sections
      401(a)(11) and 417 of the Code.

8.4   Transitional Rules Applicable to Joint and Survivor Annuities

      (a)   Any living Participant not receiving benefits on August 23, 1984,
            who would

                                       65
<PAGE>

            otherwise not receive the benefits prescribed by Section 8.2 must be
            give the opportunity to elect to have Section 8.2 apply if such
            Participant is credited with at least one (1) Hour of Service under
            this Plan or a predecessor plan in a Plan Year beginning on or after
            January 1, 1976, and such Participant had at least ten (10) years of
            Service when he or she terminated employment.

      (b)   Any living Participant not receiving benefits on August 23, 1984,
            who was credited with at least one (1) Hour of Service under this
            Plan or a predecessor Plan on or after September 2, 1974, and who is
            not otherwise credited with any Service in a Plan Year beginning on
            or after January 1, 1976, must be given the opportunity to have his
            or her benefits paid in the manner set forth in paragraph (d) below.

      (c)   The respective opportunities to elect (as described in paragraphs
            (a) and (b) above) must be afforded to the appropriate Participants
            during the period commencing on August 23, 1984, and ending on the
            date benefits would otherwise commence to said Participants.

      (d)   Any Participant who has elected pursuant to paragraph (b) above and
            any Participant who does not elect under paragraph (a) above or who
            meets the requirements of paragraph (a) except that such Participant
            does not have at least ten (10) Years of Service when he or she
            terminates employment, shall have his or her benefits distributed in
            accordance with all of the following requirements if benefits would
            have been payable in the form of a life annuity:

            (1)   Qualified Joint and Survivor Annuity. If benefits in the form
                  of a life annuity become payable to a married Participant who:

                  (i)   Begins to receive payments under the Plan on or after
                        his Normal Retirement Age; or

                  (ii)  Dies on or after his Normal Retirement Age while still
                        working for the Employer; or

                  (iii) Begins to receive payments on or after the Qualified
                        Early Retirement Age; or

                  (iv)  Separates from service on or after attaining his Normal
                        Retirement Age (or the Qualified Early Retirement Age)
                        and after satisfying the eligibility requirements for
                        the payment of benefits under the Plan and thereafter
                        dies before beginning to receive such benefits;

                                       66
<PAGE>

                  then such benefits shall be received under this Plan in the
                  form of a Qualified Joint and Survivor Annuity, unless the
                  Participant, with the consent of his or her Spouse, has
                  elected otherwise during the election period which shall begin
                  at least six (6) months before the Participant attains the
                  Qualified Early Retirement Age (or the date the Participant
                  begins participation in the Plan, if later) and end not more
                  than ninety (90) days before the commencement of benefits. Any
                  election hereunder shall be in writing and may be changed by
                  the Participant, with the consent of his or her Spouse, at any
                  time during the election period.

            (2)   Election of Early Survivor Annuity. A Participant who is
                  employed after attaining the Qualified Early Retirement Age
                  will be given the opportunity to elect, during the election
                  period, to have a survivor annuity payable on death. If the
                  Participant elects the survivor annuity, payments under such
                  annuity must not be less than the payments which would have
                  been made to the Spouse under the Qualified Joint and Survivor
                  Annuity if the Participant had retired on the day before his
                  or her death. Any election under this provision will be in
                  writing and may be changed by the Participant with the consent
                  of his or her Spouse at any time. The election period begins
                  on the later of (1) the ninetieth (90) day before the
                  Participant attains the Qualified Early Retirement Age, or (2)
                  the date on which participation begins, and ends on the date
                  the Participant terminates employment.

                  Notwithstanding the availability of the elections set forth
                  above, in the event a Participant dies after attaining the
                  Qualified Early Retirement Age while still employed by the
                  Employer, but before reaching the Normal Retirement Date, the
                  Participant's account balance as of the date of death shall be
                  paid to the Participant's Spouse. If the Participant is not
                  married, such benefit shall be paid to the Participant's
                  designated Beneficiary or, if none, to the Participant's
                  estate.

            (3)   Definitions. For purpose of this Section  8.4, the following
                  words shall have the following meanings:

                  (i)   "Qualified Joint and Survivor Annuity" shall mean an
                        annuity for the life of the Participant with a survivor
                        annuity for the life of his Spouse as described in
                        Section 8.2.

                  (ii)  "Qualified Early Retirement Age" shall mean the latest
                         of:

                                       67
<PAGE>

                        (A)   the earliest date, under the Plan, on which the
                              Participant may elect to receive retirement
                              benefits;

                        (B)   the first day of the one hundred twentieth (120th)
                              month beginning before the Participant reaches his
                              Normal Retirement Age; or

                        (C)   the date on which the Participant begins
                              participation.

8.5   Required Payment of Benefits

      (a)   GENERAL RULE. Except as otherwise provided in Section 8.2, the
            requirements of this Section shall apply to any distribution of a
            Participant's account balance and will take precedence over any
            inconsistent provisions of the Plan. Unless otherwise specified, the
            provisions of this Section shall apply to calendar years beginning
            after December 31, 1984.

            All distributions required under this Section 8.5 shall be
            determined and made in accordance with the Income Tax Regulations
            under section 401(a)(9) of the Code, including the minimum
            distribution incidental benefit requirement of section 1.401(a)(9)-2
            of the regulations.

      (b)   LIMITS ON DISTRIBUTION PERIODS. Distributions, if not made in a
            single-sum, may only be made over one of the following periods (or a
            combination thereof): (1) the life of the Participant; (2) the life
            of the Participant and a Designated Beneficiary; (3) a period
            certain not extending beyond the life expectancy of the Participant;
            or (4) a period certain not extending beyond the joint and last
            survivor expectancy of the Participant and a Designated Beneficiary.

            Any annuity contract purchased and distributed to a Participant or
            his Beneficiary shall comply with the requirements of this Plan, and
            shall be made and endorsed as nontransferable.

      (c)   MINIMUM AMOUNTS TO BE DISTRIBUTED. If the Participant's entire
            interest is to be distributed in other than a single sum, the
            following minimum distribution rules shall apply on or after the
            Required Beginning Date:

            (i)   If a Participant's benefit is to be distributed over (1) a
                  period not extending beyond the life expectancy of the
                  Participant or the joint life and last survivor expectancy of
                  the Participant and the Participant's Designated

                                       68

<PAGE>

                  Beneficiary or (2) a period not extending beyond the life
                  expectancy of the Designated Beneficiary, the amount required
                  to be distributed for each calendar year, beginning with
                  distributions for the first distribution calendar year, must
                  at least equal the quotient obtained by dividing the
                  Participant's benefit by the applicable life expectancy.

            (ii)  For calendar years beginning before January 1, 1989, if the
                  Participant's spouse is not the designated Beneficiary, the
                  method of distribution selected must assure that at least
                  fifty percent (50%) of the present value of the amount
                  available for distribution is paid within the life expectancy
                  of the Participant.

            (iii) For calendar years beginning after December 31, 1988, the
                  amount to be distributed each year, beginning with
                  distributions for the first distribution calendar year shall
                  not be less than the quotient obtained by dividing the
                  Participant's benefit by the lesser of (1) the applicable life
                  expectancy or (2) if the Participant's spouse is not the
                  Designated Beneficiary, the applicable divisor determined from
                  the table set forth in Q&A-4 of section 1.401 (a)(9)-2 of the
                  Income Tax Regulations. Distributions after the death of the
                  Participant shall be distributed using the applicable life
                  expectancy in paragraph (c)(i) above as the relevant divisor
                  without regard to section 1.401 (a)(9)-2 of the regulations.

            (iv)  The minimum distribution required for the Participant's first
                  distribution calendar year must be made on or before the
                  Participant's Required Beginning Date. The minimum
                  distribution for other calendar years, including the minimum
                  distribution for the distribution calendar year in which the
                  Employee's Required Beginning Date occurs, must be made on or
                  before December 31 of that distribution calendar year.

      (d)   COMMENCEMENT OF DEATH BENEFITS. Upon the death of the Participant,
            the following distribution provisions shall take effect:

            (i)   If the Participant dies after distribution of his or her
                  interest has commenced, the remaining portion of such interest
                  will continue to be distributed at least as rapidly as under
                  the method of distribution being used prior to the
                  Participant's death. Upon the death of the Participant's
                  Beneficiary, any undistributed interest shall be paid to the
                  legal representatives of such Beneficiary's estate.

            (ii)  If the Participant dies before distribution of his or her
                  interest commences,

                                       69
<PAGE>

                  the Participant's entire interest will be distributed by
                  December 31 of the calendar year in which falls the fifth
                  anniversary of the Participant's death except to the extent
                  that an election is made to receive distributions in
                  accordance with (1) or (2) below:

                  (1)   If any portion of the Participant's interest is payable
                        to a Designated Beneficiary, distributions may be made
                        in substantially equal installments over the life or
                        over a period certain not greater than the life
                        expectancy of the Designated Beneficiary commencing on
                        or before December 31 of the calendar year immediately
                        following the calendar year in which the Participant
                        died.

                  (2)   If the Designated Beneficiary is the Participant's
                        surviving spouse, the date distributions are required to
                        begin in accordance with (1) above shall not be earlier
                        than the later of (A) December 31 of the calendar year
                        immediately following the calendar year in which the
                        Participant died and (B) December 31 of the calendar
                        year in which the Participant would have attained age
                        seventy and one-half (70 1/2).

            If the Participant has not made an election pursuant to this Section
            8.5(d)(ii) by the time of his or her death, the Participant's
            Designated Beneficiary must elect the method of distribution no
            later than the earlier of (1) December 31 of the calendar year in
            which distributions would be required to begin under this Section,
            or (2) December 31 of the calendar year which contains the fifth
            anniversary of the date of death of the Participant. If the
            Participant has no Designated Beneficiary, or if the Designated
            Beneficiary does not elect a method of distribution, distribution of
            the Participant's entire interest must be completed by December 31
            of the calendar year containing the fifth anniversary of the
            Participant's death.

            (iii) For purposes of Section 8.5(d)(ii) above, if the surviving
                  spouse dies after the Participant, but before payments to such
                  spouse begin, the provisions of Section 8.5(d)(ii), with the
                  exception of subparagraph (2) thereof, shall be applied as if
                  the surviving spouse were the Participant.

            (iv)  For purposes of this Section 8.5(d), any amount paid to a
                  child of the Participant will be treated as if it had been
                  paid to the Surviving Spouse if the amount becomes payable to
                  the Surviving Spouse when the child reaches the age of
                  majority.

                                       70
<PAGE>

            (v)   For purposes of this Section 8.5(d), distribution of a
                  Participant's interest is considered to begin on the
                  Participant's Required Beginning Date (or, if Section
                  8.5(d)(iii) above is applicable, the date distribution is
                  required to begin to the surviving spouse pursuant to Section
                  8.5(d)(ii) above). If distribution in the form of an annuity
                  irrevocably commences to the Participant before the Required
                  Beginning Date, the date distribution is considered to begin
                  is the date distribution actually commences.

      (e)   DEFINITIONS. For purposes of this Section 8.5, the following
            terms shall have the following meanings:

            (i)   Designated Beneficiary. The individual who is designated as
                  the Beneficiary under the Plan in accordance with section
                  401(a)(9) of the Code and the regulations thereunder.

            (ii)  Distribution calendar year. A calendar year for which a
                  minimum distribution is required. For distributions beginning
                  before the Participant's death, the first distribution
                  calendar year is the calendar year immediately preceding the
                  calendar year which contains the Participant's Required
                  Beginning Date. For distributions beginning after the
                  Participant's death, the first distribution calendar year is
                  the calendar year in which distributions are required to begin
                  pursuant to Section 8.5(d) above.

            (iii) Life expectancy. The life expectancy (or joint and last
                  survivor expectancy) calculated using the attained age of the
                  Participant (or Designated Beneficiary) as of the
                  Participant's (or Designated Beneficiary's) birthday in the
                  applicable calendar year. The applicable calendar year shall
                  be the first distribution calendar year. If annuity payments
                  commerce before the required beginning date, the applicable
                  calendar year is the year such payments commence. Life
                  expectancy and joint and last survivor expectancy are computed
                  by use of the expected return multiples in Tables V and VI of
                  section 1.72-9 of the Income Tax Regulations.

                  Unless otherwise elected by the Participant (or spouse, in the
                  case of distributions described in Section 8.5(d)(ii)(2)
                  above) by the time distributions are required to begin, life
                  expectancies shall be recalculated annually. Such election
                  shall be irrevocable as to the Participant (or spouse) and
                  shall apply to all subsequent years. The life expectancy of a
                  nonspouse Beneficiary may not be recalculated.

                                       71
<PAGE>

            (iv)  Participant's benefit.

                  (A)   The account balance as of the last valuation date in the
                        calendar year immediately preceding the distribution
                        calendar year (valuation calendar year) increased by the
                        amount of any contributions or forfeitures allocated to
                        the account balance as of dates in the valuation
                        calendar year after the valuation date and decreased by
                        distributions made in the valuation calendar year after
                        the valuation date.

                  (B)   Exception for second distribution calendar year. For
                        purposes of paragraph (A) above, if any portion of the
                        minimum distribution for the first distribution calendar
                        year is made in the second distribution calendar year on
                        or before the Required Beginning Date, the amount of the
                        minimum distribution made in the second distribution
                        calendar year shall be treated as if it had been made in
                        the immediately preceding distribution calendar year.

            (v)   Required Beginning Date.

                  (A)   General rule. The Required Beginning Date of a
                        Participant is the first day of April of the calendar
                        year following the calendar year in which the
                        Participant attains age seventy and one-half (70 1/2).

                  (B)   Transitional rules. The Required Beginning Date of a
                        Participant who attains age seventy and one-half (70
                        1/2) before January 1, 1988, shall BE determined in
                        accordance with (1) or (2) below:

                        (1)   Non-Five percent owners. The Required Beginning
                              Date of a Participant who is not a five percent
                              (5%) owner is the first day of April of the
                              calendar year following the calendar year in which
                              the later of retirement or attainment of age of
                              seventy and one-half (70 1/2) occurs.

                        (2)   Five percent owners. The required beginning date
                              of a Participant who is a five percent (5%) owner
                              during any year beginning after December 31, 1979,
                              is the first day of April following the later of:

                              (i)   the calendar year in which the Participant
                                    attains

                                       72
<PAGE>

                                    age seventy and one-half (70 1/2), or

                              (ii)  the earlier of the calendar year with or
                                    within which ends the plan year in which the
                                    Participant becomes a five percent (5%)
                                    owner, or the calendar year in which the
                                    Participant retires.

                              The Required Beginning Date of a Participant who
                              is not a five percent (5%) owner who attains age
                              seventy and one-half (70 1/2) during 1988 and who
                              has not retired as of January 1, 1989, is April 1,
                              1990.

                  (C)   Five percent owner. A Participant is treated as a five
                        percent (5%) owner for purposes of this Section if such
                        Participant is a five percent (5%) owner as defined in
                        section 416(i) of the Code but without regard to whether
                        the Plan is top-heavy) at any time during the Plan Year
                        ending with or within the calendar year in which such
                        owner attains age sixty-six and one-half (66 1/2) or aNY
                        subsequent Plan Year.

                  (D)   Once distributions have begun to a five percent (5%)
                        owner under this Section, they must continue to be
                        distributed, even if the Participant ceases to be a five
                        percent (5%) owner in a subsequent year.

      (f)   TRANSITIONAL RULE. Notwithstanding the other requirements of this
            Section and subject to the requirements of Section 8.2, distribution
            on behalf of any Employee, including a five percent (5%) owner, may
            be made in accordance with all of the following requirements
            (regardless of when such distribution commences):

            (i)   The distribution by the trust is one which would not have
                  disqualified such trust under section 401(a)(9) of the Code as
                  in effect prior to amendment by the Deficit Reduction Act of
                  1984.

            (ii)  The distribution is in accordance with a method of
                  distribution designated by the Employee whose interest in the
                  trust is being distributed or, if the Employee is deceased, by
                  a Beneficiary of such Employee.

            (iii) Such designation was in writing, was signed by the Employee or
                  the Beneficiary, and was made before January 1, 1984.

                                       73
<PAGE>

            (iv)  The Employee had accrued a benefit under the Plan as of
                  December 31, 1983.

            (v)   The method of distribution designated by the Employee or the
                  Beneficiary specifies the time at which distribution will
                  commence, the period over which distributions will be made,
                  and in the case of any distribution upon the Employee's death,
                  the Beneficiaries of the Employee listed in order of priority.

      A distribution upon death will not be covered by this transitional rule
      unless the information in the designation contains the required
      information described above with respect to the distributions to be made
      upon the death of the Employee.

      For any distribution which commences before January 1, 1984, but continues
      after December 31, 1983, the Employee, or the Beneficiary, to who such
      distribution is being made, will be presumed to have designated the method
      of distribution under which the distribution is being made if the method
      of distribution was specified in writing and the distribution satisfies
      the requirements in Subsections (i) through (v) above.

      If a designation is revoked, any subsequent distribution must satisfy the
      requirements of section 401(a)(9) of the Code and the regulations
      thereunder. If a designation is revoked subsequent to the date
      distributions are required to begin, the trust must distribute by the end
      of the calendar year following the calendar year in which the revocation
      occurs the total amount not yet distributed which would have been required
      to have been distributed to satisfy section 401(a)(9) of the Code and the
      regulations thereunder, but for the election under section 242(b)(2) of
      Pub. L. No. 97-248. For calendar years beginning after December 31, 1988,
      such distributions must meet the minimum distribution incidental benefit
      requirements in section 1.401(a)(9)-2 of the Income Tax Regulations. Any
      changes in the designation will be considered to be a revocation of the
      designation. However, the mere substitution or addition of another
      Beneficiary (one not named in the designation) under the designation will
      not be considered to be a revocation of the designation, so long as such
      substitution or addition does not alter the period over which
      distributions are to be made under the designation, directly or indirectly
      (for example, by altering the relevant measuring life). The rules of Q&A
      J-2 and J-3 of Income Tax Regulations section 1.401(a)(9)-1 shall apply to
      rollovers and transfers from one plan to another.

8.6   Available Forms of Distribution

      (a)   If pursuant to Section 8.3, the Plan is a Profit Sharing Plan exempt
            from the

                                       74
<PAGE>

            Automatic Annuity Rules of Section 8.2, the normal form of
            distribution shall be a lump sum distribution. Unless specified
            otherwise in the Adoption Agreement, in lieu of the lump sum
            distribution, a Participant or Beneficiary may elect to receive
            installment payments payable monthly, quarterly, semi-annually or
            annually.

      (b)   If the Plan is subject to the Automatic Annuity Rules of Section
            8.2, the normal form of distribution shall be the applicable form of
            Automatic Annuity under Section 8.2. In lieu of the Automatic
            Annuity, a Participant or Beneficiary may elect a lump sum
            distribution or such other available forms of distribution as are
            set forth below or as are specified in the Adoption Agreement. Any
            such election by a Participant must be accompanied by the written
            consent of his spouse (consistent with the requirements for a
            Qualified Election under Section 8.2).

            The available forms of distribution shall be:

            (i)   a joint and 100% survivor annuity contract purchased from an
                  insurance company selected by the Committee.

            (ii)  a single life annuity contract purchased from an insurance
                  company selected by the Committee.

            (iii) a single life annuity contract, with 10 years guaranteed,
                  purchased from an insurance company selected by the Committee.

            (iv)  installments payable monthly, quarterly, semi-annually or
                  annually.

8.7   Certain Distributions

      In the event a distribution of an account balance made to or on behalf of
      a Participant prior to the attainment of age fifty-nine and one-half (59
      1/2) would be subject to the ten percent (10%) penalTY tax set forth in
      section 72(t) or 72(m)(5) of the Code, the Participant may, within sixty
      (60) days of the distribution date, request that the distribution be
      transferred to another qualified retirement plan or an Individual
      Retirement Account as a rollover contribution if the distribution
      satisfies the requirements of section 402(a)(5) of the Code.

8.8   Forfeitures

      Any balance in the Regular Account, Employer Discretionary Contribution
      Account or in the Employer Matching Contribution Account, if any, of a
      Participant who is separated

                                       75
<PAGE>

      from service, to which he is not entitled under the foregoing provisions,
      shall be forfeited and applied as provided in Sections 3.2 and 4.2 of this
      Plan, and Section X(E) of the Dreyfus Standardized/Paired Prototype Target
      Benefit Plan and Trust Adoption Agreement.

                                   ARTICLE IX.
                                 DEATH BENEFITS

9.1   Payment to Beneficiary

      (a)   Subject to the provisions of Article VIII, upon the death of a
            Participant, such Participant's account balance shall be paid to his
            designated Beneficiary or if no such Beneficiary is designated or
            survives the Participant, to the legal representative of such
            Participant's estate. Such payment shall commence as soon as
            practicable after the Participant's death and after the Trustee is
            given such documentation as may be required under the provisions of
            the Trust Agreement or Custodial Agreement.

      (b)   Subject to the provisions of the Custodial Agreement if the Plan is
            an Easy Retirement Plan, the Committee may prescribe the manner in
            which a Beneficiary is to be designated in writing and the Custodial
            Agreement, may prescribe the manner in which such designations shall
            be filed. Notwithstanding the foregoing, any designation (or change
            of designation) of a Beneficiary must be consented to by the
            Participant's Spouse pursuant to a Qualified Election under Section
            8.2, if such Beneficiary is not the Participant's Spouse.

9.2   Method of Payment

      Subject to the provisions of Article VIII, death benefits may be paid in
      any mode of benefit payment provided for in this Plan as elected by the
      Participant or Beneficiary, except in the event of the death of the
      Participant after payments have commenced under an annuity contract, by
      the Beneficiary.

                                   ARTICLE X.
                      PARTICIPANT CONTRIBUTIONS; ROLLOVERS

10.1  Voluntary Contributions

                                       76
<PAGE>

      (a)   Effective for Plan Years beginning January 1, 1987, non-deductible
            Voluntary Contributions shall not be permitted under this Plan. A
            separate Account shall be maintained for Voluntary Contributions
            made prior to such time. Such Account shall be nonforfeitable at all
            times.

      (b)   A Participant may make withdrawals from the Voluntary Account at
            such time as the Committee shall designate, but not more than
            quarterly during a Plan Year provided that no single withdrawal
            shall be less than the total amount available for withdrawal under
            the other limitations of this Section 10.1 or five hundred dollars
            ($500), whichever is less. Notwithstanding the preceding sentence,
            if the Plan is an Easy Retirement Plan, a Participant may make such
            a withdrawal at any time.

      (c)   If the Plan is subject to the Automatic Annuity rules of Section
            8.2, the written consent of the Participant's spouse (consistent
            with the requirements for a Qualified Election under Section 8.2)
            must be obtained with respect to any withdrawal.

      (d)   No forfeitures of amounts allocated to Participants from Employer
            contributions and earnings thereon, shall occur solely as a result
            of a Participant's withdrawal of voluntary contributions.

      (e)   Voluntary Contributions for Plan years beginning after December 31,
            1986 shall be subject to the Contribution Percentage tests and the
            rules applicable to Excess Aggregate Contributions set forth in
            Section 4.7.

10.2  Voluntary Tax-Deductible Contributions

      (a)   Voluntary  Tax-Deductible  Contributions  (within the meaning of
            section  72(o)(5)(A)  of the Code) shall not be permitted  under
            this  Plan  for  taxable  years  beginning  after  December  31,
            1986.  A  separate  Voluntary  Tax-Deductible  Account  shall be
            established  for  such  contributions  made  for  taxable  years
            beginning on or before  December 31,  1986.  Such Account  shall
            be  nonforfeitable  at  all  times.  However,  no  part  of  the
            Voluntary  Tax-Deductible  Account will be used to purchase life
            insurance or available for loans under Article XII.

      (b)   The Participant may withdraw any part of the Voluntary
            Tax-Deductible Account by making written application to the
            Committee. If the Plan is subject to the Automatic Annuity Rules of
            Section 8.2, the written consent of the Participant's Spouse
            (consistent with the requirements of a Qualified Election under
            Section 8.2) must be obtained to any withdrawal made after the first
            day of the first Plan

                                       77
<PAGE>

            Year beginning on or after January 1, 1989.

10.3  Transfers From Other Trusts

      Unless specified otherwise in the Adoption Agreement, the Committee may,
      in its discretion, direct the Trustee to accept a rollover contribution
      described in sections 401(a)(31), 402(a)(5), 403(a)(4) or 408(d)(3)(A)(ii)
      of the Code or a direct transfer of funds from a qualified retirement
      plan, provided that, in the opinion of counsel for the Employer, the
      transfer will not jeopardize the tax exempt status of the Plan or create
      adverse tax consequences to the Employer. The Committee shall exercise
      such discretion in a uniform and nondiscriminatory manner. A transfer or
      rollover contribution may be made on behalf of an Employee eligible to
      participate in the Plan who has not met the age and service requirements,
      if any, for participation. Such an Employee shall become a Participant on
      the date the Trustee accepts the rollover contribution or transfer for all
      purposes, except that no employer or employee contributions shall be made
      by or on behalf of such Employee and such Employee shall not share in Plan
      forfeitures until he has completed the age and service requirements for
      participation and become a Participant. A rollover contribution or
      transfer shall be maintained in a Participant's Rollover Account and
      Transfer Account, respectively. Notwithstanding the preceding sentence,
      amounts attributable to voluntary deductible employee contributions shall
      be maintained in a Participant's Voluntary Tax-Deductible Account.

      A Participant may take withdrawals from the Rollover Account at such time
      as the Committee shall designate, but not more than quarterly during a
      Plan Year, provided that no single withdrawal shall be less than the total
      amount available for withdrawal or five hundred dollars ($500) whichever
      is less. If the Plan is subject to the Automatic Annuity Rules of Section
      8.2 and the Participant is married, the request for withdrawal must be
      consented to in writing by the Participant's spouse. Notwithstanding the
      preceding sentence, if the Plan is an Easy Retirement Plan, a Participant
      may make such a withdrawal at any time.

      Unless indicated otherwise in the Adoption Agreement, distributions shall
      be made from the Transfer Account upon meeting the requirements set forth
      under Articles VIII and IX of the Plan. If the Plan is subject to the
      Automatic Annuity Rules of Section 8.2 and the Participant is married, the
      request for distribution must be consented to in writing by the
      Participant's spouse.

      The written consent of the Participant's spouse (consistent with the
      requirements for a Qualified Election under Section 8.2) must be obtained
      with respect to any withdrawal.

                                       78
<PAGE>

                                   ARTICLE XI.
                               INSURANCE POLICIES

11.1  Policy Procurement

      The Employer may elect in the Adoption Agreement to have the provisions of
      this Article XI apply. If so authorized, the Committee may elect to
      provide all Active Participants with the option of having life insurance
      or annuity contracts (hereinafter referred to as "policy") purchased on
      their behalf from a legal reserve life insurance company.

11.2  Rules and Regulations

      The following rules shall be applicable to the acquisition, handling and
      disposition of any policy:

      (a)   The basic options, cash surrender values and other material features
            of all policies shall be as nearly uniform as possible. No endowment
            policies shall be purchased.

      (b)   The Trustee shall be designated as the sole owner of any policy
            purchased hereunder. However, all benefits, rights, privileges and
            options under such policy and any dividends or credits earned in
            insurance contracts will be allocated to the Participant's account
            balance derived from Employer contributions for whose benefit the
            contract is held. Notwithstanding any other provision of the Plan,
            in computing the amount of the vested interest of any Participant,
            the cash surrender value of any policy shall be included in the
            Participant's account balance. The applicable vested interest
            percentage shall be applied to this sum. The product of this
            computation shall then constitute the Participant's vested interest.

      (c)   Payments made to any insurance company with respect to any such
            policy shall constitute an investment of the funds credited to the
            account balance of the Participant on whose behalf it was purchased
            and his account balance derived from Employer contributions shall
            accordingly be reduced by any such payments.

      (d)   If the policy or policies purchased are ordinary life insurance, the
            aggregate premiums payable with respect to such policy or policies
            may not equal or exceed fifty percent (50%) of the aggregate
            Employer contributions and forfeitures credited to such
            Participant's account balance, exclusive of investment earnings. A
            Participant may upon consultation with the Committee and with its
            consent

                                       79
<PAGE>

            modify or terminate this election at any time. If the policy
            purchased is term or universal life insurance, the phrase
            "twenty-five percent (25%)" shall be substituted for the phrase
            "fifty percent (50%)." If the policy or policies purchased are
            ordinary life insurance and term insurance, the sum of one-half
            (1/2) thE ordinary life premiums and the term premiums may not
            exceed twenty-five percent (25%) of the aggregate Employer
            contributions and forfeitures credited to such Participant's account
            balance, exclusive of investment earnings. For purposes of these
            incidental insurance provisions, ordinary life insurance contracts
            are contracts with both nondecreasing death benefits and
            nonincreasing premiums.

      (e)   If a Participant is not insurable as a standard risk but may
            nevertheless be eligible for insurance coverage at an extra rating
            because of excess mortality hazards, the Committee, in its
            discretion, may agree or not agree to obtain insurance. The
            insurance to be purchased for a substandard life shall not exceed
            the face amount that could have been purchased by the premium that
            would have been available for the purchase of insurance had the
            Participant not been rated a substandard life. In determining
            whether or not to purchase insurance, the Committee shall not
            discriminate and shall accord uniform treatment to all of its
            Participants in a similar situation.

11.3  Transfer of Policies

      (a)   Upon the Participant's retirement, the Trustee shall, upon
            instructions from the Committee, either transfer and deliver to the
            Participant any policy held on his behalf (with such endorsements as
            the Committee may direct), convert such policy to an annuity, or
            surrender such policy, in which case the cash proceeds thereof shall
            be included as part of the account balance of such Participant and
            distributed accordingly.

      (b)   The Committee shall offer to a vested Participant any policy held in
            his behalf at a price equal to the total cash surrender value of
            such policy. If the Participant elects to purchase such policy, the
            Trustee shall, upon instructions from the Committee, transfer
            ownership of the policy to such Participant, endorsed so as to vest
            in the transferee all right, title and interest thereto, free and
            clear of the Trust. If the Participant declines to purchase such
            policy, the Trustee shall, upon instructions from the Committee,
            liquidate the policy for its cash surrender value; transfer the
            policy to the Participant as a distribution of benefits; or if the
            Participant has terminated employment with the Employer other than
            by reason of retirement, death or disability, place the policy on a
            paid-up basis. The Committee may direct the Trustee to designate
            itself, if not so designated, as Beneficiary under such policy for
            the period prior to the date on which it is liquidated.

                                       80
<PAGE>

      (c)   Subject to the Qualified Joint and Survivor Annuity Rules of Section
            8.2, the contracts on a Participant's life will be converted to cash
            or an annuity or distributed to the Participant upon commencement of
            benefits.

11.4  Payment Upon Death

      Subject to the Qualified Pre-Retirement Survivor Annuity Rules of Section
      8.2, all death benefits payable under any policy held on behalf of a
      deceased Participant shall be paid to his Beneficiary. Such benefits may,
      as the Committee shall determine, be paid either to the Trust Fund, in
      which case the cash proceeds thereof shall be included as part of vested
      account balance of such Participant and distributed accordingly, or
      directly by the insurance company to the Beneficiary pursuant to the
      settlement option in effect at the time of the Participant's death. In the
      absence of such election, the benefits may be paid in a lump sum or under
      any other settlement option contained in such policy, as determined by the
      Committee.

11.5  Plan Provisions Control

      In the event of any conflict between the terms of this Plan and the terms
      of any policy issued hereunder, the Plan provisions shall control.

                                  ARTICLE XII.
                                      LOANS

12.1  Loans to Participants

      If permitted under the Adoption Agreement, the Committee, in its
      discretion, may authorize and direct the Trustee to grant loans to
      Participants and Beneficiaries in accordance with written rules
      established by the Committee. Such loans:

      (a)   Shall not exceed the lesser of:

            (1)   fifty thousand dollars ($50,000) reduced by the excess, if
                  any, of (i) the highest outstanding balance of loans from the
                  Plan during the one (1) year period ending on the day before
                  the date on which such loan was made, over (ii) the
                  outstanding balance of loans from the Plan on the date such
                  loan was made, or

                                       81
<PAGE>

            (2)   one-half (1/2) of the Participant's or Beneficiary'S vested
                  interest under the Plan.

                  For this purpose, all plans of the Employer and Affiliated
                  Employers shall be treated as a single plan.

      (b)   Shall be evidenced by a promissory note, secured by an assignment of
            a portion of the Participant's or Beneficiary's vested interest in
            the Plan, other than a Voluntary Tax-Deductible Account (effective
            for loans granted or renewed after October 18, 1989, the portion of
            a Participant's or Beneficiary's vested interest which may be used
            as security for a loan hereunder shall not exceed fifty percent
            (50%));

      (c)   Shall bear a reasonable rate of interest as determined by the
            Committee to be a rate of interest commensurate with the interest
            rates charged by persons in the business of lending money for loans
            which would be made under similar circumstances; and

      (d)   Shall require substantially level repayments of principal and
            interest (with repayments made not less frequently than quarterly)
            over a period not to exceed five (5) years. Any such loan shall be
            nonrenewable except that if the loan was originally granted for a
            period of less than five (5) years, then the same may be renewed, in
            the discretion of the Committee, for a period of time equal to the
            difference between five (5) years and the duration of the original
            loan. The five (5) year repayment period shall not apply to any loan
            used to acquire any dwelling unit which within a reasonable period
            of time is to be used (to be determined at the time the loan is
            made) as the principal residence of the Participant.

      If the Plan is subject to the Automatic Annuity Rules of Section 8.2, the
      written consent of the Participant's spouse (consistent with the
      requirements for a Qualified Election under Section 8.2) must be obtained
      within the ninety (90) day period ending on the date the account balance
      is used as security for the loan. Such consent shall thereafter be binding
      with respect to the consenting spouse or any subsequent spouse. However, a
      new consent shall be required if the account balance is used for
      renegotiation, extension, renewal or other revision of the loan.

      If Participant-directed investments have been elected in the Adoption
      Agreement, loans shall be treated as an investment of one or more of the
      borrower's separate Accounts, in accordance with rules established by the
      Committee. Repayments of principal and interest shall be allocated solely
      to the Account(s) of the borrower from which such loan

                                       82
<PAGE>

      was made, and any loss caused by non-payment or default shall be charged
      solely to such Account(s). Otherwise, all loans hereunder shall be treated
      as an investment of the Fund.

12.2  Provisions to be Applied in a Uniform and Nondiscriminatory Manner

      In deciding whether or not to grant any request for a loan hereunder, the
      Committee shall be guided by procedures and criteria designed to assure
      that the loans shall be made available to all Participants and
      Beneficiaries on a reasonably equivalent basis and shall not be available
      to Highly Compensated Employees in an amount greater than the amount made
      available to other Employees.

12.3  Satisfaction of Loan

      In the event of default, foreclosure on the note and attachment of the
      security will not occur until a distributable event occurs under the terms
      of the Plan.

      If spousal consent (consistent with the requirements for a Qualified
      Election under Section 8.2) has been obtained, then, notwithstanding any
      other provision of the Plan, the portion of the Participant's vested
      account balance used as security for a loan shall be taken into account
      for purposes of determining the amount of the account balance payable at
      the time of death or distribution, but only if the reduction is used as
      repayment of the loan. If less than one hundred percent (100%) of the
      Participant's vested account balance (determined without regard to the
      preceding sentence) is payable to the surviving spouse, then the account
      balance shall be adjusted by first reducing the vested account balance by
      the amount of the security used as repayment of the loan, and then
      determining the benefit payable to the surviving spouse.

12.4  Loans to Owner-Employees or Shareholder-Employees

      No loan shall be granted to an Owner-Employee or Shareholder-Employee
      unless an exemption has been obtained for such loan from the Secretary of
      Labor under Section 408 of the Act (and such loan is exempt from the
      excise tax imposed under Section 4975 of the Code).

                                       83
<PAGE>

                                  ARTICLE XIII.
                              TOP-HEAVY PROVISIONS

As specified in the Adoption Agreement, the provisions of this Article XIII will
either (1) always supersede any conflicting provisions in the Plan or (2) only
supersede such conflicting provisions in any Plan Year beginning after 1983,
during which the Plan is or becomes Top-Heavy.

13.1  Definitions

      For purposes of this Article and Article XVII, the following words shall
      have the following meanings:

      (a)   "Compensation" shall mean Compensation as defined in Article I as
            limited by section 401(a)(17) of the Code.

      (b)   "Determination Date" shall mean (1) the last day of the preceding
            Plan Year, or (2) in the case of the first Plan Year of any Plan,
            the last day of such Plan Year.

      (c)   "Employer" shall mean the Employer and all Affiliated Employers.

      (d)   "Key Employee" shall mean any Employee or former Employee (and the
            Beneficiaries of such Employee) who at any time during the Plan Year
            containing the Determination Date and the four (4) preceding Plan
            Years was:

            (1)   An officer of the Employer if such individual's annual
                  compensation exceeds fifty percent (50%) of the dollar
                  limitation under section 415(b)(1)(A) of the Code (provided
                  that the number of employees treated as officers shall be no
                  more than fifty (50) or, if fewer, the greater of three (3)
                  employees or ten percent (10%) of all employees);

            (2)   An owner (or considered an owner under section 318 of the
                  Code) of at least a one-half of one percent (.5%) interest and
                  one of the ten (10) largest interests in the Employer if such
                  individual's annual compensation exceeds one hundred percent
                  (100%) of the dollar limitation under section 415(c)(1)(A) of
                  the Code;

            (3)   A five percent (5%) owner of the Employer; or

            (4)   A one percent (1%) owner of the Employer who has an annual
                  compensation of more than one hundred fifty thousand dollars
                  ($150,000).

                                       84

<PAGE>

            For this purpose, annual compensation means compensation as defined
            in section 415(c)(3) of the Code, but including amounts excludible
            from the Employee's gross income by reason of sections 125,
            402(a)(8), 402(h) or 403(b) of the Code. The determination of who is
            a Key Employee will be made in accordance with section 416(i)(1) of
            the Code and the regulations thereunder.

      (d)   "Non-Key  Employee" shall mean any Employee who is not a Key
            Employee.

      (e)   "Permissive Aggregation Group" shall mean the Required Aggregation
            Group of plans plus any other plan or plans of the Employer which,
            when considered as a group with the Required Aggregation Group,
            would continue to satisfy the requirements of sections 401(a)(4) and
            410 of the Code.

      (f)   "Present Value" shall be based on the interest and mortality table
            specified in the Employer's qualified defined benefit plan for
            Top-Heavy purposes, or if such assumptions are not specified in the
            Employer's qualified defined benefit plan, Present Value shall be
            based on the assumptions specified in the Adoption Agreement.

      (g)   "Required Aggregation Group" shall mean (1) each qualified plan of
            the Employer in which at least one Key Employee participates or
            participated at any time during the determination period (regardless
            of whether the Plan has terminated), and (2) any other qualified
            plan of the Employer which enables a plan described in (1) to meet
            the requirements of Sections 401(a)(4) or 410 of the Code.

      (h)   "Super Top-Heavy Plan": For any Plan Year after 1983, this Plan is
            Super Top-Heavy if the Top-Heavy Ratio for the Plan, the Required
            Aggregation Group or the Permissive Aggregation Group, as
            applicable, exceeds ninety percent (90%).

      (i)   "Top-Heavy":  For any  Plan  Year  beginning  after  1983,  this
            Plan is Top-Heavy if any of the following conditions exist:

            (1)   If the Top-Heavy Ratio for this Plan exceeds sixty percent
                  (60%) and this Plan is not part of any Required Aggregation
                  Group or Permissive Aggregation Group of plans.

            (2)   If this Plan is a part of a Required Aggregation Group of
                  plans, but not part of a Permissive Aggregation Group and the
                  Top-Heavy Ratio for the group of plans exceeds sixty percent
                  (60%).

                                       85
<PAGE>

            (3)   If this Plan is a part of a Required Aggregation Group and
                  part of a Permissive Aggregation Group of plans and the
                  Top-Heavy Ratio for the Permissive Aggregation Group exceeds
                  sixty percent (60%).

      (j)   "Top-Heavy Ratio":

            (1)   If the Employer maintains one or more defined contribution
                  plans (including any Simplified Employee Pension Plan) and the
                  Employer has not maintained any defined benefit plan which
                  during the five (5) year period ending on the Determination
                  Date has or has had accrued benefits, the Top-Heavy Ratio for
                  this Plan alone or for the Required or Permissive Aggregation
                  Group as appropriate is a fraction, the numerator of which is
                  the sum of the account balances of all Key Employees as of the
                  Determination Date (including any part of any account balance
                  distributed in the five (5) year period ending on the
                  Determination Date, and the denominator of which is the sum of
                  all account balances (including any part of any account
                  balance distributed in the five (5) year period ending on the
                  Determination Date, both computed in accordance with section
                  416 of the Code and the regulations thereunder. Both the
                  numerator and denominator of the Top-Heavy Ratio are increased
                  to reflect any contribution not actually made as of the
                  Determination Date, but which is required to be taken into
                  account on that date under section 416 of the Code and the
                  regulations thereunder.

            (2)   If the Employer maintains one or more defined contribution
                  plans (including any Simplified Employee Pension Plan) and the
                  Employer maintains or has maintained one or more defined
                  benefit plans which during the five (5) year period ending on
                  the Determination Date has or has had any accrued benefits,
                  the Top-Heavy Ratio for any Required or Permissive Aggregation
                  Group as appropriate is a fraction, the numerator of which is
                  the sum of account balances under the aggregated defined
                  contribution plan or plans for all Key Employees determined in
                  accordance with (d) above, and the Present Value of accrued
                  benefits under the aggregated defined benefit plan or plans
                  for all employees as of the Determination Date, and the
                  denominator of which is the sum of the account balances under
                  the aggregated defined contribution plan or plans for all
                  participants, determined in accordance with (j)(1) above, and
                  the Present Value of accrued benefits under the defined
                  benefit plan or plans for all Participants as of the
                  Determination Date, all determined in accordance with section
                  416 of the Code and the regulations thereunder.

                                       86
<PAGE>

                  The accrued benefits under a defined benefit plan in both the
                  numerator and denominator of the Top-Heavy Ratio are increased
                  for any distribution of an accrued benefit made in the five
                  (5) year period ending on the Determination Date.

            (3)   For purposes of (1) and (2) above, the value of account
                  balances and the Present Value of accrued benefits will be
                  determined as of the most recent Valuation Date that falls
                  within or ends with the twelve (12) month period ending on the
                  Determination Date, except as provided in section 416 of the
                  Code and the regulations thereunder for the first and second
                  Plan years of a defined benefit plan. The account balances and
                  accrued benefits of a participant who is not a Key Employee
                  but who was a Key Employee in a prior year, or has not been
                  credited with at least one Hour of Service for any Employer
                  maintaining the Plan at any time during the five (5) year
                  period ending on the Determination Date will be disregarded.
                  The calculation of the Top-Heavy Ratio, and the extent to
                  which distributions, rollovers, and transfers are taken into
                  account will be made in accordance with section 416 of the
                  Code and the regulations thereunder. Deductible Employee
                  contributions will not be taken into account for purposes of
                  computing the Top-Heavy Ratio. When aggregating plans the
                  value of account balances and accrued benefits will be
                  calculated with references to the Determination Date that
                  falls within the same calendar year.

            (4)   Solely for the purpose of determining if the Plan, or any
                  other plan included in a Required Aggregation Group of which
                  this Plan is a part, is Top-Heavy (within the meaning of
                  section 416(g) of the Code) the accrued benefit of a Non-Key
                  Employee shall be determined under (a) the method, if any,
                  that uniformly applies for accrual purposes under all plans
                  maintained by the Employer, or (b) if there is no such method,
                  as if such benefit accrued not more rapidly than the slowest
                  accrual rate permitted under the fractional accrual rate of
                  section 411(b)(1)(C) of the Code.

      (k)   "Valuation Date" shall mean the last day of the Plan Year and is the
            day on which account balances and accrued benefits are valued for
            purposes of calculating the Top-Heavy Ratio.

13.2  Vesting Schedules

      For any Plan Year in which this Plan is Top-Heavy, one of the Top Heavy
      minimum vesting schedules as elected by the Employer in the Adoption
      Agreement will automatically apply to the Plan. The Top Heavy Minimum
      vesting schedule applies to all

                                       87
<PAGE>

      benefits within the meaning of section 411(a)(7) of the Code except those
      attributable to Employee contributions, including benefits accrued before
      the effective date of section 416 of the Code and benefits accrued before
      the Plan became Top-Heavy. Further, no reduction in a vested benefit may
      occur in the event the Plan's status as Top-Heavy changes for any Plan
      Year. However, this Section does not apply to the account balance of any
      Employee who does not have an Hour of Service after the Plan has initially
      become Top-Heavy and such Employee's account balance attributable to
      Employer contributions and forfeitures will be determined without regard
      to this Section.

13.3  Minimum Allocation

      (a)   Except as otherwise provided in (b), (c) and (d) below, when the
            Plan is Top-Heavy the Employer contributions and forfeitures
            allocated on behalf of any Participant who is a Non-Key Employee
            shall not be less than the lesser of three percent (3%) of such
            Participant's Compensation or, if neither the Employer nor an
            Affiliated Employer maintains a defined benefit plan which
            designates this Plan to satisfy sections 401(a)(4) or 410 of the
            Code, the largest percentage of Employer contributions and
            forfeitures, as a percentage of the Key Employee's Compensation, as
            limited by section 401(a)(17) of the Code allocated on behalf of any
            Key Employee for that year. For purposes of determining whether a
            Plan is Top-Heavy, Elective Deferrals are considered Employer
            contributions. However, neither Elective Deferrals nor Matching
            Contributions may be taken into account for purposes of satisfying
            the three percent (3%) minimum Top-Heavy contributions requirements
            for Plan Years beginning on or after January 1, 1989.

            The Minimum Allocation is determined without regard to a Social
            Security contribution. This Minimum Allocation shall be made even
            though, under other Plan provisions, the Participant would not
            otherwise be entitled to receive an allocation, or would have
            received a lesser allocation for the year because of (1) the
            Participant's failure to complete one thousand (1,000) Hours of
            Service (or any equivalent provided in the Plan), (2) the
            Participant's failure to make mandatory employee contributions, or
            (3) the Participant's Compensation is less than a stated amount.

      (b)   The provision in (a) above shall not apply to any Participant who
            was not employed by the Employer on the last day of the Plan Year.

      (c)   If the Employer maintains a qualified defined benefit plan and this
            Plan is Top-Heavy, but is not Super Top-Heavy, each Participant who
            is a Non-Key Employee and is not covered by the defined benefit plan
            shall receive the Minimum Allocation under (a) above, except that
            "four percent (4%) "shall be

                                       88
<PAGE>

            substituted for "three percent (3%)".

      (d)   The provision in (a) above shall not apply with respect to any
            Participant covered under any other qualified plan or plans of the
            Employer other than a paired plan of the Sponsor and the adopting
            Employer has elected in the Adoption Agreement that the minimum Top
            Heavy allocation or benefit will be met in the other plan or plans.

            If the Employer maintains a qualified defined benefit plan, other
            than Sponsor's paired defined benefit plan 02001, and the adopting
            Employer has elected in the Adoption Agreement to provide the Top
            Heavy minimum allocation or benefit under this Plan, then with
            respect to participants covered under both plans, "five percent
            (5%)" shall be substituted for "three percent (3%)" in (a) above if
            the Plan is Super Top Heavy and "seven and one-half percent (7
            1/2%)" shall be substituted fOR "three percent (3%)" in (a) above if
            the Plan is Top Heavy, but not Super Top Heavy.

      (e)   The Minimum Allocation required (to the extent nonforfeitable under
            section 416(b) of the Code) may not be forfeited under section
            411(a)(3)(B) or 411(a)(3)(D) of the Code.

13.4  Adjustment  to  Defined  Benefit  Fraction  and  Defined  Contribution
      Fraction under section 6.4.

      If the Plan is Super Top-Heavy, then "one-hundred percent (100%)" shall be
      substituted for "one hundred twenty-five percent (125%)" in the
      denominator of the Defined Benefit Fraction and the Defined Contribution
      Fraction under Section 6.4.

                                  ARTICLE XIV.
                                  THE COMMITTEE

14.1  Creation of a Committee

      The Employer may appoint a person or persons to act as the Committee and
      serve at its pleasure. If no such Committee is appointed, the Employer
      shall act as the Committee. The Employer shall notify the Trustee of the
      appointment of the original members of the Committee and of each change in
      the membership of the Committee. Vacancies in the Committee shall be
      filled by the Employer.

                                       89
<PAGE>

14.2  Committee Action

      In the event that the Employer appoints such person or persons to act as
      the Committee, such Committee shall act by a majority of its members at a
      meeting (which can be by telephone) or in writing without a meeting. A
      member of the Committee who is also a Participant of the Plan shall not
      vote or act as a member of the Committee upon any matter relating solely
      to his rights or benefits under the Plan.

14.3  Authorized Signatory

      Except as otherwise provided in Section 14.10, the Committee may designate
      a person or persons who shall be authorized to sign any document in the
      name of the Committee. The Trustee shall be fully protected in relying
      upon any notice, instruction or certification from the Committee or
      executed pursuant to the provisions of this Section.

14.4  Powers and Duties

      The Committee shall have such powers and duties as are necessary for the
      proper administration of the Plan, including but not limited to the power
      to make decisions with respect to the application and interpretation of
      the Plan. The Committee shall be empowered to establish rules and
      regulations for the transactions of its business and for the
      administration of the Plan. The determinations of the Committee with
      respect to the interpretation, application, or administration of the Plan
      shall be final, binding, and conclusive upon each person or party
      interested or concerned.

14.5  Nondiscrimination

      Where provisions of this Plan are at the discretion of the Committee, all
      Participants shall be treated in a uniform and nondiscriminatory manner.

14.6  Records and Reports

      The Committee shall maintain such records as may be necessary for proper
      administration of the Plan and shall be responsible for supplying all
      information and reports to the Internal Revenue Service, Department of
      Labor, Participants, Beneficiaries and others as required by law.
      Employees may examine records pertaining directing to them.

14.7  Reliance on Professional Advice

      The Committee shall be entitled to rely conclusively on the advice or
      opinion of any

                                       90

<PAGE>

      consultant, accountant, or attorney and such persons may also act in their
      respective professional capacities as advisors to the Employer.

14.8  Payment of Expenses

      All expenses of administration may be paid out of the Trust Fund unless
      paid by the Employer. Such expenses shall include any expenses incident to
      the duties of the Committee, including, but not limited to, fees of
      consultants, accountants, and attorneys, and other costs of administering
      the Plan. Until paid, the expenses shall constitute a liability of the
      Trust Fund. However, the Employer may reimburse the Trust Fund for any
      administration expense incurred. Any administration expense paid to the
      Trust Fund as a reimbursement shall not be considered an Employer
      contribution.

14.9  Limitation of Liability

      The Committee must discharge its duties solely in the interest of the
      Participants and their Beneficiaries. The Committee must carry out its
      duties with the care, skill, prudence and diligence under circumstances
      then prevailing that a prudent man acting in a like capacity and familiar
      with such matters would use in the conduct of an enterprise of like
      character and with like aims. The Committee, however, shall not be liable
      for any acts or decisions based on the advice or opinion of any
      consultant, accountant or attorney employed by the Committee in their
      respective professional capacities as advisors to the Employer, provided,
      however, that the Committee did not violate its general fiduciary duty in
      selecting or retaining such advisor.

14.10 Payment Certification to Trustee

      The Committee shall provide written instruction to the Trustee with
      respect to all payments which become due under the terms of the Plan and
      shall direct the Trustee to make such payments from the Trust Fund. All
      orders, requests and instructions by the Committee to the Trustee shall be
      in writing and signed by an authorized member of the Committee.

      The Trustee shall act and shall be fully protected in acting in accordance
      with such orders, requests and instructions.

14.11 Claims Procedure

      A Participant or Beneficiary ("Claimant") may file a written claim for
      benefits with the Committee. If the Committee decides that a Claimant is
      not entitled to all or any part of the benefits claimed, it shall within
      ninety (90) days of receipt of such claim, inform the

                                       91
<PAGE>

      Claimant in writing of its determination; the reasons for its
      determination, including specific references to the pertinent Plan
      provisions; and the Plan's review procedures. The Claimant or his
      authorized personal representative shall be permitted to review pertinent
      documents and within sixty (60) days after receipt of the notice of denial
      of claim to request to appear personally before it or to submit such
      further information or comments to the Committee as will, in the
      Claimant's opinion establish his right to such benefits. The Committee
      will render its final decision with the specific reason therefore in
      writing and will transmit it to the claimant by certified mail within
      sixty (60) days (or one hundred twenty (120) days, if special
      circumstances require an extension of time and the claimant is given
      written notice within the initial sixty (60) day period) of any such
      appearance. If the final decision is not made within such period, it will
      be considered denied. If, upon review of a request for benefits hereunder,
      the Committee finds the Participant ineligible for such benefits, it shall
      inform the Participant in writing the reason or reasons for such denial.
      In the event any Participant or Beneficiary disagrees with the conclusions
      of the Committee, the Committee must reconsider their decision based on
      the facts and evidence presented to them by the Participant or
      Beneficiary. Further, the Committee must substantiate in writing to any
      Participant or Beneficiary who disagrees with the amount of his benefit
      the method under which the benefit computations were made.

                                   ARTICLE XV.
                               GENERAL PROVISIONS

15.1  No Right of Continued Employment

      No Employee or Participant shall have any right or claim to any benefit
      under the Plan except in accordance with the provisions of the Plan. The
      adoption of the Plan shall not be construed as creating any contract of
      employment between the Employer and any Employee or otherwise conferring
      upon any Employee or other person any legal right to continuation of
      employment, nor as limiting or qualifying the right of the Employer to
      discharge any Employee without regard to the effect that such discharge
      might have upon his rights under the Plan.

15.2  Nonalienation of Interest

      No benefit or interest available hereunder will be subject to assignment
      or alienation, either voluntarily or involuntarily. The preceding sentence
      shall not apply to loans made to the Participant under the Plan, or
      domestic relations orders which are determined by the Committee to be
      qualified domestic relations orders, as defined in section 414(p) of the
      Code and section 206(d)(3) of the Act, or were entered before January 1,
      1985.

                                       92
<PAGE>

      Notwithstanding any provision in the Plan to the contrary, payments
      pursuant to a qualified domestic relations order may be made to an
      alternate payee prior to the time that the Plan may make payments to the
      affected Participant.

15.3  Incompetence of Participants and Beneficiaries

      If the Committee deems any person incapable of receiving benefits to which
      he is entitled by reason of minority, illness, infirmity, or other
      incapacity, it may direct the Trustee to make payment directly for the
      benefit of such person to a legal representative of such person. Such
      payment shall, to the extent thereof, discharge all liability of the
      Employer, the Committee, the Trustee and the Fund.

15.4  Unclaimed Benefits

      If any benefit hereunder has been payable and unclaimed for four (4) years
      since the whereabouts or continued existence of the person entitled
      thereto was last known to the Committee, such benefit shall be placed in a
      segregated, interest-bearing suspense account with no further attempts to
      uncover the whereabouts of the person entitled thereto. The Committee
      shall rely upon notification from the Department of Health, Education and
      Welfare as to the whereabouts of such person when he applies for benefits
      under the Social Security Act. The four (4) year period may be extended by
      the Committee whenever, in its discretion, special circumstances justify
      such action. The Committee shall make a reasonable and diligent search for
      the Participant before any benefit is segregated. If a benefit is
      forfeited because the Participant or Beneficiary cannot be found, such
      benefit will be reinstated if a claim is made by the Participant or
      Beneficiary.

15.5  Separate Employer Trusts Maintained

      Except as provided in Section 16.5, the Plan of each Employer which adopts
      this Prototype Plan and corresponding Trust Agreement as part of its Plan
      shall be administered separately from those of any other Employer.

15.6  Governing Law

      The Plan shall be administered, construed and enforced to the state
      wherein the Trustee maintains its principal place of business, except to
      the extent preempted by the Act.

15.7  Severability

      Should any provision of the Plan or rules and regulations adopted
      thereunder be deemed

                                       93
<PAGE>

      or held to be unlawful or invalid for any reason, such fact shall not
      adversely affect the other provisions unless such invalidity shall render
      impossible or impractical the functioning of the Plan. In such case, the
      appropriate parties shall immediately adopt a new provision to take the
      place of the illegal or invalid provision.

15.8  Gender and Number

      The masculine pronoun wherever used shall include the feminine pronoun and
      the singular shall include the plural and the plural shall include the
      singular, wherever appropriate to the context.

15.9  Titles and Headings

      The titles or headings of the respective Articles and Sections are
      inserted merely for convenience and shall be given no legal effect.

15.10 Failure of Employer's Plan to Qualify

      The use of this Prototype Plan and corresponding Trust Agreement shall be
      available only to the Plans of Employers which meet the requirements of
      section 401(a) of the Code. If the Employer's Plan fails to attain or
      retain qualification, such Plan will no longer participate in this
      Prototype Plan and will be considered an individually designed plan.

15.11 Exclusive Benefit

      Except as provided in Section 6.3, at no time shall any part of the corpus
      or income of the Fund be used for or diverted to purposes other than for
      the exclusive benefit of the Participants and their Beneficiaries and
      defraying reasonable expenses of the Plan.

15.12 Action by Employer

      Any action, including the amendment or termination of the Plan as provided
      in Sections 16.1 and 16.2 of the Plan, by an Employer which is a
      corporation shall be taken by the board of directors of the corporation or
      any person or persons duly empowered to exercise the powers of the
      corporation with respect to the Plan. In the case of an Employer which is
      a partnership, any action, including the amendment or termination of the
      Plan as provided in Sections 16.1 and 16.2 of the Plan, shall be taken by
      any general partner or the partnership. In the case of an Employer which
      is a sole proprietorship, any action, including the amendment or
      termination of the Plan as provided in Sections 16.1 and 16.2 of the Plan,
      shall be taken by the sole proprietor.

                                       94
<PAGE>

                                   ARTICLE XVI
                            AMENDMENT AND TERMINATION

16.1  Amendment

      (a)   The Employer expressly recognizes the authority of the Sponsor to
            amend the Plan and the Trust Agreement or Custodial Agreement from
            time to time, and the Employer shall be deemed to have consented to
            any such amendment. The Employer shall receive a written instrument
            indicating the amendment of the Plan and Trust Agreement and such
            amendment shall become effective as of the effective date of such
            instrument.

      (b)   The Employer reserves the right to amend the Plan at any time.
            Except for (1) changes to the choice of options in the Adoption
            Agreement, (2) amendments stated in the Adoption Agreement which
            allow the Plan to satisfy section 415 of the Code or to avoid
            duplication of minimums under section 416 of the Code because of the
            required aggregation of multiple plans, or (3) amendments published
            by the Internal Revenue Service which specifically provide that
            their adoption will not cause the Plan to be treated as individually
            designed, an Employer will no longer participate in the Prototype
            Plan and will be considered to have an individually designed plan if
            it amends the Plan or obtains a waiver of the minimum funding
            requirement under Section 412(d) of the Code.

      (c)   Notwithstanding  anything  in  this  Plan  to the  contrary,  no
            amendment shall:

            (1)   Increase the responsibility of the Trustee without the
                  Trustee's written consent;

            (2)   Have the effect of decreasing a Participant's account balance
                  or eliminating an optional form of benefit with respect to
                  accrued benefits, except to the extent permitted by section
                  412(c)(8) of the Code;

            (3)   In the case of an Employee who is a Participant as of the
                  later of the date such amendment is adopted or the date it
                  becomes effective, decrease the nonforfeitable percentage
                  (determined as of such date) of such Employee's right to his
                  Employer-derived account balance below his non-forfeitable
                  percentage computed under the Plan without regard to such
                  amendment;

            (4)   Violate the exclusive benefit rule of Section 15.11.

                                       95
<PAGE>

16.2  Termination and Partial Termination

      The adopting Employer may, at any time, by written notice to the Trustee
      in such form as is acceptable to the Trustee, terminate the Plan and
      discontinue all further contributions hereunder. Upon termination or
      partial termination of the Plan or upon complete discontinuance of
      contributions to a Profit Sharing Plan, each affected Employee shall have
      a one hundred percent (100%) vested and nonforfeitable interest in his
      account balance. Upon a termination or partial termination of the Plan
      (and subject to the limitations of section 4.10 in the case of a cash or
      deferred arrangement qualified under section 401(k) of the Code), each
      affected Participant's account balance may be distributed in accordance
      with the provisions of Article VIII or, at the option of the Employer and
      with the Trustee's consent, shall continue to be held by the Trustee for
      distribution as authorized by Articles VIII and IX. Notwithstanding the
      preceding sentence, a Profit Sharing Plan which does not offer an annuity
      form of benefit (purchased from a commercial provider) may distribute each
      affected Participant's account balance immediately in a single sum without
      Participant consent, provided that neither the Employer nor any Affiliated
      Employer maintains another defined contribution plan, other than an
      employee stock ownership plan (as defined in section 4975(e)(7) of the
      Code). If either the Employer or any Affiliated Employer maintains another
      such defined contribution plan, then a Participant's account balance may
      be transferred to such plan without his consent if the Participant does
      not consent to the single sum distribution from this Plan.

16.3  Plan Merger and Consolidation or Transfer of Plan Assets

      In the event of any merger or consolidation with, or transfer of assets or
      liabilities to, any other plan, each Participant of this Plan would (if
      the Plan then terminated) receive an amount immediately after such merger,
      consolidation or transfer which is equal to or greater than the amount he
      would have been entitled to receive immediately before the merger,
      consolidation, or transfer (if the Plan had then terminated).

16.4  Amended and Restated Plans

      If this Plan is an amendment and restatement of an existing plan
      ("Existing Plan"), the following provisions shall apply:

      (a)   Each Employee who was a participant in the Existing Plan immediately
            prior to the Effective Date shall become a Participant in this Plan
            on the Effective Date.

      (b)   The balance of such Employee's accounts under the Existing Plan
            attributable to

                                       96
<PAGE>

            employer or employee contributions shall be allocated to the
            corresponding Accounts under this Plan or accounted for separately.

      (c)   All years of service credited for vesting service under the Existing
            Plan shall be credited as years of Service under this Plan. The
            amendment and restatement shall not reduce the vested interest of a
            participant in the Existing Plan, and any change in the vesting
            schedule shall be subject to the provisions of Section 7.3.

      (d)   The amendment and restatement shall not reduce a Participant's
            account balance and shall not eliminate any optional form of
            benefit.

      (e)   Any beneficiary designation in effect under the Existing Plan
            immediately before the amendment and restatement shall be deemed to
            be a valid Beneficiary designation under this Plan, to the extent
            consistent with Article VIII.

16.5  Participating Employers

      (a)   With the consent of the Employer and Trustee, and by duly authorized
            action, any Affiliated Employer may adopt this Plan and become a
            Participating Employer.

      (b)   Each such Participating Employer shall be bound by the same Adoption
            Agreement provisions as those selected by the Employer, and to use
            the same Trustee as the Employer. If the Employer does not make a
            contribution to the Plan, the Participating Employer shall be
            obligated to do so.

      (c)   The Trustee may, but shall not be required to commingle, hold and
            invest as one Trust Fund all contributions made by Participating
            Employers, as well as all increments thereof.

      (d)   With respect to its relations with the Trustee and Committee for the
            purposes of this Plan, each Participating Employer shall be deemed
            to have irrevocably designated the adopting Employer as its agent.
            Amendment of this Plan by the adopting Employer at any time when
            there shall be a Participating Employer hereunder shall only be by
            the written action of the adopting Employer, with the consent of the
            Trustee where such consent is necessary in accordance with the terms
            of this Plan.

      (e)   A Participating Employer may, at any time, by written notice to the
            Employer and Trustee in such form as is acceptable to the Employer
            and Trustee, discontinue its participation in the plan and
            discontinue all further contributions hereunder. The Employer shall
            direct the Trustee to transfer, deliver and assign

                                       97
<PAGE>

            Fund assets attributable to the Participants of such Participating
            Employer to such successor trustee as shall have been designated by
            such Participating Employer, in the event that it has established a
            separate plan for its Employees. If no successor trustee is
            designated, the Trustee shall retain such assets for the

            Employees of said Participating Employer pursuant to the provisions
            of Articles VIII and IX hereof.

                                       98
<PAGE>

                                  ARTICLE XVII.
                             PAIRED PLAN PROVISIONS

The provisions of this Article are applicable only if the Employer adopts a set
of Dreyfus paired plans. Paired plans are a combination of standardized form
plans offered by the Sponsor, so designed that if any single plan or combination
of plans is adopted by an Employer each plan by itself, or the plans together,
will meet the anti-discrimination rules set forth in section 401(a)(4) of the
Code, the contribution and benefit limits set forth in section 415 of the Code
and the Top-Heavy provisions set forth in section 416 of the Code.

17.1  Compliance With Section 415(e) of the Code

      If the Employer adopts one or two of Sponsor's paired defined contribution
      plans and Sponsor's paired defined benefit plan, the "1.0" aggregate
      limitation of section 415(e) of the Code on contributions and benefits
      will be met by freezing or reducing the rate of benefit accruals under the
      paired defined benefit plan.

17.2  Adjustment  of Combined Plan  Fractions  Under Section 415 of the Code
      for Top-Heavy Ratio in Excess of Ninety Percent (90%)

      In any Plan Year in which the Plan becomes Super Top-Heavy, the
      denominators of the Defined Benefit Fraction (as defined in Section 6.4 of
      the Plan) and the Defined Contribution Fraction (as defined in Section 6.4
      of the Plan) shall be computed using one hundred percent (100%) of the
      dollar limitation instead of one hundred twenty-five percent (125%).

17.3  Top-Heavy Minimum Benefits and Contributions

      (a)   When the paired plans maintained by the Employer are Top-Heavy, but
            are not Super Top-Heavy, each Non-Key Employee who participates in
            paired defined contribution plan number 01001, 01003, 01004, 01005
            or 01006, but does not participate in paired defined benefit plan
            number 02001, will receive the Minimum Allocation provided for in
            Section 13.3. Each Non-Key Employee who participates in two of the
            paired defined contribution plans, but not the paired defined
            benefit plan, shall receive the minimum Top-Heavy allocation under
            the paired defined contribution plan specified in the Adoption
            Agreement. Each Non-Key Employee who is a participant in this Plan
            and the paired defined benefit plan shall receive the minimum
            top-heavy benefit accrual under such plan and shall not receive any
            top-heavy minimum contribution under the paired defined contribution
            plan or plans.

                                       99
<PAGE>

      (b)   When the paired plans maintained by the Employer are Super
            Top-Heavy, each Non-Key Employee who participates in paired defined
            contribution plan number 01001, 01003, 01004, 01005 or 01006 but who
            does not participate in paired defined benefit plan number 02001,
            will receive the Minimum Allocation provided for in Section 13.3.
            Each Non-Key Employee who participates in two of the paired defined
            contribution plans, but not the defined benefit plan, shall receive
            the minimum top-heavy allocation under the paired defined
            contribution plan specified in the Adoption Agreement. Each Non-Key
            Employee who is a Participant in this Plan and the paired defined
            benefit plan shall receive the minimum top heavy benefit accrual
            under such plan and shall not receive any top heavy minimum
            contribution under the paired defined contribution plan or plans.

17.4  Integration of Paired Plans

      If the Employer adopts paired plans, only one plan may allocate
      contributions or determine benefits on an integrated basis.

                                      100<PAGE>

                                                                     Exhibit 4.1

                                                                  EXECUTION COPY

================================================================================

                             PLAYTEX PRODUCTS, INC.

                    9-3/8% SENIOR SUBORDINATED NOTES DUE 2011

                  Guaranteed to the extent set forth herein by

                           the GUARANTORS named herein

                           ---------------------------

                                    INDENTURE

                            Dated as of May 22, 2001

                           ---------------------------

                        THE BANK OF NEW YORK, as Trustee

                           ---------------------------

================================================================================

<PAGE>

                             CROSS-REFERENCE TABLE*

Trust Indenture Act Section                                  Indenture Section

310 (a)(1)................................................................7.11
(a)(2) ...................................................................7.11
(a)(3)....................................................................N.A.
(a)(4)....................................................................N.A.
(a)(5)....................................................................7.11
(b).......................................................................7.11
(c).......................................................................N.A.
311(a)....................................................................7.12
(b).......................................................................7.12
(c).......................................................................N.A.
312 (a)...................................................................2.05
(b)......................................................................13.03
(c)......................................................................13.03
313(a)....................................................................7.07
(b)(1)....................................................................N.A.
(b)(2)....................................................................7.07;
                                                                          7.08

(c).......................................................................7.07;
                                                                         13.02

(d).......................................................................7.07
314(a)...................................................................13.05
(b).......................................................................N.A.
(c)(1)...................................................................13.04
(c)(2)...................................................................13.04
(c)(3)....................................................................N.A.
(d).......................................................................N.A.
(e)......................................................................13.05
(f).......................................................................N.A.
315 (a)...................................................................7.01
(b).......................................................................7.06;
                                                                         13.02

(c).......................................................................7.01
(d).......................................................................7.01
(e).......................................................................6.11
316 (a)(last sentence)....................................................2.09
(a)(1)(A).................................................................6.05
(a)(1)(B).................................................................6.04
(a)(2)....................................................................N.A.
(b).......................................................................6.07
(c).......................................................................2.12
317 (a)(1)................................................................6.08
(a)(2)....................................................................6.09
(b).......................................................................2.04
318 (a)..................................................................13.01
(b).......................................................................N.A.
(c)......................................................................13.01
N.A. means not applicable.
*This Cross-Reference Table is not part of the Indenture.

<PAGE>

<TABLE>
<CAPTION>

                                TABLE OF CONTENTS

                                                                            PAGE

<S>                                                                          <C>
ARTICLE 1 DEFINITIONS AND INCORPORATION BY REFERENCE...........................5
         Section 1.01  Definitions.............................................5
         Section 1.02  Other Definitions......................................26
         Section 1.03  Incorporation of TIA Provisions........................27
         Section 1.04  Rules of Construction..................................27

ARTICLE 2 THE NOTES...........................................................28
         Section 2.01  Form and Dating........................................28
         Section 2.02  Execution and Authentication...........................29
         Section 2.03  Registrar and Paying Agent.............................30
         Section 2.04  Paying Agent to Hold Money in Trust....................30
         Section 2.05  Holder Lists...........................................30
         Section 2.06  Transfer and Exchange..................................30
         Section 2.07  Replacement Notes......................................42
         Section 2.08  Outstanding Notes......................................42
         Section 2.09  Treasury Notes.........................................43
         Section 2.10  Temporary Notes........................................43
         Section 2.11  Cancellation...........................................43
         Section 2.12  Defaulted Interest.....................................43

ARTICLE 3 REDEMPTION AND PREPAYMENT...........................................44
         Section 3.01  Notices to Trustee.....................................44
         Section 3.02  Selection of Notes to Be Redeemed......................44
         Section 3.03  Notice of Redemption...................................44
         Section 3.04  Effect of Notice of Redemption.........................45
         Section 3.05  Deposit of Redemption Price............................45
         Section 3.06  Notes Redeemed in Part.................................46
         Section 3.07  Optional Redemption....................................46
         Section 3.08  Mandatory Redemption...................................46
         Section 3.09  Offer to Purchase by Application of Excess Proceeds....46

ARTICLE 4 COVENANTS...........................................................48
         Section 4.01  Payment of Notes.......................................48
         Section 4.02  Maintenance of Office or Agency........................49
         Section 4.03  Reports.  49
         Section 4.04  Compliance Certificate.................................50
         Section 4.05  Taxes.    50
         Section 4.06  Stay, Extension and Usury Laws.........................51
         Section 4.07  Limitation on Restricted Payments......................51
         Section 4.08  Dividend and Other Payment Restrictions
                       Affecting Subsidiaries.................................54
         Section 4.09  Limitation on Indebtedness.............................55
         Section 4.10  Asset Sales............................................55
         Section 4.11  Transactions with Affiliates...........................57
</TABLE>

                                       1
<PAGE>

<TABLE>

<S>                    <C>                                                   <C>
         Section 4.12  Liens..................................................58
         Section 4.13  Corporate Existence....................................59
         Section 4.14  Offer to Repurchase Upon Change of Control.............59
         Section 4.15  No Senior Subordinated Indebtedness....................60
         Section 4.16  Designation of Restricted and Unrestricted
                       Subsidiaries...........................................61
         Section 4.17  Payments for Consent...................................61
         Section 4.18  Additional Guarantees..................................61

ARTICLE 5 SUCCESSORS..........................................................61
         Section 5.01  Merger, Consolidation, or Sale of Assets...............61
         Section 5.02  Successor Corporation Substituted......................62

ARTICLE 6 DEFAULTS AND REMEDIES...............................................63
         Section 6.01  Events of Default......................................63
         Section 6.02  Acceleration...........................................64
         Section 6.03  Other Remedies.........................................65
         Section 6.04  Waiver of Past Defaults................................65
         Section 6.05  Control by Majority....................................66
         Section 6.06  Limitation on Suits....................................66
         Section 6.07  Rights of Holders of Notes to Receive Payment..........66
         Section 6.08  Collection Suit by Trustee.............................66
         Section 6.09  Trustee May File Proofs of Claim.......................67
         Section 6.10  Priorities.............................................67
         Section 6.11  Undertaking for Costs..................................67

ARTICLE 7 TRUSTEE.............................................................68
         Section 7.01  Duties of Trustee......................................68
         Section 7.02  Rights of Trustee......................................69
         Section 7.03  Individual Rights of Trustee...........................70
         Section 7.04  Trustee's Disclaimer...................................70
         Section 7.05  Money Held in Trust....................................70
         Section 7.06  Notice of Defaults.....................................70
         Section 7.07  Reports by Trustee to Holders of the Notes.............70
         Section 7.08  Compensation and Indemnity.............................71
         Section 7.09  Replacement of Trustee.................................71
         Section 7.10  Successor Trustee by Merger, etc.......................72
         Section 7.11  Eligibility; Disqualification..........................72
         Section 7.12  Preferential Collection of Claims Against Company......73

ARTICLE 8 DEFEASANCE AND COVENANT DEFEASANCE..................................73
         Section 8.01  Option to Effect Defeasance or Covenant Defeasance.....73
         Section 8.02  Defeasance and Discharge...............................73
         Section 8.03  Covenant Defeasance....................................73
         Section 8.04  Conditions to Defeasance or Covenant Defeasance........74
         Section 8.05  Deposited Money and U.S. Government Obligations
                       to be Held in Trust; Other Miscellaneous Provisions....75
         Section 8.06  Repayment to Company...................................75
</TABLE>

                                       2
<PAGE>

<TABLE>

<S>                    <C>                                                   <C>
         Section 8.07  Reinstatement..........................................76

ARTICLE 9 AMENDMENT, SUPPLEMENT AND WAIVER....................................76
         Section 9.01  Without Consent of Holders of Notes....................76
         Section 9.02  With Consent of Holders of Notes.......................77
         Section 9.03  Compliance with Trust Indenture Act....................78
         Section 9.04  Revocation and Effect of Consents......................78
         Section 9.05  Notation on or Exchange of Notes.......................78
         Section 9.06  Trustee to Sign Amendments, etc........................79
         Section 9.07  Affect on Holders of Senior Indebtedness...............79

ARTICLE 10 SUBORDINATION......................................................79
         Section 10.01 Agreement to Subordinate...............................79
         Section 10.02 Liquidation; Dissolution; Bankruptcy...................79
         Section 10.03 Default on Designated Senior Indebtedness..............80
         Section 10.04 Acceleration of Securities.............................81
         Section 10.05 When Distribution Must Be Paid Over....................81
         Section 10.06 Notice to Trustee......................................81
         Section 10.07 Subrogation............................................82
         Section 10.08 Relative Rights........................................82
         Section 10.09 Subordination May Not Be Impaired by Company...........83
         Section 10.10 Distribution or Notice to Representative...............83
         Section 10.11 Rights of Trustee and Paying Agent.....................83
         Section 10.12 Authorization to Effect Subordination..................83
         Section 10.13 No Waiver of Subordination Provisions..................84
         Section 10.14 Amendments.............................................84
         Section 10.15 Trustee's Compensation Not Prejudiced..................84

ARTICLE 11 GUARANTEES.........................................................84
         Section 11.01 Guarantee.84
         Section 11.02 Subordination of Guarantee.............................85
         Section 11.03 Limitation of Guarantor Liability......................85
         Section 11.04 Execution And Delivery Of Guarantee....................86
         Section 11.05 Guarantors May Consolidate, Etc., On Certain Terms.....86
         Section 11.06 Releases Following Sale Of Assets......................87

ARTICLE 12 SATISFACTION AND DISCHARGE.........................................88
         Section 12.01 Satisfaction and Discharge.............................88
         Section 12.02 Application of Trust Money.............................89

ARTICLE 13 MISCELLANEOUS......................................................89
         Section 13.01 Trust Indenture Act Controls...........................89
         Section 13.02 Notices................................................89
         Section 13.03 Communication by Holders of Notes with Other
                       Holders of Notes.......................................90
         Section 13.04 Certificate and Opinion as to Conditions Precedent.....90
         Section 13.05 Statements Required in Certificate or Opinion..........91
         Section 13.06 Rules by Trustee and Agents............................91
</TABLE>

                                       3
<PAGE>

<TABLE>

<S>                    <C>                                                   <C>
         Section 13.07 No Personal Liability of Directors, Officers,
                       Employees and Stockholders.............................91
         Section 13.08 Governing Law..........................................91
         Section 13.09 No Adverse Interpretation of Other Agreements..........91
         Section 13.10 Successors.............................................92
         Section 13.11 Severability...........................................92
         Section 13.12 Counterpart Originals..................................92
         Section 13.13 Table of Contents, Headings, etc.......................92

EXHIBITS
Exhibit A1: FORM OF NOTE
Exhibit A2: FORM OF REGULATION S TEMPORARY GLOBAL NOTE
Exhibit B:  FORM OF CERTIFICATE OF TRANSFER
Exhibit C:  FORM OF CERTIFICATE OF EXCHANGE
Exhibit D:  FORM OF CERTIFICATE OF ACQUIRING INSTITUTIONAL
            ACCREDITED INVESTOR
Exhibit E:  FORM OF GUARANTEE
Exhibit F:  FORM OF SUPPLEMENTAL INDENTURE

SCHEDULE

Schedule 1: GUARANTORS
</TABLE>

                                       4
<PAGE>

      INDENTURE dated as of May 22, 2001, by and among Playtex Products, Inc., a
Delaware corporation (the "COMPANY"), the guarantors listed on Schedule 1 hereto
(the "GUARANTORS") and The Bank of New York, as Trustee (the "TRUSTEE").

      The Company, the Guarantors and the Trustee agree as follows for the
benefit of each other and for the equal and ratable benefit of the Holders of
the 9-3/8% Senior Subordinated Notes due 2011 (the "NOTES").

                                   ARTICLE 1

                    DEFINITIONS AND INCORPORATION BY REFERENCE

SECTION 1.01      DEFINITIONS.

      "144A GLOBAL NOTE" means the form of the Notes initially sold to QIBs.

      "ACQUIRED INDEBTEDNESS" means Indebtedness of a Person:

      (a) existing at the time such Person becomes a Restricted Subsidiary; or

      (b) assumed in connection with the acquisition of assets from such Person,

in each case, other than Indebtedness incurred in connection with, or in
contemplation of, such Person becoming a Restricted Subsidiary upon such
acquisition. Acquired Indebtedness shall be deemed to be incurred on the date of
the related acquisition of assets from any Person or the date the acquired
Person becomes a Restricted Subsidiary.

      "ADDITIONAL NOTES" means Notes (other than the Initial Notes) issued under
this Indenture in accordance with Sections 2.02 and 4.09 hereof, as part of the
same series as the Initial Notes.

      "AFFILIATE" of any specified Persons means any other Person directly or
indirectly controlling or controlled by or under direct or indirect common
control with such specified Person. For purposes of this definition, "control"
(including, with correlative meanings, the terms "controlling," "controlled by"
and "under common control with"), as used with respect to any Person, shall mean
the possession, directly or indirectly, of the power to direct or cause the
direction of the management or policies of such Person, whether through the
ownership of voting securities, by agreement or otherwise; PROVIDED that
beneficial ownership of more than 10% or more of the Voting Stock of a Person
shall be deemed to be control. For purposes of this definition, the terms
"controlling," "controlled by" and "under common control with" shall have
correlative meanings.

Notwithstanding the foregoing, no Person (other than the Company or any
Restricted Subsidiary of the Company) in whom a Securitization Entity makes an
Investment in connection with a Qualified Securitization Transaction shall be
deemed to be an Affiliate of the Company or any of its Restricted Subsidiaries
solely by reason of such Investment.

      "AGENT" means any Registrar, Paying Agent or co-registrar.

      "APPLICABLE PROCEDURES" means, with respect to any transfer or exchange of
or for beneficial interests in any Global Note, the rules and procedures of the
Depositary, Euroclear and Clearstream that apply to such transfer or exchange.

                                       5
<PAGE>

      "ASSET SALE" means any sale, issuance, conveyance, transfer, lease or
other disposition (including, without limitation, by way of merger,
consolidation or sale and leaseback transaction but not the grant of a pledge or
security interest) (collectively, a "transfer"), directly or indirectly, in one
or a series of related transactions, of:

      (a) any Capital Stock of any Subsidiary held by the Company or any
Restricted Subsidiary;

      (b) all or substantially all of the properties and assets of any division
or line of business of the Company or any of its Restricted Subsidiaries; or

      (c) any other properties or assets (other than cash) of the Company or any
Restricted Subsidiary, other than in the ordinary course of business.

      For the purposes of this definition, the term "Asset Sale" shall not
include:

      (a) any transfer of properties or assets that is governed by the
provisions of Article 5 hereof,

      (b) any transfer of properties or assets from any Restricted Subsidiary to
the Company in accordance with the terms of the Indenture,

      (c) any transfer of properties or assets having a market value of less
than $2,000,000 (it being understood that if the market value of the properties
or assets being transferred exceeds $2,000,000, the entire value and not just
the portion in excess of $2,000,000, shall be deemed to have been the subject of
an Asset Sale),

      (d) any transfer of properties or assets to any Restricted Subsidiary,

      (e) any transfer of properties or assets which are obsolete to the
Company's and its Restricted Subsidiaries' businesses,

      (f) any transfer of properties or assets from any Restricted Subsidiary to
any other Restricted Subsidiary;

      (g) any transfer or sale of accounts receivable, equipment or related
assets (including contract rights) of the type specified in the definition of
"Qualified Securitization Transaction" to a Securitization Entity for the fair
market value thereof as determined in accordance with GAAP. For the purposes of
this clause (g), Purchase Money Notes shall be deemed to be cash; or

      (h) any Restricted Payment or Permitted Investment permitted by the terms
of this Indenture.

      "AVERAGE LIFE TO STATED MATURITY" means, as of the date of determination
with respect to any Indebtedness, the quotient obtained by dividing (1) the sum
of the products of (a) the number of years from the date of determination to the
date or dates of each successive scheduled principal payment of such
Indebtedness multiplied by (b) the amount of each such principal payment by (2)
the sum of all such principal payments.

      "BANKRUPTCY LAW" means Title 11 of the United States Code, as amended, or
any similar United States federal or state law relating to bankruptcy,
insolvency, receivership, winding-up, liquidation, reorganization or relief of
debtors or any amendment to, succession to or change in any such law.

                                       6
<PAGE>

      "BENEFICIAL OWNER" has the meaning assigned to such term in Rule 13d-3 and
Rule 13d-5 under the Exchange Act, except that in calculating the beneficial
ownership of any particular "person", such "person" will be deemed to have
beneficial ownership of all securities that such "person" has the right to
acquire by conversion or exercise of other securities, whether such right is
currently exercisable or is exercisable only upon the occurrence of a subsequent
condition. The terms "Beneficially Owns" and "Beneficially Owned" have a
corresponding meaning.

      "BOARD OF DIRECTORS" means the Board of Directors of the Company, or any
authorized committee of the Board of Directors.

      "BUSINESS DAY" means any day other than a Legal Holiday.

      "CAPITAL LEASE OBLIGATION" of any Person means any obligations of such
Person and its Restricted Subsidiaries on a consolidated basis under any capital
lease of real or personal property which, in accordance with GAAP, has been
recorded as a capitalized lease obligation.

      "CAPITAL STOCK" of any Person means any and all shares, interests,
participations or other equivalents (however designated) of such Person's
capital stock.

      "CASH EQUIVALENTS" means:

      (a) any evidence of Indebtedness with a maturity of 180 days or less
issued or directly and fully guaranteed or insured by the United States of
America of any agency or instrumentality thereof (PROVIDED that the full faith
and credit of the United States of America is pledged in support thereof);

      (b) certificates of deposit or acceptances with a maturity of 190 days or
less of any financial institution that is a member of the Federal Reserve System
having combined capital and surplus and undivided profits of not less than
$500,000,000;

      (c) commercial paper with a maturity of 180 days or less issued by a
corporation that is not an Affiliate of the Company organized under the laws of
any state of the United States or the District of Columbia and rated A-1 (or
higher) according to S&P or P-1 (or higher) according to Moody's or at least an
equivalent rating category of another nationally recognized securities rating
agency;

      (d) any money market deposit accounts issued or offered by a domestic
commercial bank having capital and surplus in excess of $500,000,000; and

      (e) repurchase agreements and reverse repurchase agreements relating to
marketable direct obligations issued or unconditionally guaranteed by the
government of the United States of America or issued by any agency thereof and
backed by the full faith and credit of the United States of America, in each
case maturing within 180 days from the date of acquisition.

      "CLEARSTREAM" means Clearstream Banking, S.A.

      "CHANGE OF CONTROL" means the occurrence of any of the following events:

      (a) any "person" or "group" (as such terms are used in Sections 13(d) and
14(d) of the Exchange Act), other than Permitted Holders or any of their Related
Parties or a Permitted Group, is or becomes the Beneficial Owner, directly or
indirectly, of more than 50% of the voting power of all classes of Voting Stock
of the Company;

                                       7
<PAGE>

      (b) the Company consolidates with or merges with or into any Person or
conveys, transfers or leases all or substantially all of its assets to any
Person, or any corporation consolidates with or merges with or into the Company,
in any such event pursuant to a transaction in which the outstanding Voting
Stock of the Company is changed into or exchanged for cash, securities or other
property, other than any such transaction:

            (i) where the outstanding Voting Stock of the Company is not changed
      or exchanged at all (except to the extent necessary to reflect a change in
      the jurisdiction of incorporation of the Company); or

            (ii) where no "person" or "group" other than Permitted Holders or
      any of their Related Parties or a Permitted Group Beneficially Owns
      immediately after such transaction, directly or indirectly, more than 50%
      of the total outstanding Voting Stock of the surviving corporation; or

      (c) the Company is liquidated or dissolved or adopts a plan of liquidation
or dissolution other than in a transaction which complies with Article 5 hereof.

      "CODE" means the Internal Revenue Code of 1986, as amended.

      "COMMISSION" means the Securities and Exchange Commission, as from time to
time constituted, created under the Exchange Act, or if at any time after the
execution of this Indenture such Commission is not existing and performing the
duties now assigned to it under the Trust Indenture Act, then the body
performing such duties at such time.

      "COMMON STOCK" means the common stock, par value $.01 per share, of the
Company.

      "COMPANY" means Playtex Products, Inc., a Delaware corporation, or any
successor thereto as permitted by Article 5 hereof.

      "CONSOLIDATED ASSETS" means with respect to the Company, the total assets
shown on the balance sheet of the Company and its Restricted Subsidiaries, as
determined on a consolidated basis in accordance with GAAP, as of the end of the
Company's latest full fiscal quarter.

      "CONSOLIDATED FIXED CHARGE COVERAGE RATIO" means, for any Person for any
period, the ratio of:

      (a) the sum of Consolidated Net Income, Consolidated Interest Expense,
Consolidated Income Tax Expense and Consolidated Non-Cash Charges deducted in
computing Consolidated Net Income (Loss), in each case, for such period, of such
Person and its Restricted Subsidiaries on a consolidated basis, all determined
in accordance with GAAP, to

      (b) the sum of Consolidated Interest Expense for such period and cash
dividends paid on any Preferred Stock of such Person and non-cash dividends paid
on Redeemable Capital Stock of such Person (other than dividends paid in
Qualified Capital Stock) during such period, provided that:

            (i) in making such computation, the Consolidated Interest Expense
      attributable to interest on any Indebtedness and (1) bearing a floating
      interest rate shall be computed as if the rate in effect on the date of
      computation had been the applicable rate for the entire period and (2)
      which was not outstanding during the period for which the computation is
      being made but which

                                       8
<PAGE>

      bears, at the option of such Person, a fixed or floating rate of interest,
      shall be computed by applying, at the option of such Person, either the
      fixed or floating rate; and

            (ii) in making such computation, the Consolidated Interest Expense
      of such Person attributable to interest on any Indebtedness under a
      revolving credit facility shall be computed based upon the average daily
      balance of such Indebtedness during the applicable period.

      "CONSOLIDATED INCOME TAX EXPENSE" means, for any period, as applied to any
Person, the provision for federal, state, local and foreign income taxes of such
Person and its Restricted Subsidiaries for such period as determined in
accordance with GAAP.

      "CONSOLIDATED INTEREST EXPENSE" of any Person means, without duplication,
for any period, as applied to any Person, the sum of:

      (a) the interest expense of such Person and its Restricted Subsidiaries
for such period, on a consolidated basis, including, without limitation:

            (i) amortization of debt discount and other deferred financing costs
      (but excluding the write off and amortization of deferred financing costs
      that will occur in connection with the Refinancing Transactions);

            (ii) the net cost under interest rate contracts (including
      amortization of discounts);

            (iii) the interest portion of any deferred payment obligation; and

            (iv)  accrued interest, plus

            (b) (i) the interest component of Capital Lease Obligations paid,
      accrued and/or scheduled to be paid or accrued by such Person during such
      period; and

            (ii) all capitalized interest of such Person and its Restricted
      Subsidiaries,

      in each case as determined in accordance with GAAP; provided that interest
      expense on the 15 1/2% Junior Subordinated Notes due 2003 shall be
      included in Consolidated Interest Expense only to the extent that such
      interest expense exceeds the amount of interest income that the Company
      earns on the 15% Debentures due 2003 of Playtex Apparel Partners, L.P.

      "CONSOLIDATED NET INCOME (LOSS)" of any Person means, for any period, the
consolidated net income (or loss) of such Person and its Restricted Subsidiaries
for such period as determined on a consolidated basis in accordance with GAAP,
adjusted, to the extent included in calculating such consolidated net income (or
loss), by excluding, without duplication:

      (a) all extraordinary gains and losses and all charges associated with the
Refinancing Transactions;

      (b) the portion of consolidated net income (or loss) of such Person and
its Restricted Subsidiaries allocable to interests in Persons that are not
Restricted Subsidiaries to the extent that cash dividends or distributions have
not actually been received by such Person or one of its Restricted Subsidiaries;

                                       9
<PAGE>

      (c) net income (or loss) of any Person combined with such Person or any of
its Restricted Subsidiaries on a "pooling of interests" basis attributable to
any period prior to the date of combination;

      (d) aggregate net gains or losses (less all fees and expenses relating
thereto) in respect of dispositions of assets other than in the ordinary course
of business;

      (e) the net income of any Restricted Subsidiary to the extent that the
declaration of dividends or similar distributions by that Restricted Subsidiary
of that income is not at the time permitted, directly or indirectly, by
operation of the terms of its charter or any agreement, instrument, judgment,
decree, order, statute, rule or governmental regulations applicable to that
Restricted Subsidiary or its stockholders;

      (f) all interest income earned by the Company on the 15% Debentures due
2003 of Playtex Apparel Partners, L.P. unless such interest income (i) exceeds
the interest expense owed by the Company to Playtex Apparel Partners, L.P.
pursuant to the 15 1/2% Junior Subordinated Notes due 2003 and (ii) is actually
paid to the Company in cash;

      (g) all interest expense owed by the Company to Playtex Apparel Partners,
L.P. on the 15 1/2% Junior Subordinated Notes due 2003 to the extent that such
interest expense is offset by interest income on the 15% Debentures due 2003 of
Playtex Apparel Partners, L.P.

      (h) any restoration to income of any contingency reserve, except to the
extent that provision for such reserve was made out of income accrued at any
time following the date of this Indenture; or

      (i) any gain arising from the acquisition of any securities, or the
extinguishment, under GAAP, of any Indebtedness of such Person.

      "CONSOLIDATED NON-CASH CHARGES" of any Person means, for any period, the
aggregate depreciation, amortization and other non-cash charges of such Person
and its Restricted Subsidiaries for such period, as determined in accordance
with GAAP (excluding any non-cash charge which requires an accrual or reserve
for cash charges for any future period).

      "CORPORATE TRUST OFFICE OF THE TRUSTEE" shall be at the address of the
Trustee specified in Section 13.02 hereof or such other address as to which the
Trustee may give notice to the Company.

      "CREDIT AGREEMENT" means the Credit Agreement, and all guarantees, pledge
agreements, security agreements and similar agreements and instruments to be
entered into as part of the Refinancing Transactions, between the Company, the
lenders thereto and Credit Suisse First Boston as administrative agent for the
lenders, as any of them may be amended, restated, modified, renewed, refunded,
replaced or refinanced in whole or in part from time to time.

      "CREDIT FACILITIES" means, one or more debt facilities (including, without
limitation, the Credit Agreement) or commercial paper facilities, in each case
with banks or other institutional lenders providing for revolving credit loans,
term loans, receivables financing (including through the sale of receivables to
such lenders or to special purpose entities formed to borrow from such lenders
against such receivables) or letters of credit, in each case, as amended,
restated, modified, renewed, refunded, replaced or refinanced in whole or in
part from time to time.

      "CUSTODIAN" means any receiver, Trustee, assignee, liquidator or similar
official under any Bankruptcy Law.

                                       10
<PAGE>

      "DEFAULT" means any event which is, or after notice or passage of any time
or both would be, an Event of Default.

      "DEFINITIVE NOTE" means a certificated Note registered in the name of the
Holder thereof and issued in accordance with Section 2.06 hereof, in the form of
Exhibit A1 hereto except that such Note shall not bear the Global Note Legend
and shall not have the "Schedule of Exchanges of Interests in the Global Note"
attached thereto.

      "DESIGNATED SENIOR INDEBTEDNESS" means:

      (a) all Senior Indebtedness under the Credit Agreement; and

      (b) any other Senior Indebtedness which, at the time of determination has
an aggregate principal amount outstanding, together with any commitments to lend
additional amounts, of at least $50,000,000 and is specifically designated by
the Company, with the consent of the administrative agent under the Credit
Agreement if the Credit Agreement is then in effect, in the instrument
evidencing such Senior Indebtedness or the agreement under which such Senior
Indebtedness arises as "DESIGNATED SENIOR INDEBTEDNESS."

      "DISINTERESTED DIRECTOR" means, with respect to any transaction or series
of related transactions, a member of the Board of Directors who does not have
any material direct or indirect financial interest in or with respect to such
transaction or series of related transactions.

      "DOMESTIC SUBSIDIARY" means any Restricted Subsidiary of the Company that
was formed under the laws of the United States or any state of the United States
or the District of Columbia or that guarantees or otherwise provides direct
credit support for any Indebtedness of the Company.

      "EQUITY OFFERING" means any sale of Qualified Capital Stock of a Person
(a) to the public pursuant to an effective registration statement under the
Securities Act or (b) in a private placement pursuant to an exemption from the
registration requirements of the Securities Act.

      "EUROCLEAR" means Morgan Guaranty Trust Company of New York, Brussels
office, as operator of the Euroclear system.

      "EXCHANGE ACT" means the Securities Exchange Act of 1934, as amended.

      "EXCHANGE NOTES" means the Notes issued in the Exchange Offer pursuant to
Section 2.06(f) hereof.

      "EXCHANGE OFFER" has the meaning set forth in the Registration Rights
Agreement.

      "EXCHANGE OFFER REGISTRATION STATEMENT" has the meaning set forth in the
Registration Rights Agreement.

      "EXCLUDED ASSETS" means the assets and other property held by the Company
(including shares of Capital Stock) relating to the Jhirmack Business.

       "GENERALLY ACCEPTED ACCOUNTING PRINCIPLES" or "GAAP" means generally
accepted accounting principles in the United States, consistently applied, which
are in effect on the date of this Indenture.

                                       11
<PAGE>

      "GLOBAL NOTES" means, individually and collectively, each of the
Restricted Global Notes and the Unrestricted Global Notes, in the form of
Exhibit A1 hereto issued in accordance with Section 2.01, 2.06(b)(iv),
2.06(d)(ii) or 2.06(f) hereof.

      "GLOBAL NOTE LEGEND" means the legend set forth in Section 2.06(g)(ii),
which is required to be placed on all Global Notes issued under this Indenture.

      "GUARANTEE" means the guarantee by any Guarantor of the Indenture
Obligations.

      "GUARANTEED DEBT" of any Person means, without duplication, all
Indebtedness of any other Person referred to in the definition of Indebtedness
that has been guaranteed directly or indirectly in any manner by such Person, or
in effect guaranteed directly or indirectly by such Person through an agreement:

      (a) to pay or purchase such Indebtedness or to advance or supply funds for
the payment or purchase of such Indebtedness;

      (b) to purchase, sell or lease (as lessee or lessor) property, or to
purchase or sell services, primarily for the purpose of enabling the debtor to
make payment of such Indebtedness or to assure the holder of such Indebtedness
against loss;

      (c) to supply funds to, or in any other manner invest in, the debtor
(including any agreement to pay for property or services without requiring that
such property be received or such services be rendered);

      (d) to maintain working capital or equity capital of the debtor, or
otherwise to maintain the net worth, solvency or other financial condition of
the debtor; or

      (e) otherwise to assure a creditor against loss: provided that the term
"guarantee" shall not include endorsements for collection or deposit, in either
case in the ordinary course of business.

      Notwithstanding the foregoing, Guaranteed Debt shall not include any
Indebtedness of a Securitization Entity solely by reason of the Standard
Securitization Undertakings.

      "GUARANTOR" means any guarantor of the Notes.

      "HOLDER" means a Person in whose name a Note is registered.

      "IAI GLOBAL NOTE" means the global Note substantially in the form of
Exhibit A1 hereto bearing the Global Note Legend and the Private Placement
Legend and deposited with or on behalf of and registered in the name of the
Depositary or its nominee that will be issued in a denomination equal to the
outstanding principal amount by the Notes sold to Institutional Accredited
Investors.

      "INDEBTEDNESS" means, with respect to any Person, without duplication:

            (a) all indebtedness of such Person for borrowed money or for the
      deferred purchase price of property or services, excluding any trade
      payables and other accrued current liabilities arising in the ordinary
      course of business, but including, without limitation, all obligations,
      contingent or otherwise, of such Person in connection with any letters of
      credit issued under letter of credit facilities, acceptance facilities or
      other similar facilities, now or hereafter outstanding;

                                       12
<PAGE>

            (b) all obligations of such Person evidenced by bonds, notes,
      debentures or other similar instruments;

            (c) all indebtedness created or arising under any conditional sale
      or other title retention agreement with respect to property acquired by
      such Person (even if the rights and remedies of the seller or lender under
      such agreement in the event of default are limited to repossession or sale
      of such property), but excluding trade payables arising in the ordinary
      course of business;

            (d) all obligations under Interest Rate Agreements of such Person;

            (e) all Capital Lease Obligations of such Person;

            (f) all Indebtedness referred to in clauses (a) through (e) of the
      definition of "Indebtedness" of other Persons and all dividends of other
      Persons, the payment of which is secured by (or for which the holder of
      such Indebtedness has an existing right, contingent or otherwise, to be
      secured by) any Lien, upon or with respect to property (including, without
      limitation, accounts and contract rights) owned by such Person, even
      though such Person has not assumed or become liable for the payment of
      such Indebtedness;

            (g) all Guaranteed Debt of such Person;

            (h) all Redeemable Capital Stock valued at the greater of its
      voluntary or involuntary maximum fixed repurchase price plus accrued and
      unpaid dividends; and

            (i) any amendment, supplement, modification, deferral, renewal,
      extension, refunding or refinancing of any Indebtedness of the types
      referred to in clauses (a) through (i) of this definition of
      "Indebtedness."

      Notwithstanding the foregoing, Indebtedness of the Company and its
Restricted Subsidiaries shall not include any Indebtedness of a Securitization
Entity solely by reason of the Standard Securitization Undertakings.

      For the purposes hereof, the maximum fixed repurchase price of any
Redeemable Capital Stock which does not have a fixed repurchase price shall be
calculated in accordance with the terms of such Redeemable Capital Stock as if
such Redeemable Capital Stock were purchased on any date on which Indebtedness
shall be required to be determined pursuant to this Indenture, and if such price
is based upon, or measured by, the fair market value of such Redeemable Capital
Stock, such fair market value to be determined in good faith by the Board of
Directors of such Person.

      "INDENTURE" means this Indenture, as amended or supplemented from time to
time.

      "INDENTURE OBLIGATIONS" means the obligations of the Company under this
Indenture or under the Notes to pay principal of, premium, if any, and interest
when due and payable, and all other amounts due or to become due under or in
connection with this Indenture, the Notes and the performance of all other
obligations to the Trustee and the Holders under this Indenture and the Notes,
according to the terms thereof. If any Indebtedness has been satisfied or
discharged or defeased (either by Defeasance or Covenant Defeasance), then such
Indebtedness shall not be deemed to be outstanding for the purposes of this
Indenture.

                                       13
<PAGE>

      "INDIRECT PARTICIPANT" means a Person who holds a beneficial interest in a
Global Note through a Participant.

      "INITIAL NOTES" means the first $350,000,000 aggregate principal amount of
Notes issued under this Indenture on the date hereof.

      "INITIAL PURCHASERS" means Credit Suisse First Boston Corporation and
Wells Fargo Brokerage Services, LLC.

      "INSTITUTIONAL ACCREDITED INVESTOR" means an institution that is an
"accredited investor" as defined in Rule 501(a)(1), (2), (3) or (7) under the
Securities Act, who are not also QIBs.

      "INTEREST PAYMENT DATE" means June 1 and December 1.

      "INTEREST RATE AGREEMENTS" means one or more of the following agreements
which shall be entered into by one or more financial institutions, interest rate
protection agreements (including, without limitation, interest rate swaps, caps,
floors, collars and similar agreements) and/or other types of interest rate
hedging agreements from time to time.

      "INVESTMENT" means, with respect to any Person, directly or indirectly,
any advance, loan (including guarantees), or other extension of credit or
capital contribution to (by means of any transfer of cash or other property to
others or any payment for property or services for the account or use of
others), or any purchase, acquisition or ownership by such Person of any Capital
Stock, bonds, notes, debentures, limited liability company interests or other
securities issued or owned by, any other Person and all other items that are or
would be classified as investments on a balance sheet prepared in accordance
with GAAP.

      "JHIRMACK BUSINESS" means the assets and liabilities of the Company and
its Subsidiaries relating to Jhirmack hair care products, including the Capital
Stock of any Subsidiary, substantially all of the assets and liabilities of
which relate to Jhirmack hair care products.

      "LEGAL HOLIDAY" means a Saturday, a Sunday or a day on which banking
institutions in the City of New York or the city in which the principal
corporate trust office of the Trustee is located, or at a place of payment, are
authorized by law, regulation or executive order to remain closed. If a payment
date is a Legal Holiday at a place of payment, payment may be made at that place
on the next succeeding day that is not a Legal Holiday, and no interest shall
accrue on such payment for the intervening period.

      "LETTER OF TRANSMITTAL" means the letter of transmittal to be prepared by
the Company and sent to all Holders of the Notes for use by such Holders in
connection with the Exchange Offer.

      "LIEN" means any mortgage, charge, pledge, lien (statutory or otherwise),
security interest, hypothecation or other encumbrance upon or with respect to
any property of any kind, real or personal, movable or immovable, now owned or
hereafter acquired.

      "LIQUIDATED DAMAGES" means all liquidated damages then owing pursuant to
Section 5 of the Registration Rights Agreement.

      "MARKETING CORPORATION" means Playtex Marketing Corporation, a Delaware
corporation.

      "MATERIAL SUBSIDIARY" means each Restricted Subsidiary of the Company
which:

                                       14
<PAGE>

      (a) for the most recent fiscal year of the Company accounted for more than
10% of the consolidated revenues of the Company and its Restricted Subsidiaries;
or

      (b) at the end of such fiscal year, was the owner (beneficial or
otherwise) of more than 10% of the Consolidated Assets of the Company and its
Restricted Subsidiaries, all as shown on the Company's consolidated financial
statements for such fiscal year.

In addition, Marketing Corporation shall be deemed to be a "Material
Subsidiary."

      "MOODY'S" means Moody's Investors Service, Inc. or any successor thereto.

      "NET CASH PROCEEDS" means:

      (a) with respect to any Asset Sale by any Person, the proceeds thereof in
the form of cash or Cash Equivalents including payments in respect of deferred
payment obligations when received in the form of, or stock, or other assets when
disposed of for, cash or Cash Equivalents (except to the extent that such
obligations are financed or sold with recourse to the Company or any Restricted
Subsidiary) net of:

            (i) brokerage commissions and other reasonable fees and expenses
      (including fees and expenses of counsel and investment bankers) related to
      such Asset Sale;

            (ii) provisions for all taxes payable as a result of such Asset
      Sale;

            (iii) payments made to retire Indebtedness where payment of such
      Indebtedness is secured by the assets or properties the subject of such
      Asset Sale;

            (iv) amounts required to be paid to any Person (other than the
      Company or any Restricted Subsidiary) owning a beneficial interest in the
      assets subject to the Asset Sale; and

            (v) appropriate amounts to be provided by the Company or any
      Restricted Subsidiary, as the case may be, as a reserve, in accordance
      with GAAP, against any liabilities associated with such Asset Sale and
      retained by the Company or any Restricted Subsidiary, as the case may be,
      after such Asset Sale, including, without limitation, pension and other
      post-employment benefit liabilities, liabilities related to environmental
      matters and liabilities under any indemnification obligations associated
      with such Asset Sale, all as reflected in an officer's certificate
      delivered to the Trustee; and

      (b) with respect to any issuance or sale of Capital Stock or options,
warrants or rights to purchase Capital Stock, or debt securities or Capital
Stock that have been converted into or exchanged for Capital Stock, as referred
to in Section 4.07 hereof, the proceeds of such issuance or sale in the form of
cash or Cash Equivalents, including payments in respect of deferred payment
obligations when received in the form of, or stock or other assets when disposed
of for, cash or cash equivalents (except to the extent that such obligations are
financed or sold with recourse to the Company or any Restricted Subsidiary), net
of attorney's fees, accountant's fees and brokerage, consultation, underwriting
and other fees and expenses actually incurred in connection with such issuance
or sale and net of taxes paid or payable as a result thereof.

      "NON-U.S. PERSON" means a Person who is not a U.S. Person.

                                       15
<PAGE>

      "NOTE CUSTODIAN" means the Trustee, as custodian with respect to the Notes
in global form, or any successor entity thereto.

      "NOTES" has the meaning assigned to it in the preamble to this Indenture.
The Initial Notes and the Additional Notes shall be treated as a single class
for all purposes under this Indenture.

      OBLIGATIONS" means any principal, interest, penalties, fees,
indemnifications, reimbursements, damages and other liabilities payable under
the documentation governing any Indebtedness.

      "OFFICER" means, with respect to any Person, the Chairman of the Board,
the Chief Executive Officer, the President, the Chief Operating Officer, the
Chief Financial Officer, the Treasurer, any Assistant Treasurer, the Controller,
the Secretary, any Assistant Secretary or any Vice-President of such Person or
any other officer designated by the Board of Directors.

      "OFFICER'S CERTIFICATE" means a certificate signed on behalf of the
Company by an Officer of the Company. The officer must be the principal
executive officer, the principal financial officer, the treasurer or the
principal accounting officer of the Company that meets the requirements of
Section 13.05 hereof.

      "OPINION OF COUNSEL" means an opinion from legal counsel who is reasonably
acceptable to the Trustee, that meets the requirements of Section 13.05 hereof.
The counsel may be an employee of or counsel to the Company, any Subsidiary of
the Company or the Trustee.

      "PARI PASSU INDEBTEDNESS" means any Indebtedness of the Company that is
PARI PASSU in right of payment to the Notes.

      "PARTICIPANT" means, with respect to the Depositary, Euroclear or
Clearstream, a Person who has an account with the Depositary, Euroclear or
Clearstream, respectively (and, with respect to The Depository Trust Company,
shall include Euroclear and Clearstream).

      "PERMITTED GROUP" means any group of investors that is deemed to be a
"person" (as that term is used in Section 13(d)(3) of the Exchange Act) and that
includes any of the Permitted Holders described in clause (i) of the definition
of "Permitted Holders;" PROVIDED that no single Person (other than the Permitted
Holders and their Related Parties) Beneficially Owns more than 50% of the
outstanding Voting Stock of the Company.

      "PERMITTED HOLDERS" means (i) HWH Capital Partners, L.P., HWH Valentine
Partners, L.P., HWH Surplus Valentine Partners, L.P. or Haas Wheat & Partners
Incorporated and any of their respective Affiliates; (ii) any officer or other
member of management employed by the Company or any Subsidiary as of the date of
this Indenture; (iii) BLUM Capital Partners, Richard C. Blum & Associates, Inc.,
and RCBA GP, L.L.C.; (iv) Stinson Capital Partners, L.P., Stinson Capital
Partners II, L.P., Stinson Capital Partners III, BK Capital Partners IV, L.P.,
RCBA-Playtex, L.P. and RCBA Strategic Partners, L.P., in each case, for so long
as BLUM Capital Partners serves as the general partner of such partnership; (v)
The Carpenters Pension Trust for Southern California, The Common Fund for its
Multi-Strategy and Value Opportunity Funds, The United Brotherhood of Carpenters
Pension Plan, and Stinson Capital Fund (Cayman), Ltd., in each case, for so long
as BLUM Capital Partners has voting and investment discretion over such
investment advisory account; (vi) Robert B. Haas, Douglas D. Wheat and Richard
C. Blum; (vii) family members or relatives of the persons described in clauses
(i), (ii), (iii), (iv) and (vi); (viii) any trusts created for the benefit of
the persons described in clauses (i), (ii), (iii), (iv), (vi) and (vii); (ix) in
the event of the death or incompetence of an individual described in clauses
(i), (ii), (iii), (iv), (vi) or (vii), such person's estate, executor,
administrator, committee or other personal representatives or beneficiaries; and
(x) upon a

                                       16
<PAGE>

distribution by a partnership described in clause (i), (iii) or (iv) of all or
any of the stock of the Company, the limited partners of such partnership.

      "PERMITTED INDEBTEDNESS" means the following:

      (a) Indebtedness of the Company under one or more Credit Facilities in an
aggregate principal amount under this clause (a) at any one time outstanding not
to exceed $725,000,000 LESS the amount applied to repay term loans under Credit
Facilities since the date of this Indenture with the Net Cash Proceeds of Asset
Sales and LESS any commitment reductions with respect to revolving loans under
Credit Facilities since the date of this Indenture as a result of repayments
with the Net Cash Proceeds of Asset Sales and LESS the amount of all outstanding
commitments under the Receivables Facility or any similar facility entered into
in connection with a Qualified Securitization Transaction (whether or not any
amounts are actually outstanding thereunder);

      (b) Guarantees of any Indebtedness of the Company by any of the Guarantors
or guarantees of any Indebtedness of any Subsidiary by the Company or any
Guarantor;

      (c) Indebtedness of the Company pursuant to the Notes to be issued on the
date of this Indenture and the Exchange Notes to be issued pursuant to the
registration rights agreement and Indebtedness of any Guarantor pursuant to a
Guarantee of any such Notes;

      (d) Indebtedness of the Company or any Restricted Subsidiary outstanding
on the date of this Indenture;

      (e) Indebtedness:

            (i) of the Company owing to a Restricted Subsidiary; or

            (ii) of a Restricted Subsidiary owing to the Company or another
      Restricted Subsidiary;

      PROVIDED that any such Indebtedness of the Company owing to a Restricted
Subsidiary, is subordinated in right of payment from and after such time as the
Notes shall become due and payable (whether at Stated Maturity, acceleration or
otherwise) to the payment and performance of the Company's obligations under the
Notes. Notwithstanding the foregoing, any disposition, pledge or transfer of any
such Indebtedness to a Person (other than the Company or a Restricted
Subsidiary) shall be deemed to be an incurrence of such Indebtedness by the
obligor not permitted by this clause (e) and any transaction pursuant to which
any Restricted Subsidiary, which has Indebtedness owing to the Company or any
other Restricted Subsidiary, ceases to be a Restricted Subsidiary shall be
deemed to be the incurrence of Indebtedness by the Company or such other
Restricted Subsidiary that is not permitted by this clause (e);

      (f) obligations of the Company or any Restricted Subsidiary pursuant to
Interest Rate Agreements designed to protect the Company or any Restricted
Subsidiary against fluctuations in interest rates in respect of Indebtedness of
the Company or any of its Restricted Subsidiaries, which obligations do not
exceed the aggregate principal amount of such Indebtedness;

      (g) trade and standby letters of credit issued for the account of the
Company or any Restricted Subsidiary of the Company in the ordinary course of
its business (excluding letters of credit described in clauses (h) and (i)
below);

                                       17
<PAGE>

      (h) letters of credit of up to $15,000,000 in the aggregate at any time
outstanding issued for the account of the Company or any Restricted Subsidiary
of the Company for any purpose other than in the ordinary course of business;

      (i) letters of credit issued for the account of the Company or any of its
Restricted Subsidiaries in support of self-insurance obligations and in support
of Indebtedness under industrial revenue bonds, to the extent that such
obligations or such Indebtedness are recorded on the balance sheet of the
Company or any of its Restricted Subsidiaries;

      (j) Capital Lease Obligations, industrial revenue bonds and Purchase Money
Obligations of the Company or any Restricted Subsidiary, not to exceed
$25,000,000 in the aggregate at any time outstanding (and any refinancings
thereof);

      (k) Indebtedness of the Company or any Restricted Subsidiary that is not a
Domestic Subsidiary incurred to fund the working capital requirements of that
Subsidiary in an amount not to exceed $25,000,000 in the aggregate at any time
outstanding;

      (l) any renewals, extensions, substitutions, refundings, refinancing or
replacements (collectively, a "refinancing") of any Indebtedness incurred
pursuant to the Consolidated Fixed Charge Coverage Ratio test in Section 4.09
hereof or pursuant to clauses (c) or (d) of this definition of "Permitted
Indebtedness," including any successive refinancings so long as

            (i) such refinancing does not increase the aggregate principal
      amount of Indebtedness represented thereby plus:

                  (A) the amount of any premium required to be paid in
            connection with such refinancing pursuant to the terms of the
            Indebtedness refinanced or the amount of any premium reasonably
            determined by the Company as necessary to accomplish such
            refinancing, and

                  (B) the amount of the expenses of the Company reasonably
            estimated to be incurred in connection with such refinancing, and

            (ii) in the case of Pari Passu Indebtedness or Subordinated
      Indebtedness, such refinancing does not reduce the Average Life to Stated
      Maturity or the Stated Maturity of such Indebtedness; and

      (m) the incurrence by a Securitization Entity of Indebtedness in a
Qualified Securitization Transaction that is non-recourse to the Company or any
Restricted Subsidiary of the Company (except for Standard Securitization
Undertakings) in an aggregate amount not to exceed $725,000,000 LESS the amount
outstanding under clause (a) of this definition of Permitted Indebtedness;

      (n) Indebtedness of the Company or any Restricted Subsidiary in addition
to that described in clauses (a) through (m) of this definition of "Permitted
Indebtedness" in an aggregate principal amount outstanding at any given time not
to exceed $50,000,000, which amount, notwithstanding the provisions of clause
(a) hereof, may be incurred under the Credit Agreement.

      In the event that an item of proposed Indebtedness meets the criteria of
more than one of the categories of Permitted Indebtedness described in clauses
(a) through (n) above, or would be permitted to be incurred pursuant to the
Consolidated Fixed Charge Coverage Ratio test set forth in Section 4.09

                                       18
<PAGE>

hereof, the Company will be permitted to classify such item of Indebtedness, or
later reclassify all or a portion of such item of Indebtedness, in any manner
that complies with this definition and Section 4.09 hereof. Indebtedness under
the Credit Agreement outstanding on the date on which Notes are first issued and
authenticated under this Indenture will be deemed to have been incurred on such
date in reliance on the exception provided by clause (a) of this definition.

      "PERMITTED INVESTMENT" means:

      (a) Investments in the Company or in any Restricted Subsidiary or
Investments by the Company or any Restricted Subsidiary in a Person, if as a
result of such Investment:

            (i) such Person becomes a Restricted Subsidiary; or

            (ii) such Person is merged, consolidated or amalgamated with or
      into, or transfers or conveys substantially all of its assets to, or is
      liquidated into, the Company or any Restricted Subsidiary,

      (b) Investments in the Notes;

      (c) Indebtedness owing to the Company or a Restricted Subsidiary described
under clause (e) of the definition of "Permitted Indebtedness;"

      (d) Temporary Cash Investments;

      (e) Investments acquired by the Company or any Restricted Subsidiary in
connection with an Asset Sale permitted under Section 4.10 hereof, to the extent
such Investments are non-cash consideration as permitted under said Section
4.10;

      (f) any Investment by the Company or a Restricted Subsidiary in a
Securitization Entity or any Investment by a Securitization Entity in any other
Person in connection with a Qualified Securitization Transaction; provided that
any Investment in a Securitization Entity is in the form of a Purchase Money
Note, equity interest or limited liability company interest;

      (g) Investments in existence on the date of this Indenture; and

      (h) in addition to the Investments described in clauses (a) through (g) of
this definition of "Permitted Investments," Investments in any Unrestricted
Subsidiary or in any joint venture or other entity in an amount not to exceed
$35,000,000 in the aggregate at any one time outstanding (with each such
Investment being valued as of the date made and without regard to subsequent
changes in value).

      "PERMITTED JUNIOR SECURITIES" means:

      (a) Qualified Capital Stock of the Company; or

      (b) debt securities of the Company that are subordinated to all Senior
Indebtedness and any debt securities issued in exchange for Senior Indebtedness
to the same extent as, or to a greater extent than, the Notes and the Guarantees
are subordinated to Senior Indebtedness pursuant to this Indenture, that have a
final maturity date and a weighted average life to maturity which is at least
six months greater than the Senior Indebtedness or the debt securities issued in
exchange for such Senior Indebtedness, as the case may be, and that are not
secured by a Lien on any assets.

                                       19
<PAGE>

      "PERSON" means any individual, corporation, limited liability company,
limited or general partnership, joint venture, association, joint-stock company,
trust, unincorporated organization or government or any agency or political
subdivision thereof.

      "PREFERRED STOCK" means, with respect to any Person, any Capital Stock of
any class or classes (however designated) which is preferred as to the payment
of dividends or distributions, or as to the distribution of assets upon any
voluntary or involuntary liquidation or dissolution of such Person, over the
Capital Stock of any other class in such Person.

      "PRIVATE PLACEMENT LEGEND" means the legend set forth in Section
2.06(g)(i) to be placed on all Notes issued under this Indenture except where
otherwise permitted by the provisions of this Indenture.

      "PURCHASE MONEY NOTE" means a promissory note of a Securitization Entity
evidencing amounts owed to the Company or any Restricted Subsidiary in
connection with a Qualified Securitization Transaction to a Securitization
Entity, which note shall be repaid from cash available to the Securitization
Entity other than amounts required to be established as reserves pursuant to
agreements, amounts paid to investors in respect of interest and principal and
amounts paid in connection with the purchase of newly generated receivables or
newly acquired equipment.

      "PURCHASE MONEY OBLIGATION" means any Indebtedness secured by a Lien on
assets related to the business of the Company or its Restricted Subsidiaries,
and any additions and accessions thereto, which are purchased by the Company or
any Restricted Subsidiary at any time after the Notes are issued; PROVIDED that:

      (a) the security agreement or conditional sales or other title retention
contract pursuant to which the Lien on such assets is created (collectively a
"Purchase Money Security Agreement") shall be entered into within 180 days after
the purchase or substantial completion of the construction of such assets and
shall at all times be confined solely to the assets so purchased or acquired,
any additions and accessions thereto and any proceeds therefrom;

      (b) at no time shall the aggregate principal amount of the outstanding
Indebtedness secured thereby be increased, except in connection with the
purchase of additions and accessions thereto and except in respect of fees and
other obligations in respect of such Indebtedness; and

            (c) (i) the aggregate outstanding principal amount of indebtedness
      secured thereby (determined on a per asset basis in the case of any
      additions and accessions) shall not at the time such Purchase Money
      Security Agreement is entered into exceed 100% of the purchase price to
      the Company or any Restricted Subsidiary of the assets subject thereto
      (including expenses); or

            (ii) the Indebtedness secured thereby shall be with recourse solely
      to the assets so purchased or acquired, any additions and accessions
      thereto and any proceeds therefrom.

      "QUALIFIED CAPITAL STOCK" of any Person means any and all Capital Stock of
such Person other than Redeemable Capital Stock.

      "QUALIFIED SECURITIZATION TRANSACTION" means any transaction or series of
transactions that may be entered into by the Company or any of its Restricted
Subsidiaries pursuant to which the Company or any of its Restricted Subsidiaries
may sell, convey or otherwise transfer to:

                                       20
<PAGE>

      (a) a Securitization Entity (in the case of a transfer by the Company or
any of its Restricted Subsidiaries); and

      (b) any other Person (in the case of a transfer by a Securitization
Entity),

      or may grant a security interest in any accounts receivable or equipment
(whether now existing or arising or acquired in the future) of the Company or
any of its Restricted Subsidiaries, and any assets related thereto, including,
without limitation, all collateral securing such accounts receivable and
equipment, all contracts and contract rights and all guarantees or other
obligations in respect of such accounts receivable and equipment, proceeds of
such accounts receivable and equipment and other assets (including contract
rights) which are customarily transferred or in respect of which security
interests are customarily granted in connection with asset securitization
transactions involving accounts receivable and equipment.

      "QIB" means a "qualified institutional buyer" as defined in Rule 144A.

      "RECEIVABLES FACILITY" means an off-balance sheet receivables purchase
facility entered into through a Securitization Entity.

      "RECORD DATE" means May 15 and November 15.

      "REDEEMABLE CAPITAL STOCK" means any Capital Stock that, either by its
terms or by the terms of any security into which it is convertible or
exchangeable or otherwise, is, or upon the happening of an event or passage of
time would be, required to be redeemed prior to any Stated Maturity of the
principal of the Notes or is redeemable at the option of the holder thereof at
any time prior to any such Stated Maturity, or is convertible into or
exchangeable for debt securities at any time prior to any such Stated Maturity
at the option of the holder thereof; PROVIDED, HOWEVER, that any Capital Stock
that would not constitute Redeemable Capital Stock but for the provisions
thereof giving the holders the right to require such Person to redeem or
repurchase such Capital Stock upon the occurrence of an Asset Sale or Change of
Control shall not be deemed to be Redeemable Capital Stock.

      "REFINANCING TRANSACTIONS" means:

      (a) entering into the Credit Agreement;

      (b) entering into the Receivables Facility;

      (c) the repayment of all amounts outstanding under all existing credit
agreements;

      (d) the redemption, within 60 days after the date of this Indenture, of
all the outstanding 8-7/8% Senior Notes due 2004 of the Company and the related
satisfaction and discharge of such notes; and

      (e) the redemption, within 60 days after the date of this Indenture, of
all the outstanding 9% Senior Subordinated Notes due 2003 of the Company and the
related satisfaction and discharge of such notes.

      "REGISTRATION RIGHTS AGREEMENT" means the Registration Rights Agreement,
dated as of May 22, 2001, by and among the Company and the other parties named
on the signature pages thereof, as such agreement may be amended, modified or
supplemented from time to time, and, with respect to any Additional Notes, one
or more registration rights agreements between the Company and the other parties
thereto, as such agreement(s) may be amended, modified or supplemented from time
to time, relating to

                                       21
<PAGE>

rights given by the Company to the purchasers of Additional Notes to register
such Additional Notes under the Securities Act.

      "REGULATION S" means Regulation S promulgated under the Securities Act.

      "REGULATION S GLOBAL NOTE" means a Regulation S Temporary Global Note or a
Regulation S Permanent Global Note, as appropriate.

      "REGULATION S PERMANENT GLOBAL NOTE" means a permanent Global Note in the
form of Exhibit A1 hereto bearing the Global Note Legend and the Private
Placement Legend and deposited with or on behalf of and registered in the name
of the Depositary or its nominee, issued in a denomination equal to the
outstanding principal amount of the Regulation S Temporary Global Note upon
expiration of the Restricted Period.

      "REGULATION S TEMPORARY GLOBAL NOTE" means a temporary Global Note in the
form of Exhibit A2 hereto bearing the Private Placement Legend and deposited
with or on behalf of and registered in the name of the Depositary or its
nominee, issued in a denomination equal to the outstanding principal amount of
the Notes initially sold in reliance on Rule 903 of Regulation S.

      "REGULATION S TEMPORARY GLOBAL NOTE LEGEND" means the legend set forth in
2.06(g)(iii), which is required to be placed on the Regulation S Temporary
Global Note issued under this Indenture.

      "RELATED PARTY" means:

      (a) any controlling stockholder, 50% (or more) owned Subsidiary, or
immediate family member (in the case of an individual) of any Permitted Holder;
or

      (b) any trust, corporation, partnership or other entity, the
beneficiaries, stockholders, partners, owners or Persons beneficially holding a
50% or more controlling interest of which consist of any one or more Permitted
Holders and/or such other Persons referred to in the immediately preceding
clause (a); or

      (c) any corporation or other entity owned by the former stockholders of
the Company that is created solely for the purpose of creating a holding company
whose only significant asset is 100% of the Capital Stock of the Company.

      "RESPONSIBLE OFFICER" means, when used with respect to the Trustee, any
officer within the corporate trust department of the Trustee, including any vice
president, assistant vice president, assistant secretary, assistant treasurer,
trust officer or any other officer of the Trustee who customarily performs
functions similar to those performed by the Persons who at the time shall be
officers, respectively, or to whom any corporate trust matter is referred
because of such person's knowledge of and familiarity with the particular
subject and who shall have direct responsibility for the administration of this
Indenture.

      "RESTRICTED DEFINITIVE NOTE" means a Definitive Note bearing the Private
Placement Legend.

      "RESTRICTED GLOBAL NOTE" means a Global Note bearing the Private Placement
Legend.

      "RESTRICTED INVESTMENT" means an Investment other than a Permitted
Investment.

      "RESTRICTED PERIOD" means the 40-day distribution compliance period as
defined in Regulation S.

                                       22
<PAGE>

      "RESTRICTED SUBSIDIARY" of a Person means any Subsidiary of the referent
Person that is not an Unrestricted Subsidiary.

      "RULE 144" means Rule 144 promulgated under the Securities Act.

      "RULE 144A" means Rule 144A promulgated under the Securities Act.

      "RULE 903" means Rule 903 promulgated under the Securities Act.

      "RULE 904" means Rule 904 promulgated under the Securities Act.

      "SECURITIES ACT" means the Securities Act of 1933, as amended and the
rules and regulations promulgated thereunder.

      "SECURITIZATION ENTITY" means any Person in which the Company or any
Restricted Subsidiary of the Company makes an Investment and to which the
Company or any Restricted Subsidiary of the Company transfers accounts
receivable or equipment (and related assets, including contract rights) which
engages in no activities other than in connection with the financing of accounts
receivable or equipment or related assets (including contract rights) and which
is designated by the Board of Directors as a Securitization Entity.

      "SENIOR INDEBTEDNESS" means:

      (a) The principal of, premium, if any, and interest (including interest
accruing after the filing of a petition initiating any proceeding under any
state, federal or foreign bankruptcy laws whether or not allowable as a claim in
such proceedings), fees, costs, expenses, reimbursements, indemnifications and
all other obligations on any Indebtedness of the Company or any Guarantor (other
than as otherwise provided in this definition), whether outstanding on the date
of this Indenture or thereafter created, incurred or assumed, and whether at any
time owing, actually or contingent, unless, in the case of any particular
Indebtedness, the instrument creating or evidencing the same or pursuant to
which the same is outstanding expressly provides that such Indebtedness shall
not be senior in right of payment to the Notes.

      (b) Without limiting the generality of the clause (a) of this definition,
"SENIOR INDEBTEDNESS" shall include the principal of, premium, if any, and
interest (including interest accruing after the filing of a petition initiating
any proceeding under any state, federal or foreign bankruptcy laws whether or
not allowable as a claim in such proceedings) on all obligations of every nature
of the Company or any Guarantor from time to time owed to the lenders under the
Credit Agreement; PROVIDED, HOWEVER, that any Indebtedness under any
refinancing, refunding, or replacement of the Credit Agreement shall not
constitute Senior Indebtedness to the extent that the Indebtedness thereunder is
expressly subordinate in right of payment to any other Indebtedness of the
Company.

      Notwithstanding clauses (a) and (b) above, "SENIOR INDEBTEDNESS" shall not
include:

      (a) Indebtedness evidenced by the Notes;

      (b) Indebtedness that is subordinate or junior in right of payment to any
Indebtedness of the Company;

      (c) Indebtedness which, when incurred and without respect to any election
under Section 1111(b) of Title 11, United States Code, is without recourse to
the Company;

                                       23
<PAGE>

      (d) Indebtedness which is represented by Redeemable Capital Stock;

      (e) any liability for foreign, federal, state, local or other taxes owed
or owing by the Company;

      (f) Indebtedness of the Company to a Subsidiary;

      (g) that portion of any Indebtedness which at the time of issuance is
issued in violation of this Indenture; and

      (h) the Company's 8-7/8% Senior Notes due 2004, the Company's 9% Senior
Subordinated Notes due 2003, the 15 1/2% Junior Subordinated Notes due 2003 and
the Company's 6% Convertible Subordinated Notes due 2004.

      "SHELF REGISTRATION STATEMENT" means the Shelf Registration Statement as
defined in the Registration Rights Agreement.

      "STANDARD SECURITIZATION UNDERTAKINGS" means representations, warranties,
covenants and indemnities entered into by the Company or any Restricted
Subsidiary of the Company which are reasonably customary in an accounts
receivable or equipment transaction.

      "STATED MATURITY" when used with respect to any Indebtedness or any
installment of interest thereon, means the dates specified in such Indebtedness
as the fixed date on which the principal of such Indebtedness or such
installment of interest, as the case may be, is due and payable.

      "SUBORDINATED INDEBTEDNESS" means Indebtedness of the Company subordinated
in right of payment to the Notes.

      "SUBSIDIARY" means any Person a majority of the equity ownership or the
Voting Stock of which is at the time owned, directly or indirectly, by the
Company or by one or more other Subsidiaries, or by the Company and one or more
other Subsidiaries.

      "S&P" means Standard & Poor's Ratings Group or any successor thereto.

      "TEMPORARY CASH INVESTMENTS" means:

      (a) any evidence of Indebtedness, maturing not more than one year after
the date of acquisition, issued by the United States of America, or an
instrumentality or agency thereof, and guaranteed fully as to principal,
premium, if any, and interest by the United States of America;

      (b) any certificate of deposit, maturing not more than one year after the
date of acquisition, issued by, or time deposit of, the Trustee or a commercial
banking institution that is a member of the Federal Reserve System and that has
combined capital and surplus and undivided profits of not less than
$500,000,000, whose debt has a rating, at the time as of which any investment
therein is made, of "P-l" (or higher) according to Moody's or any successor
rating agency or "A-l" (or higher) according to S&P or any successor rating
agency;

      (c) commercial paper, maturing not more than one year after the date of
acquisition, issued by a corporation organized and existing under the laws of
the United States of America with a rating, at the

                                       24
<PAGE>

time as of which any investment therein is made, of "P-1" (or higher) according
to Moody's or "A-l" (or higher) according to S&P and

      (d) any money market deposit accounts issued or offered by the Trustee or
a domestic commercial bank having capital and surplus in excess of $500,000,000.

      "TRUST INDENTURE ACT" means the Trust Indenture Act of 1939, as amended.

      "TRUSTEE" means the party named as such above until a successor replaces
it in accordance with the applicable provisions of this Indenture and thereafter
means the successor serving hereunder.

      "U.S. GOVERNMENT OBLIGATIONS" means direct obligations of, or obligations
guaranteed by, the United States of America, and the payment for which the
United States pledges its full faith and credit.

      "UNRESTRICTED DEFINITIVE NOTE" means one or more Definitive Notes that do
not bear and are not required to bear the Private Placement Legend.

      "UNRESTRICTED GLOBAL NOTE" means a permanent global Note in the form of
Exhibit A attached hereto that bears the Global Note Legend and that has the
"Schedule of Exchanges of Interests in the Global Note" attached thereto, and
that is deposited with or on behalf of and registered in the name of the
Depositary, representing a series of Notes that do not bear the Private
Placement Legend.

      "UNRESTRICTED SUBSIDIARY" means any Subsidiary that would but for this
definition of "Unrestricted Subsidiary" be a Restricted Subsidiary as to which
all of the following conditions apply:

      (a) neither the Company nor any of its other Restricted Subsidiaries
provides credit support for any Indebtedness of such Subsidiary (including any
undertaking, agreement or instrument evidencing such Indebtedness) other than
Permitted Investments and Standard Securitization Undertakings;

      (b) such Subsidiary is not liable, directly or indirectly, with respect to
any Indebtedness other than Unrestricted Subsidiary Indebtedness;

      (c) neither the Company nor any of its Restricted Subsidiaries has made an
Investment in such Subsidiary unless such Investment was permitted by Section
4.07 hereof; and

      (d) the Board of Directors of the Company, as provided below, shall have
designated such Subsidiary (including any newly formed or acquired Subsidiary)
to be an Unrestricted Subsidiary; PROVIDED that after giving effect to such
designation, such Unrestricted Subsidiary does not own, directly or indirectly,
any Capital Stock of any other Restricted Subsidiary. Any such designation by
the Board of Directors of the Company shall be evidenced to the Trustee by
filing with the Trustee a resolution of the Board of Directors giving effect to
such designation and an officer's certificate certifying that such designation
complies with the foregoing conditions.

      The Board of Directors of the Company may designate any Unrestricted
Subsidiary as a Restricted Subsidiary; PROVIDED that:

      (a) immediately after giving pro forma effect to such designation, the
Company could incur $1.00 of additional Indebtedness (other than Permitted
Indebtedness) pursuant to the restrictions under Section 4.09 hereof;

                                       25
<PAGE>

      (b) all Indebtedness of such Unrestricted Subsidiary shall be deemed to be
incurred on the date such Unrestricted Subsidiary becomes a Restricted
Subsidiary; and

      (c) the redesignation would not cause an Event of Default.

      Any Subsidiary of an Unrestricted Subsidiary shall be an Unrestricted
Subsidiary for purposes of this Indenture.

      "UNRESTRICTED SUBSIDIARY INDEBTEDNESS" of any Unrestricted Subsidiary
means Indebtedness of such Unrestricted Subsidiary:

      (a) as to which neither the Company nor any Restricted Subsidiary is
directly or indirectly liable (by virtue of the Company or any such Restricted
Subsidiary being the primary obligor on, guarantor of, or otherwise liable in
any respect to such Indebtedness) except to the extent of the Standard
Securitization Undertakings and any Permitted Investment;

      (b) which, upon the occurrence of a default with respect thereto, does not
result in, or permit any holder of any Indebtedness of the Company or any
Restricted Subsidiary to declare, a default on such Indebtedness of the Company
or any Restricted Subsidiary or cause the payment thereof to be accelerated or
payable prior to its Stated Maturity other than under the terms of any
Indebtedness existing on the date of this Indenture; and

      (c) as to which lenders have been notified in writing that they will not
have any recourse to the assets of the Company or the stock or assets of any of
its Restricted Subsidiaries, except to the extent of the Standard Securitization
Undertakings and any Permitted Investment.

      "U.S. PERSON" means a U.S. person as defined in Rule 902(k) under the
Securities Act.

      "VOTING STOCK" means stock of the class or classes pursuant to which the
holders thereof have the general voting power under ordinary circumstances to
elect at least a majority of the board of directors, managers or Trustees of a
corporation or other entity (irrespective of whether or not at the time stock of
any other class or classes shall have or might have voting power by reason of
the happening of any contingency).

SECTION 1.02      OTHER DEFINITIONS.

                                                         Defined in
              Term                                         Section

         "Asset Sale Offer"...................................3.09
         "Authentication Order"...............................2.02
         "Change of Control Offer"............................4.15
         "Change of Control Payment"..........................4.15
         "Change of Control Payment Date" ....................4.15
         "Covenant Defeasance"................................8.03
         "Defeasance".........................................8.02
         "Defeasance Redemption Date".........................8.04
         "DTC"................................................2.03
         "Event of Default"...................................6.01

                                       26
<PAGE>

         "Excess Proceeds"....................................4.10
         "incur"..............................................4.09
         "Initial Blockage Period" ...........................10.03
         "Defeasance" ........................................8.02
         "Non-payment Default"................................10.03
         "Note Amount"........................................4.10
         "Offer"..............................................4.10
         "Offer Amount".......................................3.09
         "Offer Period".......................................3.09
         "Offered Price"......................................4.10
         "Pari Passu Debt Amount".............................4.10
         "Pari Passu Offer"...................................4.10
         "Participating Broker-Dealer"........................2.06(b)(iv)(c)
         "Paying Agent".......................................2.03
         "Payment Blockage Notice"............................10.03
         "Payment Blockage Period"............................10.03
         "Permitted Payments".................................4.09
         "Purchase Date"......................................3.09
         "Refinance"..........................................4.07
         "Registrar"..........................................2.03
         "Representative".....................................10.02
         "Required Filing Dates"..............................4.03
         "Restricted Payments"................................4.07
         "Surviving Entity"...................................5.01

SECTION 1.03      INCORPORATION OF TIA PROVISIONS.

      Whenever this Indenture refers to a provision of the TIA, the provision is
incorporated by reference in and made a part of this Indenture.

      The following TIA terms used in this Indenture have the following
meanings:

      "INDENTURE SECURITIES" means the Notes;

      "INDENTURE SECURITY HOLDER" means a Holder of a Note;

      "INDENTURE TO BE QUALIFIED" means this Indenture;

      "INDENTURE TRUSTEE" or "INSTITUTIONAL TRUSTEE" means the Trustee; and

      "OBLIGOR" on the Notes means the Company and any successor obligor upon
the Notes.

      All other terms used in this Indenture that are defined by the TIA,
defined by TIA reference to another statute or defined by Commission rule under
the TIA have the meanings so assigned to them.

SECTION 1.04      RULES OF CONSTRUCTION.

      Unless the context otherwise requires:

                  (1) a term has the meaning assigned to it;

                                       27
<PAGE>

                  (2) an accounting term not otherwise defined has the meaning
            assigned to it in accordance with GAAP;

                  (3) "or" is not exclusive;

                  (4) words in the singular include the plural, and in the
            plural include the singular;

                  (5) provisions apply to successive events and transactions;
            and

                  (6) references to sections of or rules under the Securities
            Act shall be deemed to include substitute, replacement of successor
            sections or rules adopted by the Commission from time to time.

                                    ARTICLE 2
                                    THE NOTES

SECTION 2.01      FORM AND DATING.

      (a) GENERAL. The Notes and the Trustee's certificate of authentication
shall be substantially in the form of Exhibit A1 hereto. The Notes may have
notations, legends or endorsements required by law, stock exchange rule or
usage. Each Note shall be dated the date of its authentication. The Notes shall
be in denominations of $1,000 and integral multiples of $1,000.

      The terms and provisions contained in the Notes shall constitute, and are
hereby expressly made, a part of this Indenture and the Company, the Guarantors
and the Trustee, by their execution and delivery of this Indenture, expressly
agree to such terms and provisions and to be bound thereby. However, to the
extent any provision of any Note conflicts with the express provisions of this
Indenture, the provisions of this Indenture shall govern and be controlling.

      (b) GLOBAL NOTES. Notes issued in global form shall be substantially in
the form of Exhibit A1 or A2 attached hereto (including the Global Note Legend
thereon and the "Schedule of Exchanges of Interests in the Global Note" attached
thereto). Notes issued in definitive form shall be substantially in the form of
Exhibit A1 attached hereto (but without the Global Note Legend thereon and
without the "Schedule of Exchanges of Interests in the Global Note" attached
thereto). Each Global Note shall represent such of the outstanding Notes as
shall be specified therein and each shall provide that it shall represent the
aggregate principal amount of outstanding Notes from time to time endorsed
thereon and that the aggregate principal amount of outstanding Notes represented
thereby may from time to time be reduced or increased, as appropriate, to
reflect exchanges and redemptions. Any endorsement of a Global Note to reflect
the amount of any increase or decrease in the aggregate principal amount of
outstanding Notes represented thereby shall be made by the Trustee or the Note
Custodian, at the direction of the Trustee, in accordance with instructions
given by the Holder thereof as required by Section 2.06 hereof.

      (c) TEMPORARY GLOBAL NOTES. Notes offered and sold in reliance on
Regulation S shall be issued initially in the form of the Regulation S Temporary
Global Note, which shall be deposited on behalf of the purchasers of the Notes
represented thereby with the Trustee, at its New York office, as custodian for
the Depositary, and registered in the name of the Depositary or the nominee of
the Depositary for the accounts of designated agents holding on behalf of
Euroclear or Clearstream, duly executed by the Company and authenticated by the
Trustee as hereinafter provided. The Restricted Period shall be terminated upon
the receipt by the Trustee of (i) a written certificate from the Depositary,

                                       28
<PAGE>

together with copies of certificates from Euroclear and Clearstream certifying
that they have received certification of non-United States beneficial ownership
of 100% of the aggregate principal amount of the Regulation S Temporary Global
Note (except to the extent of any beneficial owners thereof who acquired an
interest therein during the Restricted Period pursuant to another exemption from
registration under the Securities Act and who will take delivery of a beneficial
ownership interest in a 144A Global Note or an IAI Global Note bearing a Private
Placement Legend, all as contemplated by Section 2.06(a)(ii) hereof), and (ii)
an Officer's Certificate from the Company. Following the termination of the
Restricted Period, beneficial interests in the Regulation S Temporary Global
Note shall be exchanged for beneficial interests in Regulation S Permanent
Global Notes pursuant to the Applicable Procedures. Simultaneously with the
authentication of Regulation S Permanent Global Notes, the Trustee shall cancel
the Regulation S Temporary Global Note. The aggregate principal amount of the
Regulation S Temporary Global Note and the Regulation S Permanent Global Notes
may from time to time be increased or decreased by adjustments made on the
records of the Trustee and the Depositary or its nominee, as the case may be, in
connection with transfers of interest as hereinafter provided.

      (d) EUROCLEAR AND CLEARSTREAM PROCEDURES APPLICABLE. The provisions of the
"Operating Procedures of the Euroclear System" and "Terms and Conditions
Governing Use of Euroclear" and the "General Terms and Conditions of
Clearstream" and "Customer Handbook" of Clearstream shall be applicable to
transfers of beneficial interests in the Regulation S Global Notes that are held
by Participants through Euroclear or Clearstream.

      (D) CUSIP NUMBERS. The Company in issuing the Notes may use "CUSIP"
numbers (if then generally in use), and, if so, the Trustee shall use "CUSIP"
numbers in notices of redemption as a convenience to Holders; PROVIDED that any
such notice may state that no representation is made as to the correctness of
such numbers either as printed on the Notes or as contained in any notice of a
redemption and that reliance may be placed only on the other identification
numbers printed on the Notes, and any such redemption shall not be affected by
any defect in or omission of such numbers. The Company will promptly notify the
Trustee of any change in the "CUSIP" numbers.

SECTION 2.02      EXECUTION AND AUTHENTICATION.

      One Officer shall sign the Notes for the Company by manual or facsimile
signature. The Company's seal shall be reproduced on the Notes and may be in
facsimile form.

      If an Officer whose signature is on a Note no longer holds that office at
the time a Note is authenticated, the Note shall nevertheless be valid.

      A Note shall not be valid until authenticated by the manual signature of
the Trustee. The signature shall be conclusive evidence that the Note has been
authenticated under this Indenture.

      The Trustee shall, upon a written order of the Company signed by one
Officer (an "AUTHENTICATION ORDER"), authenticate Notes for original issue up to
the aggregate principal amount stated in paragraph 4 of the Notes, plus
Additional Notes issued pursuant to this Section 2.02 and Section 4.09 hereof
PROVIDED that the aggregate principal amount of Notes issued under this
Indenture may not exceed $500,000,000 except as provided in Section 2.07 hereof.

      The Trustee may appoint an authenticating agent acceptable to the Company
to authenticate Notes. An authenticating agent may authenticate Notes whenever
the Trustee may do so. Each reference in this Indenture to authentication by the
Trustee includes authentication by such agent. An authenticating agent has the
same rights as an Agent to deal with Holders or an Affiliate of the Company.

                                       29
<PAGE>

SECTION 2.03      REGISTRAR AND PAYING AGENT.

      The Company shall maintain an office or agency where Notes may be
presented for registration of transfer or for exchange ("REGISTRAR") and an
office or agency where Notes may be presented for payment ("PAYING AGENT"). The
Registrar shall keep a register of the Notes and of their transfer and exchange.
The Company may appoint one or more co-registrars and one or more additional
paying agents. The term "Registrar" includes any co-registrar and the term
"Paying Agent" includes any additional paying agent. The Company may change any
Paying Agent or Registrar without notice to any Holder. The Company shall notify
the Trustee in writing of the name and address of any Agent not a party to this
Indenture. If the Company fails to appoint or maintain another entity as
Registrar or Paying Agent, the Trustee shall act as such. The Company or any of
its Subsidiaries may act as Paying Agent or Registrar.

      The Company initially appoints The Depository Trust Company ("DTC") to act
as Depositary with respect to the Global Notes.

      The Company initially appoints the Trustee to act as the Registrar and
Paying Agent and to act as Note Custodian with respect to the Global Notes.

SECTION 2.04      PAYING AGENT TO HOLD MONEY IN TRUST.

      The Company shall require each Paying Agent other than the Trustee to
agree in writing that the Paying Agent will hold in trust for the benefit of
Holders or the Trustee all money held by the Paying Agent for the payment of
principal, premium or Liquidated Damages, if any, or interest on the Notes, and
will notify the Trustee of any default by the Company in making any such
payment. While any such default continues, the Trustee may require a Paying
Agent to pay all money held by it to the Trustee. The Company at any time may
require a Paying Agent to pay all money held by it to the Trustee. Upon payment
over to the Trustee, the Paying Agent (if other than the Company or a
Subsidiary) shall have no further liability for the money. If the Company or a
Subsidiary acts as Paying Agent, it shall segregate and hold in a separate trust
fund for the benefit of the Holders all money held by it as Paying Agent. Upon
any bankruptcy or reorganization proceedings relating to the Company, the
Trustee shall serve as Paying Agent for the Notes.

SECTION 2.05      HOLDER LISTS.

      The Trustee shall preserve in as current a form as is reasonably
practicable the most recent list available to it of the names and addresses of
all Holders and shall otherwise comply with TIA Section 312(a). If the Trustee
is not the Registrar, the Company shall furnish to the Trustee at least seven
Business Days before each Interest Payment Date and at such other times as the
Trustee may request in writing, a list in such form and as of such date as the
Trustee may reasonably require of the names and addresses of the Holders of
Notes and the Company shall otherwise comply with TIA Section 312(a).

SECTION 2.06      TRANSFER AND EXCHANGE.

      (a) TRANSFER AND EXCHANGE OF GLOBAL NOTES. A Global Note may not be
transferred as a whole except by the Depositary to a nominee of the Depositary,
by a nominee of the Depositary to the Depositary or to another nominee of the
Depositary, the Depositary or any such nominee to a successor Depositary or a
nominee of such successor Depositary. All Global Notes will be exchanged by the
Company for Definitive Notes if (i) the Company delivers to the Trustee notice
from the Depositary that it is unwilling or unable to continue to act as
Depositary or that it is no longer a clearing agency registered

                                       30
<PAGE>

under the Exchange Act and, in either case, a successor Depositary is not
appointed by the Company within 90 days after the date of such notice from the
Depositary or (ii) the Company in its sole discretion determines that the Global
Notes (in whole but not in part) should be exchanged for Definitive Notes and
delivers a written notice to such effect to the Trustee; PROVIDED that in no
event shall the Regulation S Temporary Global Note be exchanged by the Company
for Definitive Notes prior to (x) the expiration of the Restricted Period and
(y) the receipt by the Registrar of any certification required pursuant to Rule
903(b)(3)(ii)(B) under the Securities Act. Upon the occurrence of any of the
preceding events in (i) or (ii) above, Definitive Notes shall be issued in such
names as the Depositary shall instruct the Trustee. Global Notes also may be
exchanged or replaced, in whole or in part, as provided in Sections 2.07 and
2.10 hereof. Every Note authenticated and delivered in exchange for, or in lieu
of, a Global Note or any portion thereof, pursuant to this Section 2.06 or
Section 2.07 or 2.10 hereof, shall be authenticated and delivered in the form
of, and shall be, a Global Note, except as provided in this Section 2.06. A
Global Note may not be exchanged for another Note other than as provided in this
Section 2.06(a), however, beneficial interests in a Global Note may be
transferred and exchanged as provided in Section 2.06(b), (c) or (f) hereof.

      (b) TRANSFER AND EXCHANGE OF BENEFICIAL INTERESTS IN THE GLOBAL NOTES. The
transfer and exchange of beneficial interests in the Global Notes shall be
effected through the Depositary, in accordance with the provisions of this
Indenture and the Applicable Procedures. Beneficial interests in the Restricted
Global Notes shall be subject to restrictions on transfer comparable to those
set forth herein to the extent required by the Securities Act. Transfers of
beneficial interests in the Global Notes also shall require compliance with
either subparagraph (i) or (ii) below, as applicable, as well as one or more of
the other following subparagraphs, as applicable:

            (i) TRANSFER OF BENEFICIAL INTERESTS IN THE SAME GLOBAL NOTE.
      Beneficial interests in any Restricted Global Note may be transferred to
      Persons who take delivery thereof in the form of a beneficial interest in
      the same Restricted Global Note in accordance with the transfer
      restrictions set forth in the Private Placement Legend; PROVIDED, HOWEVER,
      that prior to the expiration of the Restricted Period, transfers of
      beneficial interests in the Temporary Regulation S Global Note may not be
      made to a U.S. Person or for the account or benefit of a U.S. Person
      (other than an Initial Purchaser). Beneficial interests in any
      Unrestricted Global Note may be transferred to Persons who take delivery
      thereof in the form of a beneficial interest in an Unrestricted Global
      Note. No written orders or instructions shall be required to be delivered
      to the Registrar to effect the transfers described in this Section
      2.06(b)(i).

            (ii) ALL OTHER TRANSFERS AND EXCHANGES OF BENEFICIAL INTERESTS IN
      GLOBAL NOTES. In connection with all transfers and exchanges of beneficial
      interests that are not subject to Section 2.06(b)(i) above, the transferor
      of such beneficial interest must deliver to the Registrar either (A) (1) a
      written order from a Participant or an Indirect Participant given to the
      Depositary in accordance with the Applicable Procedures directing the
      Depositary to credit or cause to be credited a beneficial interest in
      another Global Note in an amount equal to the beneficial interest to be
      transferred or exchanged and (2) instructions given in accordance with the
      Applicable Procedures containing information regarding the Participant
      account to be credited with such increase or (B) (1) a written order from
      a Participant or an Indirect Participant given to the Depositary in
      accordance with the Applicable Procedures directing the Depositary to
      cause to be issued a Definitive Note in an amount equal to the beneficial
      interest to be transferred or exchanged and (2) instructions given by the
      Depositary to the Registrar containing information regarding the Person in
      whose name such Definitive Note shall be registered to effect the transfer
      or exchange referred to in (1) above; PROVIDED that in no event

                                       31
<PAGE>

      shall Definitive Notes be issued upon the transfer or exchange of
      beneficial interests in the Regulation S Temporary Global Note prior to
      (x) the expiration of the Restricted Period and (y) the receipt by the
      Registrar of any certification required pursuant to Rule 903 under the
      Securities Act. Upon consummation of an Exchange Offer by the Company in
      accordance with Section 2.06(f) hereof, the requirements of this Section
      2.06(b)(ii) shall be deemed to have been satisfied upon receipt by the
      Registrar of the instructions contained in the Letter of Transmittal
      delivered by the Holder of such beneficial interests in the Restricted
      Global Notes. Upon satisfaction of all of the requirements for transfer or
      exchange of beneficial interests in Global Notes contained in this
      Indenture and the Notes or otherwise applicable under the Securities Act,
      the Trustee shall adjust the principal amount of the relevant Global
      Note(s) pursuant to Section 2.06(h) hereof.

            (iii) TRANSFER OF BENEFICIAL INTERESTS TO ANOTHER RESTRICTED GLOBAL
      NOTE. A beneficial interest in any Restricted Global Note may be
      transferred to a Person who takes delivery thereof in the form of a
      beneficial interest in another Restricted Global Note if the transfer
      complies with the requirements of Section 2.06(b)(ii) above and the
      Registrar receives the following:

                  (A) if the transferee will take delivery in the form of a
            beneficial interest in the 144A Global Note, then the transferor
            must deliver a certificate in the form of Exhibit B hereto,
            including the certifications in item (1) thereof;

                  (B) if the transferee will take delivery in the form of a
            beneficial interest in the Regulation S Temporary Global Note or the
            Regulation S Global Note, then the transferor must deliver a
            certificate in the form of Exhibit B hereto, including the
            certifications in item (2) thereof; and

                  (C) if the transferee will take delivery in the form of a
            beneficial interest in the IAI Global Note, then the transferor must
            deliver a certificate in the form of Exhibit B hereto, including the
            certifications and certificates and Opinion of Counsel required by
            item (3) thereof, if applicable.

            (iv) TRANSFER AND EXCHANGE OF BENEFICIAL INTERESTS IN A RESTRICTED
      GLOBAL NOTE FOR BENEFICIAL INTERESTS IN THE UNRESTRICTED GLOBAL NOTE. A
      beneficial interest in any Restricted Global Note may be exchanged by any
      holder thereof for a beneficial interest in an Unrestricted Global Note or
      transferred to a Person who takes delivery thereof in the form of a
      beneficial interest in an Unrestricted Global Note if the exchange or
      transfer complies with the requirements of Section 2.06(b)(ii) above, and:

                  (A) such exchange or transfer is effected pursuant to the
            Exchange Offer in accordance with the Registration Rights Agreement
            and the holder of the beneficial interest to be transferred, in the
            case of an exchange, or the transferee, in the case of a transfer,
            certifies in the applicable Letter of Transmittal that it is not (1)
            a broker-dealer, (2) a Person participating in the distribution of
            the Exchange Notes or (3) a Person who is an affiliate (as defined
            in Rule 144) of the Company;

                  (B) such transfer is effected pursuant to the Shelf
            Registration Statement in accordance with the Registration Rights
            Agreement;

                                       32
<PAGE>

                  (C) such transfer is effected by a Participating Broker-Dealer
            (as defined in the Registration Rights Agreement) pursuant to the
            Exchange Offer Registration Statement in accordance with the
            Registration Rights Agreement; or

                  (D) the Registrar receives the following:

                        (1) if the holder of such beneficial interest in a
                  Restricted Global Note proposes to exchange such beneficial
                  interest for a beneficial interest in an Unrestricted Global
                  Note, a certificate from such holder in the form of Exhibit C
                  hereto, including the certifications in item (1)(a) thereof;
                  or

                        (2) if the holder of such beneficial interest in a
                  Restricted Global Note proposes to transfer such beneficial
                  interest to a Person who shall take delivery thereof in the
                  form of a beneficial interest in an Unrestricted Global Note,
                  a certificate from such holder in the form of Exhibit B
                  hereto, including the certifications in item (4) thereof,

      and, in each such case set forth in this subparagraph (D), if the
      Registrar so requests or if the Applicable Procedures so require, an
      Opinion of Counsel in form reasonably acceptable to the Registrar to the
      effect that such exchange or transfer is in compliance with the Securities
      Act and that the restrictions on transfer contained herein and in the
      Private Placement Legend are no longer required in order to maintain
      compliance with the Securities Act.

      If any such transfer is effected pursuant to subparagraph (B) or (D) above
at a time when an Unrestricted Global Note has not yet been issued, the Company
shall issue and, upon receipt of an Authentication Order in accordance with
Section 2.02 hereof, the Trustee shall authenticate one or more Unrestricted
Global Notes in an aggregate principal amount equal to the aggregate principal
amount of beneficial interests transferred pursuant to subparagraph (B) or (D)
above.

      Beneficial interests in an Unrestricted Global Note cannot be exchanged
for, or transferred to Persons who take delivery thereof in the form of, a
beneficial interest in a Restricted Global Note.

      (c) TRANSFER OR EXCHANGE OF BENEFICIAL INTERESTS FOR DEFINITIVE NOTES.

            (i) BENEFICIAL INTERESTS IN RESTRICTED GLOBAL NOTES TO RESTRICTED
      DEFINITIVE NOTES. If any holder of a beneficial interest in a Restricted
      Global Note proposes to exchange such beneficial interest for a Restricted
      Definitive Note or to transfer such beneficial interest to a Person who
      takes delivery thereof in the form of a Restricted Definitive Note, then,
      upon receipt by the Registrar of the following documentation:

                  (A) if the holder of such beneficial interest in a Restricted
            Global Note proposes to exchange such beneficial interest for a
            Restricted Definitive Note, a certificate from such holder in the
            form of Exhibit C hereto, including the certifications in item
            (2)(a) thereof;

                  (B) if such beneficial interest is being transferred to a QIB
            in accordance with Rule 144A under the Securities Act, a certificate
            to the effect set forth in Exhibit B hereto, including the
            certifications in item (1) thereof;

                                       33
<PAGE>

                  (C) if such beneficial interest is being transferred to a
            Non-U.S. Person in an offshore transaction in accordance with Rule
            903 or Rule 904 under the Securities Act, a certificate to the
            effect set forth in Exhibit B hereto, including the certifications
            in item (2) thereof;

                  (D) if such beneficial interest is being transferred pursuant
            to an exemption from the registration requirements of the Securities
            Act in accordance with Rule 144 under the Securities Act, a
            certificate to the effect set forth in Exhibit B hereto, including
            the certifications in item (3)(a) thereof;

                  (E) if such beneficial interest is being transferred to an
            Institutional Accredited Investor in reliance on an exemption from
            the registration requirements of the Securities Act other than those
            listed in subparagraphs (B) through (D) above, a certificate to the
            effect set forth in Exhibit B hereto, including the certifications,
            certificates and Opinion of Counsel required by item (3) thereof, if
            applicable;

                  (F) if such beneficial interest is being transferred to the
            Company or any of its Subsidiaries, a certificate to the effect set
            forth in Exhibit B hereto, including the certifications in item
            (3)(b) thereof; or

                  (G) if such beneficial interest is being transferred pursuant
            to an effective registration statement under the Securities Act, a
            certificate to the effect set forth in Exhibit B hereto, including
            the certifications in item (3)(c) thereof,

      the Trustee shall cause the aggregate principal amount of the applicable
      Global Note to be reduced accordingly pursuant to Section 2.06(h) hereof,
      and the Company shall execute and the Trustee shall authenticate and
      deliver to the Person designated in the instructions a Definitive Note in
      the appropriate principal amount. Any Definitive Note issued in exchange
      for a beneficial interest in a Restricted Global Note pursuant to this
      Section 2.06(c) shall be registered in such name or names and in such
      authorized denomination or denominations as the holder of such beneficial
      interest shall instruct the Registrar through instructions from the
      Depositary and the Participant or Indirect Participant. The Trustee shall
      deliver such Definitive Notes to the Persons in whose names such Notes are
      so registered. Any Definitive Note issued in exchange for a beneficial
      interest in a Restricted Global Note pursuant to this Section 2.06(c)(i)
      shall bear the Private Placement Legend and shall be subject to all
      restrictions on transfer contained therein.

            (ii) BENEFICIAL INTERESTS IN THE REGULATION S TEMPORARY GLOBAL NOTE
      TO DEFINITIVE NOTES. Notwithstanding Sections 2.06(c)(i)(A) and (C)
      hereof, a beneficial interest in the Regulation S Temporary Global Note
      may not be exchanged for a Definitive Note or transferred to a Person who
      takes delivery thereof in the form of a Definitive Note prior to (x) the
      expiration of the Restricted Period and (y) the receipt by the Registrar
      of any certification required pursuant to Rule 903(b)(3)(ii)(B) under the
      Securities Act, except in the case of a transfer pursuant to an exemption
      from the registration requirements of the Securities Act other than Rule
      903 or Rule 904.

            (iii) BENEFICIAL INTERESTS IN RESTRICTED GLOBAL NOTES TO
      UNRESTRICTED DEFINITIVE NOTES. A holder of a beneficial interest in a
      Restricted Global Note may exchange such beneficial interest for an
      Unrestricted Definitive Note or may transfer such beneficial interest to a
      Person who takes delivery thereof in the form of an Unrestricted
      Definitive Note only if:

                                       34
<PAGE>

                  (A) such exchange or transfer is effected pursuant to the
            Exchange Offer in accordance with the Registration Rights Agreement
            and the holder of such beneficial interest, in the case of an
            exchange, or the transferee, in the case of a transfer, certifies in
            the applicable Letter of Transmittal that it is not (1) a
            broker-dealer, (2) a Person participating in the distribution of the
            Exchange Notes or (3) a Person who is an affiliate (as defined in
            Rule 144) of the Company;

                  (B) such transfer is effected pursuant to the Shelf
            Registration Statement in accordance with the Registration Rights
            Agreement;

                  (C) such transfer is effected by a Participating Broker-Dealer
            pursuant to the Exchange Offer Registration Statement in accordance
            with the Registration Rights Agreement; or

                  (D) the Registrar receives the following:

                        (1) if the holder of such beneficial interest in a
                  Restricted Global Note proposes to exchange such beneficial
                  interest for a Definitive Note that does not bear the Private
                  Placement Legend, a certificate from such holder in the form
                  of Exhibit C hereto, including the certifications in item
                  (1)(b) thereof; or

                        (2) if the holder of such beneficial interest in a
                  Restricted Global Note proposes to transfer such beneficial
                  interest to a Person who shall take delivery thereof in the
                  form of a Definitive Note that does not bear the Private
                  Placement Legend, a certificate from such holder in the form
                  of Exhibit B hereto, including the certifications in item (4)
                  thereof,

      and, in each such case set forth in this subparagraph (D), if the
      Registrar so requests or it the Applicable Procedures so require, an
      Opinion of Counsel in form reasonably acceptable to the Registrar to the
      effect that such exchange or transfer is in compliance with the Securities
      Act and that the restrictions on transfer contained herein and in the
      Private Placement Legend are no longer required in order to maintain
      compliance with the Securities Act.

            (iv) BENEFICIAL INTERESTS IN UNRESTRICTED GLOBAL NOTES TO
      UNRESTRICTED DEFINITIVE NOTES. If any holder of a beneficial interest in
      an Unrestricted Global Note proposes to exchange such beneficial interest
      for a Definitive Note or to transfer such beneficial interest to a Person
      who takes delivery thereof in the form of a Definitive Note, then, upon
      satisfaction of the conditions set forth in Section 2.06(b)(ii) hereof,
      the Trustee shall cause the aggregate principal amount of the applicable
      Global Note to be reduced accordingly pursuant to Section 2.06(h) hereof,
      and the Company shall execute and the Trustee shall authenticate and
      deliver to the Person designated in the instructions a Definitive Note in
      the appropriate principal amount. Any Definitive Note issued in exchange
      for a beneficial interest pursuant to this Section 2.06(c)(iv) shall be
      registered in such name or names and in such authorized denomination or
      denominations as the holder of such beneficial interest shall instruct the
      Registrar through instructions from the Depositary and the Participant or
      Indirect Participant. The Trustee shall deliver such Definitive Notes to
      the Persons in whose names such Notes are so registered. Any Definitive
      Note issued in exchange for a beneficial interest pursuant to this Section
      2.06(c)(iv) shall not bear the Private Placement Legend.

                                       35
<PAGE>

      (d) TRANSFER AND EXCHANGE OF DEFINITIVE NOTES FOR BENEFICIAL INTERESTS.

            (i) RESTRICTED DEFINITIVE NOTES TO BENEFICIAL INTERESTS IN
      RESTRICTED GLOBAL NOTES. If any Holder of a Restricted Definitive Note
      proposes to exchange such Note for a beneficial interest in a Restricted
      Global Note or to transfer such Restricted Definitive Notes to a Person
      who takes delivery thereof in the form of a beneficial interest in a
      Restricted Global Note, then, upon receipt by the Registrar of the
      following documentation:

                  (A) if the Holder of such Restricted Definitive Note proposes
            to exchange such Note for a beneficial interest in a Restricted
            Global Note, a certificate from such Holder in the form of Exhibit C
            hereto, including the certifications in item (2)(b) thereof;

                  (B) if such Restricted Definitive Note is being transferred to
            a QIB in accordance with Rule 144A under the Securities Act, a
            certificate to the effect set forth in Exhibit B hereto, including
            the certifications in item (1) thereof;

                  (C) if such Restricted Definitive Note is being transferred to
            a Non-U.S. Person in an offshore transaction in accordance with Rule
            903 or Rule 904 under the Securities Act, a certificate to the
            effect set forth in Exhibit B hereto, including the certifications
            in item (2) thereof;

                  (D) if such Restricted Definitive Note is being transferred
            pursuant to an exemption from the registration requirements of the
            Securities Act in accordance with Rule 144 under the Securities Act,
            a certificate to the effect set forth in Exhibit B hereto, including
            the certifications in item (3)(a) thereof;

                  (E) if such Restricted Definitive Note is being transferred to
            an Institutional Accredited Investor in reliance on an exemption
            from the registration requirements of the Securities Act other than
            those listed in subparagraphs (B) through (D) above, a certificate
            to the effect set forth in Exhibit B hereto, including the
            certifications, certificates and Opinion of Counsel required by item
            (3) thereof, if applicable;

                  (F) if such Restricted Definitive Note is being transferred to
            the Company or any of its Subsidiaries, a certificate to the effect
            set forth in Exhibit B hereto, including the certifications in item
            (3)(b) thereof; or

                  (G) if such Restricted Definitive Note is being transferred
            pursuant to an effective registration statement under the Securities
            Act, a certificate to the effect set forth in Exhibit B hereto,
            including the certifications in item (3)(c) thereof,

      the Trustee shall cancel the Restricted Definitive Note, increase or cause
      to be increased the aggregate principal amount of, in the case of clause
      (A) above, the appropriate Restricted Global Note, in the case of clause
      (B) above, the 144A Global Note, and in the case of clause (C) above, the
      Regulation S Global Note and, in all other cases, the IAI Global Note.

            (ii) RESTRICTED DEFINITIVE NOTES TO BENEFICIAL INTERESTS IN
      UNRESTRICTED GLOBAL NOTES. A Holder of a Restricted Definitive Note may
      exchange such Note for a beneficial interest in an Unrestricted Global
      Note or transfer such Restricted Definitive Note to a Person who takes
      delivery thereof in the form of a beneficial interest in an Unrestricted
      Global Note only if:

                                       36
<PAGE>

                  (A) such exchange or transfer is effected pursuant to the
            Exchange Offer in accordance with the Registration Rights Agreement
            and the Holder, in the case of an exchange, or the transferee, in
            the case of a transfer, certifies in the applicable Letter of
            Transmittal that it is not (1) a broker-dealer, (2) a Person
            participating in the distribution of the Exchange Notes or (3) a
            Person who is an affiliate (as defined in Rule 144) of the Company;

                  (B) such transfer is effected pursuant to the Shelf
            Registration Statement in accordance with the Registration Rights
            Agreement;

                  (C) such transfer is effected by a Participating Broker-Dealer
            pursuant to the Exchange Offer Registration Statement in accordance
            with the Registration Rights Agreement; or

                  (D) the Registrar receives the following:

                        (1) if the Holder of such Definitive Notes proposes to
                  exchange such Notes for a beneficial interest in the
                  Unrestricted Global Note, a certificate from such Holder in
                  the form of Exhibit C hereto, including the certifications in
                  item (1)(c) thereof; or

                        (2) if the Holder of such Definitive Notes proposes to
                  transfer such Notes to a Person who shall take delivery
                  thereof in the form of a beneficial interest in the
                  Unrestricted Global Note, a certificate from such Holder in
                  the form of Exhibit B hereto, including the certifications in
                  item (4) thereof,

      and, in each such case set forth in this subparagraph (D), if the
      Registrar so requests or if the Applicable Procedures so require, an
      Opinion of Counsel in form reasonably acceptable to the Registrar to the
      effect that such exchange or transfer is in compliance with the Securities
      Act and that the restrictions on transfer contained herein and in the
      Private Placement Legend are no longer required in order to maintain
      compliance with the Securities Act.

      Upon satisfaction of the conditions of any of the subparagraphs in this
      Section 2.06(d)(ii), the Trustee shall cancel the Definitive Notes and
      increase or cause to be increased the aggregate principal amount of the
      Unrestricted Global Note.

            (iii) UNRESTRICTED DEFINITIVE NOTES TO BENEFICIAL INTERESTS IN
      UNRESTRICTED GLOBAL NOTES. A Holder of an Unrestricted Definitive Note may
      exchange such Note for a beneficial interest in an Unrestricted Global
      Note or transfer such Definitive Notes to a Person who takes delivery
      thereof in the form of a beneficial interest in an Unrestricted Global
      Note at any time. Upon receipt of a request for such an exchange or
      transfer, the Trustee shall cancel the applicable Unrestricted Definitive
      Note and increase or cause to be increased the aggregate principal amount
      of one of the Unrestricted Global Notes.

            If any such exchange or transfer from a Definitive Note to a
      beneficial interest is effected pursuant to subparagraphs (ii)(B), (ii)(D)
      or (iii) above at a time when an Unrestricted Global Note has not yet been
      issued, the Company shall issue and, upon receipt of an Authentication
      Order in accordance with Section 2.02 hereof, the Trustee shall
      authenticate one or more Unrestricted Global Notes in an aggregate
      principal amount equal to the principal amount of Definitive Notes so
      transferred.

                                       37
<PAGE>

      (e) TRANSFER AND EXCHANGE OF DEFINITIVE NOTES FOR DEFINITIVE NOTES. Upon
request by a Holder of Definitive Notes and such Holder's compliance with the
provisions of this Section 2.06(e), the Registrar shall register the transfer or
exchange of Definitive Notes. Prior to such registration of transfer or
exchange, the requesting Holder shall present or surrender to the Registrar the
Definitive Notes duly endorsed or accompanied by a written instruction of
transfer in form satisfactory to the Registrar duly executed by such Holder or
by its attorney, duly authorized in writing. In addition, the requesting Holder
shall provide any additional certifications, documents and information, as
applicable, required pursuant to the following provisions of this Section
2.06(e).

            (i) RESTRICTED DEFINITIVE NOTES TO RESTRICTED DEFINITIVE NOTES. Any
      Restricted Definitive Note may be transferred to and registered in the
      name of Persons who take delivery thereof in the form of a Restricted
      Definitive Note if the Registrar receives the following:

                  (A) if the transfer will be made pursuant to Rule 144A under
            the Securities Act, then the transferor must deliver a certificate
            in the form of Exhibit B hereto, including the certifications in
            item (1) thereof;

                  (B) if the transfer will be made pursuant to Rule 903 or Rule
            904, then the transferor must deliver a certificate in the form of
            Exhibit B hereto, including the certifications in item (2) thereof;
            and

                  (C) if the transfer will be made pursuant to any other
            exemption from the registration requirements of the Securities Act,
            then the transferor must deliver a certificate in the form of
            Exhibit B hereto, including the certifications, certificates and
            Opinion of Counsel required by item (3) thereof, if applicable.

            (ii) RESTRICTED DEFINITIVE NOTES TO UNRESTRICTED DEFINITIVE NOTES.
      Any Restricted Definitive Note may be exchanged by the Holder thereof for
      an Unrestricted Definitive Note or transferred to a Person or Persons who
      take delivery thereof in the form of an Unrestricted Definitive Note if:

                  (A) such exchange or transfer is effected pursuant to the
            Exchange Offer in accordance with the Registration Rights Agreement
            and the Holder, in the case of an exchange, or the transferee, in
            the case of a transfer, certifies in the applicable Letter of
            Transmittal that it is not (1) a broker-dealer, (2) a Person
            participating in the distribution of the Exchange Notes or (3) a
            Person who is an affiliate (as defined in Rule 144) of the Company;

                  (B) any such transfer is effected pursuant to the Shelf
            Registration Statement in accordance with the Registration Rights
            Agreement;

                  (C) any such transfer is effected by a Participating
            Broker-Dealer pursuant to the Exchange Offer Registration Statement
            in accordance with the Registration Rights Agreement; or

                  (D) the Registrar receives the following:

                        (1) if the Holder of such Restricted Definitive Notes
                  proposes to exchange such Notes for an Unrestricted Definitive
                  Note, a certificate from such

                                       38
<PAGE>

                  Holder in the form of Exhibit C hereto, including the
                  certifications in item (1)(d) thereof; or

                        (2) if the Holder of such Restricted Definitive Notes
                  proposes to transfer such Notes to a Person who shall take
                  delivery thereof in the form of an Unrestricted Definitive
                  Note, a certificate from such Holder in the form of Exhibit B
                  hereto, including the certifications in item (4) thereof;

      and, in each such case set forth in this subparagraph (D), if the
      Registrar so requests, an Opinion of Counsel in form reasonably acceptable
      to the Company to the effect that such exchange or transfer is in
      compliance with the Securities Act and that the restrictions on transfer
      contained herein and in the Private Placement Legend are no longer
      required in order to maintain compliance with the Securities Act.

            (iii) UNRESTRICTED DEFINITIVE NOTES TO UNRESTRICTED DEFINITIVE
      NOTES. A Holder of Unrestricted Definitive Notes may transfer such Notes
      to a Person who takes delivery thereof in the form of an Unrestricted
      Definitive Note. Upon receipt of a request to register such a transfer,
      the Registrar shall register the Unrestricted Definitive Notes pursuant to
      the instructions from the Holder thereof.

      (f) EXCHANGE OFFER. Upon the occurrence of the Exchange Offer in
accordance with the Registration Rights Agreement, the Company shall issue and,
upon receipt of an Authentication Order in accordance with Section 2.02, the
Trustee shall authenticate (i) one or more Unrestricted Global Notes in an
aggregate principal amount equal to the principal amount of the beneficial
interests in the Restricted Global Notes tendered for acceptance by Persons that
certify in the applicable Letters of Transmittal that (x) they are not
broker-dealers, (y) they are not participating in a distribution of the Exchange
Notes and (z) they are not affiliates (as defined in Rule 144) of the Company,
and accepted for exchange in the Exchange Offer and (ii) Definitive Notes in an
aggregate principal amount equal to the principal amount of the Restricted
Definitive Notes accepted for exchange in the Exchange Offer. Concurrently with
the issuance of such Notes, the Trustee shall cause the aggregate principal
amount of the applicable Restricted Global Notes to be reduced accordingly, and
the Company shall execute and the Trustee shall authenticate and deliver to the
Persons designated by the Holders of Definitive Notes so accepted Definitive
Notes in the appropriate principal amount.

      (g) LEGENDS. The following legends shall appear on the face of all Global
Notes and Definitive Notes issued under this Indenture unless specifically
stated otherwise in the applicable provisions of this Indenture.

      (i) PRIVATE PLACEMENT LEGEND.

                  (A) Except as permitted by subparagraph (B) below, each Global
            Note and each Definitive Note (and all Notes issued in exchange
            therefor or substitution thereof) shall bear the legend in
            substantially the following form:

      "THIS NOTE (OR ITS PREDECESSOR) WAS ORIGINALLY ISSUED IN A TRANSACTION
      EXEMPT FROM REGISTRATION UNDER THE UNITED STATES SECURITIES ACT OF 1933
      (THE "SECURITIES ACT"), AND THIS NOTE MAY NOT BE OFFERED, SOLD OR
      OTHERWISE TRANSFERRED IN THE ABSENCE OF SUCH REGISTRATION OR AN APPLICABLE
      EXEMPTION THEREFROM. EACH PURCHASER OF THIS NOTE IS HEREBY NOTIFIED THAT
      THE SELLER OF THIS

                                       39
<PAGE>

      NOTE MAY BE RELYING ON THE EXEMPTION FROM THE PROVISIONS OF SECTION 5 OF
      THE SECURITIES ACT PROVIDED BY RULE 144A THEREUNDER.

      THE HOLDER OF THIS NOTE AGREES FOR THE BENEFIT OF THE COMPANY THAT (A)
      THIS NOTE MAY BE OFFERED, RESOLD, PLEDGED OR OTHERWISE TRANSFERRED, ONLY
      (I) IN THE UNITED STATES TO A PERSON WHOM THE SELLER REASONABLY BELIEVES
      IS A QUALIFIED INSTITUTIONAL BUYER (AS DEFINED IN RULE 144A UNDER THE
      SECURITIES ACT) IN A TRANSACTION MEETING THE REQUIREMENTS OF RULE 144A,
      (II) OUTSIDE THE UNITED STATES IN AN OFFSHORE TRANSACTION IN ACCORDANCE
      WITH RULE 904 UNDER THE SECURITIES ACT, (III) PURSUANT TO AN EXEMPTION
      FROM REGISTRATION UNDER THE SECURITIES ACT PROVIDED BY RULE 144 THEREUNDER
      (IF AVAILABLE), (IV) TO AN INSTITUTIONAL "ACCREDITED INVESTOR" (AS DEFINED
      IN RULE 501(A)(1), (2), (3) OR (7) OF REGULATION D UNDER THE SECURITIES
      ACT (AN "IAI") THAT, PRIOR TO SUCH TRANSFER, FURNISHES THE TRUSTEE A
      SIGNED LETTER CONTAINING CERTAIN REPRESENTATIONS AND AGREEMENTS RELATING
      TO THE TRANSFER OF THIS NOTE (THE FORM OF WHICH CAN BE OBTAINED FROM THE
      TRUSTEE) AND, IF SUCH TRANSFER IS IN RESPECT OF AN AGGREGATE PRINCIPAL
      AMOUNT OF NOTES LESS THAN $250,000, AN OPINION OF COUNSEL ACCEPTABLE TO
      THE COMPANY THAT SUCH TRANSFER IS IN COMPLIANCE WITH THE SECURITIES ACT,
      (V) TO THE COMPANY OR ANY OF ITS SUBSIDIARIES OR (VI) PURSUANT TO AN
      EFFECTIVE REGISTRATION STATEMENT UNDER THE SECURITIES ACT, IN EACH OF
      CASES (I) THROUGH (VI) IN ACCORDANCE WITH ANY APPLICABLE SECURITIES LAWS
      OF ANY STATE OF THE UNITED STATES, AND (B) THE HOLDER WILL, AND EACH
      SUBSEQUENT HOLDER IS REQUIRED TO, NOTIFY ANY PURCHASER OF THIS NOTE FROM
      IT OF THE RESALE RESTRICTIONS REFERRED TO IN (A) ABOVE."

                  (B) Notwithstanding the foregoing, any Global Note or
            Definitive Note issued pursuant to subparagraphs (b)(iv), (c)(iii),
            (c)(iv), (d)(ii), (d)(iii), (e)(ii), (e)(iii) or (f) to this Section
            2.06 (and all Notes issued in exchange therefor or substitution
            thereof) shall not bear the Private Placement Legend.

            (ii) GLOBAL NOTE LEGEND. Each Global Note shall bear a legend in
      substantially the following form:

      "THIS GLOBAL NOTE IS HELD BY THE DEPOSITARY (AS DEFINED IN THE INDENTURE
      GOVERNING THIS NOTE) OR ITS NOMINEE IN CUSTODY FOR THE BENEFIT OF THE
      BENEFICIAL OWNERS HEREOF, AND IS NOT TRANSFERABLE TO ANY PERSON UNDER ANY
      CIRCUMSTANCES EXCEPT THAT (I) THE TRUSTEE MAY MAKE SUCH NOTATIONS HEREON
      AS MAY BE REQUIRED PURSUANT TO SECTION 2.07 OF THE INDENTURE, (II) THIS
      GLOBAL NOTE MAY BE EXCHANGED IN WHOLE BUT NOT IN PART PURSUANT TO SECTION
      2.06(a) OF THE INDENTURE, (III) THIS GLOBAL NOTE MAY BE DELIVERED TO THE
      TRUSTEE FOR CANCELLATION PURSUANT TO SECTION 2.11 OF THE INDENTURE AND
      (IV) THIS GLOBAL NOTE MAY BE TRANSFERRED TO A SUCCESSOR DEPOSITARY WITH
      THE PRIOR WRITTEN CONSENT OF THE COMPANY."

                                       40
<PAGE>

            (iii) REGULATION S TEMPORARY GLOBAL NOTE LEGEND. The Regulation S
      Temporary Global Note shall bear a legend in substantially the following
      form:

      "THE RIGHTS ATTACHING TO THIS REGULATION S TEMPORARY GLOBAL NOTE, AND THE
      CONDITIONS AND PROCEDURES GOVERNING ITS EXCHANGE FOR CERTIFICATED NOTES,
      ARE AS SPECIFIED IN THE INDENTURE (AS DEFINED HEREIN). NEITHER THE HOLDER
      NOR THE BENEFICIAL OWNERS OF THIS REGULATION S TEMPORARY GLOBAL NOTE SHALL
      BE ENTITLED TO RECEIVE PAYMENT OF INTEREST HEREON."

      (h) CANCELLATION AND/OR ADJUSTMENT OF GLOBAL NOTES. At such time as all
beneficial interests in a particular Global Note have been exchanged for
Definitive Notes or a particular Global Note has been redeemed, repurchased or
cancelled in whole and not in part, each such Global Note shall be returned to
or retained and cancelled by the Trustee in accordance with Section 2.11 hereof.
At any time prior to such cancellation, if any beneficial interest in a Global
Note is exchanged for or transferred to a Person who will take delivery thereof
in the form of a beneficial interest in another Global Note or for Definitive
Notes, the principal amount of Notes represented by such Global Note shall be
reduced accordingly and an endorsement shall be made on such Global Note by the
Trustee or by the Depositary at the direction of the Trustee to reflect such
reduction; and if the beneficial interest is being exchanged for or transferred
to a Person who will take delivery thereof in the form of a beneficial interest
in another Global Note, such other Global Note shall be increased accordingly
and an endorsement shall be made on such Global Note by the Trustee or by the
Depositary at the direction of the Trustee to reflect such increase.

      (i) GENERAL PROVISIONS RELATING TO TRANSFERS AND EXCHANGES.

            (i) To permit registrations of transfers and exchanges, the Company
      shall execute and the Trustee shall authenticate Global Notes and
      Definitive Notes upon the Company's order or at the Registrar's request.

            (ii) No service charge shall be made to a holder of a beneficial
      interest in a Global Note or to a Holder of a Definitive Note for any
      registration of transfer or exchange, but the Company may require payment
      of a sum sufficient to cover any transfer tax or similar governmental
      charge payable in connection therewith (other than any such transfer taxes
      or similar governmental charge payable upon exchange or transfer pursuant
      to Sections 2.10, 3.06, 3.09, 4.10, 4.14 and 9.05 hereof).

            (iii) The Registrar shall not be required to register the transfer
      of or exchange any Note selected for redemption in whole or in part,
      except the unredeemed portion of any Note being redeemed in part.

            (iv) All Global Notes and Definitive Notes issued upon any
      registration of transfer or exchange of Global Notes or Definitive Notes
      shall be the valid obligations of the Company, evidencing the same debt,
      and entitled to the same benefits under this Indenture, as the Global
      Notes or Definitive Notes surrendered upon such registration of transfer
      or exchange.

            (v) The Company shall not be required (A) to issue, to register the
      transfer of or to exchange any Notes during a period beginning at the
      opening of 15 Business Days before the day of any selection of Notes for
      redemption under Section 3.02 hereof and ending at the close of business
      on the day of selection, (B) to register the transfer of or to exchange
      any Note so

                                       41
<PAGE>

      selected for redemption in whole or in part, except the unredeemed portion
      of any Note being redeemed in part or (c) to register the transfer of or
      to exchange a Note between a Record Date and the next succeeding Interest
      Payment Date.

            (vi) Prior to due presentment for the registration of a transfer of
      any Note, the Trustee, any Agent and the Company may deem and treat the
      Person in whose name any Note is registered as the absolute owner of such
      Note for the purpose of receiving payment of principal of and interest and
      Liquidated Damages, if any, on such Notes and for all other purposes, and
      none of the Trustee, any Agent or the Company shall be affected by notice
      to the contrary.

            (vii) The Trustee shall authenticate Global Notes and Definitive
      Notes in accordance with the provisions of Section 2.02 hereof.

            (viii) All certifications, certificates and Opinions of Counsel
      required to be submitted to the Registrar pursuant to this Section 2.06 to
      effect a registration of transfer or exchange may be submitted by
      facsimile.

      Each Holder of a Note agrees to indemnify the Company and the Trustee
against any liability that may result from the transfer, exchange or assignment
of such Holder's Note in violation of any provision of this Indenture and/or
applicable United States federal or state securities laws.

      The Trustee shall have no obligation or duty to monitor, determine or
inquire as to compliance with any restrictions on transfer imposed under this
Indenture or under any applicable law with respect to any transfer of any
interest in any Note (including any transfers between or among Participants or
beneficial owners of interests in any Global Note) other than to require
delivery of such certificates and other documentation or evidence as are
expressly required by, and to do so if and when expressly required by the terms
of, this Indenture, and to examine the same to determine substantial compliance
as to form with the express requirements hereof.

SECTION 2.07      REPLACEMENT NOTES.

      If any mutilated Note is surrendered to the Trustee or the Company and the
Trustee receives evidence to its satisfaction of the destruction, loss or theft
of any Note, the Company shall issue and the Trustee, upon receipt of an
Authentication Order, shall authenticate a replacement Note if the Trustee's
requirements are met. If required by the Trustee or the Company, an indemnity
bond must be supplied by the Holder that is sufficient in the judgment of the
Trustee and the Company to protect the Company, the Trustee, any Agent and any
authenticating agent from any loss that any of them may suffer if a Note is
replaced. The Company may charge for its expenses in replacing a Note.

      Every replacement Note is an additional obligation of the Company and
shall be entitled to all of the benefits of this Indenture equally and
proportionately with all other Notes duly issued hereunder.

SECTION 2.08      OUTSTANDING NOTES.

      The Notes outstanding at any time are all the Notes authenticated by the
Trustee except for those cancelled by it, those delivered to it for
cancellation, those reductions in the interest in a Global Note effected by the
Trustee in accordance with the provisions hereof, and those described in this
Section as not outstanding. Except as set forth in Section 2.09 hereof, a Note
does not cease to be outstanding because the Company or an Affiliate of the
Company holds the Note; however, Notes held by the

                                       42
<PAGE>

Company or a Subsidiary of the Company shall not be deemed to be outstanding for
purposes of Section 3.07 hereof.

      If a Note is replaced pursuant to Section 2.07 hereof, it ceases to be
outstanding unless the Trustee receives proof satisfactory to it that the
replaced Note is held by a bona fide purchaser.

      If the principal amount of any Note is considered paid under Section 4.01
hereof, it ceases to be outstanding and interest on it ceases to accrue.

      If the Paying Agent (other than the Company, a Subsidiary or an Affiliate
of any thereof) holds, on a redemption date or maturity date, money sufficient
to pay Notes payable on that date, then on and after that date such Notes shall
be deemed to be no longer outstanding and shall cease to accrue interest.

SECTION 2.09      TREASURY NOTES.

      In determining whether the Holders of the required principal amount of
Notes have concurred in any direction, waiver or consent, Notes owned by the
Company, or by any Person directly or indirectly controlling or controlled by or
under direct or indirect common control with the Company, shall be considered as
though not outstanding, except that for the purposes of determining whether the
Trustee shall be protected in relying on any such direction, waiver or consent,
only Notes that the Trustee knows are so owned shall be so disregarded.

SECTION 2.10      TEMPORARY NOTES.

      Until certificates representing Notes are ready for delivery, the Company
may prepare and the Trustee, upon receipt of an Authentication Order, shall
authenticate temporary Notes. Temporary Notes shall be substantially in the form
of certificated Notes but may have variations that the Company considers
appropriate for temporary Notes and as shall be reasonably acceptable to the
Trustee. Without unreasonable delay, the Company shall prepare and the Trustee
shall, as soon as practicable upon receipt of the written order of the Company
signed by an Officer of the Company, authenticate definitive Notes in exchange
for temporary Notes.

      Holders of temporary Notes shall be entitled to all of the benefits of
this Indenture.

SECTION 2.11      CANCELLATION.

      The Company at any time may deliver Notes to the Trustee for cancellation.
The Registrar and Paying Agent shall forward to the Trustee any Notes
surrendered to them for registration of transfer, exchange or payment. The
Trustee and no one else shall cancel all Notes surrendered for registration of
transfer, exchange, payment, replacement or cancellation and shall dispose of
cancelled Notes according to its standard operating procedures (subject to the
record retention requirement of the Exchange Act). Certification of the
destruction or disposition of all cancelled Notes shall be delivered to the
Company. The Company may not issue new Notes to replace Notes that it has paid
or that have been delivered to the Trustee for cancellation.

SECTION 2.12      DEFAULTED INTEREST.

      If the Company defaults in a payment of interest on the Notes, it shall
pay the defaulted interest in any lawful manner plus, to the extent lawful,
interest payable on the defaulted interest, to the Persons who are Holders on a
subsequent special record date, in each case at the rate provided in the Notes
and in

                                       43
<PAGE>

Section 4.01 hereof. The Company shall notify the Trustee in writing of the
amount of defaulted interest proposed to be paid on each Note and the date of
the proposed payment. The Company shall fix or cause to be fixed each such
special record date and payment date, PROVIDED that no such special Record Date
shall be less than 10 days prior to the related payment date for such defaulted
interest. At least 15 days before the special record date, the Company (or, upon
the written request of the Company, the Trustee in the name and at the expense
of the Company) shall mail or cause to be mailed to Holders a notice that states
the special record date, the related payment date and the amount of such
interest to be paid.

                                    ARTICLE 3
                            REDEMPTION AND PREPAYMENT

SECTION 3.01      NOTICES TO TRUSTEE.

      If the Company elects to redeem Notes pursuant to the optional redemption
provisions of Section 3.07 hereof, it shall furnish to the Trustee, at least 30
days but not more than 90 days before a redemption date, an Officer's
Certificate setting forth (i) the clause of this Indenture pursuant to which the
redemption shall occur, (ii) the redemption date, (iii) the principal amount of
Notes to be redeemed and (iv) the redemption price.

SECTION 3.02      SELECTION OF NOTES TO BE REDEEMED.

      If less than all of the Notes are to be redeemed at any time, selection of
Notes for redemption will be made by the Trustee in compliance with the
requirements of the principal national securities exchange, if any, on which the
Notes are listed, or, if the Notes are not so listed, on a PRO RATA basis, by
lot or by another method as the Trustee shall deem fair and appropriate. In the
event of a partial redemption by lot, the particular Notes to be redeemed shall
be selected, unless otherwise provided herein, not less than 30 nor more than 90
days prior to the redemption date by the Trustee from the outstanding Notes not
previously called for redemption.

      The Trustee shall promptly notify the Company in writing of the Notes
selected for redemption and, in the case of any Note selected for partial
redemption, the principal amount thereof to be redeemed. Notes and portions of
Notes selected shall be in amounts of $1,000 or whole multiples of $1,000 and no
Notes of less than $1,000 can be redeemed in part. Except as provided in the
preceding sentence, provisions of this Indenture that apply to Notes called for
redemption also apply to portions of Notes called for redemption.

SECTION 3.03      NOTICE OF REDEMPTION.

      Subject to the provisions of Section 3.09 hereof, notices of redemption
shall be mailed by first class mail at least 30 but not more than 60 days before
the redemption date to each Holder of Notes to be redeemed at its registered
address, except that notice of redemption may be mailed more than 60 days prior
to the redemption date if such notice is issued in connection with a Defeasance
of the Notes, a satisfaction and discharge of the Notes or an optional
redemption of the Notes made in accordance with Section 3.07 hereof.

      The notice shall identify the Notes to be redeemed and shall state:

      (a) the redemption date;

      (b) the redemption price;

                                       44
<PAGE>

      (c) the CUSIP number; if any;

      (d) if any Note is being redeemed in part, the portion of the principal
amount of such Note to be redeemed and that, after the redemption date upon
surrender of such Note, a new Note or Notes in principal amount equal to the
unredeemed portion shall be issued upon cancellation of the original Note;

      (e) the name and address of the Paying Agent;

      (f) that Notes called for redemption must be surrendered to the Paying
Agent to collect the redemption price;

      (g) that, unless the Company defaults in making such redemption payment,
interest on Notes called for redemption ceases to accrue on and after the
redemption date;

      (h) the paragraph of the Notes and/or Section of this Indenture pursuant
to which the Notes called for redemption are being redeemed; and

      (i) that no representation is made as to the correctness or accuracy of
the CUSIP number, if any, listed in such notice or printed on the Notes.

      At the Company's request, the Trustee shall give the notice of redemption
in the Company's name and at its expense; PROVIDED, HOWEVER, that the Company
shall have delivered to the Trustee, at least seven days prior to the date on
which a notice of redemption is to be sent, an Officer's Certificate requesting
that the Trustee give such notice and setting forth the information to be stated
in such notice as provided in the preceding paragraph.

SECTION 3.04      EFFECT OF NOTICE OF REDEMPTION.

      Once notice of redemption is mailed in accordance with Section 3.03
hereof, Notes called for redemption become irrevocably due and payable on the
redemption date at the redemption price. A notice of redemption may not be
conditional.

SECTION 3.05      DEPOSIT OF REDEMPTION PRICE.

      On or prior to 11.00 a.m., New York City time, on the redemption date, the
Company shall deposit with the Trustee or with the Paying Agent money sufficient
to pay the redemption price of and accrued interest on all Notes to be redeemed
on that date. The Trustee or the Paying Agent shall promptly return to the
Company any money deposited with the Trustee or the Paying Agent by the Company
in excess of the amounts necessary to pay the redemption price of, and accrued
interest on, all Notes to be redeemed.

      If the Company complies with the provisions of the preceding paragraph, on
and after the redemption date, interest shall cease to accrue on the Notes or
the portions of Notes called for redemption. If a Note is redeemed on or after a
Record Date but on or prior to the related Interest Payment Date, then any
accrued and unpaid interest shall be paid to the Person in whose name such Note
was registered at the close of business on such Record Date. If any Note called
for redemption shall not be so paid upon surrender for redemption because of the
failure of the Company to comply with the preceding paragraph, interest shall be
paid on the unpaid principal, from the redemption date until such principal is
paid, and to the extent lawful on any interest and Liquidated Damages, if any,
not paid on such unpaid principal, in each case at the rate provided in the
Notes and in Section 4.01 hereof.

                                       45
<PAGE>

SECTION 3.06      NOTES REDEEMED IN PART.

      Upon surrender of a Note that is redeemed in part, the Company shall issue
and, upon the Company's written request, the Trustee shall authenticate for the
Holder at the expense of the Company a new Note equal in principal amount to the
unredeemed portion of the Note surrendered.

SECTION 3.07      OPTIONAL REDEMPTION.

      (a) Except as provided below, the Notes will not be redeemable at the
Company's option prior to June 1, 2006. Thereafter, the Notes will be subject to
redemption at any time at the option of the Company, in whole or in part, upon
not less than 30 nor more than 90 days' notice, at the redemption prices
(expressed as percentages of principal amount) set forth below, plus accrued and
unpaid interest on the Notes redeemed, to the applicable redemption date, if
redeemed during the twelve-month period beginning on June 1 of the years
indicated below:

          YEAR                                   PERCENTAGE

          2006...................................104.688%
          2007...................................103.125%
          2008...................................101.563%
          2009 and thereafter....................100.000%

      Notwithstanding the foregoing, at any time prior to June 1, 2004, the
Company may redeem up to 35% of the aggregate principal amount of Notes from
time to time issued under this Indenture at a redemption price of 109.375% of
the principal amount thereof, plus accrued and unpaid interest to the redemption
date, with the net cash proceeds of one or more Equity Offerings; PROVIDED that:

            (i) at least 65% of the aggregate principal amount of Notes issued
      under this Indenture remains outstanding immediately after the occurrence
      of the redemption (excluding Notes held by the Company and its
      Subsidiaries); and

            (ii) the redemption shall be made within 90 days of the date of the
      closing of any such Equity Offering.

      (b) Any redemption pursuant to this Section 3.07 shall be made pursuant to
the provisions of Section 3.01 through 3.06 hereof.

SECTION 3.08      MANDATORY REDEMPTION.

      The Company is not required to make mandatory redemption of, or sinking
fund payments with respect to, the Notes.

SECTION 3.09      OFFER TO PURCHASE BY APPLICATION OF EXCESS PROCEEDS.

      In the event that, pursuant to Section 4.10 hereof, the Company shall be
required to commence an offer to all Holders to purchase Notes (a "ASSET SALE
OFFER"), it shall follow the procedures specified below.

                                       46
<PAGE>

      The Asset Sale Offer shall remain open for a period of 20 Business Days
following its commencement and no longer, except to the extent that a longer
period is required by applicable law (the "OFFER PERIOD"). No later than five
Business Days after the termination of the Offer Period (the "PURCHASE DATE"),
the Company shall purchase the principal amount of Notes required to be
purchased pursuant to Section 4.10 hereof (the "OFFER AMOUNT") or, if less than
the Offer Amount has been tendered, all Notes tendered in response to the Asset
Sale Offer. Payment for any Notes so purchased shall be made in the same manner
as interest payments are made.

      If the Purchase Date is on or after a Record Date and on or before the
related Interest Payment Date, any accrued and unpaid interest shall be paid to
the Person in whose name a Note is registered at the close of business on such
Record Date, and no additional interest shall be payable to Holders who tender
Notes pursuant to the Asset Sale Offer.

      The Notes shall be purchased by the Company, at the option of the Holder
thereof, in whole or in part in integral multiples of $1,000, on a date that is
not earlier than 30 days and not later than 60 days from the date the notice is
given to Holders, or such later date as may be necessary for the Company to
comply with the requirements under the Exchange Act, subject to proration in the
event the Note Amount is less than the aggregate Offered Price of all Notes
tendered.

      The Company shall comply with the applicable tender offer rules, including
Rule 14e-1 under the Exchange Act, and any other applicable securities laws or
regulations in connection with an Offer.

      Upon the commencement of an Asset Sale Offer, the Company shall send, by
first class mail, a notice to the Trustee and each of the Holders, with a copy
to the Trustee. The notice shall contain all instructions and materials
necessary to enable such Holders to tender Notes pursuant to the Asset Sale
Offer. The Asset Sale Offer shall be made to all Holders. The notice, which
shall govern the terms of the Asset Sale Offer, shall state:

      (a) that the Asset Sale Offer is being made pursuant to this Section 3.09
and Section 4.10 hereof and the length of time the Asset Sale Offer shall remain
open;

      (b) the Offer Amount, the purchase price and the Purchase Date;

      (c) that any Note not tendered or accepted for payment shall continue to
accrete or accrue interest;

      (d) that, unless the Company defaults in making such payment, any Note
accepted for payment pursuant to the Asset Sale Offer shall cease to accrete or
accrue interest after the Purchase Date;

      (e) that Holders electing to have a Note purchased pursuant to an Asset
Sale Offer may elect to have Notes purchased in integral multiples of $1,000
only;

      (f) that Holders electing to have a Note purchased pursuant to any Asset
Sale Offer shall be required to surrender the Note, with the form entitled
"Option of Holder to Elect Purchase" on the reverse of the Note completed, or
transfer by book-entry transfer, to the Company, a depositary, if appointed by
the Company, or a Paying Agent at the address specified in the notice at least
three days before the Purchase Date;

      (g) that Holders shall be entitled to withdraw their election if the
Company, the Depositary or the Paying Agent, as the case may be, receives, not
later than the expiration of the Offer Period, a

                                       47
<PAGE>

telegram, telex, facsimile transmission or letter setting forth the name of the
Holder, the principal amount of the Note the Holder delivered for purchase and a
statement that such Holder is withdrawing its election to have such Note
purchased;

      (h) that, if the aggregate principal amount of Notes surrendered by
Holders exceeds the Offer Amount, the Company shall select the Notes to be
purchased on a PRO RATA basis (with such adjustments as may be deemed
appropriate by the Company so that only Notes in denominations of $1,000, or
integral multiples thereof, shall be purchased); and

      (i) that Holders whose Notes were purchased only in part shall be issued
new Notes equal in principal amount to the unpurchased portion of the Notes
surrendered (or transferred by book-entry transfer).

      On or before the Purchase Date, the Company shall, to the extent lawful,
accept for payment, on a PRO RATA basis to the extent necessary, the Offer
Amount of Notes or portions thereof tendered pursuant to the Asset Sale Offer,
or if less than the Offer Amount has been tendered, all Notes tendered, and
shall deliver to the Trustee an Officer's Certificate stating that such Notes or
portions thereof were accepted for payment by the Company in accordance with the
terms of this Section 3.09. The Company, the Depositary or the Paying Agent, as
the case may be, shall promptly (but in any case not later than five days after
the Purchase Date) mail or deliver to each tendering Holder an amount equal to
the purchase price of the Notes tendered by such Holder and accepted by the
Company for purchase, and the Company shall promptly issue a new Note, and the
Trustee, upon written request from the Company shall authenticate and mail or
deliver such new Note to such Holder, in a principal amount equal to any
unpurchased portion of the Note surrendered. Any Note not so accepted shall be
promptly mailed or delivered by the Company to the Holder thereof. The Company
shall publicly announce the results of the Asset Sale Offer on the Purchase
Date.

      Other than as specifically provided in this Section 3.09, any purchase
pursuant to this Section 3.09 shall be made pursuant to the provisions of
Sections 3.01 through 3.06 hereof.

                                    ARTICLE 4
                                    COVENANTS

SECTION 4.01      PAYMENT OF NOTES.

      The Company shall pay or cause to be paid the principal of, premium, if
any, and interest on the Notes on the dates and in the manner provided in the
Notes. Interest on the Notes will accrue at the rate of 9-3/8% per year.
Principal, premium, if any, and interest shall be considered paid on the date
due if the Paying Agent, if other than the Company or a Subsidiary thereof, (i)
holds as of 10:00 a.m. Eastern Time on the due date money deposited by the
Company in immediately available funds and designated for and sufficient to pay
all principal, premium, if any, and interest then due and (ii) is not prohibited
from paying such money to the Holders pursuant to the terms of this Indenture or
the Notes. The Company shall pay all Liquidated Damages, if any, in the same
manner on the dates and in the amounts set forth in the Registration Rights
Agreement.

      The Company shall pay interest (including post-petition interest in any
proceeding under any Bankruptcy Law) on overdue principal at the rate equal to
1% per annum in excess of the then applicable interest rate on the Notes to the
extent lawful; and shall pay interest (including post-petition interest in any
proceeding under any Bankruptcy Law) on overdue installments of interest and
Liquidated Damages (without regard to any applicable grace period) at the same
rate to the extent lawful.

                                       48
<PAGE>

SECTION 4.02      MAINTENANCE OF OFFICE OR AGENCY.

      The Company shall maintain in the Borough of Manhattan, The City of New
York, an office or agency (which may be an office of the Trustee or an Affiliate
of the Trustee, Registrar or co-registrar) where Notes may be surrendered for
registration of transfer or for exchange and where notices and demands to or
upon the Company in respect of the Notes and this Indenture may be served. The
Company shall give prompt written notice to the Trustee of the location, and any
change in the location, of such office or agency. If at any time the Company
shall fail to maintain any such required office or agency or shall fail to
furnish the Trustee with the address thereof, such presentations, surrenders,
notices and demands may be made or served at the Corporate Trust Office of the
Trustee.

      The Company may also from time to time designate one or more other offices
or agencies where the Notes may be presented or surrendered for any or all such
purposes and may from time to time rescind such designations; PROVIDED, HOWEVER,
that no such designation or rescission shall in any manner relieve the Company
of its obligation to maintain an office or agency in the Borough of Manhattan,
The City of New York for such purposes. The Company shall give prompt written
notice to the Trustee of any such designation or rescission and of any change in
the location of any such other office or agency.

      The Company hereby designates the Corporate Trust Office of the Trustee as
one such office or agency of the Company in accordance with Section 2.03 hereof.

SECTION 4.03      REPORTS.

      Whether or not the Company is subject to Section 13(a) or 15(d) of the
Exchange Act, the Company will, to the extent permitted under the Exchange Act,
file with the Commission the annual reports, quarterly reports and other
documents which the Company would have been required to file with the Commission
pursuant to such Sections 13(a) or 15(d) if the Company were so subject, such
documents to be filed with the Commission on or prior to the respective dates
(the "REQUIRED FILING DATES") by which the Company would have been required so
to file such documents if the Company were so subject. The Company will also in
any event within 15 days of each Required Filing Date:

      (a) transmit, or instruct the Trustee on behalf of and at the expense of
the Company to transmit, all such reports and other documents by mail to all
Holders of Notes, as their names and addresses appear in the security register,
without cost to such Holders of Notes;

      (b) file with the Trustee copies of the annual reports, quarterly reports
and other documents which the Company would have been required to file with the
Commission pursuant to Section 13(a) or 15(d) of the Exchange Act if the Company
was subject to such Sections; PROVIDED, HOWEVER that delivery of such reports,
information and other documents to the Trustee is for informational purposes
only and the Trustee's receipt of such shall not constitute constructive notice
of any information contained therein or determinable from information contained
therein, including the Company's compliance with any of its covenants hereunder
(as to which the Trustee is entitled to rely exclusively on Officer's
Certificates); and

      (c) if filing such documents by the Company with the Commission is not
permitted under the Exchange Act, promptly upon written request and payment of
the reasonable cost of duplication and delivery, supply copies of such documents
to any prospective purchaser of Notes at the Company's cost.

      In addition, following the consummation of the Exchange Offer contemplated
by the Registration Rights Agreement, whether or not required by the rules and
regulations of the Commission, the Company will file a copy of all such
information and reports referred to in paragraphs (a), (b) and (c) above with
the

                                       49
<PAGE>

Commission for public availability within the time periods specified in the
Commission's rules and regulations (unless the Commission will not accept such a
filing) and make such information available to securities analysts and
prospective investors upon request.

      In addition, the Company has agreed that, prior to the consummation of the
Exchange Offer and for so long as any Notes remain outstanding, if (i) the
Commission does not accept the filings provided for in this Section or (ii) such
filings provided for in this Section do not contain the information required to
be delivered upon request pursuant to Rule 144A(d)(4) under the Securities Act,
the Company shall furnish to the Holders, upon their request, the information
required to be delivered pursuant to Rule 144A(d)(4) under the Securities Act.

SECTION 4.04      COMPLIANCE CERTIFICATE.

      (a) The Company shall deliver to the Trustee, within 90 days after the end
of each fiscal year, an Officer's Certificate stating that a review of the
activities of the Company and its Restricted Subsidiaries during the preceding
fiscal year have been made under the supervision of the signing Officers with a
view to determining whether the Company have kept, observed, performed and
fulfilled its obligations under this Indenture, and further stating, as to each
such Officer signing such certificate, that to the best of his or her knowledge
the Company has kept, observed, performed and fulfilled each and every covenant
contained in this Indenture and is not in default in the performance or
observance of any of the terms, provisions and conditions of this Indenture (or,
if a Default or Event of Default shall have occurred, describing all such
Defaults or Events of Default of which he or she may have knowledge and what
action the Company is taking or propose to take with respect thereto) and that
to the best of his or her knowledge no event has occurred and remains in
existence by reason of which payments on account of the principal of or interest
or Liquidated Damages, if any, on the Notes is prohibited or if such event has
occurred, a description of the event and what action the Company is taking or
proposes to take with respect thereto.

      (b) So long as not contrary to the then current recommendations of the
American Institute of Certified Public Accountants, the year-end financial
statements delivered pursuant to Section 4.03(a) above shall be accompanied by a
written statement of the Company's independent public accountants (which shall
be a firm of established national reputation) that in making the examination
necessary for certification of such financial statements, nothing has come to
their attention that would lead them to believe that the Company has violated
any provisions of Article 4 or Article 5 hereof or, if any such violation has
occurred, specifying the nature and period of existence thereof, it being
understood that such accountants shall not be liable directly or indirectly to
any Person for any failure to obtain knowledge of any such violation.

      (c) The Company shall, so long as any of the Notes are outstanding,
deliver to the Trustee, forthwith upon any Officer becoming aware of any Default
or Event of Default, an Officer's Certificate specifying such Default or Event
of Default and what action the Company is taking or proposes to take with
respect thereto.

SECTION 4.05      TAXES.

      The Company shall pay, and shall cause each of its Restricted Subsidiaries
to pay, prior to delinquency, all material taxes, assessments, and governmental
levies except such as are contested in good faith and by appropriate proceedings
or where the failure to effect such payment would not have a material adverse
effect on the business, financial condition or results of operations of the
Company and its Restricted Subsidiaries, taken as a whole.

                                       50
<PAGE>

SECTION 4.06      STAY, EXTENSION AND USURY LAWS.

      The Company and each of the Guarantors covenants that (to the extent
permitted by law) it shall not at any time insist upon, plead, or in any manner
whatsoever claim or take the benefit or advantage of, any stay, extension or
usury law wherever enacted, now or at any time hereafter in force, that may
affect the covenants or the performance of this Indenture; and the Company
hereby expressly waives (to the extent permitted by law) all benefit or
advantage of any such law, and covenants that (to the extent permitted by law)
it shall not, by resort to any such law, hinder, delay or impede the execution
of any power herein granted to the Trustee, but shall suffer and permit the
execution of every such power as though no such law has been enacted.

SECTION 4.07      LIMITATION ON RESTRICTED PAYMENTS.

      The Company shall not and shall not permit any Restricted Subsidiary to,
directly or indirectly:

      (a) declare or pay any dividend on, or make any distribution in respect
of, the Company's Capital Stock (other than dividends or distributions payable
in shares of the Company's Qualified Capital Stock or in options, warrants or
other rights to acquire such Qualified Capital Stock);

      (b) purchase, redeem or otherwise acquire or retire for value, directly or
indirectly

            (i) any Capital Stock of the Company; or

            (ii) any Capital Stock of any Restricted Subsidiary of the Company
      held by any Affiliate of the Company (other than any Permitted
      Investments); or

            (iii) options, warrants or other rights to acquire any such Capital
      Stock;

      (c) make any principal payment on, or repurchase, redeem, defease, retire
or otherwise acquire for value any Subordinated Indebtedness prior to any
scheduled principal payment, any sinking fund payment, or payment at final
maturity;

      (d) declare or pay any dividend or distribution on any Capital Stock of
any Restricted Subsidiary to any Person (other than with respect to any Capital
Stock held by the Company or any of its Restricted Subsidiaries or with respect
to Capital Stock held by any other Person made on a pro rata basis consistent
with the ownership interests in such Capital Stock to the owners of such Capital
Stock); or

      (e) make any Investment in any Person (other than any Permitted
Investments),

(any of the payments described in paragraphs (a) through (e) above, other than
any such action that is a Permitted Payment, being referred to, collectively,
herein as "RESTRICTED PAYMENTS") unless at the time of and after giving effect
to the proposed Restricted Payment (the amount of any such Restricted Payment,
if other than cash, as determined by the Board of Directors, whose determination
shall be conclusive and evidenced by a board resolution):

      (a) no Default or Event of Default shall have occurred and be continuing;

      (b) immediately before and immediately after giving effect to such
transaction on a pro forma basis, the Company could incur $1.00 of additional
Indebtedness (other than Permitted Indebtedness) under the first paragraph of
Section 4.09 hereof; and

                                       51
<PAGE>

      (c) the aggregate amount of all such Restricted Payments declared or made
after the date of this Indenture does not exceed the sum, without duplication,
of:

      (i) $30,000,000;

      (ii) 50% of the aggregate cumulative Consolidated Net Income of the
Company accrued on a cumulative basis during the period beginning on the first
day of the Company's fiscal quarter commencing prior to the date of this
Indenture and ending on the last day of the Company's last fiscal quarter ending
prior to the date of the Restricted Payment (or, if such aggregate cumulative
Consolidated Net Income shall be a loss, minus 100% of such loss);

      (iii) the aggregate Net Cash Proceeds received after the date of this
Indenture by the Company from the issuance or sale (other than to any of its
Subsidiaries) of its Qualified Capital Stock or any option, warrants or rights
to purchase such Qualified Capital Stock of the Company (except, in each case,
to the extent such proceeds are used to purchase, redeem or otherwise retire
Capital Stock or Subordinated Indebtedness as set forth below);

      (iv) the aggregate Net Cash Proceeds received after the date of this
Indenture by the Company (other than from any of its Subsidiaries) upon the
exercise of any options or warrants to purchase Qualified Capital Stock of the
Company;

      (v) the aggregate Net Cash Proceeds received before or after the date of
this Indenture by the Company from the sale of debt securities or Redeemable
Capital Stock that has been converted after the date of this Indenture into or
exchanged for Qualified Capital Stock of the Company to the extent such debt
securities or Redeemable Capital Stock were originally sold for cash (assuming,
in the case of the 6% Convertible Subordinated Notes of the Company due 2004,
that they were sold for $50.0 million in cash) plus the aggregate Net Cash
Proceeds received by the Company at the time of such conversion or exchange;

      (vi) if any Unrestricted Subsidiary (A) is redesignated as a Restricted
Subsidiary, the fair market value of such redesignated Subsidiary (as determined
in good faith by the Board of Directors) as of the date of its redesignation or
(B) pays any cash dividends or cash distributions to the Company or any of its
Restricted Subsidiaries, 100% of any such cash dividends or cash distributions
made after the date of this Indenture; and

      (vii) the aggregate amount returned to the extent that any Restricted
Investment is sold for cash or otherwise liquidated or repaid for cash (less the
cost of disposition, if any).

      Notwithstanding the foregoing, and in the case of clauses (b), (c) and (d)
below, so long as there is no Default or Event of Default continuing, the
foregoing provisions shall not prohibit the following actions (which are,
collectively, referred to as "PERMITTED PAYMENTS"):

      (a) the payment of any dividend or distribution within 60 days after the
date of declaration thereof, if at such date of declaration such payment would
be permitted by the provisions of the first paragraph of this Section 4.07 and
such payment shall be deemed to have been paid on such date of declaration for
purposes of the calculation required by the first paragraph of this Section
4.07;

      (b) the repurchase, redemption or other acquisition or retirement of any
shares of Capital Stock of the Company in exchange for (including any such
exchange pursuant to the exercise of a conversion right or privilege where in
connection therewith cash is paid in lieu of the issuance of

                                       52
<PAGE>

fractional shares or scrip), or out of the Net Cash Proceeds of, a substantially
concurrent issue and sale for cash (other than to a Subsidiary) of other
Qualified Capital Stock of the Company; PROVIDED that the Net Cash Proceeds from
the issuance of such shares of Qualified Capital Stock are excluded from clause
(c)(iii) of the first paragraph this Section 4.07;

      (c) any repurchase, redemption, defeasance, retirement or acquisition for
value or payment of principal of any Subordinated Indebtedness in exchange for,
or out of the net proceeds of a substantially concurrent issuance and sale for
cash (other than to any Subsidiary of the Company) of, any Qualified Capital
Stock of the Company; PROVIDED that the Net Cash Proceeds from the issuance of
such Qualified Capital Stock are excluded from clause (c)(iii) of this Section
4.07;

      (d) the repurchase, redemption, defeasance, retirement, refinancing,
acquisition for value or payment of principal of any Subordinated Indebtedness
(other than Redeemable Capital Stock) (a "REFINANCING") through the issuance of
new Subordinated Indebtedness of the Company; PROVIDED that any such new
Subordinated Indebtedness:

            (i) shall be in a principal amount that does not exceed the
      principal amount so refinanced (or, if such old Subordinated Indebtedness
      provides for an amount less than the principal amount thereof to be due
      and payable upon a declaration or acceleration thereof, then such lesser
      amount as of the date of determination), plus the amount of any premium
      required to be paid in connection with such refinancing pursuant to the
      terms of the Subordinated Indebtedness refinanced or the amount of any
      premium reasonably determined by the Company as necessary to accomplish
      such refinancing, plus, in either case, the amount of expenses of the
      Company incurred in connection with such refinancing;

            (ii) has an Average Life to Stated Maturity greater than the
      remaining Average Life to Stated Maturity of the Indebtedness being
      refinanced;

            (iii) has a Stated Maturity for its final scheduled principal
      payment later than the Stated Maturity for the final scheduled principal
      payment of the Indebtedness being refinanced; and

            (iv) is expressly subordinated in right of payment to the Notes at
      least to the same extent as the Indebtedness to be refinanced; and

      (e) the repurchase or other retirement of the Company's 15 1/2% Junior
Subordinated Notes due 2003 in exchange for or in connection with a simultaneous
retirement of the 15% Debentures due 2003 of Playtex Apparel Partners, L.P., in
a transaction that does not involve any transfer of cash.

      In determining whether any payment is permitted by this Section 4.07, the
Company may allocate or reallocate, among clauses (a) - (e) of the preceding
paragraph or among such clauses and the first paragraph of this Section 4.07,
all or any portion of such payment and all or any portion of any payment
previously allocated; PROVIDED that, after giving effect to such allocation or
reallocation, all such payments (or allocated portions of such payments) would
be permitted under the various provisions of this Section 4.07.

                                       53
<PAGE>

SECTION 4.08      IVIDEND AND OTHER PAYMENT RESTRICTIONS AFFECTING SUBSIDIARIES.

      The Company will not, and will not permit any of its Restricted
Subsidiaries to, directly or indirectly, create or otherwise cause or suffer to
exist or become effective any consensual encumbrance or restriction on the
ability of any Restricted Subsidiary to:

      (a) pay dividends or make any other distribution on its Capital Stock to
the Company or any other Restricted Subsidiary;

      (b) pay any Indebtedness owed to the Company or any Restricted Subsidiary;

      (c) make any Investment in the Company; or

      (d) transfer any of its properties or assets to the Company or any
Restricted Subsidiary, except:

            (i) any encumbrance or restriction pursuant to the Credit Agreement
      and any related security agreement in each case as in effect on the date
      of this Indenture or any other agreement in effect on the date of this
      Indenture;

            (ii) any encumbrance or restriction, with respect to a Restricted
      Subsidiary that is not a Restricted Subsidiary of the Company on the date
      of this Indenture, in existence at the time such Person becomes a
      Restricted Subsidiary of the Company and not incurred in connection with,
      or in contemplation of, such Person becoming a Restricted Subsidiary;

            (iii) customary provisions restricting assignment of contracts or
      subletting, licensing or assignment of any lease governing a leasehold
      interest of the Company or any Restricted Subsidiary;

            (iv) restrictions contained in any agreement relating to the sale of
      all or substantially all of the Capital Stock or assets of a Restricted
      Subsidiary that are only applicable to the Restricted Subsidiary whose
      Capital Stock or assets are being sold;

            (v) any encumbrance or restriction contained in a working capital
      facility permitted to be incurred pursuant to clause (k) of the definition
      of "Permitted Indebtedness" provided that the Company's chief financial
      officer determines in good faith that such restrictions will not
      materially adversely affect the Company's ability to make payments of
      interest and principal on the Notes when due;

            (vi) any Purchase Money Note or other Indebtedness or other
      contractual requirements of a Securitization Entity in connection with a
      Qualified Securitization Transaction; PROVIDED that such restrictions
      apply only to such Securitization Entity; and

            (vii) any encumbrance or restriction existing under any agreement
      that amends, restates, modifies, renews, refunds, replaces or refinances,
      in whole or in part, any of the encumbrances or restrictions described in
      the foregoing clauses (i) and (ii), provided that the terms and conditions
      of any such encumbrances or restrictions are not materially less favorable
      to the Holders of the Notes than those under or pursuant to the agreement
      evidencing the Indebtedness so amended, restated, modified, renewed,
      refunded, replaced or refinanced.

                                       54
<PAGE>

SECTION 4.09      LIMITATION ON INDEBTEDNESS.

      The Company shall not, and shall not permit any of its Restricted
Subsidiaries to, create, issue, assume, guarantee, or otherwise in any manner
become directly or indirectly liable for or with respect to or otherwise incur
(collectively, "INCUR") any Indebtedness (including any Acquired Indebtedness
but excluding any Permitted Indebtedness) except for:

      (a) Indebtedness of the Company or any Guarantor; or

      (b) Indebtedness of any other Restricted Subsidiary constituting Acquired
Indebtedness;

PROVIDED that, in each case, the Consolidated Fixed Charge Coverage Ratio for
the Company for the four full fiscal quarters immediately preceding the
incurrence of such Indebtedness taken as one period would have been at least 2.0
to 1.0 (calculated after giving pro forma effect to:

      (a) the incurrence of such Indebtedness and (if applicable) the
application of the net proceeds therefrom, including to refinance other
Indebtedness, as if such Indebtedness was incurred, and the application of such
proceeds occurred, at the beginning of such four-quarter period;

      (b) the incurrence, repayment or retirement of any other Indebtedness by
the Company and its Restricted Subsidiaries since the first day of such
four-quarter period as if such Indebtedness was incurred, repaid or retired at
the beginning of such four-quarter period (except that, in making such
computation, the amount of Indebtedness under any revolving credit facility
shall be computed based upon the average daily balance of such Indebtedness
during such four-quarter period);

      (c) in the case of Acquired Indebtedness, the related acquisition (as if
such acquisition had been consummated on the first day of such four-quarter
period); and

      (d) any acquisition or disposition by the Company and its Restricted
Subsidiaries of any company or any business or any assets out of the ordinary
course of business, whether by merger, stock purchase or sale, or asset purchase
or sale and any related repayment of Indebtedness, in each case since the first
day of such four-quarter period, as if such acquisition or disposition had been
consummated on the first day of such four-quarter period and giving effect only
to those acquisition related cost savings that have been realized or that the
Company's chief financial officer reasonably believes will be realized).

The accrual or accretion of interest or dividends and the payment of interest or
dividends in kind shall not be deemed to be an incurrence of Indebtedness.

SECTION 4.10      ASSET SALES.

      The Company will not, and will not permit any of its Restricted
Subsidiaries to, directly or indirectly, consummate an Asset Sale unless:

      (a) at least 75% of the proceeds from such Asset Sale are received in
cash; PROVIDED, HOWEVER, that the amount of (i) any Senior Indebtedness of the
Company or any Guarantor (or any Indebtedness of a Restricted Subsidiary that is
not a Guarantor) that is assumed by the transferee of any asset in connection
with any Asset Sale and (ii) any securities, notes or other obligations received
by the Company or any such Restricted Subsidiary from such transferee or
purchaser that are converted by the Company or such Restricted Subsidiary into
cash or Cash Equivalents within 60 days after receipt (to the

                                       55
<PAGE>

extent of any cash or Cash Equivalents received in that conversion), shall be
deemed to be cash for purposes of this provision; and

      (b) The Company or such Restricted Subsidiary receives consideration at
the time of such Asset Sale at least equal to the fair market value of the
shares or assets sold (as determined by the Board of Directors of the Company
and evidenced by a board resolution for Asset Sales in excess of $15,000,000).

      Notwithstanding the foregoing, clause (a) of the preceding paragraph shall
not apply to any Asset Sale or portions thereof involving Excluded Assets or the
making of any Permitted Investment pursuant to the definition of "PERMITTED
INVESTMENT" or any Restricted Payment under Section 4.07 hereof.

      If all or a portion of the Net Cash Proceeds of any Asset Sale are not
applied to prepay or repay permanently any Senior Indebtedness then outstanding
as provided by the terms thereof (and to effect a corresponding commitment
reduction in the event that the Senior Indebtedness prepaid or repaid is not a
term loan) within 12 months of the closing of such Asset Sale, or if no such
Senior Indebtedness is then outstanding, then the Company may within 12 months
of the Asset Sale, invest the Net Cash Proceeds in properties and assets that
(as determined by the Board of Directors) replace the properties and assets that
were the subject of the Asset Sale or in properties and assets that will be used
in the businesses of the Company or its Restricted Subsidiaries existing on the
date of this Indenture or in businesses reasonably related thereto which for
purposes of this Indenture shall include any consumer products business. The
amount of such Net Cash Proceeds neither used to permanently repay or prepay
Senior Indebtedness nor used or invested as set forth in this paragraph
constitutes "EXCESS PROCEEDS."

      When the aggregate amount of Excess Proceeds equals $25,000,000 or more,
the Company shall apply the Excess Proceeds to the repayment of the Notes and
any Pari Passu Indebtedness required to be repurchased under the instrument
governing such Pari Passu Indebtedness as follows:

      (a) the Company shall make an offer to purchase (an "OFFER") from all
Holders of the Notes in accordance with the procedures set forth in this
Indenture in the maximum principal amount (expressed as a multiple of $1,000) of
Notes that may be purchased out of an amount (the "NOTE AMOUNT") equal to the
product of such Excess Proceeds multiplied by a fraction, the numerator of which
is the outstanding principal amount of the Notes, and the denominator of which
is the sum of the outstanding principal amount of the Notes and such Pari Passu
Indebtedness (subject to proration in the event such amount is less than the
aggregate Offered Price (as defined herein) of all Notes tendered); and

      (b) to the extent required by such Pari Passu Indebtedness to permanently
reduce the principal amount of such Pari Passu Indebtedness, the Company shall
make an offer to purchase or otherwise repay or repurchase or redeem Pari Passu
Indebtedness (a "PARI PASSU OFFER") in an amount (the "PARI PASSU DEBT AMOUNT")
equal to the excess of the Excess Proceeds over the Note Amount; PROVIDED that
in no event shall the Pari Passu Debt Amount exceed the principal amount of such
Pari Passu Indebtedness plus the amount of any premium required to be paid to
repurchase such Pari Passu Indebtedness.

The offer price shall be payable in cash in an amount equal to 100% of the
principal amount of the Notes plus accrued and unpaid interest, if any, to the
date (the "PURCHASE DATE") such Offer is consummated (the "OFFERED PRICE"), in
accordance with the procedures set forth in Section 3.09 hereof.

      To the extent that the aggregate Offered Price of the Notes tendered
pursuant to the Offer is less than the Note Amount relating thereto or the
aggregate amount of Pari Passu Indebtedness that is purchased is less than the
Pari Passu Debt Amount (the amount of such shortfall, if any, constituting a
"Deficiency"), the Company shall use such Deficiency in the business of the
Company and its Restricted

                                       56
<PAGE>

Subsidiaries or for any other purpose permitted under the terms of this
Indenture. Upon completion of the purchase of all the Notes tendered pursuant to
an Offer and repurchase of the Pari Passu Indebtedness pursuant to a Pari Passu
Offer, the amount of Excess Proceeds, if any, shall be reset at zero.

      Such Excess Proceeds may be invested in Temporary Cash Investments or used
to temporarily repay amounts outstanding under a revolving credit facility until
they are applied as provided above. The Company shall be entitled to any
interest or dividends accrued, earned or paid on such Temporary Cash
Investments.

SECTION 4.11      TRANSACTIONS WITH AFFILIATES.

      The Company will not, and will not permit any of its Restricted
Subsidiaries to, directly or indirectly, enter into or suffer to exist any
transaction or series of related transactions (including, without limitation,
the sale, purchase, exchange or lease of assets, property or services) with any
Affiliate of the Company (other than the Company or a Restricted Subsidiary)
unless:

      (a) such transaction or series of related transactions is on terms that
are no less favorable to the Company or such Restricted Subsidiary, as the case
may be, than would be available in a comparable transaction in arm's length
dealings with an unrelated third party; and

      (b) with respect to any transaction or series of related transactions
involving aggregate consideration in excess of $5,000,000, the Company delivers
an officer's certificate to the Trustee certifying that such transaction or
series of related transactions complies with clause (a) above and such
transaction or series of related transactions has been approved by a majority of
the Disinterested Directors of the Board of Directors;

PROVIDED that any transaction or series of related transactions otherwise
permitted under this paragraph (other than any transaction or series of related
transactions with respect to the making of any Permitted Investment pursuant to
the definition of "Permitted Investment" or any Restricted Payment permitted
pursuant to Section 4.07) pursuant to which the Company or any Restricted
Subsidiary of the Company shall receive or render value exceeding $25,000,000
shall not be permitted unless, prior to the consummation of any such transaction
or series of related transactions, the Company shall have received an opinion,
from an independent nationally recognized investment banking firm or firm
experienced in the appraisal or similar review of similar types of transactions,
that the financial terms of such transaction are fair to the Company from a
financial point of view.

      Notwithstanding the foregoing, the provisions of this Section 4.11 shall
not apply to:

      (a) any transaction with an officer or member of the Board of Directors of
the Company entered into in the ordinary course of business (including, without
limitation, the Playtex Products, Inc. Stock Option Plan and other employment,
indemnification, compensation or employee benefit arrangements with any officer
or member of the Board of Directors of the Company);

      (b) transactions or agreements in existence on the date of this Indenture
(and extensions or amendments thereof on terms which are not materially less
favorable to the Company than the terms of any such transaction or agreement as
in existence on the date of this Indenture);

      (c) directors' fees;

      (d) employment agreements approved by the Board of Directors of the
Company;

                                       57
<PAGE>

      (e) loans to employees in the ordinary course of business plus up to
$5,000,000 of additional loans to employees in the aggregate at any one time
outstanding;

      (f) transactions effected as part of a Qualified Securitization
Transaction;

      (g) any employee benefit plan available to employees of the Company
generally; and

      (h) sales by the Company of its products in the ordinary course of
business on arm's-length terms.

      In addition, the Company will cause Playtex Investment Corp. not to amend,
modify or in any way alter the terms of the Agreement, dated as of November 5,
1991, between Playtex Investment Corp. and Playtex Apparel Partners, L.P. in a
manner adverse to the Company or any Subsidiary.

SECTION 4.12      LIENS.

      The Company will not, and will not permit any Restricted Subsidiary to
create, incur, affirm or suffer to exist any Lien of any kind securing any Pari
Passu Indebtedness or Subordinated Indebtedness (including any assumption,
guarantee or other liability with respect thereto by any Restricted Subsidiary)
upon any property or assets (including any intercompany Notes) of the Company or
any Restricted Subsidiary owned on the date of this Indenture or acquired after
the date of this Indenture, or any income or profits therefrom, unless the Notes
are directly secured equally and ratably with (or prior to in the case of
Subordinated Indebtedness) the obligation or liability secured by such Lien,
except for:

      (a) any Lien securing Acquired Indebtedness (and not created in connection
with, or in contemplation of the related acquisition) in each case which
Indebtedness is permitted under the provisions of Section 4.09 hereof; PROVIDED
that any such Lien only extends to the assets that were subject to such Lien
securing such Acquired Indebtedness prior to the related acquisition by the
Company or its Restricted Subsidiaries;

      (b) Liens securing other Indebtedness having an aggregate principal amount
not to exceed $20,000,000 at any one time outstanding;

      (c) Liens on assets transferred to a Securitization Entity or on assets of
a Securitization Entity, in either case incurred in connection with a Qualified
Securitization Transaction; and

      (d) any Liens that may arise in connection with the satisfaction and
discharge of the Company's 8-7/8% Senior Notes due 2004 and the Company's 9%
Senior Subordinated Notes due 2003 prior to their redemption.

      Notwithstanding the foregoing, any security interest granted by the
Company or any Restricted Subsidiary to secure the Notes created pursuant to the
first paragraph of this Section 4.12 shall provide by its terms that such
security interest shall be automatically and unconditionally released and
discharged upon the release by the holders of the Indebtedness of the Company or
any Restricted Subsidiary described in the first paragraph of this Section 4.12
of their security interest (including any deemed release upon payment in full of
all obligations under such Indebtedness or as a result of the satisfaction and
discharge or legal or covenant defeasance of such Indebtedness) at a time when:

                                       58
<PAGE>

      (a) no other Pari Passu Indebtedness and Subordinated Indebtedness of the
Company or any Restricted Subsidiary has been secured by such property or assets
of the Company or any such Restricted Subsidiary; or

      (b) the holders of all such other Pari Passu Indebtedness and Subordinated
Indebtedness which is secured by such property or assets of the Company or any
such Restricted Subsidiary also release their security interest in such property
or assets (including any deemed release upon payment in full of all obligations
under such Indebtedness or as a result of the satisfaction and discharge or
legal or covenant defeasance of such Indebtedness).

SECTION 4.13      CORPORATE EXISTENCE.

      Subject to Article 5 hereof, the Company shall do or cause to be done all
things necessary to preserve and keep in full force and effect (i) the
corporate, partnership or other existence of itself and each of its Restricted
Subsidiaries, in accordance with the respective organizational documents (as the
same may be amended from time to time) of the Company or any such Restricted
Subsidiary and (ii) the rights (charter and statutory), licenses and franchises
of the Company and its Restricted Subsidiaries; PROVIDED, HOWEVER, that the
Company shall not be required to preserve any such right, license or franchise,
or the corporate, partnership or other existence of itself and any of its
Restricted Subsidiaries, if the Board of Directors shall determine that the
preservation thereof is no longer desirable in the conduct of the business of
the Company and its Restricted Subsidiaries, taken as a whole, and that the loss
thereof will not have a material adverse effect on the Company and its
Restricted Subsidiaries, taken as a whole.

SECTION 4.14      OFFER TO REPURCHASE UPON CHANGE OF CONTROL.

      (a) Upon the occurrence of a Change of Control, each Holder of Notes will
have the right to require the Company to repurchase all or any part (equal to
$1,000 or an integral multiple of $1,000) of such Holder's Notes validly
tendered pursuant to the offer described below (the "CHANGE OF CONTROL OFFER")
at an offer price in cash equal to 101% of the aggregate principal amount
thereof, plus accrued and unpaid interest and Liquidated Damages, if any,
thereon to the date of repurchase (the "CHANGE OF CONTROL PAYMENT"). Within 15
days following any Change of Control, the Company will, or will cause the
Trustee, on behalf of and at the expense of the Company, to mail a notice to
each Holder describing the transaction or transactions that constitute the
Change of Control and offering to repurchase Notes on the date specified in that
notice, which date shall be no earlier than 30 days and no later than 60 days
from the date that notice is mailed (the "CHANGE OF CONTROL PAYMENT DATE"),
pursuant to the procedures required by this Indenture and described in that
notice. The Company will comply with the requirements of Rule 14e-1 under the
Exchange Act and any other securities laws and regulations thereunder to the
extent such laws and regulations are applicable in connection with the
repurchase of the Notes as a result of a Change of Control. To the extent that
the provisions of any securities laws or regulations conflict with the
provisions of this Indenture relating to a Change of Control Offer, the Company
will comply with the applicable securities laws and regulations and shall not be
deemed to have breached its obligations described in this Indenture by virtue of
such conflict.

      (b) Prior to the commencement of a Change of Control Offer, but in any
event within 30 days following any Change of Control, the Company shall:

            (i)(x) repay in full and terminate all commitments under
      Indebtedness under the Credit Agreement and all other Senior Indebtedness,
      the terms of which require repayment upon a Change of Control, or (y)
      offer to repay in full and terminate all commitments under all
      Indebtedness under the Credit Agreement and all other Senior Indebtedness
      and repay the Indebtedness owed to each lender that has accepted such
      offer in full, or

                                       59
<PAGE>

            (ii) obtain the requisite consents under the Credit Agreement and
      all such other Senior Indebtedness to permit the repurchase of the Notes
      as provided herein.

      (c) On the Change of Control Payment Date, the Company will, to the extent
lawful:

            (i) accept for payment all Notes or portions thereof properly
      tendered pursuant to the Change of Control Offer;

            (ii) deposit with the Paying Agent an amount equal to the Change of
      Control Payment in respect of all Notes or portions thereof properly
      tendered; and

            (iii) deliver or cause to be delivered to the Trustee the Notes
      properly accepted together with an Officer's Certificate stating the
      aggregate principal amount of Notes or portions thereof being purchased by
      the Company.

      The Company shall publicly announce the results of the Change of Control
Offer on or as soon as practicable after the Change of Control Payment Date.

      (d) Notwithstanding anything to the contrary in this Section 4.14, the
Company will not be required to make a Change of Control Offer upon a Change of
Control if a third party makes the Change of Control Offer in the manner, at the
times and otherwise in compliance with the requirements set forth in this
Indenture applicable to a Change of Control Offer made by the Company including
any requirements to repay in full all Indebtedness under the Credit Agreement,
any such Senior Indebtedness or Senior Indebtedness of any Guarantor or obtains
the consent of such lenders to such Change of Control Offer and purchases all
Notes properly tendered and not withdrawn under the Change of Control Offer.

      The provisions under this Indenture relative to the Company's obligation
to make an offer to repurchase the Notes as a result of a Change of Control may
be waived or modified with the written consent of the Holders of a majority in
principal amount of the Notes then outstanding.

      The Paying Agent will promptly mail to each Holder of Notes property
tendered the Change of Control Payment for such Notes, and the Trustee will
promptly authenticate and mail (or cause to be transferred by book entry) to
each Holder a new Note equal in principal amount to any unpurchased portion of
the Notes surrendered, if any; PROVIDED that each new note will be in a
principal amount of $1,000 or an integral multiple of $1,000.

SECTION 4.15      NO SENIOR SUBORDINATED INDEBTEDNESS.

      Neither the Company nor any Guarantor will create, incur, issue, assume,
guarantee or otherwise in any manner become directly or indirectly liable for or
with respect to or otherwise permit to exist any Indebtedness that is
subordinate in right of payment to any Indebtedness of the Company or such
Guarantor, as the case may be, unless such Indebtedness is also pari passu with
the Notes or the Guarantee of such Guarantor, as the case may be, or subordinate
in right of payment to the Notes or such Guarantee in the same manner as the
Notes are subordinate in right of payment to Senior Indebtedness or such
Guarantee is subordinate to Senior Indebtedness, as the case may be, or in a
manner that is more favorable to the Holders of the Notes.

                                       60
<PAGE>

SECTION 4.16      DESIGNATION OF RESTRICTED AND UNRESTRICTED SUBSIDIARIES.

      The Board of Directors may designate any Restricted Subsidiary to be an
Unrestricted Subsidiary if that designation would not cause a Default. If a
Restricted Subsidiary is designated as an Unrestricted Subsidiary, the aggregate
fair market value of all outstanding Investments owned by the Company and its
Restricted Subsidiaries in the Subsidiary properly designated will be deemed to
be an Investment made as of the time of the designation and will reduce the
amount available for Restricted Payments under the first paragraph of Section
4.07 hereof or one or more of the clauses of the defined term Permitted
Investments, as determined by the Company. That designation will only be
permitted if the Investment would be permitted at that time and if the
Restricted Subsidiary otherwise meets the definition of an Unrestricted
Subsidiary.

SECTION 4.17      PAYMENTS FOR CONSENT

      The Company will not, and will not permit any of its Subsidiaries to,
directly or indirectly, pay or cause to be paid any consideration to or for the
benefit of any Holder of Notes for or as an inducement to any consent, waiver or
amendment of any of the terms or provisions of this Indenture or the Notes
unless such consideration is offered to be paid and is paid to al Holders of the
Notes that consent, waive or agree to amend in the time frame set forth in the
solicitation documents relating to such consent, waiver or agreement.

SECTION 4.18      ADDITIONAL GUARANTEES

      If the Company or any of its Restricted Subsidiaries shall acquire or
create another Domestic Subsidiary after the date of this Indenture, then such
newly acquired or created Domestic Subsidiary shall become a Guarantor and
deliver to the Trustee a Guarantee in the form of a Supplemental Indenture. The
form of such Supplemental Indenture is attached as Exhibit F hereto.

                                    ARTICLE 5
                                   SUCCESSORS

SECTION 5.01      MERGER, CONSOLIDATION, OR SALE OF ASSETS.

      The Company shall not, in a single transaction or a series of related
transactions, consolidate with or merge with or into any other Person or sell,
assign, convey, transfer, lease or otherwise dispose of all or substantially all
of its properties and assets to any Person or group of affiliated Persons, or
permit any of its Restricted Subsidiaries to enter into any such transaction or
transactions if such transaction or transactions, in the aggregate, would result
in an assignment, conveyance, transfer, lease or disposition of all or
substantially all of the properties and assets of the Company and its Restricted
Subsidiaries on a consolidated basis to any other Person or group of affiliated
Persons, unless at the time and after giving effect thereto:

      (a) either:

            (i) the Company shall be the continuing corporation; or

            (ii) the Person (if other than the Company) formed by such
      consolidation or into which the Company is merged or the Person which
      acquires by sale, assignment, conveyance, transfer, lease or disposition
      all or substantially all of the properties and assets of the Company and
      its Restricted Subsidiaries on a consolidated basis (the "SURVIVING
      Entity") shall be a corporation

                                       61
<PAGE>

      duly organized and validly existing under the laws of the United States of
      America, any state thereof or the District of Columbia and such Person
      assumes by a Supplemental Indenture in a form reasonably satisfactory to
      the Trustee, all the obligations of the Company under the Notes and this
      Indenture, and this Indenture shall remain in full force and effect;

      (b) immediately before and immediately after giving effect to such
transaction on a pro forma basis, no Default or Event of Default shall have
occurred and be continuing;

      (c) except in the case of a merger with or into any Person solely for the
purpose of changing the Company's jurisdiction of incorporation or a merger
whose sole purpose is to create a holding company whose only significant asset
is the stock of the Company, either:

            (i) immediately after giving effect to such transaction on a pro
      forma basis (on the assumption that the transaction occurred on the first
      day of the four-quarter period immediately prior to the consummation of
      such transaction with the appropriate adjustments with respect to the
      transaction being included in such pro forma calculation), the Company (or
      the Surviving Entity if the Company is not the continuing obligor under
      this Indenture) could incur $1.00 of additional Indebtedness under Section
      4.09 hereto (other than Permitted Indebtedness); or

            (ii) the Company's (or the Surviving Entity if the Company is not
      the continuing obligor under this Indenture) pro forma Consolidated Fixed
      Charge Coverage Ratio after giving effect to such transaction (calculated
      as provided above) is equal to or higher than the Company's actual
      Consolidated Fixed Charge Coverage Ratio for such four-quarter period;

      (d) the Company or the Surviving Entity shall have delivered, or caused to
be delivered, to the Trustee, in form and substance reasonably satisfactory to
the Trustee, an Officer's Certificate and an Opinion of Counsel, each to the
effect that such consolidation, merger, transfer, sale, assignment, lease or
other transaction and the Supplemental Indenture in respect thereto comply with
the provisions described herein and that all conditions precedent herein
provided for relating to such transaction have been complied with.

      In addition, the Company may not, directly or indirectly, lease all or
substantially all of its properties or assets, in one or more related
transactions to any other Person. This Article 5 will not apply to the sale,
merger, consolidation, assignment, transfer, conveyance or other disposition of
assets between or among the Company and any of its Restricted Subsidiaries.

SECTION 5.02      SUCCESSOR CORPORATION SUBSTITUTED.

      Upon any consolidation or merger, or any sale, assignment, transfer,
lease, conveyance or other disposition of all or substantially all of the assets
of the Company in accordance with Section 5.01 hereof, the successor Person
formed by such consolidation or into or with which the Company is merged or to
which such sale, assignment, transfer, lease, conveyance or other disposition is
made shall succeed to, and be substituted for (so that from and after the date
of such consolidation, merger, sale, lease, conveyance or other disposition, the
provisions of this Indenture referring to the "Company" shall refer instead to
the successor Person and not to the Company), and may exercise every right and
power of the Company under this Indenture with the same effect as if such
successor Person had been named as the Company herein. In the event of any
consolidation or merger, or any sale, assignment, transfer, lease conveyance or
other disposition of all or substantially all of the assets of the Company in
accordance with Section 5.01 hereof, the Company will be discharged from all
obligations and covenants under this Indenture and the Notes.

                                       62
<PAGE>

                                    ARTICLE 6
                              DEFAULTS AND REMEDIES

SECTION 6.01      EVENTS OF DEFAULT.

      Each of the following constitutes an Event of Default:

      (a) there shall be a default in the payment of any interest or Liquidated
Damages, if any, with respect to any Note when it becomes due and payable, and
such default shall continue for a period of 30 days;

      (b) there shall be a default in the payment of the principal of (or
premium, if any, on) any Note when and as the same shall become due and payable
at maturity (upon acceleration, optional or mandatory redemption, required
repurchase or otherwise);

      (c) (i) there shall be a default in the performance, or breach, of any
      covenant or agreement of the Company or any Guarantor under this Indenture
      (other than a default in the performance, or breach, of a covenant or
      agreement which is specifically dealt with in clauses (a) or (b) above or
      in sub-clauses (ii) or (iii) of this clause (c)) and such default or
      breach shall continue for a period of 60 days after written notice has
      been given, by certified mail, to the Company by the Trustee or to the
      Company and the Trustee by the Holders of at least 25% in aggregate
      principal amount of the outstanding Notes;

            (ii) there shall be a default in the performance or breach of the
      provisions described in Article 5; or

            (iii) the Company shall have failed to make or consummate a Change
      of Control Offer in accordance with the provisions of Section 4.14 hereof;

      (d) one or more defaults shall have occurred under any agreements,
indentures or instruments under which the Company, any Guarantor or any
Restricted Subsidiary then has outstanding Indebtedness in excess of $25,000,000
in the aggregate and, if not already matured at its final maturity in accordance
with its terms, such Indebtedness shall have been accelerated;

      (e) any Guarantee shall for any reason cease to be, or be asserted in
writing by any Guarantor or the Company not to be, in full force and effect,
enforceable in accordance with its terms, except to the extent contemplated by
this Indenture and any such Guarantee;

      (f) one or more final judgments, orders or decrees for the payment of
money in excess of $15,000,000, either individually or in the aggregate, shall
be entered against the Company or any Restricted Subsidiary or any of their
respective properties and shall not be discharged and either (i) enforcement
proceedings shall have been commenced upon such judgment, order or decree or
(ii) there shall have been a period of 60 consecutive days during which a stay
of enforcement of such judgment or order, by reason of an appeal or otherwise,
shall not be in effect;

      (g) there shall have been the entry by a court of competent jurisdiction
of (a) a decree or order for relief in respect of the Company, any Guarantor or
any Material Subsidiary in an involuntary case or proceeding under any
applicable Bankruptcy Law or (b) a decree or order adjudging the Company, any
Guarantor or any Material Subsidiary bankrupt or insolvent, or seeking
reorganization, arrangement,

                                       63
<PAGE>

adjustment or composition of or in respect of the Company, any Guarantor or any
Material Subsidiary under any applicable federal or state law, or appointing a
custodian, receiver, liquidator, assignee, trustee, sequestrator or similar
official of the Company, any Guarantor or any Material Subsidiary or of any
substantial part of its property, or ordering the winding up or liquidation of
its affairs, and any such decree or order for relief shall continue to be in
effect, or any such other decree or order shall be unstayed and in effect, for a
period of 60 consecutive days; or

      (h) (i) the Company, any Guarantor or any Material Subsidiary commences a
voluntary case or proceeding under any applicable Bankruptcy Law or any other
case or proceeding to be adjudicated bankrupt or insolvent;

            (ii) the Company, any Guarantor or any Material Subsidiary consents
      to the entry of a decree or order for relief in respect of the Company,
      such Guarantor or such Material Subsidiary in an involuntary case or
      proceeding under any applicable Bankruptcy Law or to the commencement of
      any bankruptcy or insolvency case or proceeding against it;

            (iii) the Company, any Guarantor or any Material Subsidiary files a
      petition or answer or consent seeking reorganization or relief under any
      applicable federal or state law;

            (iv) the Company, any Guarantor or any Material Subsidiary (1)
      consents to the filing of such petition or the appointment of, or taking
      possession by, a custodian, receiver, liquidator, assignee, trustee,
      sequestrator or similar official of the Company, any Guarantor or such
      Material Subsidiary or of any substantial part of its property, (2) makes
      an assignment for the benefit of creditors or (3) admits in writing its
      inability to pay its debts generally as they become due; or

            (v) the Company, any Guarantor or any Material Subsidiary takes any
      corporate action in furtherance of any such actions in this clause (h).

SECTION 6.02      ACCELERATION.

      If an Event of Default (other than as specified in clause (g) and (h) of
Section 6.01 hereof with respect to the Company) shall occur and be continuing,
the Trustee or the Holders of not less than 25% in aggregate principal amount of
the Notes then outstanding may declare the Notes due and payable immediately at
their principal amount together with accrued and unpaid interest, if any, to the
date the Notes shall have become due and payable by a notice in writing to the
Company (and to the Trustee if given by the Holders of the Notes) and, if the
Credit Agreement is in effect, to the administrative agent under the Credit
Agreement, and upon any such declaration such amount shall become immediately
due and payable, except if the Credit Agreement is in effect, any such
acceleration shall not be effective until the first to occur of:

      (a) an acceleration under the Credit Agreement; or

      (b) the fifth Business Day after receipt by the Company and by such
administrative agent under the Credit Agreement of such written notice, and
thereupon the Trustee may, at its discretion, proceed to protect and enforce the
rights of the Holders of Notes by appropriate judicial proceeding.

      If an Event of Default specified in clause (g) or (h) of the Section 6.01
hereof occurs with respect to the Company and is continuing, then all the Notes
shall ipso facto become and be immediately due and payable, in an amount equal
to the principal amount of the Notes, together with accrued and unpaid interest,

                                       64
<PAGE>

if any, to the date the Notes become due and payable, without any declaration or
other act on the part of the trustee or any Holder.

      After a declaration of acceleration, but before a judgment or decree for
payment of the money due has been obtained by the Trustee, the Holders of a
majority in aggregate principal amount of Notes outstanding, by written notice
to the Company and the Trustee, may rescind and annul such declaration and its
consequences if:

      (a) the Company has paid or deposited with the trustee a sum sufficient to
pay:

            (i) all sums paid or advanced by the Trustee and the reasonable
      compensation, expenses, disbursements and advances of the Trustee, its
      agents and counsel;

            (ii) all overdue interest, and Liquidated Damages, if any, on all
      Notes;

            (iii) the principal of and premium, if any, on any Notes which have
      become due otherwise than by such declaration of acceleration and interest
      thereon at the rate borne by the Notes; and

            (iv) to the extent that payment of such interest is lawful, interest
      upon overdue interest at the rate borne by the Notes; and

      (b) all Events of Default, other than the non-payment of principal of the
Notes which have become due solely by such declaration of acceleration, have
been cured or waived.

      The Company shall notify the Trustee within five Business Days of the
occurrence of any Default.

SECTION 6.03      OTHER REMEDIES.

      If an Event of Default occurs and is continuing, the Trustee may pursue
any available remedy to collect the payment of principal, premium, if any, and
interest and Liquidated Damages, if any, on the Notes or to enforce the
performance of any provision of the Notes or this Indenture.

      The Trustee may maintain a proceeding even if it does not possess any of
the Notes or does not produce any of them in the proceeding. A delay or omission
by the Trustee or any Holder of a Note in exercising any right or remedy
accruing upon an Event of Default shall not impair the right or remedy or
constitute a waiver of or acquiescence in the Event of Default. All remedies are
cumulative to the extent permitted by law.

SECTION 6.04      WAIVER OF PAST DEFAULTS.

      The Holders of not less than a majority in aggregate principal amount of
the then outstanding Notes by notice to the Trustee may on behalf of the Holders
of all the Notes waive any past Default or Event of Default under this Indenture
and its consequences, except, subject to Section 6.03 hereof, a continuing
Default or Event of Default in the payment of the principal, premium, if any,
and Liquidated Damages, if any, or interest on any Note, or in respect of a
covenant or provision which under this Indenture cannot be modified or amended
without the consent of the Holder of each Note outstanding. Upon any such
waiver, such Default shall cease to exist, and any Event of Default arising
therefrom shall

                                       65
<PAGE>

be deemed to have been cured for every purpose of this Indenture; but no such
waiver shall extend to any subsequent or other Default or impair any right
consequent thereon.

SECTION 6.05      CONTROL BY MAJORITY.

      Holders of a majority in principal amount of the then outstanding Notes
may direct the time, method and place of conducting any proceeding for
exercising any remedy available to the Trustee or exercising any trust or power
conferred on it. However, the Trustee may refuse to follow any direction that
conflicts with law or this Indenture that the Trustee determines may be unduly
prejudicial to the rights of other Holders of Notes or that may involve the
Trustee in personal liability.

SECTION 6.06      LIMITATION ON SUITS.

      A Holder of a Note may pursue a remedy with respect to this Indenture or
the Notes only if:

      (a) the Holder of a Note gives to the Trustee written notice of a
continuing Event of Default;

      (b) the Holders of at least 25% in principal amount of the then
outstanding Notes make a written request to the Trustee to pursue the remedy;

      (c) such Holder of a Note or Holders of Notes offer and, if requested,
provide to the Trustee indemnity satisfactory to the Trustee against any loss,
liability or expense;

      (d) the Trustee does not comply with the request within 60 days after
receipt of the request and the offer and, if requested, the provision of
indemnity; and

      (e) during such 60-day period the Holders of a majority in principal
amount of the then outstanding Notes do not give the Trustee a direction
inconsistent with the request.

      A Holder of a Note may not use this Indenture to prejudice the rights of
another Holder of a Note or to obtain a preference or priority over another
Holder of a Note.

SECTION 6.07      RIGHTS OF HOLDERS OF NOTES TO RECEIVE PAYMENT.

      Notwithstanding any other provision of this Indenture, the right of any
Holder of a Note to receive payment of principal, premium and Liquidated
Damages, if any, and interest on the Note, on or after the respective due dates
expressed in the Note (including in connection with an offer to purchase), or to
bring suit for the enforcement of any such payment on or after such respective
dates, shall not be impaired or affected without the consent of such Holder.

SECTION 6.08      COLLECTION SUIT BY TRUSTEE.

      If an Event of Default specified in Section 6.01(a) or (b) occurs and is
continuing, the Trustee is authorized to recover judgment in its own name and as
Trustee of an express trust against the Company for the whole amount of
principal of, premium and Liquidated Damages, if any, and interest remaining
unpaid on the Notes and interest and Liquidated Damages, if any, on overdue
principal and, to the extent lawful, interest and such further amount as shall
be sufficient to cover the costs and expenses of collection, including the
reasonable compensation, expenses, disbursements and advances of the Trustee,
its agents and counsel.

                                       66
<PAGE>

SECTION 6.09      TRUSTEE MAY FILE PROOFS OF CLAIM.

      The Trustee is authorized to file such proofs of claim and other papers or
documents as may be necessary or advisable in order to have the claims of the
Trustee (including any claim for the reasonable compensation, expenses,
disbursements and advances of the Trustee, its agents and counsel) and the
Holders of the Notes allowed in any judicial proceedings relative to the Company
(or any other obligor upon the Notes), its creditors or its property and shall
be entitled and empowered to collect, receive and distribute any money or other
property payable or deliverable on any such claims and any custodian in any such
judicial proceeding is hereby authorized by each Holder to make such payments to
the Trustee, and in the event that the Trustee shall consent to the making of
such payments directly to the Holders, to pay to the Trustee any amount due to
it for the reasonable compensation, expenses, disbursements and advances of the
Trustee, its agents and counsel, and any other amounts due the Trustee under
Section 7.07 hereof. To the extent that the payment of any such compensation,
expenses, disbursements and advances of the Trustee, its agents and counsel, and
any other amounts due the Trustee under Section 7.07 hereof out of the estate in
any such proceeding, shall be denied for any reason, payment of the same shall
be secured by a Lien on, and shall be paid out of, any and all distributions,
dividends, money, securities and other properties that the Holders may be
entitled to receive in such proceeding whether in liquidation or under any plan
of reorganization or arrangement or otherwise. Nothing herein contained shall be
deemed to authorize the Trustee to authorize or consent to or accept or adopt on
behalf of any Holder any plan of reorganization, arrangement, adjustment or
composition affecting the Notes or the rights of any Holder, or to authorize the
Trustee to vote in respect of the claim of any Holder in any such proceeding.

SECTION 6.10      PRIORITIES.

      If the Trustee collects any money pursuant to this Article 6, it shall pay
out the money in the following order:

      FIRST: to the Trustee, its agents and attorneys for amounts due under
Section 7.07 hereof, including payment of all compensation, expense and
liabilities incurred, and all advances made, by the Trustee and the costs and
expenses of collection;

      SECOND: to holders of Senior Indebtedness to the extent required by
Article 10 or Section 11.02 hereof;

      THIRD: to Holders of Notes for amounts due and unpaid on the Notes for
principal, premium and Liquidated Damages, if any, and interest, ratably,
without preference or priority of any kind, according to the amounts due and
payable on the Notes for principal, premium and Liquidated Damages, if any and
interest, respectively; and

      FOURTH: to the Company or to such party as a court of competent
jurisdiction shall direct.

      The Trustee may fix a record date and payment date for any payment to
Holders of Notes pursuant to this Section 6.10.

SECTION 6.11      UNDERTAKING FOR COSTS.

      In any suit for the enforcement of any right or remedy under this
Indenture or in any suit against the Trustee for any action taken or omitted by
it as a Trustee, a court in its discretion may require the filing by any party
litigant in the suit of an undertaking to pay the costs of the suit, and the
court in its discretion may assess reasonable costs, including reasonable
attorneys' fees and expenses, against any

                                       67
<PAGE>

party litigant in the suit, having due regard to the merits and good faith of
the claims or defenses made by the party litigant. This Section does not apply
to a suit by the Trustee, a suit by a Holder of a Note pursuant to Section 6.07
hereof, or a suit by Holders of more than 10% in principal amount of the then
outstanding Notes.

                                    ARTICLE 7
                                     TRUSTEE

SECTION 7.01      DUTIES OF TRUSTEE.

      (a) If an Event of Default has occurred and is continuing, the Trustee
shall exercise such of the rights and powers vested in it by this Indenture, and
use the same degree of care and skill in its exercise, as a prudent man would
exercise or use under the circumstances in the conduct of his own affairs.

      (b) Except during the continuance of an Event of Default:

            (i) the duties of the Trustee shall be determined solely by the
      express provisions of this Indenture and the Trustee need perform only
      those duties that are specifically set forth in this Indenture and no
      others, and no implied covenants or obligations shall be read into this
      Indenture against the Trustee; and

            (ii) in the absence of bad faith on its part, the Trustee may
      conclusively rely, as to the truth of the statements and the correctness
      of the opinions expressed therein, upon certificates or opinions furnished
      to the Trustee and conforming to the requirements of this Indenture.
      However, the Trustee shall examine the certificates and opinions to
      determine whether or not they conform to the requirements of this
      Indenture.

      (c) The Trustee may not be relieved from liabilities for its own negligent
action, its own negligent failure to act, or its own willful misconduct, except
that:

            (i) this paragraph does not limit the effect of paragraph (b) of
      this Section 7.01;

            (ii) the Trustee shall not be liable for any error of judgment made
      in good faith by a Responsible Officer, unless it is proved that the
      Trustee was negligent in ascertaining the pertinent facts; and

            (iii) the Trustee shall not be liable with respect to any action it
      takes or omits to take in good faith in accordance with a direction
      received by it pursuant to Section 6.05 hereof.

      (d) Whether or not therein expressly so provided, every provision of this
Indenture that in any way relates to the Trustee is subject to paragraphs (a),
(b), (c), (e) and (f) of this Section 7.01 and Section 7.02 hereof.

      (e) No provision of this Indenture shall require the Trustee to expend or
risk its own funds or incur any liability. The Trustee shall be under no
obligation to exercise any of its rights and powers under this Indenture at the
request of any Holders, unless such Holder shall have offered to the Trustee
security and indemnity satisfactory to it against any loss, liability or
expense.

                                       68
<PAGE>

      (f) The Trustee shall not be liable for interest on any money received by
it except as the Trustee may agree in writing with the Company. Money held in
trust by the Trustee need not be segregated from other funds except to the
extent required by law.

SECTION 7.02      RIGHTS OF TRUSTEE.

      (a) The Trustee may conclusively rely and shall be fully protected in
acting or refraining from acting upon any document believed by it to be genuine
and to have been signed or presented by the proper Person. The Trustee need not
investigate any fact or matter stated in the document.

      (b) Before the Trustee acts or refrains from acting, it may require an
Officer's Certificate or an Opinion of Counsel or both. The Trustee shall not be
liable for any action it takes or omits to take in good faith in reliance on
such Officer's Certificate or Opinion of Counsel. The Trustee may consult with
counsel of its choosing and the advice of such counsel or any Opinion of Counsel
shall be full and complete authorization and protection from liability in
respect of any action taken, suffered or omitted by it hereunder in good faith
and in reliance thereon.

      (c) The Trustee may act through its attorneys and agents and shall not be
responsible for the misconduct or negligence of any agent appointed with due
care.

      (d) The Trustee shall not be liable for any action it takes or omits to
take in good faith that it believes to be authorized or within the rights or
powers conferred upon it by this Indenture.

      (e) Unless otherwise specifically provided in this Indenture, any demand,
request, direction or notice from the Company shall be sufficient if signed by
an Officer of the Company.

      (f) The Trustee shall be under no obligation to exercise any of the rights
or powers vested in it by this Indenture at the request or direction of any of
the Holders unless such Holders shall have offered to the Trustee security or
indemnity satisfactory to it against the costs, expenses and liabilities that
might be incurred by it in compliance with such request or direction.

      (g) The Trustee shall not be bound to make any investigation into the
facts or matters stated in any resolution, certificate, statement, instrument,
opinion, report, notice, request, direction, consent, order, bond, debenture,
note, other evidence of Indebtedness or other paper or document, but the
Trustee, in its reasonable discretion, may make such further inquiry or
investigation into such facts or matters as it may see fit, and, if the Trustee
shall determine to make such further inquiry or investigation, it shall be
entitled to examine the books, records and premises of the Company during normal
business hours, personally or by agent or attorney at the sole cost of the
Company and shall incur no liability or additional liability of any kind by
reason of such inquiry or investigation.

      (h) Except for its own negligent act, its own negligent failure to act and
its own willful misconduct, the Trustee shall not be liable for any action
taken, suffered, or omitted to be taken by it in good faith and reasonably
believed by it to be authorized or within the discretion or rights or powers
conferred upon by it by this Indenture.

      (i) The rights, privileges, protections, immunities and benefits given to
the Trustee, including, without limitation, its right to be indemnified, are
extended to, and shall be enforceable by, the Trustee in each of its capacities
hereunder.

                                       69
<PAGE>

SECTION 7.03      INDIVIDUAL RIGHTS OF TRUSTEE.

      The Trustee may become the owner or pledgee of Notes and may otherwise
deal with the Company or any Affiliate of the Company with the same rights it
would have if it were not Trustee. However, in the event that the Trustee
acquires any conflicting interest it must eliminate such conflict within 90
days, apply to the Commission for permission to continue as Trustee or resign.
Any Agent may do the same with like rights and duties, if any. The Trustee is
also subject to Sections 7.11 and 7.12 hereof.

SECTION 7.04      TRUSTEE'S DISCLAIMER.

      The Trustee shall not be responsible for and makes no representation as to
the validity or adequacy of this Indenture or the Notes, it shall not be
accountable for the Company's use of the proceeds from the Notes or any money
paid to the Company or upon the Company's direction under any provision of this
Indenture, it shall not be responsible for the use or application of any money
received by any Paying Agent other than the Trustee, and it shall not be
responsible for any statement or recital herein or any statement in the Notes or
any other document in connection with the sale of the Notes or pursuant to this
Indenture other than its certificate of authentication.

SECTION 7.05      MONEY HELD IN TRUST.

      Money held by the Trustee in trust hereunder need not be segregated from
other funds except to the extent required by law. The Trustee shall be under no
liability for interest on any money received by it hereunder except as otherwise
agreed in writing with the Company.

SECTION 7.06      NOTICE OF DEFAULTS.

      If a Default or Event of Default occurs and is continuing and if it is
known to the Trustee, the Trustee shall mail to Holders of Notes a notice of the
Default or Event of Default within 90 days after such Default or Event of
Default becomes known to the Trustee. Except in the case of a Default or Event
of Default in payment of principal of, premium, if any, or interest or
Liquidated Damages, if any, on any Note, the Trustee may withhold the notice if
and so long as a committee of its Responsible Officers in good faith determines
that withholding the notice is in the interests of the Holders of the Notes.

SECTION 7.07      REPORTS BY TRUSTEE TO HOLDERS OF THE NOTES.

      Within 60 days after each June 1 beginning with June 1, 2002 and for so
long as Notes remain outstanding, the Trustee shall mail to the Holders of the
Notes a brief report dated as of such reporting date that complies with TIA
Section 313(a) (but if no event described in TIA Section 313(a) has occurred
within the twelve months preceding the reporting date, no report need be
transmitted). The Trustee also shall comply with TIA Section (b)(2). The Trustee
shall also transmit by mail all reports as required by TIA Section 313(c).

      A copy of each report at the time of its mailing to the Holders of Notes
shall be mailed to the Company and filed with the Commission and each stock
exchange on which the Notes are listed in accordance with TIA Section 313(d).
The Company shall promptly notify the Trustee when the Notes are listed on any
stock exchange and any delisting thereof.

                                       70
<PAGE>

SECTION 7.08      COMPENSATION AND INDEMNITY.

      The Company shall pay to the Trustee from time to time such compensation
as the Company and the Trustee shall from time to time agree in writing for its
acceptance of this Indenture and services hereunder. The Trustee's compensation
shall not be limited by any law on compensation of a Trustee of an express
trust. The Company shall reimburse the Trustee promptly upon request for all
reasonable disbursements, advances and expenses incurred or made by it in
addition to the compensation for its services. Such expenses shall include the
reasonable compensation, disbursements and expenses of the Trustee's agents and
counsel.

      The Company and the Guarantors shall jointly and severally indemnify the
Trustee and its agents, employees, officers, directors and shareholders for, and
hold the same harmless against, any and all losses, liabilities or expenses
(including without limitation reasonable attorney's fees and expenses) incurred
by it arising out of or in connection with the acceptance or administration of
its duties under this Indenture, including the costs and expenses of enforcing
this Indenture against the Company (including this Section 7.08) and defending
itself against any claim (whether asserted by the Company or any Holder or any
other Person) or liability in connection with the exercise or performance of any
of its powers or duties hereunder, except to the extent any such loss, liability
or expense may be attributable to its negligence or bad faith. The Trustee shall
notify the Company promptly of any claim for which it may seek indemnity.
Failure by the Trustee to so notify the Company shall not relieve the Company of
its obligations hereunder. At the Trustee's sole discretion, the Company shall
defend the claim and the Trustee shall cooperate in the defense at the Company's
expense. The Trustee may have separate counsel and the Company shall pay the
reasonable fees and expenses of such counsel. The Company need not pay for any
settlement made without its consent, which consent shall not be unreasonably
withheld.

      The obligations of the Company and any Guarantor under this Section 7.08
shall survive the satisfaction and discharge of this Indenture.

      To secure the Company's payment obligations in this Section, the Trustee
shall have a Lien prior to the Notes on all money or property held or collected
by the Trustee, except that held in trust to pay principal and interest on
particular Notes. Such Lien shall survive the resignation or removal of the
Trustee and/or the satisfaction and discharge or termination of this Indenture.

      When the Trustee incurs expenses or renders services after an Event of
Default specified in Section 6.01(g) or (h) hereof occurs, the expenses and the
compensation for the services (including the fees and expenses of its agents and
counsel) are intended to constitute expenses of administration under any
Bankruptcy Law.

      The Trustee shall comply with the provisions of TIA Section 313(b)(2) to
the extent applicable.

SECTION 7.09      REPLACEMENT OF TRUSTEE.

      A resignation or removal of the Trustee and appointment of a successor
Trustee shall become effective only upon the successor Trustee's acceptance of
appointment as provided in this Section.

      The Trustee may resign in writing at any time and be discharged from the
trust hereby created by so notifying the Company. The Holders of Notes of a
majority in principal amount of the then outstanding Notes may remove the
Trustee by so notifying the Trustee and the Company in writing. The Company may
remove the Trustee if:

                                       71
<PAGE>

      (a) the Trustee fails to comply with Section 7.11 hereof;

      (b) the Trustee is adjudged a bankrupt or an insolvent or an order for
relief is entered with respect to the Trustee under any Bankruptcy Law;

      (c) a Custodian or public officer takes charge of the Trustee or its
property; or

      (d) the Trustee becomes incapable of acting.

      If the Trustee resigns or is removed or if a vacancy exists in the office
of Trustee for any reason, the Company shall promptly appoint a successor
Trustee. Within one year after the successor Trustee takes office, the Holders
of a majority in principal amount of the then outstanding Notes may appoint a
successor Trustee to replace the successor Trustee appointed by the Company.

      If a successor Trustee does not take office within 60 days after the
retiring Trustee resigns or is removed, the retiring Trustee, the Company, or
the Holders of at least 10% in principal amount of the then outstanding Notes
may (at the expense of the Company) petition any court of competent jurisdiction
for the appointment of a successor Trustee.

      If the Trustee, after written request by any Holder who has been a Holder
for at least six months, fails to comply with Section 7.11 hereof, such Holder
may petition any court of competent jurisdiction for the removal of the Trustee
and the appointment of a successor Trustee.

      A successor Trustee shall deliver a written acceptance of its appointment
to the retiring Trustee and to the Company. Thereupon, the resignation or
removal of the retiring Trustee shall become effective, and the successor
Trustee shall have all the rights, powers and duties of the Trustee under this
Indenture. The successor Trustee shall mail a notice of its succession to
Holders. The retiring Trustee shall promptly transfer all property held by it as
Trustee to the successor Trustee, PROVIDED all sums owing to the Trustee
hereunder have been paid and subject to the Lien provided for in Section 7.08
hereof. Notwithstanding replacement of the Trustee pursuant to this Section
7.09, the Company's obligations under Section 7.08 hereof shall continue for the
benefit of the retiring Trustee.

SECTION 7.10      SUCCESSOR TRUSTEE BY MERGER, ETC.

      If the Trustee consolidates, merges or converts into, or transfers all or
substantially all of its corporate trust business to, another corporation, the
successor corporation without any further act shall be the successor Trustee.

SECTION 7.11      ELIGIBILITY; DISQUALIFICATION.

      There shall at all times be a Trustee hereunder that is a corporation
organized and doing business under the laws of the United States of America or
of any state thereof that is authorized under such laws to exercise corporate
Trustee power, that is subject to supervision or examination by federal or state
authorities and that has a combined capital and surplus of at least $50 million
as set forth in its most recent published annual report of condition.

      This Indenture shall always have a Trustee who satisfies the requirements
of TIA Sections 310(a)(1), (2) and (5). The Trustee is subject to TIA Sections
310(b).

                                       72
<PAGE>

SECTION 7.12      PREFERENTIAL COLLECTION OF CLAIMS AGAINST COMPANY.

      The Trustee is subject to TIA Section 311(a), excluding any creditor
relationship listed in TIA Section 311(b). A Trustee who has resigned or been
removed shall be subject to TIA Section 311(a) to the extent indicated therein.

                                    ARTICLE 8
                       DEFEASANCE AND COVENANT DEFEASANCE

SECTION 8.01      OPTION TO EFFECT DEFEASANCE OR COVENANT DEFEASANCE.

      The Company may, at the option of its Board of Directors evidenced by a
resolution set forth in an Officer's Certificate, at any time, elect to have
either Section 8.02 or 8.03 hereof be applied to all outstanding Notes and
Guarantees upon compliance with the conditions set forth below in this Article
8.

SECTION 8.02      DEFEASANCE AND DISCHARGE.

      Upon the Company's exercise under Section 8.01 hereof of the option
applicable to this Section 8.02, the Company and the Guarantors shall, subject
to the satisfaction of the conditions set forth in Section 8.04 hereof, be
deemed to have been discharged from its obligations with respect to all
outstanding Notes, Guarantees and this Indenture on the date the conditions set
forth below are satisfied (hereinafter, "DEFEASANCE"). For this purpose,
Defeasance means that the Company and the Guarantors shall be deemed to have
paid and discharged the entire Indebtedness represented by the outstanding
Notes, Guarantees and this Indenture, which Notes shall thereafter be deemed to
be "outstanding" only for the purposes of Section 8.05 hereof and the other
Sections of this Indenture referred to in (a) and (b) below, and to have
satisfied all its other obligations under such Notes, Guarantees and this
Indenture (and the Trustee, on demand of and at the expense of the Company,
shall execute proper instruments acknowledging the same), except for the
following provisions which shall survive until otherwise terminated or
discharged hereunder:

      (a) the rights of Holders of outstanding Notes to receive payments in
respect of the principal of, premium, if any, and interest and Liquidated
Damages, if any, on those Notes when those payments are due from the trust
referred to in Section 8.4 hereof;

      (b) the Company's obligations with respect to the Notes concerning issuing
temporary Notes, registration of Notes, mutilated, destroyed, lost or stolen
Notes and the maintenance of an office or agency for payment and money for
security payments held in trust;

      (c) the rights, powers, trusts, duties and immunities of the Trustee, and
the Company's obligations in connection therewith; and

      (d) the Defeasance provisions of this Indenture.

SECTION 8.03      COVENANT DEFEASANCE.

      Upon the Company's exercise under Section 8.01 hereof of the option
applicable to this Section 8.03, the Company and the Guarantors shall, subject
to the satisfaction of the conditions set forth in Section 8.04 hereof, be
released from their obligations under the covenants contained in Sections 4.03,
4.05, 4.07, 4.08, 4.09, 4.10, 4.11, 4.12, 4.13 4.14, 4.15, 4.16, 4.17, 4.18 and
5.01(c) hereof with respect to

                                       73
<PAGE>

the outstanding Notes on and after the date the conditions set forth in Section
8.04 are satisfied (hereinafter, "COVENANT DEFEASANCE"), and the Notes shall
thereafter be deemed not "outstanding" for the purposes of any direction,
waiver, consent or declaration or act of Holders (and the consequences of any
thereof) in connection with such covenants, but shall continue to be deemed
"outstanding" for all other purposes hereunder (it being understood that such
Notes shall not be deemed outstanding for accounting purposes). For this
purpose, Covenant Defeasance means that, with respect to the outstanding Notes,
the Company and the Guarantors may omit to comply with and shall have no
liability in respect of any term, condition or limitation set forth in any such
covenant, whether directly or indirectly, by reason of any reference elsewhere
herein to any such covenant or by reason of any reference in any such covenant
to any other provision herein or in any other document and such omission to
comply shall not constitute a Default or an Event of Default under Section 6.01
hereof, but, except as specified above, the remainder of this Indenture and such
Notes shall be unaffected thereby. In addition, upon the Company's exercise
under Section 8.01 hereof of the option applicable to this Section 8.03 hereof,
subject to the satisfaction of the conditions set forth in Section 8.04 hereof,
Sections 6.01(c) through 6.01(f) hereof shall not constitute Events of Default.

SECTION 8.04      CONDITIONS TO DEFEASANCE OR COVENANT DEFEASANCE.

      In order to exercise either Defeasance or Covenant Defeasance:

      (a) the Company must irrevocably deposit with the Trustee, in trust, for
the benefit of the Holders of the Notes, cash in United States dollars, U.S.
Government Obligations, or a combination thereof, in such amounts as will be
sufficient, in the opinion of a nationally recognized firm of independent public
accountants, to pay and discharge the principal, interest, premium, if any, and
Liquidated Damages, if any, on the outstanding Notes on the Stated Maturity of
such principal or installment of principal (or on any date after June 1, 2006
(such date being referred to as the "DEFEASANCE REDEMPTION DATE"), if when
exercising either defeasance or covenant defeasance, the Company has delivered
to the trustee an irrevocable notice to redeem all of the outstanding Notes on
the Defeasance Redemption Date);

      (b) in the case of Defeasance, the Company shall have delivered to the
Trustee an Opinion of Counsel in the United States reasonably acceptable to the
Trustee confirming that (i) the Company has received from, or there has been
published by, the Internal Revenue Service; a ruling or (ii) since the date of
this Indenture, there has been a change in the applicable federal income tax
law, in either case to the effect that, and based thereon such Opinion of
Counsel shall confirm that, subject to customary assumptions and exclusions, the
Holders of the outstanding Notes will not recognize income, gain or loss for
federal income tax purposes as a result of such Defeasance and will be subject
to federal income tax on the same amounts, in the same manner and at the same
times as would have been the case if such Defeasance had not occurred;

      (c) in the case of Covenant Defeasance, the Company shall have delivered
to the Trustee an Opinion of Counsel in the United States reasonably acceptable
to the Trustee confirming that, subject to customary assumptions and exclusions,
the Holders of the outstanding Notes will not recognize income, gain or loss for
federal income tax purposes as a result of such Covenant Defeasance and will be
subject to federal income tax on the same amounts, in the same manner and at the
same times as would have been the case if such Covenant Defeasance had not
occurred;

      (d) no Default or Event of Default shall have occurred and be continuing
on the date of such deposit;

                                       74
<PAGE>

      (e) such Defeasance or Covenant Defeasance shall not cause the Trustee to
have a conflicting interest with respect to any securities of the Company or any
Guarantor;

      (f) such Defeasance or Covenant Defeasance shall not result in a breach or
violation of, or constitute a default under this Indenture or a breach or
violation of any provision of any agreement related to any Senior Indebtedness;

      (g) the Company shall have delivered to the Trustee an Officer's
Certificate stating that the deposit was not made by the Company with the intent
of preferring the Holders of the Notes or any Guarantee over the other creditors
of the Company or any Guarantor with the intent of defeating, hindering,
delaying or defrauding creditors of the Company, any Guarantor or others;

      (h) no event or condition shall exist that could prevent the Company from
making payments of the principal of premium, if any, and interest on the Notes
on the date of such deposit; and

      (i) the Company shall have delivered to the Trustee an Officer's
Certificate and an Opinion of Counsel, each stating that all conditions
precedent relating to the Defeasance or the Covenant Defeasance, as the case may
be, have been complied with.

SECTION 8.05      DEPOSITED MONEY AND U.S. GOVERNMENT OBLIGATIONS TO BE HELD IN
                  TRUST; OTHER MISCELLANEOUS PROVISIONS.

      Subject to Section 8.06 hereof, all money and U.S. Government Obligations
(including the proceeds thereof) deposited with the Trustee (or other qualifying
Trustee, collectively for purposes of this Section 8.05, the "TRUSTEE") pursuant
to Section 8.04 hereof in respect of the outstanding Notes shall be held in
trust and applied by the Trustee, in accordance with the provisions of such
Notes and this Indenture, to the payment, either directly or through any Paying
Agent (including the Company acting as Paying Agent) as the Trustee may
determine, to the Holders of such Notes of all sums due and to become due
thereon in respect of principal, premium, if any, and interest and Liquidated
Damages, if any, but such money need not be segregated from other funds except
to the extent required by law.

      The Company shall pay and indemnify the Trustee against any tax, fee or
other charge imposed on or assessed against the cash or non-callable U.S.
Government Obligations deposited pursuant to Section 8.04 hereof or the
principal and interest received in respect thereof other than any such tax, fee
or other charge which by law is for the account of the Holders of the
outstanding Notes.

      Anything in this Article 8 to the contrary notwithstanding, the Trustee
shall deliver or pay to the Company from time to time upon the request of the
Company any money or non-callable U.S. Government Obligations held by it as
provided in Section 8.04 hereof which, in the opinion of a nationally recognized
firm of independent public accountants expressed in a written certification
thereof delivered to the Trustee (which may be the opinion delivered under
Section 8.04(a) hereof), are in excess of the amount thereof that would then be
required to be deposited to effect an equivalent Defeasance or Covenant
Defeasance.

SECTION 8.06      REPAYMENT TO COMPANY.

      Any money deposited with the Trustee or any Paying Agent, or then held by
the Company, in trust for the payment of the principal of, premium, if any, or
interest or Liquidated Damages, if any, on any Note and remaining unclaimed for
two years after such principal, and premium, if any, or interest or Liquidated
Damages, if any, has become due and payable shall be paid to the Company on its
request or

                                       75
<PAGE>

(if then held by the Company) shall be discharged from such trust; and the
Holder of such Note shall thereafter, as a secured creditor, look only to the
Company for payment thereof, and all liability of the Trustee or such Paying
Agent with respect to such trust money, and all liability of the Company as
Trustee thereof, shall thereupon cease; PROVIDED, HOWEVER, that the Trustee or
such Paying Agent, before being required to make any such repayment, may at the
expense of the Company cause to be published once, in the NEW YORK TIMES and THE
WALL STREET JOURNAL (national edition), notice that such money remains unclaimed
and that, after a date specified therein, which shall not be less than 30 days
from the date of such notification or publication, any unclaimed balance of such
money then remaining will be repaid to the Company.

SECTION 8.07      REINSTATEMENT.

      If the Trustee or Paying Agent is unable to apply any United States
dollars or non-callable U.S. Government Obligations in accordance with Section
8.02 or 8.03 hereof, as the case may be, by reason of any order or judgment of
any court or governmental authority enjoining, restraining or otherwise
prohibiting such application, then the Company's obligations under this
Indenture, the Notes and the Guarantees shall be revived and reinstated as
though no deposit had occurred pursuant to Section 8.02 or 8.03 hereof until
such time as the Trustee or Paying Agent is permitted to apply all such money in
accordance with Section 8.02 or 8.03 hereof, as the case may be; PROVIDED,
HOWEVER, that, if the Company makes any payment of principal of, premium, if
any, or interest or Liquidated Damages, if any, on any Note following the
reinstatement of its obligations, the Company shall be subrogated to the rights
of the Holders of such Notes to receive such payment from the money held by the
Trustee or Paying Agent.

                                    ARTICLE 9
                        AMENDMENT, SUPPLEMENT AND WAIVER

SECTION 9.01      WITHOUT CONSENT OF HOLDERS OF NOTES.

      Notwithstanding Section 9.02 of this Indenture, the Company, the
Guarantors and the Trustee may amend or supplement this Indenture, the
Guarantees or the Notes without the consent of any Holder of a Note:

      (a) to cure any ambiguity, defect or inconsistency;

      (b) to provide for uncertificated Notes in addition to or in place of
certificated Notes or to alter the provisions of Article 2 hereof (including the
related definitions) in a manner that does not materially adversely affect any
Holder;

      (c) to provide for the assumption of the Company's obligations to the
Holders of the Notes in the case of a merger or consolidation or sale of all or
substantially all of the assets of the Company by a successor to the Company
pursuant to Article 5 hereof or to provide for the assumption of any Guarantor's
obligations under its Guarantee in the case of a merger or consolidation of the
Guarantor pursuant to Article 11 hereof;

      (d) to make any change that would provide any additional rights or
benefits to the Holders of the Notes or that does not materially adversely
affect the legal rights hereunder of any Holder of the Notes;

      (e) to comply with requirements of the Commission in order to effect or
maintain the qualification of this Indenture under the TIA;

                                       76
<PAGE>

      (f) to provide for the issuance of Additional Notes in accordance with the
limitations set forth in this Indenture as of the date hereof; and

      (g) to allow any Guarantor to execute a Supplemental Indenture and/or a
Guarantee with respect to the Notes.

      Upon the request of the Company accompanied by a resolution of its Board
of Directors authorizing the execution of any such amended or Supplemental
Indenture, and upon receipt by the Trustee of the documents described in Section
7.02 hereof, the Trustee shall join with the Company and the Guarantors in the
execution of any amended or Supplemental Indenture authorized or permitted by
the terms of this Indenture and to make any further appropriate agreements and
stipulations that may be therein contained, but the Trustee shall not be
obligated to enter into such amended or Supplemental Indenture that affects its
own rights, duties or immunities under this Indenture or otherwise.

SECTION 9.02      WITH CONSENT OF HOLDERS OF NOTES.

      Except as provided below in this Section 9.02, the Company, the Guarantors
and the Trustee may amend or supplement this Indenture (including Section 3.09,
4.10 and 4.14 hereof), the Guarantees and the Notes may be amended or
supplemented with the consent of the Holders of at least a majority in principal
amount of the Notes (including Additional Notes, if any) then outstanding voting
as a single class (including consents obtained in connection with a tender offer
or exchange offer for, or purchase of, the Notes), and, subject to Sections 6.04
and 6.07 hereof, any existing Default or Event of Default (other than a Default
or Event of Default in the payment of the principal of, premium, if any, or
interest or Liquidated Damages, if any, on the Notes, except a payment default
resulting from an acceleration that has been rescinded) or compliance with any
provision of this Indenture, the Guarantees or the Notes may be waived with the
consent of the Holders of a majority in principal amount of the then outstanding
Notes (including Additional Notes, if any) voting as a single class (including
consents obtained in connection with a tender offer or exchange offer for, or
purchase of, the Notes. Section 2.08 hereof shall determine which Notes are
considered to be "outstanding" for the purposes of this Section 9.02.

      Subject to Sections 6.04 and 6.07 hereof, the Holders of a majority in
aggregate principal amount of the Notes (including Additional Notes, if any)
then outstanding voting as a single class may waive compliance in a particular
instance by the Company with any provision of this Indenture or the Notes.
However, without the consent of each Holder affected, an amendment or waiver
under this Section 9.02 may not (with respect to any Notes held by a
non-consenting Holder):

      (a) change the Stated Maturity of the principal of, or any installment of
interest on, any Note or waive a default in the payment of the principal or
interest on any Note or reduce the principal amount thereof or the rate of
interest thereon or any premium payable upon the redemption thereof, or any
Liquidated Damages payable thereon, or change the coin or currency in which any
Note or any premium or the interest thereon is payable, or impair the right to
institute suit for the enforcement of any such payment after the Stated Maturity
thereof;

      (b) reduce the percentage in principal amount of outstanding Notes, the
consent of whose Holders is required for any such Supplemental Indenture, or the
consent of whose Holders is required for any waiver;

      (c) modify any of the provisions relating to Supplemental Indentures
requiring the consent of Holders or relating to the waiver of past defaults or
relating to the waiver of certain covenants, except to increase the percentage
of outstanding Notes required for such actions or to provide that certain other

                                       77
<PAGE>

provisions of this Indenture cannot be modified or waived without the consent of
the Holder of each note affected thereby;

      (d) amend or modify any of the provisions of this Indenture relating to
the subordination of the Notes or any Guarantee in any manner adverse to the
Holders of the Notes or any Guarantee; or

      (e) make any change in the foregoing amendment and waiver provisions.

      Upon the request of the Company accompanied by a resolution of its Board
of Directors authorizing the execution of any such amended or Supplemental
Indenture, and upon the filing with the Trustee of evidence reasonably
satisfactory to the Trustee of the consent of the Holders of Notes as aforesaid,
and upon receipt by the Trustee of the documents described in Section 7.02
hereof, the Trustee shall join with the Company and the Guarantors in the
execution of such amended or Supplemental Indenture unless such amended or
Supplemental Indenture directly affects the Trustee's own rights, duties or
immunities under this Indenture or otherwise, in which case the Trustee may in
its discretion, but shall not be obligated to, enter into such amended or
Supplemental Indenture.

      It shall not be necessary for the consent of the Holders of Notes under
this Section 9.02 to approve the particular form of any proposed amendment or
waiver, but it shall be sufficient if such consent approves the substance
thereof.

      After an amendment, supplement or waiver under this Section 9.02 becomes
effective, the Company shall mail to the Holders of Notes affected thereby a
notice briefly describing the amendment, supplement or waiver. Any failure of
the Company to mail such notice, or any defect therein, shall not, however, in
any way impair or affect the validity of any such amended or Supplemental
Indenture or waiver.

SECTION 9.03      COMPLIANCE WITH TRUST INDENTURE ACT.

      Every amendment or supplement to this Indenture or the Notes shall be set
forth in an amended or Supplemental Indenture that complies with the TIA as then
in effect.

SECTION 9.04      REVOCATION AND EFFECT OF CONSENTS.

      Until an amendment, supplement or waiver becomes effective, a consent to
it by a Holder of a Note is a continuing consent by the Holder of a Note and
every subsequent Holder of a Note or portion of a Note that evidences the same
debt as the consenting Holder's Note, even if notation of the consent is not
made on any Note. However, any such Holder of a Note or subsequent Holder of a
Note may revoke the consent as to its Note if the Trustee receives written
notice of revocation before the date the waiver, supplement or amendment becomes
effective. An amendment, supplement or waiver becomes effective in accordance
with its terms and thereafter binds every Holder.

SECTION 9.05      NOTATION ON OR EXCHANGE OF NOTES.

      The Trustee may place an appropriate notation about an amendment,
supplement or waiver on any Note thereafter authenticated. The Company in
exchange for all Notes may issue and the Trustee shall, upon receipt of an
Authentication Order, authenticate new Notes that reflect the amendment,
supplement or waiver.

                                       78
<PAGE>

      Failure to make the appropriate notation or issue a new Note shall not
affect the validity and effect of such amendment, supplement or waiver.

SECTION 9.06      TRUSTEE TO SIGN AMENDMENTS, ETC.

      The Trustee shall sign any amended or Supplemental Indenture authorized
pursuant to this Article 9 if the amendment or supplement does not adversely
affect the rights, duties, liabilities or immunities of the Trustee. The Company
may not sign an amendment or Supplemental Indenture until its Board of Directors
approves it. In executing any amended or Supplemental Indenture, the Trustee
shall be entitled to receive and (subject to Section 7.01 hereof) shall be fully
protected in relying upon, in addition to the documents required by Section
13.04 hereof, an Officer's Certificate and an Opinion of Counsel stating that
the execution of such amended or Supplemental Indenture is authorized or
permitted by this Indenture.

SECTION 9.07      AFFECT ON HOLDERS OF SENIOR INDEBTEDNESS

      No amendment or modification of this Indenture shall adversely affect the
rights of any holders of Senior Indebtedness under the subordination provisions
of this Indenture unless the requisite holders of each issue of Senior
Indebtedness affected thereby shall have consented to such amendment or
modification.

                                   ARTICLE 10
                                  SUBORDINATION

SECTION 10.01     AGREEMENT TO SUBORDINATE.

      The Company agrees, and each Holder by accepting a Note agrees, that the
Indebtedness evidenced by the Notes is subordinated in right of payment, to the
extent and in the manner set forth in this Article 10, to the prior payment in
full in cash or Cash Equivalents of all Senior Indebtedness, whether outstanding
on the date of this Indenture or thereafter incurred and that the subordination
is for the benefit of the holders of Senior Indebtedness. The provisions of this
Article 10 shall constitute a continuing offer to all Persons that, in reliance
upon such provisions, become holders of, or continue to hold Senior
Indebtedness, and they or each of them may enforce the rights of holders of
Senior Indebtedness hereunder, subject to the terms and provisions hereof.

SECTION 10.02     LIQUIDATION; DISSOLUTION; BANKRUPTCY.

      Upon any distribution to creditors of the Company in a liquidation,
dissolution or other winding up of the Company, whether voluntary or
involuntary, or any bankruptcy, reorganization, insolvency, receivership or
similar proceeding relating to the Company or its assets, or any assignment for
the benefit of creditors or marshaling of the Company's assets and liabilities,

      (a) the holders of Senior Indebtedness shall be entitled to receive
payment in full in cash or Cash Equivalents of all Obligations due in respect of
such Senior Indebtedness, including interest after the commencement of any such
proceeding at the rate specified in the applicable Senior Indebtedness, before
the Holders of Notes will be entitled to receive any payment or distribution
(excluding Permitted Junior Securities) with respect to the Indebtedness
evidenced by the Notes, and

                                       79
<PAGE>

      (b) until all Obligations with respect to Senior Indebtedness are paid in
full in cash or Cash Equivalents, any distribution to which the Holders of Notes
would be entitled shall be made to the holders of Senior Indebtedness.

      However, Holders of Notes may receive and retain Permitted Junior
Securities and payments made from the trust described in Article 8 hereof.

      A "distribution" or "payment" may consist of a distribution, payment or
other transfer of assets by or on behalf of the Company (including, without
limitation, a redemption, repurchase or other acquisition of the Notes) from any
source, of any kind or character, whether in cash, securities or other property,
by set-off or otherwise.

SECTION 10.03     DEFAULT ON DESIGNATED SENIOR INDEBTEDNESS.

      The Company may not make any payment upon or in respect of the
Indebtedness evidenced by the Notes (except in Permitted Junior Securities or
from the trust described in Article 8 hereof) until all obligations with respect
to Senior Indebtedness have been paid in full in cash or Cash Equivalents if:

      (a) a default in the payment of the principal (including reimbursement
obligations in respect of letters of credit) of, premium, if any, or interest on
or commitment, letter of credit or administrative fees relating to, Designated
Senior Indebtedness occurs and is continuing; or

      (b) any other default occurs (a "NON-PAYMENT DEFAULT") and is continuing
with respect to Designated Senior Indebtedness that permits holders of the
Designated Senior Indebtedness as to which that default relates to accelerate
its maturity and the Trustee receives a notice of that default (a "PAYMENT
BLOCKAGE NOTICE") from a representative of the holders of any Designated Senior
Indebtedness.

      The period for which no payment on the Notes may be made (the "PAYMENT
BLOCKAGE PERIOD") shall commence upon the receipt of notice of the Non-payment
Default by the Trustee from a representative of the holders of any Designated
Senior Indebtedness and shall end on the earliest to occur of:

      (a) 179 days having elapsed since the receipt of such written notice;

      (b) the date on which such Non-payment Default (and all Non-payment
Defaults as to which notice is given after such Payment Blockage Period is
initiated) is cured, waived or ceases to exist or on which such Designated
Senior Indebtedness is discharged or paid in full in cash or Cash Equivalents or
in any other manner acceptable to the holders of such Designated Senior
Indebtedness; or

      (c) the date on which such Payment Blockage Period shall have been
terminated by written notice to the Company or the Trustee from a representative
of holders of Designated Senior Indebtedness initiating such Payment Blockage
Period,

after which, in each such case, the Company shall promptly resume making any and
all required payments in respect of the Notes, including any missed payments.

      In no event will a Payment Blockage Period extend beyond 179 days from the
date of the receipt by the Trustee of the notice initiating such Payment
Blockage Period (such 179-day period referred to as the "INITIAL BLOCKAGE
PERIOD"). Any number of notices of Non-payment Defaults may be given during the
Initial Blockage Period; PROVIDED that during any 365-consecutive-day period
only one such period during which

                                       80
<PAGE>

payment of principal, interest, premium and Liquidated Damages, if any, on the
Notes may not be made may commence and the duration of such period may not
exceed 179 days.

      No Non-payment Default with respect to Designated Senior Indebtedness that
existed or was continuing on the date of the commencement of any Payment
Blockage Period will be, or can be, made the basis for the commencement of a
second Payment Blockage Period, whether or not within a period of 365
consecutive days, unless such Non-payment Default has been cured or waived for a
period of not less than 90 consecutive days.

SECTION 10.04     ACCELERATION OF SECURITIES.

      If payment of the Notes is accelerated because of an Event of Default, the
Company or the Trustee shall promptly notify holders of Senior Indebtedness of
the acceleration.

SECTION 10.05     WHEN DISTRIBUTION MUST BE PAID OVER.

      In the event that the Trustee or any Holder receives any payment in
respect of any Indebtedness evidenced by the Notes at a time when the Trustee or
such Holder, as applicable, has actual knowledge that such payment is prohibited
by Article 10 hereof, such payment shall be held by the Trustee or such Holder
in trust for the benefit of, and shall be paid forthwith over and delivered,
upon written request, to, the holders of Senior Indebtedness as their interests
may appear or their representative under the applicable indenture or other
agreement (if any) pursuant to which Senior Indebtedness may have been issued
for application to the payment of all Obligations with respect to Senior
Indebtedness remaining unpaid to the extent necessary to pay such Obligations in
full in accordance with their terms, after giving effect to any concurrent
payment or distribution to or for the holders of Senior Indebtedness.

      With respect to the holders of Senior Indebtedness, the Trustee undertakes
to perform only such obligations on the part of the Trustee as are specifically
set forth in this Article 10, and no implied covenants or obligations with
respect to the holders of Senior Indebtedness shall be read into this Indenture
against the Trustee. The Trustee shall not be deemed to owe any fiduciary duty
to the holders of Senior Indebtedness, and shall not be liable to any such
holders if the Trustee shall pay over or distribute to or on behalf of Holders
or the Company or any other Person money or assets to which any holders of
Senior Indebtedness shall be entitled by virtue of this Article 10, except if
such payment is made as a result of the willful misconduct or gross negligence
of the Trustee.

SECTION 10.06     NOTICE TO TRUSTEE.

      The Company shall give prompt written notice to the Trustee of any fact
known to the Company which would prohibit the making of any payment to or by the
Trustee in respect of the Notes. Failure to give such notice shall not affect
the subordination of the Notes to Senior Indebtedness. Notwithstanding the
provisions of this or any other provision of this Indenture, the Trustee shall
not be charged with knowledge of the existence of any facts which would prohibit
the making of any payment to or by the Trustee in respect of the Notes, unless
and until the Trustee shall have received written notice thereof at the address
and in the manner specified in Section 13.02 from the Company or a
representative of or a holder of Senior Indebtedness or from any trustee or
agent therefor; and, prior to the receipt of any such written notice, the
Trustee, subject to the provisions of Section 7.01 shall be entitled in all
respects to assume that no such facts exist; PROVIDED, HOWEVER, that if a
Responsible Officer of the Trustee shall not have received, at least 24 hours
prior to the time upon which by the terms hereof any such money may become
payable for any purpose, the notice with respect to such money provided for this
Section 10.06, then, anything herein contained to the contrary notwithstanding,
the Trustee shall have full power and

                                       81
<PAGE>

authority to receive such money and to apply the same to the purpose for which
such money was received and shall not be affected by any notice to the contrary
which may be received by it within 24 hours prior to such time.

      Subject to the provisions of Section 7.01, the Trustee shall be entitled
to conclusively rely on the delivery to it of a written notice by a Person
representing himself to be a holder of Senior Indebtedness (or a trustee or
agent on behalf of such holder) to establish that such notice has been given by
a holder of Senior Indebtedness (or a trustee or agent on behalf of any such
holder). In the event that the Trustee determines in good faith that further
evidence is required with respect to the right of any Person as a holder of
Senior Indebtedness to participate in any payment or distribution pursuant to
this Article 10, the Trustee may request such Person to furnish evidence to the
reasonable satisfaction of the Trustee as to the amount of Senior Indebtedness
held by such Person, the extent to which such Person is entitled to participate
in such payment or distribution and any other facts pertinent to the rights of
such Person under this Article 10, and if such evidence is not furnished, the
Trustee may defer any payment which it may be required to make for the benefit
of such Person pursuant to the terms of this Indenture pending judicial
determination as to the rights of such Person to receive such payment.

SECTION 10.07     SUBROGATION.

      After all Senior Indebtedness is paid in full in cash or Cash Equivalents
and until the Notes are paid in full, Holders of Notes shall be subrogated
(equally and ratably with all other Indebtedness PARI PASSU with the Notes) to
the rights of holders of Senior Indebtedness to receive distributions applicable
to Senior Indebtedness to the extent that distributions otherwise payable to the
Holders of Notes have been applied to the payment of Senior Indebtedness. A
distribution made under this Article 10 to holders of Senior Indebtedness that
otherwise would have been made to Holders of Notes is not, as between the
Company and Holders, a payment by the Company on the Notes.

SECTION 10.08     RELATIVE RIGHTS.

      This Article 10 defines the relative rights of Holders of Notes and
holders of Senior Indebtedness. Nothing in this Indenture shall:

      (a) impair, as between the Company and Holders of Notes, the obligation of
the Company, which is absolute and unconditional, to pay principal of and
interest and Liquidated Damages, if any, on the Notes in accordance with their
terms;

      (b) affect the relative rights of Holders of Notes and creditors of the
Company other than their rights in relation to holders of Senior Indebtedness;
or

      (c) prevent the Trustee or any Holder of Notes from exercising its
available remedies upon a Default or Event of Default, subject to the rights of
holders of Senior Indebtedness to receive distributions and payments otherwise
payable to Holders of Notes.

      If the Company fails because of this Article 10 to pay principal of or
interest or Liquidated Damages, if any, on a Note on the due date, the failure
is still a Default or Event of Default.

                                       82
<PAGE>

SECTION 10.09     SUBORDINATION MAY NOT BE IMPAIRED BY COMPANY.

      No right of any holder of Senior Indebtedness to enforce the subordination
of the Indebtedness evidenced by the Notes shall be impaired by any act or
failure to act by the Company or any Holder or by the failure of the Company or
any Holder to comply with this Indenture.

SECTION 10.10     DISTRIBUTION OR NOTICE TO REPRESENTATIVE.

      Whenever a distribution is to be made or a notice given to holders of
Senior Indebtedness, the distribution may be made and the notice given to their
representative, if any.

      Upon any payment or distribution of assets of the Company referred to in
this Article 10, the Trustee and the Holders of Notes shall be entitled to rely
upon any order or decree made by any court of competent jurisdiction or upon any
certificate of such representative, if any, or of the liquidating trustee or
agent or other Person making any distribution to the Trustee or to the Holders
of Notes for the purpose of ascertaining the Persons entitled to participate in
such distribution, the holders of the Senior Indebtedness and other Indebtedness
of the Company, the amount thereof or payable thereon, the amount or amounts
paid or distributed thereon and all other facts pertinent thereto or to this
Article 10.

SECTION 10.11     RIGHTS OF TRUSTEE AND PAYING AGENT.

      Notwithstanding the provisions of this Article 10 or any other provision
of this Indenture, the Trustee shall not be charged with knowledge of the
existence of any facts that would prohibit the making of any payment or
distribution by the Trustee, and the Trustee and the Paying Agent may continue
to make payments on the Notes, unless the Trustee shall have received at the
Corporate Trust Office of the Trustee at least five Business Days prior to the
date of such payment written notice of facts that would cause the payment of any
Obligations with respect to the Notes to violate this Article 10. Only the
Company or a representative, if any, may give the notice. Nothing in this
Article 10 shall impair the claims of, or payments to, the Trustee under or
pursuant to Section 7.07 hereof.

      To the extent permitted by the TIA, the Trustee in its individual or any
other capacity may hold Senior Indebtedness with the same rights it would have
if it were not Trustee. Any Agent may do the same with like rights.

      Nothing in this Article shall apply to claims of, or payments to, the
Trustee under or pursuant to Section 7.07.

SECTION 10.12     AUTHORIZATION TO EFFECT SUBORDINATION.

      Each Holder of Notes, by the Holder's acceptance thereof, authorizes and
directs the Trustee on such Holder's behalf to take such action as may be
necessary or appropriate to effectuate the subordination as provided in this
Article 10, and appoints the Trustee to act as such Holder's attorney-in-fact
for any and all such purposes. If the Trustee does not file a proper proof of
claim or proof of debt in the form required in any proceeding referred to in
Section 6.09 hereof at least 30 days before the expiration of the time to file
such claim, the representative, if any, is hereby authorized to file an
appropriate claim for and on behalf of the Holders of the Notes.

                                       83
<PAGE>

SECTION 10.13     NO WAIVER OF SUBORDINATION PROVISIONS.

      (a) No right of any present or future holder of any Senior Indebtedness to
enforce subordination as herein provided shall at any time in any way be
prejudiced or impaired by any act or failure to act by any such holder.

      (b) Without in any way limiting the generality of paragraph (a) of this
Section 10.13, the holders of Senior Indebtedness may, at any time and from time
to time, without the consent of or notice to the Trustee or any Holder, without
incurring responsibility to any Holder and without impairing or releasing the
subordination provided in this Article 10 or the obligations hereunder of the
Holders to the holders of Senior Indebtedness, do any one or more of the
following: (i) change the manner, place or terms of payment or extend the time
of payment of, or renew or alter, any Senior Indebtedness or any instrument
evidencing the same or any agreement under which Senior Indebtedness is
outstanding; (ii) sell, exchange, release or otherwise deal with any property
pledged, mortgaged or otherwise securing Senior Indebtedness; (iii) release any
Person liable in any manner for the collection of Senior Indebtedness; and (iv)
exercise or refrain from exercising any rights against either Company or any
other Person.

SECTION 10.14     AMENDMENTS.

      The provisions of this Article 10 shall not be amended or modified without
the written consent of the holders of all Senior Indebtedness.

SECTION 10.15     TRUSTEE'S COMPENSATION NOT PREJUDICED.

      Nothing in this Article 10 shall apply to amounts due to the Trustee
pursuant to other Sections of this Indenture.

                                   ARTICLE 11
                                   GUARANTEES

SECTION 11.01     GUARANTEE.

      Subject to this Article 11, each of the Guarantors hereby, jointly and
severally, unconditionally guarantees on a senior subordinated basis to each
Holder of a Note authenticated and delivered by the Trustee and to the Trustee
and its successors and assigns, irrespective of the validity and enforceability
of this Indenture, the Notes or the obligations of the Company hereunder or
thereunder, that: (1) the principal of and interest on the Notes will be
promptly paid in full when due, whether at maturity, by acceleration, redemption
or otherwise, and interest on the overdue principal of and interest on the
Notes, if any, if lawful, and all other obligations of the Company to the
Holders or the Trustee hereunder or thereunder will be promptly paid in full or
performed, all in accordance with the terms hereof and thereof; and (2) in case
of any extension of time of payment or renewal of any Notes or any of such other
obligations, that same will be promptly paid in full when due or performed in
accordance with the terms of the extension or renewal, whether at Stated
Maturity, by acceleration or otherwise. Failing payment when due of any amount
so guaranteed or any performance so guaranteed for whatever reason, the
Guarantors shall be jointly and severally obligated to pay the same immediately.
Each Guarantor agrees that this is a guarantee of payment and not a guarantee of
collection.

      The Guarantors hereby agree that their obligations hereunder shall be
unconditional, irrespective of the validity, regularity or enforceability of the
Notes or this Indenture, the absence of any action to

                                       84
<PAGE>

enforce the same, any waiver or consent by any Holder of the Notes with respect
to any provisions hereof or thereof, the recovery of any judgment against the
Company, any action to enforce the same or any other circumstance which might
otherwise constitute a legal or equitable discharge or defense of a Guarantor.
Each Guarantor hereby waives diligence, presentment, demand of payment, filing
of claims with a court in the event of insolvency or bankruptcy of the Company,
any right to require a proceeding first against the Company, protest, notice and
all demands whatsoever and covenant that this Guarantee shall not be discharged
except by complete performance of the obligations contained in the Notes and
this Indenture.

      If any Holder or the Trustee is required by any court or otherwise to
return to the Company, the Guarantors or any custodian, Trustee, liquidator or
other similar official acting in relation to either the Company or the
Guarantors, any amount paid by either to the Trustee or such Holder, this
Guarantee, to the extent theretofore discharged, shall be reinstated in full
force and effect.

      Each Guarantor agrees that it shall not be entitled to any right of
subrogation in relation to the Holders in respect of any obligations guaranteed
hereby until payment in full of all obligations guaranteed hereby. Each
Guarantor further agrees that, as between the Guarantors, on the one hand, and
the Holders and the Trustee, on the other hand, (1) the maturity of the
obligations guaranteed hereby may be accelerated as provided in Article 6 hereof
for the purposes of this Guarantee, notwithstanding any stay, injunction or
other prohibition preventing such acceleration in respect of the obligations
guaranteed hereby, and (2) in the event of any declaration of acceleration of
such obligations as provided in Article 6 hereof, such obligations (whether or
not due and payable) shall forthwith become due and payable by the Guarantors
for the purpose of this Guarantee. Each Guarantor that makes a payment or
distribution under a guarantee shall be entitled to a contribution from each
other Guarantor in a pro rata amount based on the assets of each Guarantor
determined accordance with GAAP. The Guarantors shall have the right to seek
contribution from any non-paying Guarantor so long as the exercise of such right
does not impair the rights of the Holders under the Guarantee.

SECTION 11.02     SUBORDINATION OF GUARANTEE.

      The Obligations of each Guarantor under its Guarantee pursuant to this
Article 11 shall be junior and subordinated to all Senior Indebtedness of such
Guarantor on the same basis as the Notes are junior and subordinated to Senior
Indebtedness of the Company. For the purposes of the foregoing sentence, the
Trustee and the Holders shall have the right to receive and/or retain payments
by any of the Guarantors only at such times as they may receive and/or retain
payments in respect of the Notes pursuant to this Indenture, including Article
10 hereof with respect to subordination.

      Upon any voluntary or involuntary liquidation or dissolution of any
Guarantor or any bankruptcy, reorganization, insolvency, receivership or similar
proceeding relating to any such Guarantor or its respective property, all Senior
Indebtedness of any such Guarantor must be paid in full in cash or Cash
Equivalents before any payment or distribution is made (excluding a distribution
of Permitted Junior Securities) upon principal, interest, premium, if any, and
Liquidated Damages, if any, on the Notes.

SECTION 11.03     LIMITATION OF GUARANTOR LIABILITY.

      Each Guarantor, and by its acceptance of Notes, each Holder, hereby
confirms that it is the intention of all such parties that the Guarantee of such
Guarantor not constitute a fraudulent transfer or conveyance for purposes of
Bankruptcy Law, the Uniform Fraudulent Conveyance Act, the Uniform Fraudulent
Transfer Act or any similar federal or state law to the extent applicable to any
Guarantee. To effectuate the foregoing intention, the Trustee, the Holders and
the Guarantors hereby irrevocably agree

                                       85
<PAGE>

that the obligations of such Guarantor will, after giving effect to any maximum
amount and any other contingent and fixed liabilities that are relevant under
any applicable bankruptcy or fraudulent conveyance laws, and after giving effect
to any collections from, rights to receive contribution from or payments made by
or on behalf of any other Guarantor in respect of the obligations of such other
Guarantor under Article 11 hereof, such Guarantee shall be limited to the
maximum amount permissible such that the obligations of such Guarantor under its
Guarantee will not constitute a fraudulent transfer or conveyance.

SECTION 11.04     EXECUTION AND DELIVERY OF GUARANTEE.

      To evidence its Guarantee set forth in Section 11.01, each Guarantor
hereby agrees that a notation of such Guarantee substantially in the form
included in Exhibit E shall be endorsed by an Officer of such Guarantor on each
Note authenticated and delivered by the Trustee and that this Indenture shall be
executed on behalf of such Guarantor by an Officer of such Guarantor.

      Each Guarantor hereby agrees that its Guarantee set forth in Section 11.01
shall remain in full force and effect notwithstanding any failure to endorse on
each Note a notation of such Guarantee.

      If an Officer whose signature is on this Indenture or on the Guarantee no
longer holds that office at the time the Trustee authenticates the Note on which
a Guarantee is endorsed, the Guarantee shall be valid nevertheless.

      The delivery of any Note by the Trustee, after the authentication thereof
hereunder, shall constitute due delivery of the Guarantee set forth in this
Indenture on behalf of the Guarantors.

      In the event that the Company creates or acquires any new Restricted
Subsidiaries subsequent to the date of this Indenture, if required by Section
4.18 hereof, the Company shall cause such Restricted Subsidiaries to execute
Supplemental Indentures to this Indenture and Guarantees in accordance with
Section 4.18 hereof and this Article 11, to the extent applicable.

SECTION 11.05     GUARANTORS MAY CONSOLIDATE, ETC., ON CERTAIN TERMS.

      Except as otherwise provided in Section 11.06, a Guarantor may not sell or
otherwise dispose of all or substantially all of its assets to, or consolidate
with or merge with or into (whether or not such Guarantor is the surviving
Person), another Person, other than the Company or another Guarantor, unless:

      (a) the Person acquiring the property in any such sale or disposition or
the Person formed by or surviving any such consolidation or merger assumes all
the obligations of that Guarantor under this Indenture, its Guarantee and, if it
is still in effect, the Registration Rights Agreement pursuant to a Supplemental
Indenture reasonably satisfactory to the Trustee; or

      (b) such sale, disposition, merger or consolidation is permitted by the
terms of this Indenture and, to the extent required, the Net Cash Proceeds are
applied in accordance with the applicable provisions of this Indenture.

      The Guarantee of a Guarantor will be released:

      (a) in connection with any consolidation or merger if the Guarantor or
surviving Person shall cease to be a Subsidiary of the Company, if the
consolidation or merger complies with the provisions of this Indenture;

                                       86
<PAGE>

      (b) in connection with any sale or other disposition of all or
substantially all of the assets of that Guarantor (including by way of merger or
consolidation) to a Person that is not (either before or after giving effect to
such transaction) a Subsidiary of the Company, if all of the conditions in
Section 11.06 hereof are satisfied and the sale or other disposition complies
with Section 4.10 hereof;

      (c) if the Guarantor is declared to be an Unrestricted Subsidiary in
accordance with the provisions of this Indenture; or

      (d) in connection with any sale of all of the Capital Stock of a Guarantor
to a Person that is not (either before or after giving effect to such
transaction) a Restricted Subsidiary of the Company, if the sale complies with
Section 4.10 hereof.

      In the case of any such sale of substantially all of the assets to or,
consolidation, merger, sale or conveyance and upon the assumption by the
successor Person, by Supplemental Indenture, executed and delivered to the
Trustee and reasonably satisfactory in form to the Trustee, of the Guarantees
endorsed upon the Notes and the due and punctual performance of all of the
covenants and conditions of this Indenture to be performed by the Guarantor,
such successor Person shall succeed to and be substituted for the Guarantor with
the same effect as if it had been named herein as a Guarantor. Such successor
Person thereupon may cause to be signed any or all of the Guarantees to be
endorsed upon all of the Notes issuable hereunder which theretofore shall not
have been signed by the Company and delivered to the Trustee. All the Guarantees
so issued shall in all respects have the same legal rank and benefit under this
Indenture as the Guarantees theretofore and thereafter issued in accordance with
the terms of this Indenture as though all of such Guarantees had been issued at
the date of the execution hereof.

      Except as set forth in Articles 4 and 5 hereof, and notwithstanding
clauses (a) and (b) above, nothing contained in this Indenture or in any of the
Notes shall prevent any consolidation or merger of a Guarantor with or into the
Company or another Guarantor, or shall prevent any sale or conveyance of the
property of a Guarantor as an entirety or substantially as an entirety to the
Company or another Guarantor.

SECTION 11.06     RELEASES FOLLOWING SALE OF ASSETS.

      In the event of a sale or other disposition of all or substantially all of
the assets of a Guarantor, by way of merger, consolidation or otherwise, or a
sale or other disposition of all of the capital stock of a Guarantor, then such
Guarantor (in the event of a sale or other disposition, by way of merger,
consolidation or otherwise, of all of the capital stock of such Guarantor) or
the Person acquiring the property (in the event of a sale or other disposition
of all or substantially all of the assets of such Guarantor) will be released
and relieved of any obligations under its Guarantee; PROVIDED that the Net Cash
Proceeds of such sale or other disposition are applied in accordance with the
applicable provisions of this Indenture, including without limitation Section
4.10 hereof. Upon delivery by the Company to the Trustee of an Officer's
Certificate and an Opinion of Counsel to the effect that such sale or other
disposition was made by the Company in accordance with the provisions of this
Indenture, including without limitation Section 4.10 hereof, the Trustee shall
execute any documents reasonably required in order to evidence the release of
such Guarantor from its obligations under its Guarantee.

      In the event of the defeasance of the Notes in accordance with the terms
of this Indenture, including without limitation Sections 8.02 and 8.03 hereof,
and in the event of the designation of any Restricted Subsidiary that is a
Guarantor as an Unrestricted Subsidiary in accordance with the terms of this
Indenture, then such Guarantor will be released and relieved of any obligations
under its Guarantee.

                                       87
<PAGE>

      Any Guarantor not released from its obligations under its Guarantee shall
remain liable for the full amount of principal of and interest on the Notes and
for the other obligations of any Guarantor under this Indenture as provided in
this Article 11.

                                   ARTICLE 12
                           SATISFACTION AND DISCHARGE

SECTION 12.01     SATISFACTION AND DISCHARGE

      This Indenture will be discharged and will cease to be of further effect
as to all Notes issued hereunder except as to surviving rights as provided
herein, and the Trustee, on demand and at the expense of the Company shall
execute proper instruments acknowledging satisfaction and discharge of this
Indenture when:

      (a) either:

            (i) all the Notes theretofore authenticated and delivered (except
      lost, stolen or destroyed Notes which have been replaced as provided in
      Section 2.07 or paid and Notes for whose payment funds have been deposited
      in trust by the Company and thereafter repaid to the Company or discharged
      from such trust as provided in Section 8.05) have been delivered to the
      Trustee for cancellation; or

            (ii) all Notes not theretofore delivered to the Trustee for
      cancellation (1) have become due and payable, (2) will become due and
      payable at their Stated Maturity within one year or (3) are to be called
      for redemption within one year under arrangements reasonably satisfactory
      to the Trustee for the giving of notice of redemption by the Trustee in
      the name, and at the reasonable expense, of the Company, and either the
      Company or any Guarantor has irrevocably deposited or caused to be
      deposited with the trustee as trust funds in trust an amount sufficient to
      pay and discharge the entire indebtedness on the Notes not theretofore
      delivered to the Trustee for cancellation, including principal of,
      premium, if any, and accrued interest on such Notes, at such maturity,
      Stated Maturity or redemption date;

      (b) the Company and the Guarantors have paid or caused to be paid all
other sums payable under this Indenture by the Company and the Guarantors; and

      (c) the Company has delivered to the Trustee an Officer's Certificate and
an Opinion of Counsel each stating that all conditions precedent under this
Indenture relating to the satisfaction and discharge of this Indenture under
this Section 12.01 have been complied with, and that such satisfaction and
discharge will not result in a breach or violation of, or constitute a Default
under, this Indenture or a breach or violation of any provision of any agreement
relating to any Senior Indebtedness.

      (d) the Company has delivered irrevocable instructions to the Trustee
under this Indenture to apply the deposited money toward the payment of the
Notes at maturity or the redemption date, as the case may be.

      Notwithstanding the satisfaction and discharge of this Indenture, if money
shall have been deposited with the Trustee pursuant to subclause (ii) of clause
(a) of this Section 12.01, the provisions of Section 8.06 and Section 12.02
shall survive.

                                       88
<PAGE>

SECTION 12.02     APPLICATION OF TRUST MONEY

      Subject to the provisions of Section 8.06, all money deposited with the
Trustee pursuant to Section 12.01 shall be held in trust and applied by it, in
accordance with the provisions of the Notes and this Indenture, to the payment,
either directly or through any Paying Agent (including the Company acting as its
own Paying Agent) as the Trustee may determine, to the Persons entitled thereto,
of the principal (and premium, if any) and interest for whose payment such money
has been deposited with the Trustee; but such money need not be segregated from
other funds except to the extent required by law.

      If the Trustee or Paying Agent is unable to apply any money or U.S.
Government Obligations in accordance with Section 12.01 by reason of any legal
proceeding or by reason of any order or judgment of any court or governmental
authority enjoining, restraining or otherwise prohibiting such application, the
Company's and any Guarantor's obligations under this Indenture and the Notes
shall be revived and reinstated as though no deposit had occurred pursuant to
Section 12.01; PROVIDED that if the Company has made any payment of principal
or, premium, if any, or interest on any Notes because of the reinstatement of
its obligation, the Company shall be subrogated to the rights of the Holders of
such Notes to receive such payment from the money or U.S. Government Obligations
held by the Trustee or Paying Agent.

                                   ARTICLE 13
                                  MISCELLANEOUS

SECTION 13.01     TRUST INDENTURE ACT CONTROLS.

      If any provision of this Indenture limits, qualifies or conflicts with the
duties imposed by TIA Section 318(c), the imposed duties shall control.

SECTION 13.02     NOTICES.

      Any notice or communication by the Company, any Guarantor or the Trustee
to the others is duly given if in writing and delivered in Person or mailed by
first class mail (registered or certified, return receipt requested), telex,
telecopier or overnight air courier guaranteeing next day delivery, to the
others' address.

      If to the Company or any Guarantor:

            Playtex Products, Inc.
            300 Nyala Farms Road
            Westport, Connecticut  06880
            Telecopier No.:  (203) 341-4260
            Attention: Chief Financial Officer

      With a copy to:

            Paul, Weiss, Rifkind, Wharton & Garrison
            1285 Avenue of the Americas
            New York, New York  10019
            Telecopier No.:  (212) 757-3990
            Attention:  John C. Kennedy, Esq.

                                       89
<PAGE>

      If to the Trustee:

            The Bank of New York
            101 Barclay Avenue
            Floor 21 West
            New York, NY 10286
            Telecopier No.:  (212) 815-5915
            Attention:  Corporate Trust - Trustee Administration

      The Company, any Guarantor or the Trustee, by notice to the others may
designate additional or different addresses for subsequent notices or
communications.

      All notices and communications (other than those sent to Holders) shall be
deemed to have been duly given: at the time delivered by hand, if personally
delivered; five Business Days after being deposited in the mail, postage
prepaid, if mailed; when receipt acknowledged, if telecopied; and the next
Business Day after timely delivery to the courier, if sent by overnight air
courier guaranteeing next day delivery.

      Any notice or communication to a Holder shall be mailed by first class
mail, certified or registered, return receipt requested, or by overnight air
courier guaranteeing next day delivery to its address shown on the register kept
by the Registrar. Any notice or communication shall also be so mailed to any
Person described in TIA Section 313(c), to the extent required by the TIA.
Failure to mail a notice or communication to a Holder or any defect in it shall
not affect its sufficiency with respect to other Holders.

      If a notice or communication is mailed in the manner provided above within
the time prescribed, it is duly given, whether or not the addressee receives it.

      If the Company mails a notice or communication to Holders, it shall mail a
copy to the Trustee and each Agent at the same time.

SECTION 13.03     COMMUNICATION BY HOLDERS OF NOTES WITH OTHER HOLDERS OF NOTES.

      Holders may communicate pursuant to TIA Section 312(b) with other Holders
with respect to their rights under this Indenture or the Notes. The Company, the
Trustee, the Registrar and anyone else shall have the protection of TIA Section
312(c).

SECTION 13.04     CERTIFICATE AND OPINION AS TO CONDITIONS PRECEDENT.

      Upon any request or application by the Company to the Trustee to take any
action under this Indenture, the Company shall furnish to the Trustee:

      (a) an Officer's Certificate in form and substance reasonably satisfactory
to the Trustee (which shall include the statements set forth in Section 13.05
hereof) stating that, in the opinion of the signers, all conditions precedent
and covenants, if any, provided for in this Indenture relating to the proposed
action have been satisfied; and

      (b) an Opinion of Counsel in form and substance reasonably satisfactory to
the Trustee (which shall include the statements set forth in Section 13.05
hereof) stating that, in the opinion of such counsel, all such conditions
precedent and covenants have been satisfied.

                                       90
<PAGE>

SECTION 13.05     STATEMENTS REQUIRED IN CERTIFICATE OR OPINION.

      Each certificate or opinion with respect to compliance with a condition or
covenant provided for in this Indenture (other than a certificate provided
pursuant to TIA Section 314(a)(4)) shall comply with the provisions of TIA
Section 314(e) and shall include:

      (a) a statement that the Person making such certificate or opinion has
read such covenant or condition;

      (b) a brief statement as to the nature and scope of the examination or
investigation upon which the statements or opinions contained in such
certificate or opinion are based;

      (c) a statement that, in the opinion of such Person, he or she has made
such examination or investigation as is necessary to enable him to express an
informed opinion as to whether or not such covenant or condition has been
satisfied; and

      (d) a statement as to whether or not, in the opinion of such Person, such
condition or covenant has been satisfied.

SECTION 13.06     RULES BY TRUSTEE AND AGENTS.

      The Trustee may make reasonable rules for action by or at a meeting of
Holders. The Registrar or Paying Agent may make reasonable rules and set
reasonable requirements for its functions.

SECTION 13.07     NO PERSONAL LIABILITY OF DIRECTORS, OFFICERS, EMPLOYEES AND
                  STOCKHOLDERS.

      No past, present or future member, director, officer, employee,
incorporator or stockholder of the Company or any Guarantor, as such, shall have
any liability for any obligations of the Company or the Guarantors under the
Notes, the Guarantees or this Indenture or for any claim based on, in respect
of, or by reason of, such obligations or their creation. Each Holder of Notes by
accepting a Note waives and releases all such liability. The waiver and release
are part of the consideration for issuance of the Notes.

SECTION 13.08     GOVERNING LAW.

      THE INTERNAL LAW OF THE STATE OF NEW YORK SHALL GOVERN AND BE USED TO
CONSTRUE THIS INDENTURE AND THE NOTES WITHOUT GIVING EFFECT TO APPLICABLE
PRINCIPLES OF CONFLICTS OF LAW TO THE EXTENT THAT THE APPLICATION OF THE LAWS OF
ANOTHER JURISDICTION WOULD BE REQUIRED THEREBY.

SECTION 13.09     NO ADVERSE INTERPRETATION OF OTHER AGREEMENTS.

      This Indenture may not be used to interpret any other indenture, loan or
debt agreement of the Company or its Subsidiaries or of any other Person. Any
such indenture, loan or debt agreement may not be used to interpret this
Indenture.

                                       91
<PAGE>

SECTION 13.10     SUCCESSORS.

      All agreements of the Company and the Guarantors in this Indenture, the
Notes and the Guarantees shall bind their successors. All agreements of the
Trustee in this Indenture shall bind its successors.

SECTION 13.11     SEVERABILITY.

      In case any provision in this Indenture or in the Notes shall be invalid,
illegal or unenforceable, the validity, legality and enforceability of the
remaining provisions shall not in any way be affected or impaired thereby.

SECTION 13.12     COUNTERPART ORIGINALS.

      The parties may sign any number of copies of this Indenture. Each signed
copy shall be an original, but all of them together represent the same
agreement.

SECTION 13.13     TABLE OF CONTENTS, HEADINGS, ETC.

      The Table of Contents, Cross-Reference Table and Headings of the Articles
and Sections of this Indenture have been inserted for convenience of reference
only, are not to be considered a part of this Indenture and shall in no way
modify or restrict any of the terms or provisions hereof.

                         [Signatures on following page]

                                       92
<PAGE>

                                   SIGNATURES

Dated as of May 22, 2001

                                    PLAYTEX PRODUCTS, INC.

                                    By: /s/ Glenn A. Forbes
                                       -----------------------------------------
                                       Name:  Glenn A. Forbes
                                       Title: Executive Vice President and
                                              Chief Financial Officer

                                    PLAYTEX SALES & SERVICES, INC.

                                    By: /s/ Glenn A. Forbes
                                       -----------------------------------------
                                       Name:  Glenn A. Forbes
                                       Title: Executive Vice President

                                    PLAYTEX MANUFACTURING, INC.

                                    By: /s/ Glenn A. Forbes
                                       -----------------------------------------
                                       Name:  Glenn A. Forbes
                                       Title: Executive Vice President

                                    PLAYTEX INVESTMENT CORP.

                                    By: /s/ Glenn A. Forbes
                                       -----------------------------------------
                                       Name:  Glenn A. Forbes
                                       Title: Executive Vice President

                                    PLAYTEX INTERNATIONAL CORP.

                                    By: /s/ Glenn A. Forbes
                                       -----------------------------------------
                                       Name:  Glenn A. Forbes
                                       Title: Executive Vice President

                                    TH MARKETING CORP.

                                    By: /s/ Glenn A. Forbes
                                       -----------------------------------------
                                       Name:  Glenn A. Forbes
                                       Title: Executive Vice President

                                    SMILE-TOTE, INC.

                                    By: /s/ Glenn A. Forbes
                                       -----------------------------------------
                                       Name:  Glenn A. Forbes
                                       Title: Executive Vice President

                                       93
<PAGE>

                                    SUN PHARMACEUTICALS CORP.

                                    By: /s/ Glenn A. Forbes
                                       -----------------------------------------
                                       Name:  Glenn A. Forbes
                                       Title: Executive Vice President

                                    PERSONAL CARE GROUP, INC.

                                    By: /s/ Glenn A. Forbes
                                       -----------------------------------------
                                       Name:  Glenn A. Forbes
                                       Title: Executive Vice President

                                    PERSONAL CARE HOLDINGS, INC.

                                    By: /s/ Glenn A. Forbes
                                       -----------------------------------------
                                       Name:  Glenn A. Forbes
                                       Title: Executive Vice President

                                    CAREWELL INDUSTRIES, INC.

                                    By: /s/ Glenn A. Forbes
                                       -----------------------------------------
                                       Name:  Glenn A. Forbes
                                       Title: Executive Vice President

THE BANK OF NEW YORK,
as Trustee

By: /s/ Geovanni Barris
   -------------------------
   Name:  Geovanni Barris
   Title: Vice President

                                       94
<PAGE>

                                   EXHIBIT A1
                              (Face of Global Note)

================================================================================

                                                      CUSIP/CINS ______________

                    9-3/8% Senior Subordinated Notes due 2011

No. __                                                      $
                                                             -----------

                             PLAYTEX PRODUCTS, INC.

promises to pay to ________, or registered assigns, the principal sum of _______
Dollars on June 1, 2011

Interest Payment Dates: June 1 and December 1

Record Dates:  May 15 and November 15

Dated: May 22, 2001

                                          PLAYTEX PRODUCTS, INC.

                                          BY:
                                             ---------------------------------
                                             Name:
                                             Title:

This is one of the Global Notes referred to in the within-mentioned Indenture:

THE BANK OF NEW YORK,
  as Trustee

By:
   --------------------------
   Name:
   Title:

================================================================================

                                      A1-1
<PAGE>

                                 (Back of Note)

         9-3/8% [Series A] [Series B] Senior Subordinated Notes due 2011

Unless and until it is exchanged in whole or in part for Notes in definitive
form, this Note may not be transferred except as a whole by the Depositary to a
nominee of the Depositary or by a nominee of the Depositary to the Depositary or
another nominee of the Depositary or by the Depositary or any such nominee to a
successor Depositary or a nominee of such successor Depositary. Unless this
certificate is presented by an authorized representative of The Depository Trust
Company (55 Water Street, New York, New York) ("DTC"), to the issuer or its
agent for registration of transfer, exchange or payment, and any certificate
issued is registered in the name of Cede & Co. or such other name as may be
requested by an authorized representative of DTC (and any payment is made to
Cede & Co. or such other entity as may be requested by an authorized
representative of DTC), ANY TRANSFER, PLEDGE OR OTHER USE HEREOF FOR VALUE OR
OTHERWISE BY OR TO ANY PERSON IS WRONGFUL in as much as the registered owner
hereof, Cede & Co., has an interest herein.

      THIS NOTE (OR ITS PREDECESSOR) WAS ORIGINALLY ISSUED IN A TRANSACTION
      EXEMPT FROM REGISTRATION UNDER THE UNITED STATES SECURITIES ACT OF 1933
      (THE "SECURITIES ACT"), AND THIS NOTE MAY NOT BE OFFERED, SOLD OR
      OTHERWISE TRANSFERRED IN THE ABSENCE OF SUCH REGISTRATION OR AN APPLICABLE
      EXEMPTION THEREFROM. EACH PURCHASER OF THIS NOTE IS HEREBY NOTIFIED THAT
      THE SELLER OF THIS NOTE MAY BE RELYING ON THE EXEMPTION FROM THE
      PROVISIONS OF SECTION 5 OF THE SECURITIES ACT PROVIDED BY RULE 144A
      THEREUNDER.

      THE HOLDER OF THIS NOTE AGREES FOR THE BENEFIT OF THE COMPANY THAT (A)
      THIS NOTE MAY BE OFFERED, RESOLD, PLEDGED OR OTHERWISE TRANSFERRED, ONLY
      (I) IN THE UNITED STATES TO A PERSON WHOM THE SELLER REASONABLY BELIEVES
      IS A QUALIFIED INSTITUTIONAL BUYER (AS DEFINED IN RULE 144A UNDER THE
      SECURITIES ACT) IN A TRANSACTION MEETING THE REQUIREMENTS OF RULE 144A,
      (II) OUTSIDE THE UNITED STATES IN AN OFFSHORE TRANSACTION IN ACCORDANCE
      WITH RULE 904 UNDER THE SECURITIES ACT, (III) PURSUANT TO AN EXEMPTION
      FROM REGISTRATION UNDER THE SECURITIES ACT PROVIDED BY RULE 144 THEREUNDER
      (IF AVAILABLE), (IV) TO AN INSTITUTIONAL "ACCREDITED INVESTOR" (AS DEFINED
      IN RULE 501(A)(1), (2), (3) OR (7) OF REGULATION D UNDER THE SECURITIES
      ACT (AN "IAI") THAT, PRIOR TO SUCH TRANSFER, FURNISHES THE TRUSTEE A
      SIGNED LETTER CONTAINING CERTAIN REPRESENTATIONS AND AGREEMENTS RELATING
      TO THE TRANSFER OF THIS NOTE (THE FORM OF WHICH CAN BE OBTAINED FROM THE
      TRUSTEE) AND, IF SUCH TRANSFER IS IN RESPECT OF AN AGGREGATE PRINCIPAL
      AMOUNT OF NOTES LESS THAN $250,000, AN OPINION OF COUNSEL ACCEPTABLE TO
      THE COMPANY THAT SUCH TRANSFER IS IN COMPLIANCE WITH THE SECURITIES ACT,
      (V) TO THE COMPANY OR ANY OF ITS SUBSIDIARIES OR (VI) PURSUANT TO AN
      EFFECTIVE REGISTRATION STATEMENT UNDER THE SECURITIES ACT, IN EACH OF
      CASES (I) THROUGH (VI) IN ACCORDANCE WITH ANY APPLICABLE SECURITIES LAWS
      OF ANY STATE OF THE UNITED STATES, AND (B) THE HOLDER WILL, AND EACH
      SUBSEQUENT HOLDER IS REQUIRED TO, NOTIFY ANY PURCHASER OF THIS NOTE FROM
      IT OF THE RESALE RESTRICTIONS REFERRED TO IN (A) ABOVE.

                                      A1-2
<PAGE>

      THIS GLOBAL NOTE IS HELD BY THE DEPOSITARY (AS DEFINED IN THE INDENTURE
      GOVERNING THIS NOTE) OR ITS NOMINEE IN CUSTODY FOR THE BENEFIT OF THE
      BENEFICIAL OWNERS HEREOF, AND IS NOT TRANSFERABLE TO ANY PERSON UNDER ANY
      CIRCUMSTANCES EXCEPT THAT (I) THE TRUSTEE MAY MAKE SUCH NOTATIONS HEREON
      AS MAY BE REQUIRED PURSUANT TO SECTION 2.07 OF THE INDENTURE, (II) THIS
      GLOBAL NOTE MAY BE EXCHANGED IN WHOLE BUT NOT IN PART PURSUANT TO SECTION
      2.06(a) OF THE INDENTURE, (III) THIS GLOBAL NOTE MAY BE DELIVERED TO THE
      TRUSTEE FOR CANCELLATION PURSUANT TO SECTION 2.11 OF THE INDENTURE AND
      (IV) THIS GLOBAL NOTE MAY BE TRANSFERRED TO A SUCCESSOR DEPOSITARY WITH
      THE PRIOR WRITTEN CONSENT OF THE COMPANY.

      Capitalized terms used herein shall have the meanings assigned to them in
the Indenture referred to below unless otherwise indicated.

      1. INTEREST. Playtex Products, Inc., a Delaware corporation (the
"COMPANY"), promises to pay interest on the principal amount of this Note at
9-3/8% per annum from May 22, 2001 until maturity and shall pay the Liquidated
Damages, if any, payable pursuant to Section 5 of the Registration Rights
Agreement referred to below. Interest on the Notes will accrue at the rate of
9-3/8% per annum. The Company will pay interest and Liquidated Damages, if any,
semi-annually on June 1 and December 1 of each year, or if any such day is not a
Business Day, on the next succeeding Business Day (each, an "INTEREST PAYMENT
Date"). Interest on the Notes will accrue from the most recent date to which
interest has been paid or, if no interest has been paid, from May 22, 2001;
PROVIDED that if there is no existing Default in the payment of interest, and if
this Note is authenticated between a Record Date referred to on the face hereof
and the next succeeding Interest Payment Date, interest shall accrue from such
next succeeding Interest Payment Date; and PROVIDED FURTHER that the first
Interest Payment Date shall be December 1, 2001. The Company shall pay interest
(including post-petition interest in any proceeding under any Bankruptcy Law) on
overdue principal and premium, if any, from time to time on demand at a rate
that is 1% per annum in excess of the rate then in effect; it shall pay interest
(including post-petition interest in any proceeding under any Bankruptcy Law) on
overdue installments of interest and Liquidated Damages, if any, (without regard
to any applicable grace periods) from time to time on demand at the same rate to
the extent lawful. Interest will be computed on the basis of a 360-day year of
twelve 30-day months.

      2. METHOD OF PAYMENT. The Company will pay interest on the Notes (except
defaulted interest) and Liquidated Damages to the Persons who are registered
Holders of Notes at the close of business on the Record Date next preceding the
Interest Payment Date, even if such Notes are cancelled after such Record Date
and on or before such Interest Payment Date, except as provided in Section 2.12
of the Indenture with respect to defaulted interest. The Notes will be payable
as to principal, premium and Liquidated Damages, if any, and interest at the
office of the Paying Agent and Registrar. Holders of Notes must surrender their
Notes to the Paying Agent to collect principal payments, and the Company may, at
its option, pay principal and interest and Liquidated Damages, if any, by check
and may mail checks to a Holder's registered address; PROVIDED that all payments
with respect to Global Notes and Definitive Notes, the Holders of which have
given wire transfer instructions to the Company, will be required to be made by
wire transfer of immediately available funds to the accounts specified by the
Holders thereof. Such payment shall be in such coin or currency of the United
States of America as at the time of payment is legal tender for payment of
public and private debts.

      3. PAYING AGENT AND REGISTRAR. Initially, The Bank of New York, the
Trustee under the Indenture, will act as Paying Agent and Registrar. The Company
may change any Paying Agent or

                                      A1-3
<PAGE>

Registrar without notice to any Holder. The Company or any of its Subsidiaries
may act in any such capacity.

      4. INDENTURE. The Company issued the Notes under an Indenture dated as of
May 22, 2001 ("INDENTURE"), between the Company, the Guarantors named in
Schedule 1 thereto (the "GUARANTORS") and the Trustee. The terms of the Notes
include those stated in the Indenture and those made part of the Indenture by
reference to the Trust Indenture Act of 1939, as amended (15 U.S. Code Sections
77aaa-77bbbb). The Notes are subject to all such terms, and Holders ARE referred
to the Indenture and such Act for a statement of such terms. To the extent any
provision of this Note conflicts with the express provisions of the Indenture,
the provisions of the Indenture shall govern and be controlling. The Notes are
obligations of the Company initially limited to $350,000,000 in aggregate
principal amount. Additional Notes may be issued pursuant to Sections 2.02 and
4.09 of the Indenture and, if issued, will be treated as a single class for all
purposes under the Indenture; PROVIDED that the aggregate principal amount of
Notes issued under the Indenture may not exceed $500,000,000, except as provided
in Section 2.07 of the Indenture.

      5. OPTIONAL REDEMPTION.

      (a) Except as provided in subparagraph (b) of this Paragraph 5, the Notes
will not be redeemable at the Company's option prior to June 1, 2006.
Thereafter, the Notes will be subject to redemption at any time at the option of
the Company, in whole or in part, upon not less than 30 nor more than 90 days
notice, at the redemption prices (expressed as percentages of principal amount)
set forth below, plus accrued and unpaid interest on the Notes redeemed, to the
applicable redemption date, if redeemed during the twelve-month period beginning
on June 1 of the years indicated below:

            YEAR                                            PERCENTAGE

            2006.............................................104.688%
            2007.............................................103.125%
            2008.............................................101.563%
            2009 and thereafter..............................100.000%

      (b) Notwithstanding the provisions of subparagraph (a) of this Paragraph
5, on or prior to June 1, 2004, the Company may redeem up to 35% of the
aggregate principal amount of Notes issued from time to time under the Indenture
at a redemption price of 109.375% of the principal amount thereof, plus accrued
and unpaid interest to the redemption date, with the Net Cash Proceeds of one or
more Equity Offerings; PROVIDED that at least 65% of the aggregate principal
amount of Notes issued from time to time under the Indenture remains outstanding
immediately after the occurrence of any such redemption; and PROVIDED FURTHER
that such redemption shall occur within 90 days of the date of the closing of
any such Equity Offering.

      (c) Any redemption pursuant to this subparagraph 5 shall be made pursuant
to the provisions of Section 3.01 through 3.06 of the Indenture.

      6. MANDATORY REDEMPTION. Except as set forth in paragraph 7 below, the
Company shall not be required to make mandatory redemption payments with respect
to the Notes.

      7. REPURCHASE AT OPTION OF HOLDER.

      (a) Upon the occurrence of a Change of Control, each Holder of Notes will
have the right to require the Company to repurchase all or any part (equal to
$1,000 or an integral multiple of $1,000) of such

                                      A1-4
<PAGE>

Holder's Notes pursuant to the offer described in Section 4.14 of the Indenture
(the "CHANGE OF CONTROL OFFER") at an offer price in cash equal to 101% of the
aggregate principal amount thereof plus accrued and unpaid interest and
Liquidated Damages, if any, thereon to the date of repurchase (the "CHANGE OF
CONTROL PAYMENT"). Within 15 days following any Change of Control, the Company
will, or will cause the Trustee to, mail a notice to each Holder describing the
transaction or transactions that constitute the Change of Control and offering
to repurchase Notes on the date specified in such notice, which date shall be no
earlier than 30 days and no later than 60 days from the date such notice is
mailed, pursuant to the procedures required by the Indenture and described in
such notice.

      (b) If all or a portion of the Net Cash Proceeds of any Asset Sale are not
applied to prepay or repay permanently any Senior Indebtedness then outstanding
as provided by the terms thereof (and to effect a corresponding commitment
reduction in the event that the Senior Indebtedness prepaid or repaid is not a
term loan) within 12 months of the closing of such Asset Sale, or if no such
Senior Indebtedness is then outstanding, then the Company may within 12 months
of such Asset Sale invest in properties and assets that replace the property or
assets that were the subject of the Asset Sale or in properties and assets that
will be used in the businesses of the Company or its Restricted Subsidiaries
existing on the date of the Indenture or in businesses reasonably related
thereto. Any Net Proceeds from Asset Sales that are not applied or invested as
provided in the first sentence of this paragraph will be deemed to constitute
"EXCESS PROCEEDS." When the aggregate amount of Excess Proceeds equals $25.0
million or more the Company shall apply the Excess Proceeds to the repayment of
the Notes and any Pari Passu Indebtedness required to be repurchased under the
instrument governing such Pari Passu Indebtedness. The Company will be required
to make an offer to all Holders of Notes (an "ASSET SALE OFFER") in accordance
with the provisions set forth in the Indenture to purchase the maximum principal
amount of Notes that may be purchased out of an amount (the "NOTE Amount") equal
to the product of such Excess Proceeds multiplied by a fraction, the numerator
of which is the outstanding principal amount of the Notes, and the denominator
of which is the sum of the outstanding principal amount of the Notes and such
Pari Passu Indebtedness (subject to proration in the event such amount is less
than the aggregate Offered Price (as defined in the Indenture) of all Notes
tendered); and to the extent required by such Pari Passu Indebtedness to
permanently reduce the principal amount of such Pari Passu Indebtedness, the
Company shall make an offer to purchase or otherwise repay or repurchase or
redeem Pari Passu Indebtedness (a "PARI PASSU OFFER") in an amount ("PARI PASSU
DEBT AMOUNT") equal to the excess of the Excess Proceeds over the Note Amount;
PROVIDED that in no event shall the Pari Passu Debt Amount exceed the principal
amount of such Pari Passu Indebtedness plus the amount of any premium required
to be paid to repurchase such Pari Passu Indebtedness. Upon completion of such
offer to purchase, the amount of Excess Proceeds shall be reset at zero. Holders
of Notes that are the subject of an Asset Sale Offer may elect to have such
Notes purchased by completing the form entitled "Option of Holder to Elect
Purchase" on the reverse side of the Notes.

      8. NOTICE OF REDEMPTION. Notice of redemption will be mailed at least 30
days but not more than 90 days before the redemption date, except as provided in
the Indenture, to each Holder whose Notes are to be redeemed at its registered
address. Notes in denominations larger than $1,000 may be redeemed in part but
only in whole multiples of $1,000, unless all of the Notes held by a Holder are
to be redeemed. On and after the redemption date interest ceases to accrue on
Notes or portions thereof called for redemption.

      9. DENOMINATIONS, TRANSFER, EXCHANGE. The Notes are in registered form
without coupons in denominations of $1,000 and integral multiples of $1,000. The
transfer of Notes may be registered and Notes may be exchanged as provided in
the Indenture. The Registrar and the Trustee may require a Holder, among other
things, to furnish appropriate endorsements and transfer documents and the
Company may require a Holder to pay any taxes and fees required by law or
permitted by the Indenture. The Company need not exchange or register the
transfer of any Note or portion of a Note selected for redemption, except for
the unredeemed portion of any Note being redeemed in part. Also, the Company

                                      A1-5
<PAGE>

need not exchange or register the transfer of any Notes for a period of 15 days
before a selection of Notes to be redeemed or during the period between a Record
Date and the corresponding Interest Payment Date.

      10. PERSONS DEEMED OWNERS. The registered Holder of a Note may be treated
as its owner for all purposes.

      11. AMENDMENT, SUPPLEMENT AND WAIVER. Subject to certain exceptions, the
Indenture, the Guarantees or the Notes may be amended or supplemented with the
consent of the Holders of at least a majority in principal amount of the then
outstanding Notes (and Additional Notes, if any) and any past Default or Event
of Default (other than a Default or Event of Default in the payment of the
principal of, premium, if any, or interest or Liquidated Damages, if any, on the
Notes, except a payment default resulting from an acceleration that has been
rescinded) or compliance with any provision of the Indenture, the Guarantees or
the Notes may be waived with the consent of the Holders of a majority in
principal amount of the then outstanding Notes (and Additional Notes, if any).
Without the consent of any Holder of a Note, the Indenture, the Guarantees or
the Notes may be amended or supplemented to cure any ambiguity, defect or
inconsistency, to provide for uncertificated Notes in addition to or in place of
certificated Notes, to provide for the assumption of the Company's or any
Guarantor's obligations to Holders of the Notes in case of a merger or
consolidation or sale of substantially all of the assets of the Company as
permitted by the Indenture, to make any change that would provide any additional
rights or benefits to the Holders of the Notes or that does not materially
adversely affect the legal rights under the Indenture of any such Holder, to
comply with the requirements of the Commission in order to effect or maintain
the qualification of the Indenture under the Trust Indenture Act, to provide for
the Issuance of Additional Notes in accordance with the limitations set forth in
the Indenture, or to allow any Guarantor to execute a Supplemental Indenture to
the Indenture and/or a Guarantee with respect to the Notes.

      12. DEFAULTS AND REMEDIES. Each of the following constitutes an "Event of
Default": (a) a default in the payment of any interest or Liquidated Damages, if
any, with respect to any Note when it becomes due and payable, and such default
shall continue for a period of 30 days; (b) a default in the payment of the
principal of (or premium, if any, on) any Note when and as the same shall become
due and payable at maturity (upon acceleration, optional or mandatory
redemption, required repurchase or otherwise); (c) (i) a default in the
performance, or breach, of any covenant or agreement of the Company or any
Guarantor under the Indenture (other than a default in the performance, or
breach, of a covenant or agreement which is specifically dealt with in clauses
(a) or (b) above or in sub-clauses (ii) or (iii) of this clause (c)) and such
default or breach shall continue for a period of 60 days after written notice
has been given, by certified mail, to the Company by the Trustee or to the
Company and the Trustee by the Holders of at least 25% in aggregate principal
amount of the outstanding Notes; (ii) a default in the performance or breach of
the provisions described in Article 5 of the Indenture; or (iii) the Company
shall have failed to make or consummate a Change of Control Offer in accordance
with the provisions of Section 4.14 of the Indenture; (d) one or more defaults
shall have occurred under any agreements, indentures or instruments under which
the Company, any Guarantor or any Restricted Subsidiary then has outstanding
Indebtedness in excess of $25,000,000 in the aggregate and, if not already
matured at its final maturity in accordance with its terms, such Indebtedness
shall have been accelerated; (e) any Guarantee shall for any reason cease to be,
or be asserted in writing by any Guarantor or the Company not to be, in full
force and effect, enforceable in accordance with its terms, except to the extent
contemplated by the Indenture and any such Guarantee; (f) one or more final
judgments, orders or decrees for the payment of money in excess of $15,000,000,
either individually or in the aggregate, shall be entered against the Company or
any Restricted Subsidiary or any of their respective properties and shall not be
discharged and either (i) enforcement proceedings shall have been commenced upon
such judgment, order or decree or (ii) there shall have been a period of 60
consecutive days during which a stay of enforcement of such judgment or order,
by reason of an appeal or otherwise, shall not be in effect; or (g) certain
events of bankruptcy or insolvency as described in the Indenture with respect to
the Company or any Material Subsidiary.

                                      A1-6
<PAGE>

      If any Event of Default (other than certain events of bankruptcy or
insolvency with respect to the Company) shall occur and be continuing, the
Trustee or the Holders of at least 25% in principal amount of the Notes then
outstanding may declare all the Notes to be due and payable immediately by a
notice in writing to the Company and, if the Credit Agreement is in effect, to
the administrative agent under the Credit Agreement, and upon any such
declaration such amount shall become immediately due and payable, except if the
Credit Agreement is in effect, any such acceleration shall not be effective
until the first to occur of (i) an acceleration under the Credit Agreement; or
(ii) the fifth Business Day after receipt by the Company and the administrative
agent under the Credit Agreement of such written notice and thereupon the
Trustee may, at its discretion proceed to protect and enforce the rights of the
Holders of Notes by appropriate judicial proceedings. Notwithstanding the
foregoing, in the case of an Event of Default arising from certain events of
bankruptcy or insolvency with respect to the Company, all outstanding Notes will
become due and payable without further action or notice. Holders of the Notes
may not enforce the Indenture or the Notes except as provided in the Indenture.
The Holders of a majority in aggregate principal amount of the then outstanding
Notes may direct the Trustee in its exercise of any trust or power. The Trustee
may withhold from Holders of the Notes notice of any continuing Default or Event
of Default (except a Default or Event of Default relating to the payment of
principal or interest) if it determines that withholding notice is in their
interest.

      After a declaration of acceleration, but before a judgement or decree for
payment of the money due has been obtained by the Trustee, the Holders of a
majority in aggregate principal amount of Notes outstanding, by written notice
to the Company and the Trustee, may rescind and annul such declaration and its
consequences as provided in the Indenture.

      13. SUBORDINATION. The Company agrees, and each Holder by accepting a Note
agrees, that the payment of principal of, premium and interest and Liquidated
Damages, if any, on the Notes is subordinated in right of payment, to the extent
and in the manner provided in the Indenture, to the prior payment in full in
cash or Cash Equivalents of all Senior Indebtedness (whether outstanding on the
date hereof or thereafter created, incurred, assumed or guaranteed), and that
the subordination is for the benefit of the holders of Senior Indebtedness.

      14. TRUSTEE DEALINGS WITH COMPANY. The Trustee, in its individual or any
other capacity, may make loans to, accept deposits from, and perform services
for the Company or its Affiliates, and may otherwise deal with the Company or
its Affiliates, as if it were not the Trustee.

      15. NO RECOURSE AGAINST OTHERS. No past, present or future member,
director, officer, employee, incorporator or stockholder, of the Company or any
Guarantor, as such, shall have any liability for any obligations of the Company
and the Guarantors under the Notes, the Guarantees or the Indenture or for any
claim based on, in respect of, or by reason of, such obligations or their
creation. Each Holder by accepting a Note waives and releases all such
liability. The waiver and release are part of the consideration for the issuance
of the Notes.

      16. AUTHENTICATION. This Note shall not be valid until authenticated by
the manual signature of the Trustee or an authenticating agent.

      17. ABBREVIATIONS. Customary abbreviations may be used in the name of a
Holder or an assignee, such as: TEN COM (= tenants in common), TEN ENT (=
tenants by the entireties), JT TEN (= joint tenants with right of survivorship
and not as tenants in common), CUST (= Custodian), and U/G/M/A (= Uniform Gifts
to Minors Act).

                                      A1-7
<PAGE>

      18. ADDITIONAL RIGHTS OF HOLDERS OF RESTRICTED GLOBAL NOTES AND RESTRICTED
DEFINITIVE NOTES. In addition to the rights provided to Holders of Notes under
the Indenture, Holders of Restricted Global Notes and Restricted Definitive
Notes shall have all the rights set forth in the Registration Rights Agreement
dated as of May 22, 2001, between the Company and the parties named on the
signature pages thereof (the "REGISTRATION RIGHTS AGREEMENT").

      19. CUSIP NUMBERS. Pursuant to a recommendation promulgated by the
Committee on Uniform Security Identification Procedures, the Company has caused
CUSIP numbers to be printed on the Notes and the Trustee may use CUSIP numbers
in notices of redemption as a convenience to Holders. No representation is made
as to the accuracy of such numbers either as printed on the Notes or as
contained in any notice of redemption and reliance may be placed only on the
other identification numbers placed thereon.

                                      A1-8
<PAGE>

      The Company will furnish to any Holder upon written request and without
charge a copy of the Indenture and/or the Registration Rights Agreement.
Requests may be made to:

            Playtex Products, Inc.
            300 Nyala Farms Road
            Westport, Connecticut 06880
            Telecopier No.:  (203) 341-4260
            Attention:  Chief Financial Officer

                                      A1-9
<PAGE>

                                 ASSIGNMENT FORM

To assign this Note, fill in the form below:

(I) or (we) assign and transfer this Note to:

--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
 (Insert assignee's legal name)
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
 (Insert assignee's soc. sec. or tax I.D. no.)

--------------------------------------------------------------------------------

--------------------------------------------------------------------------------

--------------------------------------------------------------------------------

--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
(Print or type assignee's name, address and zip code)

and irrevocably appoint ________________________________________________________
to transfer this Note on the books of the Company. The agent may substitute
another to act for him.

Date:                               Your Signature:
                                                   ---------------------------
                                    (Sign exactly as your name appears on the
                                     Note)

                                    Tax Identification No:
                                                          ----------------------

                                    Signature Guarantee*:

      *Participant in a recognized Signature Guarantee Medallion Program (or
other signature guarantor acceptable to the Trustee)

                                     A1-10
<PAGE>

                       OPTION OF HOLDER TO ELECT PURCHASE

      If you want to elect to have this Note purchased by the Company pursuant
to Section 4.10 or 4.14 of the Indenture, check the box below:

            /_/ Section 4.10                         /_/ Section 4.14

      If you want to elect to have only part of the Note purchased by the
Company pursuant to Section 4.10 or Section 4.14 of the Indenture, state the
amount you elect to have purchased: $________

Date:                               Your Signature:
                                                   ---------------------------
                                    (Sign exactly as your name appears on the
                                    Note)

                                    Tax Identification No:
                                                          --------------------

                                    Signature Guarantee*:

      *Participant in a recognized Signature Guarantee Medallion Program (or
other signature guarantor acceptable to the Trustee)

                                     A1-11
<PAGE>

              SCHEDULE OF EXCHANGES OF INTERESTS IN THE GLOBAL NOTE

      The following exchanges of a part of this Global Note for an interest in
another Global Note or for a Definitive Note, or exchanges of a part of another
Global Note or Definitive Note for an interest in this Global Note, have been
made:

<TABLE>
<CAPTION>

                                                            Principal
                        Amount of         Amount of          amount
                       decrease in       increase in     of this Global     Signature of
                        principal         principal           Note           authorized
                         amount            amount           following        officer of
                         of this           of this        such decrease      Trustee or
 Date of Exchange      Global Note       Global Note       (or Increase)   Note Custodian
 ----------------      -----------       -----------       ------------    --------------
<S>                    <C>               <C>               <C>             <C>

</TABLE>

                                     A1-12
<PAGE>

                                   EXHIBIT A2
                  [FACE OF REGULATION S TEMPORARY GLOBAL NOTE]
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------

                                                      CUSIP/CINS ______________

                     9-3/8% Senior Subordinated Notes due 2011

No. __                                                      $
                                                             -----------

                             PLAYTEX PRODUCTS, INC.

promises to pay to _______, or registered assigns, the principal sum of ________
Dollars on June 1, 2011

Interest Payment Dates: June 1 and December 1

Record Dates:  May 15 and November 15

Dated: May 22, 2001

                                          PLAYTEX PRODUCTS, INC.

                                          BY:
                                             ---------------------------------
                                             Name:
                                             Title:

This is one of the Global Notes referred to
in the within-mentioned Indenture:

THE BANK OF NEW YORK,
  as Trustee

By:
   --------------------------
   Name:
   Title:

================================================================================

                                      A2-1
<PAGE>

                  [Back of Regulation S Temporary Global Note]

         9-3/8% [Series A] [Series B] Senior Subordinated Notes due 2011

Unless and until it is exchanged in whole or in part for Notes in definitive
form, this Note may not be transferred except as a whole by the Depositary to a
nominee of the Depositary or by a nominee of the Depositary to the Depositary or
another nominee of the Depositary or by the Depositary or any such nominee to a
successor Depositary or a nominee of such successor Depositary. Unless this
certificate is presented by an authorized representative of The Depository Trust
Company (55 Water Street, New York, New York) ("DTC"), to the issuer or its
agent for registration of transfer, exchange or payment, and any certificate
issued is registered in the name of Cede & Co. or such other name as may be
requested by an authorized representative of DTC (and any payment is made to
Cede & Co. or such other entity as may be requested by an authorized
representative of DTC), ANY TRANSFER, PLEDGE OR OTHER USE HEREOF FOR VALUE OR
OTHERWISE BY OR TO ANY PERSON IS WRONGFUL in as much as the registered owner
hereof, Cede & Co., has an interest herein.

      THE RIGHTS ATTACHING TO THIS REGULATION S TEMPORARY GLOBAL NOTE, AND THE
      CONDITIONS AND PROCEDURES GOVERNING ITS EXCHANGE FOR CERTIFICATED NOTES,
      ARE AS SPECIFIED IN THE INDENTURE (AS DEFINED HEREIN). NEITHER THE HOLDER
      NOR THE BENEFICIAL OWNERS OF THIS REGULATION S TEMPORARY GLOBAL NOTE SHALL
      BE ENTITLED TO RECEIVE PAYMENT OF INTEREST HEREON.

      UNLESS AND UNTIL IT IS EXCHANGED IN WHOLE OR IN PART FOR NOTES IN
      DEFINITIVE FORM, THIS NOTE MAY NOT BE TRANSFERRED EXCEPT AS A WHOLE BY THE
      DEPOSITARY TO A NOMINEE OF THE DEPOSITARY OR BY A NOMINEE OF THE
      DEPOSITARY TO THE DEPOSITARY OR ANOTHER NOMINEE OF THE DEPOSITARY OR BY
      THE DEPOSITARY OR ANY SUCH NOMINEE TO A SUCCESSOR DEPOSITARY OR A NOMINEE
      OF SUCH SUCCESSOR DEPOSITARY. UNLESS THIS CERTIFICATE IS PRESENTED BY AN
      AUTHORIZED REPRESENTATIVE OF THE DEPOSITORY TRUST COMPANY (55 WATER
      STREET, NEW YORK, NEW YORK) ("DTC"), TO THE COMPANY OR ITS AGENT FOR
      REGISTRATION OF TRANSFER, EXCHANGE OR PAYMENT, AND ANY CERTIFICATE ISSUED
      IS REGISTERED IN THE NAME OF CEDE & CO. OR SUCH OTHER NAME AS MAY BE
      REQUESTED BY AN AUTHORIZED REPRESENTATIVE OF DTC (AND ANY PAYMENT IS MADE
      TO CEDE & CO. OR SUCH OTHER ENTITY AS MAY BE REQUESTED BY AN AUTHORIZED
      REPRESENTATIVE OF DTC), ANY TRANSFER, PLEDGE OR OTHER USE HEREOF FOR VALUE
      OR OTHERWISE BY OR TO ANY PERSON IS WRONGFUL INASMUCH AS THE REGISTERED
      OWNER HEREOF, CEDE & CO., HAS AN INTEREST HEREIN.

      THIS NOTE (OR ITS PREDECESSOR) WAS ORIGINALLY ISSUED IN A TRANSACTION
      EXEMPT FROM REGISTRATION UNDER THE UNITED STATES SECURITIES ACT OF 1933
      (THE "SECURITIES ACT"), AND THIS NOTE MAY NOT BE OFFERED, SOLD OR
      OTHERWISE TRANSFERRED IN THE ABSENCE OF SUCH REGISTRATION OR AN APPLICABLE
      EXEMPTION THEREFROM. EACH PURCHASER OF THIS NOTE IS HEREBY NOTIFIED THAT
      THE SELLER OF THIS NOTE MAY BE RELYING ON THE EXEMPTION FROM THE
      PROVISIONS OF SECTION 5 OF THE SECURITIES ACT PROVIDED BY RULE 144A
      THEREUNDER.

                                      A2-2
<PAGE>

      THE HOLDER OF THIS NOTE AGREES FOR THE BENEFIT OF THE COMPANY THAT (A)
      THIS NOTE MAY BE OFFERED, RESOLD, PLEDGED OR OTHERWISE TRANSFERRED, ONLY
      (I) IN THE UNITED STATES TO A PERSON WHOM THE SELLER REASONABLY BELIEVES
      IS A QUALIFIED INSTITUTIONAL BUYER (AS DEFINED IN RULE 144A UNDER THE
      SECURITIES ACT) IN A TRANSACTION MEETING THE REQUIREMENTS OF RULE 144A,
      (II) OUTSIDE THE UNITED STATES IN AN OFFSHORE TRANSACTION IN ACCORDANCE
      WITH RULE 904 UNDER THE SECURITIES ACT, (III) PURSUANT TO AN EXEMPTION
      FROM REGISTRATION UNDER THE SECURITIES ACT PROVIDED BY RULE 144 THEREUNDER
      (IF AVAILABLE), (IV) TO AN INSTITUTIONAL "ACCREDITED INVESTOR" (AS DEFINED
      IN RULE 501(A)(1), (2), (3) OR (7) OF REGULATION D UNDER THE SECURITIES
      ACT (AN "IAI") THAT, PRIOR TO SUCH TRANSFER, FURNISHES THE TRUSTEE A
      SIGNED LETTER CONTAINING CERTAIN REPRESENTATIONS AND AGREEMENTS RELATING
      TO THE TRANSFER OF THIS NOTE (THE FORM OF WHICH CAN BE OBTAINED FROM THE
      TRUSTEE) AND, IF SUCH TRANSFER IS IN RESPECT OF AN AGGREGATE PRINCIPAL
      AMOUNT OF NOTES LESS THAN $250,000, AN OPINION OF COUNSEL ACCEPTABLE TO
      THE COMPANY THAT SUCH TRANSFER IS IN COMPLIANCE WITH THE SECURITIES ACT,
      (V) TO THE COMPANY OR ANY OF ITS SUBSIDIARIES OR (VI) PURSUANT TO AN
      EFFECTIVE REGISTRATION STATEMENT UNDER THE SECURITIES ACT, IN EACH OF
      CASES (I) THROUGH (VI) IN ACCORDANCE WITH ANY APPLICABLE SECURITIES LAWS
      OF ANY STATE OF THE UNITED STATES, AND (B) THE HOLDER WILL, AND EACH
      SUBSEQUENT HOLDER IS REQUIRED TO, NOTIFY ANY PURCHASER OF THIS NOTE FROM
      IT OF THE RESALE RESTRICTIONS REFERRED TO IN (A) ABOVE.

      THIS GLOBAL NOTE IS HELD BY THE DEPOSITARY (AS DEFINED IN THE INDENTURE
      GOVERNING THIS NOTE) OR ITS NOMINEE IN CUSTODY FOR THE BENEFIT OF THE
      BENEFICIAL OWNERS HEREOF, AND IS NOT TRANSFERABLE TO ANY PERSON UNDER ANY
      CIRCUMSTANCES EXCEPT THAT (I) THE TRUSTEE MAY MAKE SUCH NOTATIONS HEREON
      AS MAY BE REQUIRED PURSUANT TO SECTION 2.07 OF THE INDENTURE, (II) THIS
      GLOBAL NOTE MAY BE EXCHANGED IN WHOLE BUT NOT IN PART PURSUANT TO SECTION
      2.06(a) OF THE INDENTURE, (III) THIS GLOBAL NOTE MAY BE DELIVERED TO THE
      TRUSTEE FOR CANCELLATION PURSUANT TO SECTION 2.11 OF THE INDENTURE AND
      (IV) THIS GLOBAL NOTE MAY BE TRANSFERRED TO A SUCCESSOR DEPOSITARY WITH
      THE PRIOR WRITTEN CONSENT OF THE COMPANY.

      Capitalized terms used herein shall have the meanings assigned to them in
the Indenture referred to below unless otherwise indicated.

      1. INTEREST. Playtex Products, Inc., a Delaware corporation (the
"COMPANY"), promises to pay interest on the principal amount of this Note at
9-3/8% per annum from May 22, 2001 until maturity and shall pay the Liquidated
Damages, if any, payable pursuant to Section 5 of the Registration Rights
Agreement referred to below. Interest on the Notes will accrue at the rate of
9-3/8% per annum. The Company will pay interest and Liquidated Damages, if any,
semi-annually on June 1 and December 1 of each year, or if any such day is not a
Business Day, on the next succeeding Business Day (each, an "INTEREST PAYMENT
Date"). Interest on the Notes will accrue from the most recent date to which
interest has been paid or, if no interest has been paid, from May 22, 2001;
PROVIDED that if there is no existing Default in the payment of interest, and if
this Note is authenticated between a Record Date referred to on the face hereof
and the next succeeding Interest Payment Date, interest shall accrue from such
next

                                      A2-3
<PAGE>

succeeding Interest Payment Date; and PROVIDED FURTHER that the first Interest
Payment Date shall be December 1, 2001. The Company shall pay interest
(including post-petition interest in any proceeding under any Bankruptcy Law) on
overdue principal and premium, if any, from time to time on demand at a rate
that is 1% per annum in excess of the rate then in effect; it shall pay interest
(including post-petition interest in any proceeding under any Bankruptcy Law) on
overdue installments of interest and Liquidated Damages, if any, (without regard
to any applicable grace periods) from time to time on demand at the same rate to
the extent lawful. Interest will be computed on the basis of a 360-day year of
twelve 30-day months.

      2. METHOD OF PAYMENT. The Company will pay interest on the Notes (except
defaulted interest) and Liquidated Damages to the Persons who are registered
Holders of Notes at the close of business on the Record Date next preceding the
Interest Payment Date, even if such Notes are cancelled after such Record Date
and on or before such Interest Payment Date, except as provided in Section 2.12
of the Indenture with respect to defaulted interest. The Notes will be payable
as to principal, premium and Liquidated Damages, if any, and interest at the
office of the Paying Agent and Registrar. Holders of Notes must surrender their
Notes to the Paying Agent to collect principal payments, and the Company may, at
its option, pay principal and interest and Liquidated Damages, if any, by check
and may mail checks to a Holder's registered address; PROVIDED that all payments
with respect to Global Notes and Definitive Notes, the Holders of which have
given wire transfer instructions to the Company, will be required to be made by
wire transfer of immediately available funds to the accounts specified by the
Holders thereof. Such payment shall be in such coin or currency of the United
States of America as at the time of payment is legal tender for payment of
public and private debts.

      3. PAYING AGENT AND REGISTRAR. Initially, The Bank of New York, the
Trustee under the Indenture, will act as Paying Agent and Registrar. The Company
may change any Paying Agent or Registrar without notice to any Holder. The
Company or any of its Subsidiaries may act in any such capacity.

      4. INDENTURE. The Company issued the Notes under an Indenture dated as of
May 22, 2001 ("INDENTURE"), between the Company, the Guarantors named in
Schedule 1 thereto (the "GUARANTORS") and the Trustee. The terms of the Notes
include those stated in the Indenture and those made part of the Indenture by
reference to the Trust Indenture Act of 1939, as amended (15 U.S. Code Sections
77aaa-77bbbb). The Notes are subject to all such terms, and Holders ARE referred
to the Indenture and such Act for a statement of such terms. To the extent any
provision of this Note conflicts with the express provisions of the Indenture,
the provisions of the Indenture shall govern and be controlling. The Notes are
obligations of the Company initially limited to $350,000,000 million in
aggregate principal amount. Additional Notes may be issued pursuant to Sections
2.02 and 4.09 of the Indenture and, if issued, will be treated as a single class
for all purposes under the Indenture; PROVIDED that the aggregate principal
amount of Notes issued under the Indenture may not exceed $500,000,000, except
as provided in Section 2.07 of the Indenture.

      5.    OPTIONAL REDEMPTION.

      (a) Except as provided in subparagraph (b) of this Paragraph 5, the Notes
will not be redeemable at the Company's option prior to June 1, 2006.
Thereafter, the Notes will be subject to redemption at any time at the option of
the Company, in whole or in part, upon not less than 30 nor more than 90 days
notice, at the redemption prices (expressed as percentages of principal amount)
set forth below, plus accrued and unpaid interest on the Notes redeemed, to the
applicable redemption date, if redeemed during the twelve-month period beginning
on June 1 of the years indicated below:

                                      A2-4
<PAGE>

            YEAR                                            PERCENTAGE

            2006.............................................104.688%
            2007.............................................103.125%
            2008.............................................101.563%
            2009 and thereafter..............................100.000%

      (b) Notwithstanding the provisions of subparagraph (a) of this Paragraph
5, on or prior to June 1, 2004, the Company may redeem up to 35% of the
aggregate principal amount of Notes issued from time to time under the Indenture
in cash at a redemption price of 109.375% of the principal amount thereof, plus
accrued and unpaid interest to the redemption date, with the net cash proceeds
of one or more Equity Offerings; PROVIDED that at least 65% of the aggregate
principal amount of Notes issued from time to time under the Indenture remains
outstanding immediately after the occurrence of any such redemption; and
PROVIDED FURTHER that such redemption shall occur within 90 days of the date of
the closing of any such Equity Offering.

      (c) Any redemption pursuant to this subparagraph 5 shall be made pursuant
to the provisions of Section 3.01 through 3.06 of the Indenture.

      6. MANDATORY REDEMPTION. Except as set forth in paragraph 7 below, the
Company shall not be required to make mandatory redemption payments with respect
to the Notes.

      7. REPURCHASE AT OPTION OF HOLDER.

      (a) Upon the occurrence of a Change of Control, each Holder of Notes will
have the right to require the Company to repurchase all or any part (equal to
$1,000 or an integral multiple of $1,000) of such Holder's Notes pursuant to the
offer described in Section 4.14 of the Indenture (the "CHANGE OF CONTROL OFFER")
at an offer price in cash equal to 101% of the aggregate principal amount
thereof plus accrued and unpaid interest and Liquidated Damages, if any, thereon
to the date of purchase (the "CHANGE OF CONTROL PAYMENT"). Within 15 days
following any Change of Control, the Company will, or will cause the Trustee to,
mail a notice to each Holder describing the transaction or transactions that
constitute the Change of Control and offering to repurchase Notes on the date
specified in such notice, which date shall be no earlier than 30 days and no
later than 60 days from the date such notice is mailed, pursuant to the
procedures required by the Indenture and described in such notice.

      (b) If all or a portion of the Net Cash Proceeds of any Asset Sale are not
applied to prepay or repay permanently any Senior Indebtedness then outstanding
as provided by the terms thereof (and to effect a corresponding commitment
reduction in the event that the Senior Indebtedness prepaid or repaid is not a
term loan) within 12 months of the closing of such Asset Sale, or if no such
Senior Indebtedness is then outstanding, then the Company may within 12 months
of such Asset Sale invest in properties and assets that replace the property or
assets that were the subject of the Asset Sale; or invest in properties and
assets that will be used in the businesses of the Company or its Restricted
Subsidiaries existing on the date of the Indenture or in businesses reasonably
related thereto. Any Net Proceeds from Asset Sales that are not applied or
invested as provided in the first sentence of this paragraph will be deemed to
constitute "EXCESS PROCEEDS." When the aggregate amount of Excess Proceeds
equals $25.0 million or more the Company shall apply the Excess Proceeds to the
repayment of the Notes and any Pari Passu Indebtedness required to be
repurchased under the instrument governing such Pari Passu Indebtedness. The
Company will be required to make an offer to all Holders of Notes (an "ASSET
SALE OFFER") in accordance with the provisions set forth in the Indenture to
purchase the maximum principal amount of Notes that may be purchased out of an
amount (the "NOTE AMOUNT") equal to the product of such Excess Proceeds
multiplied by a fraction, the

                                      A2-5
<PAGE>

numerator of which is the outstanding principal amount of the Notes, and the
denominator of which is the sum of the outstanding principal amount of the Notes
and such Pari Passu Indebtedness (subject to proration in the event such amount
is less than the aggregate Offered Price (as defined in the Indenture) of all
Notes tendered); and to the extent required by such Pari Passu Indebtedness to
permanently reduce the principal amount of such Pari Passu Indebtedness, the
Company shall make an offer to purchase or otherwise repay or repurchase or
redeem Pari Passu Indebtedness (a "PARI PASSU OFFER") in an amount ("PARI PASSU
DEBT AMOUNT") equal to the excess of the Excess Proceeds over the Note Amount;
PROVIDED that in no event shall the Pari Passu Debt Amount exceed the principal
amount of such Pari Passu Indebtedness plus the amount of any premium required
to be paid to repurchase such Pari Passu Indebtedness. Upon completion of such
offer to purchase, the amount of Excess Proceeds shall be reset at zero. Holders
of Notes that are the subject of an Asset Sale Offer may elect to have such
Notes purchased by completing the form entitled "Option of Holder to Elect
Purchase" on the reverse side of the Notes.

      8. NOTICE OF REDEMPTION. Notice of redemption will be mailed at least 30
days but not more than 90 days before the redemption date, except as provided in
the Indenture, to each Holder whose Notes are to be redeemed at its registered
address. Notes in denominations larger than $1,000 may be redeemed in part but
only in whole multiples of $1,000, unless all of the Notes held by a Holder are
to be redeemed. On and after the redemption date interest ceases to accrue on
Notes or portions thereof called for redemption.

      9. DENOMINATIONS, TRANSFER, EXCHANGE. The Notes are in registered form
without coupons in denominations of $1,000 and integral multiples of $1,000. The
transfer of Notes may be registered and Notes may be exchanged as provided in
the Indenture. The Registrar and the Trustee may require a Holder, among other
things, to furnish appropriate endorsements and transfer documents and the
Company may require a Holder to pay any taxes and fees required by law or
permitted by the Indenture. The Company need not exchange or register the
transfer of any Note or portion of a Note selected for redemption, except for
the unredeemed portion of any Note being redeemed in part. Also, the Company
need not exchange or register the transfer of any Notes for a period of 15 days
before a selection of Notes to be redeemed or during the period between a Record
Date and the corresponding Interest Payment Date.

      This Regulation S Temporary Global Note is exchangeable in whole or in
part for one or more Global Notes only (i) on or after the termination of the
40-day restricted period (as defined in Regulation S) and (ii) upon presentation
of certificates (accompanied by an Opinion of Counsel, if applicable) required
by Article 2 of the Indenture. Upon exchange of this Regulation S Temporary
Global Note for one or more Global Notes, the Trustee shall cancel this
Regulation S Temporary Global Note.

      10. PERSONS DEEMED OWNERS. The registered Holder of a Note may be treated
as its owner for all purposes.

      11. AMENDMENT, SUPPLEMENT AND WAIVER. Subject to certain exceptions, the
Indenture, the Guarantees or the Notes may be amended or supplemented with the
consent of the Holders of at least a majority in principal amount of the then
outstanding Notes (and Additional Notes, if any) and any past Default or Event
of Default (other than a Default or Event of Default in the payment of the
principal of, premium, if any, or interest or Liquidated Damages, if any, on the
Notes, except a payment default resulting from an acceleration that has been
rescinded) or compliance with any provision of the Indenture, the Guarantees or
the Notes may be waived with the consent of the Holders of a majority in
principal amount of the then outstanding Notes (and Additional Notes, if any).
Without the consent of any Holder of a Note, the Indenture, the Guarantees or
the Notes may be amended or supplemented to cure any ambiguity, defect or
inconsistency, to provide for uncertificated Notes in addition to or in place of
certificated Notes, to provide for the assumption of the Company's or any
Guarantor's obligations to

                                      A2-6
<PAGE>

Holders of the Notes in case of a merger or consolidation or sale of
substantially all of the assets of the Company as permitted by the Indenture, to
make any change that would provide any additional rights or benefits to the
Holders of the Notes or that does not materially adversely affect the legal
rights under the Indenture of any such Holder, to comply with the requirements
of the Commission in order to effect or maintain the qualification of the
Indenture under the Trust Indenture Act, to provide for the Issuance of
Additional Notes in accordance with the limitations set forth in the Indenture,
or to allow any Guarantor to execute a Supplemental Indenture to the Indenture
and/or a Guarantee with respect to the Notes.

      12. DEFAULTS AND REMEDIES. Each of the following constitutes an "Event of
Default": (a) a default in the payment of any interest or Liquidated Damages, if
any, with respect to any Note when it becomes due and payable, and such default
shall continue for a period of 30 days; (b) a default in the payment of the
principal of (or premium, if any, on) any Note when and as the same shall become
due and payable at maturity (upon acceleration, optional or mandatory
redemption, required repurchase or otherwise); (c) (i) a default in the
performance, or breach, of any covenant or agreement of the Company or any
Guarantor under the Indenture (other than a default in the performance, or
breach, of a covenant or agreement which is specifically dealt with in clauses
(a) or (b) above or in sub-clauses (ii) or (iii) of this clause (c)) and such
default or breach shall continue for a period of 60 days after written notice
has been given, by certified mail, to the Company by the Trustee or to the
Company and the Trustee by the Holders of at least 25% in aggregate principal
amount of the outstanding Notes; (ii) a default in the performance or breach of
the provisions described in Article 5 of the Indenture; or (iii) the Company
shall have failed to make or consummate a Change of Control Offer in accordance
with the provisions of Section 4.14 of the Indenture; (d) one or more defaults
shall have occurred under any agreements, indentures or instruments under which
the Company, any Guarantor or any Restricted Subsidiary then has outstanding
Indebtedness in excess of $25,000,000 in the aggregate and, if not already
matured at its final maturity in accordance with its terms, such Indebtedness
shall have been accelerated; (e) any Guarantee shall for any reason cease to be,
or be asserted in writing by any Guarantor or the Company not to be, in full
force and effect, enforceable in accordance with its terms, except to the extent
contemplated by the Indenture and any such Guarantee; (f) one or more final
judgments, orders or decrees for the payment of money in excess of $15,000,000,
either individually or in the aggregate, shall be entered against the Company or
any Restricted Subsidiary or any of their respective properties and shall not be
discharged and either (i) enforcement proceedings shall have been commenced upon
such judgment, order or decree or (ii) there shall have been a period of 60
consecutive days during which a stay of enforcement of such judgment or order,
by reason of an appeal or otherwise, shall not be in effect; or (g) certain
events of bankruptcy or insolvency as described in the Indenture with respect to
the Company or any Material Subsidiary.

      If any Event of Default (other than certain events of bankruptcy or
insolvency with respect to the Company) occurs and is continuing, the Trustee or
the Holders of at least 25% in principal amount of the Notes then outstanding
may direct the Trustee to declare all the Notes to be due and payable
immediately by a notice in writing to the Company and, if the Credit Agreement
is in effect, to the administrative agent under the Credit Agreement, and upon
any such declaration such amount shall become immediately due and payable,
except if the Credit Agreement is in effect, any such acceleration shall not be
effective until the first to occur of (i) an acceleration under the Credit
Agreement; or (ii) the fifth Business Day after receipt by the Company and the
administrative agent under the Credit Agreement of such written notice and
thereupon the Trustee may, at its discretion proceed to protect and enforce the
rights of the Holders of Notes by appropriate judicial proceedings.
Notwithstanding the foregoing, in the case of an Event of Default arising from
certain events of bankruptcy or insolvency with respect to the Company, all
outstanding Notes will become due and payable without further action or notice.
Holders of the Notes may not enforce the Indenture or the Notes except as
provided in the Indenture. The Holders of a majority in aggregate principal
amount of the then outstanding Notes may direct the Trustee in its exercise of
any trust or power. The Trustee may withhold from Holders of the Notes notice of
any

                                      A2-7
<PAGE>

continuing Default or Event of Default (except a Default or Event of Default
relating to the payment of principal or interest) if it determines that
withholding notice is in their interest.

      The Holders of not less than a majority in aggregate principal amount of
the then outstanding Notes by notice to the Trustee may on behalf of the Holders
of all the Notes waive any past Default or Event of Default under the Indenture
and its consequences, except, subject to Section 6.03 of the Indenture, a
continuing Default or Event of Default in the payment of the principal, premium,
if any, and Liquidated Damages, if any, or interest on any Notes, or in respect
of a covenant or provision which under the Indenture cannot be modified or
amended without the consent of the Holder of each Note outstanding.

      After a declaration of acceleration, but before a judgement or decree for
payment of the money due has been obtained by the Trustee, the Holders of a
majority in aggregate principal amount of Notes outstanding, by written notice
to the Company and the Trustee, may rescind and annul such declaration and its
consequences as provided in the Indenture.

      13. SUBORDINATION. The Company agrees, and each Holder by accepting a Note
agrees, that the payment of principal of, premium and interest and Liquidated
Damages, if any, on the Notes is subordinated in right of payment, to the extent
and in the manner provided in the Indenture, to the prior payment in full in
cash or Cash Equivalents of all Senior Indebtedness (whether outstanding on the
date hereof or thereafter created, incurred, assumed or guaranteed), and that
the subordination is for the benefit of the holders of Senior Indebtedness.

      14. TRUSTEE DEALINGS WITH COMPANY. The Trustee, in its individual or any
other capacity, may make loans to, accept deposits from, and perform services
for the Company or its Affiliates, and may otherwise deal with the Company or
its Affiliates, as if it were not the Trustee.

      15. NO RECOURSE AGAINST OTHERS. No member, director, officer, employee,
incorporator or stockholder, of the Company or any Guarantor, as such, shall
have any liability for any obligations of the Company and the Guarantors under
the Notes, the Guarantees or the Indenture or for any claim based on, in respect
of, or by reason of, such obligations or their creation. Each Holder by
accepting a Note waives and releases all such liability. The waiver and release
are part of the consideration for the issuance of the Notes.

      16. AUTHENTICATION. This Note shall not be valid until authenticated by
the manual signature of the Trustee or an authenticating agent.

      17. ABBREVIATIONS. Customary abbreviations may be used in the name of a
Holder or an assignee, such as: TEN COM (= tenants in common), TEN ENT (=
tenants by the entireties), JT TEN (= joint tenants with right of survivorship
and not as tenants in common), CUST (= Custodian), and U/G/M/A (= Uniform Gifts
to Minors Act).

      18. ADDITIONAL RIGHTS OF HOLDERS OF RESTRICTED GLOBAL NOTES AND RESTRICTED
DEFINITIVE NOTES. In addition to the rights provided to Holders of Notes under
the Indenture, Holders of Restricted Global Notes and Restricted Definitive
Notes shall have all the rights set forth in the Registration Rights Agreement
dated as of May 22, 2001, between the Company and the parties named on the
signature pages thereof (the "REGISTRATION RIGHTS AGREEMENT").

      19. CUSIP NUMBERS. Pursuant to a recommendation promulgated by the
Committee on Uniform Security Identification Procedures, the Company has caused
CUSIP numbers to be printed on

                                      A2-8
<PAGE>

the Notes and the Trustee may use CUSIP numbers in notices of redemption as a
convenience to Holders. No representation is made as to the accuracy of such
numbers either as printed on the Notes or as contained in any notice of
redemption and reliance may be placed only on the other identification numbers
placed thereon.

                                      A2-9
<PAGE>

      The Company will furnish to any Holder upon written request and without
charge a copy of the Indenture and/or the Registration Rights Agreement.
Requests may be made to:

            Playtex Products, Inc.
            300 Nyala Farms Road
            Westport, Connecticut 06880
            Telecopier No.:  (203) 341-4260
            Attention:  Chief Financial Officer

                                     A2-10
<PAGE>

                                 ASSIGNMENT FORM

To assign this Note, fill in the form below:

(J) or (we) assign and transfer this Note to:

--------------------------------------------------------------------------------

--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
 (Insert assignee's soc. sec. or tax I.D. no.)

--------------------------------------------------------------------------------

--------------------------------------------------------------------------------

--------------------------------------------------------------------------------

--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
(Print or type assignee's name, address and zip code)

and irrevocably appoint ________________________________________________________
to transfer this Note on the books of the Company. The agent may substitute
another to act for him.

Date:                               Your Signature:
                                                   ---------------------------
                                    (Sign exactly as your name appears on the
                                     Note)

                                    Tax Identification No:
                                                          ----------------------

                                    Signature Guarantee*:

      *Participant in a recognized Signature Guarantee Medallion Program (or
other signature guarantor acceptable to the Trustee)

                                     A2-11
<PAGE>

                       OPTION OF HOLDER TO ELECT PURCHASE

      If you want to elect to have this Note purchased by the Company pursuant
to Section 4.10 or 4.14 of the Indenture, check the box below:

            /_/ Section 4.10      /_/ Section 4.14

      If you want to elect to have only part of the Note purchased by the
Company pursuant to Section 4.10 or Section 4.14 of the Indenture, state the
amount you elect to have purchased: $________

Date:                               Your Signature:
                                                   ---------------------------
                                    (Sign exactly as your name appears on the
                                     Note)

                                    Tax Identification No:
                                                          --------------------

                                    Signature Guarantee*:

      *Participant in a recognized Signature Guarantee Medallion Program (or
other signature guarantor acceptable to the Trustee)

                                     A2-12
<PAGE>

           SCHEDULE OF EXCHANGES OF REGULATION S TEMPORARY GLOBAL NOTE

      The following exchanges of a part of this Regulation S Temporary Global
Note for an interest in another global Note, or of other Restricted Global Notes
for an interest in this Regulation S Temporary Global Note, have been made:

<TABLE>
<CAPTION>

                                                            Principal
                        Amount of         Amount of          amount
                       decrease in       increase in     of this Global     Signature of
                        principal         principal           Note           authorized
                         amount            amount           following        officer of
                         of this           of this        such decrease      Trustee or
 Date of Exchange      Global Note       Global Note      (or Increase)    Note Custodian
 ----------------      -----------       -----------      -------------    --------------
<S>                    <C>               <C>              <C>              <C>

</TABLE>

                                     A2-13
<PAGE>

                                    EXHIBIT B
                         FORM OF CERTIFICATE OF TRANSFER

Playtex Products, Inc.
300 Nyala Farms Road
Westport, Connecticut 06880
Telecopier No.:
Attention:  Chief Financial Officer

The Bank of New York
101 Barclay Avenue
Floor 21 West
New York, NY 10286
Telecopier No.:  (212) 815-5915
Attention:  Corporate Trust - Trustee Administration

Re:      9-3/8% Senior Subordinated Notes due 2011

      Reference is hereby made to the Indenture, dated as of May 22, 2001 (the
"INDENTURE") among Playtex Products, Inc. (the "COMPANY"), as issuer, the
Guarantors listed on Schedule 1 thereto, and The Bank of New York, as Trustee.
Capitalized terms used but not defined herein shall have the meanings given to
them in the Indenture.

      ______________, (the "TRANSFEROR") owns and proposes to transfer the
Note[s] or interest in such Note[s] specified in Annex A hereto, in the
principal amount of $___________ in such Note[s] or interests (the "TRANSFER"),
to __________ (the "TRANSFEREE"), as further specified in Annex A hereto. In
connection with the Transfer, the Transferor hereby certifies that:

[CHECK ALL THAT APPLY]

1. /_/ CHECK IF TRANSFEREE WILL TAKE DELIVERY OF A BENEFICIAL INTEREST IN THE
144A GLOBAL NOTE OR A DEFINITIVE NOTE PURSUANT TO RULE 144A. The Transfer is
being effected pursuant to and in accordance with Rule 144A under the United
States Securities Act of 1933, as amended (the "SECURITIES ACT"), and,
accordingly, the Transferor hereby further certifies that the beneficial
interest or Definitive Note is being transferred to a Person that the Transferor
reasonably believed and believes is purchasing the beneficial interest or
Definitive Note for its own account, or for one or more accounts with respect to
which such Person exercises sole investment discretion, and such Person and each
such account is a "qualified institutional buyer" within the meaning of Rule
144A in a transaction meeting the requirements of Rule 144A and such Transfer is
in compliance with any applicable blue sky securities laws of any state of the
United States. Upon consummation of the proposed Transfer in accordance with the
terms of the Indenture, the transferred beneficial interest or Definitive Note
will be subject to the restrictions on transfer enumerated in the Private
Placement Legend printed on the 144A Global Note and/or the Definitive Note and
in the Indenture and the Securities Act.

                                       B-1
<PAGE>

2. /_/ CHECK IF TRANSFEREE WILL TAKE DELIVERY OF A BENEFICIAL INTEREST IN THE
REGULATION S TEMPORARY GLOBAL NOTE, THE REGULATION S GLOBAL NOTE OR A DEFINITIVE
NOTE PURSUANT TO REGULATION S. The Transfer is being effected pursuant to and in
accordance with Rule 903 or Rule 904 under the Securities Act and, accordingly,
the Transferor hereby further certifies that (i) the Transfer is not being made
to a Person in the United States and (x) at the time the buy order was
originated, the Transferee was outside the United States or such Transferor and
any Person acting on its behalf reasonably believed and believes that the
Transferee was outside the United States or (y) the transaction was executed in,
on or through the facilities of a designated offshore securities market and
neither such Transferor nor any Person acting on its behalf knows that the
transaction was prearranged with a buyer in the United States, (ii) no directed
selling efforts have been made in contravention of the requirements of Rule
903(b) or Rule 904(b) of Regulation S under the Securities Act, (iii) the
transaction is not part of a plan or scheme to evade the registration
requirements of the Securities Act and (iv) if the proposed transfer is being
made prior to the expiration of the Restricted Period, the transfer is not being
made to a U.S. Person or for the account or benefit of a U.S. Person (other than
an Initial Purchaser). Upon consummation of the proposed transfer in accordance
with the terms of the Indenture, the transferred beneficial interest or
Definitive Note will be subject to the restrictions on Transfer enumerated in
the Private Placement Legend printed on the Regulation S Temporary Global Note,
the Regulation S Global Note and/or the Definitive Note and in the Indenture and
the Securities Act.

3. /_/ CHECK AND COMPLETE IF TRANSFEREE WILL TAKE DELIVERY OF A BENEFICIAL
INTEREST IN THE IAI GLOBAL NOTE OR A DEFINITIVE NOTE PURSUANT TO ANY PROVISION
OF THE SECURITIES ACT OTHER THAN RULE 144A OR REGULATION S. The Transfer is
being effected in compliance with the transfer restrictions applicable to
beneficial interests in Restricted Global Notes and Restricted Definitive Notes
and pursuant to and in accordance with the Securities Act and any applicable
blue sky securities laws of any state of the United States, and accordingly the
Transferor hereby further certifies that (check one):

      (a) /_/ such Transfer is being effected pursuant to and in accordance with
      Rule 144 under the Securities Act;

                                       or

      (b) /_/ such Transfer is being effected to the Company or a subsidiary
      thereof;

      (c) /_/ such Transfer is being effected pursuant to an effectIVE
      registration statement under the Securities Act and in compliance with the
      prospectus delivery requirements of the Securities Act;

                                       or

      (d) /_/ such Transfer is being effected to an Institutional AccrediTED
      Investor and pursuant to an exemption from the registration requirements
      of the Securities Act other than Rule 144A, Rule 144 or Rule 904, and the
      Transferor hereby further certifies that it has not engaged in any general
      solicitation within the meaning of Regulation D under the Securities Act
      and the Transfer complies with the transfer restrictions applicable to
      beneficial interests in a Restricted Global Note or Restricted Definitive
      Notes and the requirements of the exemption claimed, which certification
      is supported by (1) a certificate executed by the Transferee in the form
      of Exhibit D to the Indenture and (2) if such Transfer is in respect of a
      principal amount of Notes at the time of transfer of less than $250,000,
      an Opinion of Counsel provided by the Transferor or the Transferee (a copy
      of which the Transferor has attached to this certification), to the effect
      that such Transfer is in compliance with the Securities Act. Upon
      consummation of the proposed transfer in accordance with the terms of the
      Indenture, the transferred beneficial interest or Definitive Note will be
      subject to the restrictions on transfer enumerated in the Private
      Placement

                                      B-2
<PAGE>

      Legend printed on the IAI Global Note and/or the Definitive Notes and in
      the Indenture and the Securities Act.

4. /_/ CHECK IF TRANSFEREE WILL TAKE DELIVERY OF A BENEFICIAL INTEREST IN AN
UNRESTRICTED GLOBAL NOTE OR OF AN UNRESTRICTED DEFINITIVE NOTE.

      (a) /_/ CHECK IF TRANSFER IS PURSUANT TO RULE 144. (i) The Transfer is
being effected pursuant to and in accordance with Rule 144 under the Securities
Act and in compliance with the transfer restrictions contained in the Indenture
and any applicable blue sky securities laws of any state of the United States
and (ii) the restrictions on transfer contained in the Indenture and the Private
Placement Legend are not required in order to maintain compliance with the
Securities Act. Upon consummation of the proposed Transfer in accordance with
the terms of the Indenture, the transferred beneficial interest or Definitive
Note will no longer be subject to the restrictions on transfer enumerated in the
Private Placement Legend printed on the Restricted Global Notes, on Restricted
Definitive Notes and in the Indenture.

      (b) /_/ CHECK IF TRANSFER IS PURSUANT TO REGULATION S. (i) The Transfer is
being effected pursuant to and in accordance with Rule 903 or Rule 904 under the
Securities Act and in compliance with the transfer restrictions contained in the
Indenture and any applicable blue sky securities laws of any state of the United
States and (ii) the restrictions on transfer contained in the Indenture and the
Private Placement Legend are not required in order to maintain compliance with
the Securities Act. Upon consummation of the proposed Transfer in accordance
with the terms of the Indenture, the transferred beneficial interest or
Definitive Note will no longer be subject to the restrictions on transfer
enumerated in the Private Placement Legend printed on the Restricted Global
Notes, on Restricted Definitive Notes and in the Indenture.

      (c) /_/ CHECK IF TRANSFER IS PURSUANT TO OTHER EXEMPTION. (i) The Transfer
is being effected pursuant to and in compliance with an exemption from the
registration requirements of the Securities Act other than Rule 144, Rule 903 or
Rule 904 and in compliance with the transfer restrictions contained in the
Indenture and any applicable blue sky securities laws of any state of the United
States and (ii) the restrictions on transfer contained in the Indenture and the
Private Placement Legend are not required in order to maintain compliance with
the Securities Act. Upon consummation of the proposed Transfer in accordance
with the terms of the Indenture, the transferred beneficial interest or
Definitive Note will not be subject to the restrictions on transfer enumerated
in the Private Placement Legend printed on the Restricted Global Notes or
Restricted Definitive Notes and in the Indenture.

                                      B-3
<PAGE>

      This certificate and the statements contained herein are made for your
benefit and the benefit of the Company.

                                          [Insert Name of Transferor]

                                          BY:
                                             ---------------------------------
                                             Name:
                                             Title:

                                          Signature Guarantee*:

      *Participant in a recognized Signature Guarantee Medallion Program (or
other signature guarantor acceptable to the Trustee)

Dated:      __________, ____

                                      B-4
<PAGE>

                       ANNEX A TO CERTIFICATE OF TRANSFER

1.    The Transferor owns and proposes to transfer the following:

                             [CHECK ONE OF (a) OR (b)]

      (a) /_/ a beneficial interest in the:

            (i)   /_/ 144A Global Note (CUSIP 72813PAF7), or

            (ii) /_/ Regulation S Global Note (CUSIP U7263SAA0), or

            (iii) /_/ IAI Global Note (CUSIP 72813PAG5), or

      (b) /_/ a Restricted Definitive Note.

2.    After the Transfer the Transferee will hold:

                                    [CHECK ONE]

      (a) /_/ a beneficial interest in the:

            (i) /_/ 144A Global Note (CUSIP 72813PAF7), or

            (ii) /_/ Regulation S Global Note (CUSIP U7263SAA0), or

            (iii) /_/ IAI Global Note (CUSIP 72813PAG5), or

      (b) /_/ a Restricted Definitive Note, or

      (c) /_/ an Unrestricted Definitive Note,

      in accordance with the terms of the Indenture.

                                      B-5
<PAGE>

                                    EXHIBIT C
                         FORM OF CERTIFICATE OF EXCHANGE

Playtex Products, Inc.
300 Nyala Farms Road
Westport, Connecticut 06880
Telecopier No.:
Attention:  Chief Financial Officer

The Bank of New York
101 Barclay Avenue
Floor 21 West
New York, New  York 10286
Telecopier No.:  (212) 815-5915
Attention:  Corporate Trust - Trustee Administration

Re:   9-3/8% Senior Subordinated Notes Due 2011

      Reference is hereby made to the Indenture, dated as of May 22, 2001 (the
"INDENTURE"), among Playtex Products, Inc. (the "COMPANY"), as issuer, the
Guarantors listed on Schedule 1 thereto and The Bank of New York, as Trustee.
Capitalized terms used but not defined herein shall have the meanings given to
them in the Indenture.

      ____________, (the "OWNER") owns and proposes to exchange the Note[s] or
interest in such Note[s] specified herein, in the principal amount of
$____________ in such Note[s] or interests (the "EXCHANGE"). In connection with
the Exchange, the Owner hereby certifies that:

1. EXCHANGE OF RESTRICTED DEFINITIVE NOTES OR BENEFICIAL INTERESTS IN A
RESTRICTED GLOBAL NOTE FOR UNRESTRICTED DEFINITIVE NOTES OR BENEFICIAL INTERESTS
IN AN UNRESTRICTED GLOBAL NOTE

      (a) /_/ CHECK IF EXCHANGE IS FROM BENEFICIAL INTEREST IN A RESTRICTED
GLOBAL NOTE TO BENEFICIAL INTEREST IN AN UNRESTRICTED GLOBAL NOTE. In connection
with the Exchange of the Owner's beneficial interest in a Restricted Global Note
for a beneficial interest in an Unrestricted Global Note in an equal principal
amount, the Owner hereby certifies (i) the beneficial interest is being acquired
for the Owner's own account without transfer, (ii) such Exchange has been
effected in compliance with the transfer restrictions applicable to the Global
Notes and pursuant to and in accordance with the United States Securities Act of
1933, as amended (the "SECURITIES ACT"), (iii) the restrictions on transfer
contained in the Indenture and the Private Placement Legend are not required in
order to maintain compliance with the Securities Act and (iv) the beneficial
interest in an Unrestricted Global Note is being acquired in compliance with any
applicable blue sky securities laws of any state of the United States.

      (b) /_/ CHECK IF EXCHANGE IS FROM BENEFICIAL INTEREST IN A RESTRICTED
GLOBAL NOTE TO UNRESTRICTED DEFINITIVE NOTE. In connection with the Exchange of
the Owner's beneficial interest in a Restricted Global Note for an Unrestricted
Definitive Note, the Owner hereby certifies (i) the Definitive

                                       C-1
<PAGE>

Note is being acquired for the Owner's own account without transfer, (ii) such
Exchange has been effected in compliance with the transfer restrictions
applicable to the Restricted Global Notes and pursuant to and in accordance with
the Securities Act, (iii) the restrictions on transfer contained in the
Indenture and the Private Placement Legend are not required in order to maintain
compliance with the Securities Act and (iv) the Definitive Note is being
acquired in compliance with any applicable blue sky securities laws of any state
of the United States.

      (c) /_/ CHECK IF EXCHANGE IS FROM RESTRICTED DEFINITIVE NOTE TO BENEFICIAL
INTEREST IN AN UNRESTRICTED GLOBAL NOTE. In connection with the Owner's Exchange
of a Restricted Definitive Note for a beneficial interest in an Unrestricted
Global Note, the Owner hereby certifies (i) the beneficial interest is being
acquired for the Owner's own account without transfer, (ii) such Exchange has
been effected in compliance with the transfer restrictions applicable to
Restricted Definitive Notes and pursuant to and in accordance with the
Securities Act, (iii) the restrictions on transfer contained in the Indenture
and the Private Placement Legend are not required in order to maintain
compliance with the Securities Act and (iv) the beneficial interest is being
acquired in compliance with any applicable blue sky securities laws of any state
of the United States.

      (d) /_/ CHECK IF EXCHANGE IS FROM RESTRICTED DEFINITIVE NOTE TO
UNRESTRICTED DEFINITIVE NOTE. In connection with the Owner's Exchange of a
Restricted Definitive Note for an Unrestricted Definitive Note, the Owner hereby
certifies (i) the Unrestricted Definitive Note is being acquired for the Owner's
own account without transfer, (ii) such Exchange has been effected in compliance
with the transfer restrictions applicable to Restricted Definitive Notes and
pursuant to and in accordance with the Securities Act, (iii) the restrictions on
transfer contained in the Indenture and the Private Placement Legend are not
required in order to maintain compliance with the Securities Act and (iv) the
Unrestricted Definitive Note is being acquired in compliance with any applicable
blue sky securities laws of any state of the United States.

2. EXCHANGE OF RESTRICTED DEFINITIVE NOTES OR BENEFICIAL INTERESTS IN RESTRICTED
GLOBAL NOTES FOR RESTRICTED DEFINITIVE NOTES OR BENEFICIAL INTERESTS IN
RESTRICTED GLOBAL NOTES

      (a) /_/ CHECK IF EXCHANGE IS FROM BENEFICIAL INTEREST IN A
RESTRICTED GLOBAL NOTE TO RESTRICTED DEFINITIVE NOTE. In connection with the
Exchange of the Owner's beneficial interest in a Restricted Global Note for a
Restricted Definitive Note with an equal principal amount, the Owner hereby
certifies that the Restricted Definitive Note is being acquired for the Owner's
own account without transfer. Upon consummation of the proposed Exchange in
accordance with the terms of the Indenture, the Restricted Definitive Note
issued will continue to be subject to the restrictions on transfer enumerated in
the Private Placement Legend printed on the Restricted Definitive Note and in
the Indenture and the Securities Act.

      (b) /_/ CHECK IF EXCHANGE IS FROM RESTRICTED DEFINITIVE NOTE TO BENEFICIAL
INTEREST IN A RESTRICTED GLOBAL NOTE. In connection with the Exchange of the
Owner's Restricted Definitive Note for a beneficial interest in the [CHECK ONE]
[GRAPHIC OMITTED] "144A Global Note", [GRAPHIC OMITTED] "Regulation S Global
Note", [GRAPHIC OMITTED] "IAI Global Note" with an equal principal amount, the
Owner hereby certifies (i) the beneficial interest is being acquired for the
Owner's own account without transfer and (ii) such Exchange has been effected in
compliance with the transfer restrictions applicable to the Restricted Global
Notes and pursuant to and in accordance with the Securities Act, and in
compliance with any applicable blue sky securities laws of any state of the
United States. Upon consummation of the proposed Exchange in accordance with the
terms of the Indenture, the beneficial interest issued will be subject to the
restrictions on transfer enumerated in the Private Placement Legend printed on
the relevant Restricted Global Note and in the Indenture and the Securities Act.

                                       C-2
<PAGE>

      This certificate and the statements contained herein are made for your
benefit and the benefit of the Company.

                                          [Insert Name of Owner]

                                          By:
                                             ---------------------------------
                                             Name:
                                             Title:

                                             Signature Guarantee*:

      *Participant in a recognized Signature Guarantee Medallion Program (or
other signature guarantor acceptable to the Trustee)

Dated:      __________, ____

                                      C-3
<PAGE>

                                    EXHIBIT D
                            FORM OF CERTIFICATE FROM
                   ACQUIRING INSTITUTIONAL ACCREDITED INVESTOR

Playtex Products, Inc.
300 Nyala Farms Road
Westport, Connecticut 06880
Telecopier No.:
Attention:  Chief Financial Officer

The Bank of New York
101 Barclay Avenue
Floor 21 West
New York, New York 10286
Telecopier No.:  (212) 815-5915
Attention:  Corporate Trust - Trustee Administration

Re:      9-3/8% Senior Subordinated Notes due 2011

      Reference is hereby made to the Indenture, dated as of May 22, 2001 (the
"INDENTURE"), among Playtex Products, Inc. (the "COMPANY"), as issuer, the
Guarantors listed on Schedule 1 thereto and The Bank of New York, as Trustee.
Capitalized terms used but not defined herein shall have the meanings given to
them in the Indenture.

         In connection with our proposed purchase of $____________ aggregate
         principal amount of:

      (a) /_/ a beneficial interest in a Global Note, or

      (b) /_/ a Definitive Note,

      we confirm that:

   1. We understand that any subsequent transfer of the Notes or any interest
      therein is subject to certain restrictions and conditions set forth in the
      Indenture and the undersigned agrees to be bound by, and not to resell,
      pledge or otherwise transfer the Notes or any interest therein except in
      compliance with, such restrictions and conditions and the United States
      Securities Act of 1933, as amended (the "SECURITIES ACT").

   2. We understand that the offer and sale of the Notes have not been
      registered under the Securities Act, and that the Notes and any interest
      therein may not be offered or sold except as permitted in the following
      sentence. We agree, on our own behalf and on behalf of any accounts for
      which we are acting as hereinafter stated, that if we should sell the
      Notes or any interest therein, we will do so only (A) to the Company or
      any Subsidiary thereof, (B) in accordance with Rule 144A under the
      Securities Act to a "qualified institutional buyer" (as defined therein),
      (C) to an institutional "accredited investor" (as defined below) that,
      prior to such transfer, furnishes (or has furnished on

                                       D-1
<PAGE>

      its behalf by a U.S. broker-dealer) to you and to the Company a signed
      letter substantially in the form of this letter and, if such transfer is
      in respect of a principal amount of Notes, at the time of transfer of less
      than $250,000, an Opinion of Counsel in form reasonably acceptable to the
      Company to the effect that such transfer is in compliance with the
      Securities Act, (D) outside the United States in accordance with Rule 904
      of Regulation S under the Securities Act, (E) pursuant to the provisions
      of Rule 144(k) under the Securities Act or (F) pursuant to an effective
      registration statement under the Securities Act and in each case of
      accordance with the applicable securities laws of any state of the United
      States or any other applicable jurisdiction, and we further agree to
      provide to any person purchasing the Definitive Note or beneficial
      interest in a Global Note from us in a transaction meeting the
      requirements of clauses (A) through (E) of this paragraph a notice
      advising such purchaser that resales thereof are restricted as stated
      herein.

   3. We understand that, on any proposed resale of the Notes or beneficial
      interest therein, we will be required to furnish to you and the Company
      such certifications, legal opinions and other information as you and the
      Company may reasonably require to confirm that the proposed sale complies
      with the foregoing restrictions. We further understand that the Notes
      purchased by us will bear a legend to the foregoing effect. We further
      understand that any subsequent transfer by us of the Notes or beneficial
      interest therein acquired by us must be effected through one of the
      placement agents.

   4. We are an institutional "accredited investor" (as defined in Rule
      501(a)(1), (2), (3) or (7) of Regulation D under the Securities Act) and
      have such knowledge and experience in financial and business matters as to
      be capable of evaluating the merits and risks of our investment in the
      Notes, and we and any accounts for which we are acting are each able to
      bear the economic risk of our or its investment.

   5. We are acquiring the Notes or beneficial interest therein purchased by us
      for our own account or for one or more accounts (each of which is an
      institutional "accredited investor") as to each of which we exercise sole
      investment discretion.

      You and the Company are entitled to rely upon this letter and are
      irrevocably authorized to produce this letter or a copy hereof to any
      interested party in any administrative or legal proceedings or official
      inquiry with respect to the matters covered hereby.

                                       ---------------------------------------
                                       [Insert Name of Accredited Investor]

                                       By:
                                          --------------------------------------
                                          Name:
                                          Title:

                                          Signature Guarantee*:

      *Participant in a recognized Signature Guarantee Medallion Program (or
other signature guarantor acceptable to the Trustee)

Dated: __________________, ____

                                      D-2
<PAGE>

                                    EXHIBIT E
                          FORM OF NOTATION OF GUARANTEE

      For value received, each Guarantor (which term includes any successor
Person under the Indenture) has, jointly and severally, unconditionally
guaranteed, to the extent set forth in the Indenture and subject to the
provisions in the Indenture dated as of May 22, 2001 (the "INDENTURE") among the
Playtex Products, Inc., the Guarantors listed on Schedule I thereto and The Bank
of New York, as Trustee (the "TRUSTEE"), (a) the due and punctual payment of the
principal of, premium, if any, and interest on the Notes (as defined in the
Indenture), whether at maturity, by acceleration, redemption or otherwise, the
due and punctual payment of interest on overdue principal and premium, and, to
the extent permitted by law, interest on the Notes, and the due and punctual
performance of all other obligations of the Company to the Holders or the
Trustee all in accordance with the terms of the Indenture and (b) in case of any
extension of time of payment or renewal of any Notes or any of such other
obligations, that the same will be promptly paid in full when due or performed
in accordance with the terms of the extension or renewal, whether at Stated
Maturity, by acceleration or otherwise. The obligations of the Guarantors to the
Holders of Notes and to the Trustee pursuant to this Guarantee and the Indenture
are expressly set forth in Article 11 of the Indenture and reference is hereby
made to the Indenture for the precise terms of this Guarantee. Each Holder of a
Note, by accepting the same, (a) agrees to and shall be bound by such
provisions, (b) authorizes and directs the Trustee, on behalf of such Holder, to
take such action as may be necessary or appropriate to effectuate the
subordination as provided in the Indenture and (c) appoints the Trustee
attorney-in-fact of such Holder for such purpose; PROVIDED, HOWEVER, that the
Indebtedness evidenced by this Guarantee shall cease to be so subordinated and
subject in right of payment upon any defeasance of this Note in accordance with
the provisions of the Indenture.

                                       [NAME OF GUARANTOR(S)]

                                       By:
                                          ------------------------------------
                                          Name:
                                          Title:

                                      E-1
<PAGE>

                                    EXHIBIT F
                         FORM OF SUPPLEMENTAL INDENTURE
                    TO BE DELIVERED BY SUBSEQUENT GUARANTORS

      SUPPLEMENTAL INDENTURE (this "SUPPLEMENTAL INDENTURE"), dated as of
________, ____ among __________________ (the "GUARANTEEING SUBSIDIARY"), a
subsidiary of Playtex Products, Inc. (or its permitted successor), a Delaware
corporation (the "COMPANY"), the Company, the other Guarantors (as defined in
the Indenture referred to herein) and The Bank of New York, as Trustee under the
Indenture referred to below (the "TRUSTEE").

                                W I T N E S S E T H

      WHEREAS, the Company has heretofore executed and delivered to the Trustee
an Indenture (the "INDENTURE"), dated as of May 22, 2001 providing for the
issuance of an aggregate principal amount of up to $500,000,000 of 9-3/8% Senior
Subordinated Notes due 2011 (the "NOTES");

      WHEREAS, the Indenture provides that under certain circumstances the
Guaranteeing Subsidiary shall execute and deliver to the Trustee a Supplemental
Indenture pursuant to which the Guaranteeing Subsidiary shall unconditionally
guarantee all of the Company's Obligations under the Notes and the Indenture on
the terms and conditions set forth herein (the "GUARANTEE"); and

      WHEREAS, pursuant to Section 9.01 of the Indenture, the Trustee is
authorized to execute and deliver this Supplemental Indenture.

      NOW THEREFORE, in consideration of the foregoing and for other good and
valuable consideration, the receipt of which is hereby acknowledged, the
Guaranteeing Subsidiary and the Trustee mutually covenant and agree for the
equal and ratable benefit of the Holders of the Notes as follows:

      1. CAPITALIZED TERMS. Capitalized terms used herein without definition
shall have the meanings assigned to them in the Indenture.

      2. AGREEMENT TO GUARANTEE. The Guaranteeing Subsidiary hereby agrees as
follows:

      (a) Along with all Guarantors named in the Indenture, to jointly and
severally, unconditionally guarantee on a senior subordinated basis to each
Holder of a Note authenticated and delivered by the Trustee and to the Trustee
and its successors and assigns, irrespective of the validity and enforceability
of this Indenture, the Notes or the obligations of the Company hereunder or
thereunder, that:

      (i) the principal of and interest on the Notes will be promptly paid in
full when due, whether at maturity, by acceleration, redemption or otherwise,
and interest on the overdue principal of and interest on the Notes, if any, if
lawful, and all other obligations of the Company to the Holders or the Trustee
hereunder or thereunder will be promptly paid in full or performed, all in
accordance with the terms hereof and the Indenture; and

      (ii) in case of any extension of time of payment or renewal of any Notes
or any of such other obligations, that same will be promptly paid in full when
due or performed in accordance with the terms of the extension or renewal,
whether at Stated Maturity, by acceleration or otherwise. Failing payment

                                      F-1
<PAGE>

when due of any amount so guaranteed or any performance so guaranteed for
whatever reason, the Guarantors shall be jointly and severally obligated to pay
the same immediately. Each Guarantor agrees that this is a guarantee of payment
and not a guarantee of collection.

      (b) The obligations hereunder shall be unconditional, irrespective of the
validity, regularity or enforceability of the Notes or the Indenture, the
absence of any action to enforce the same, any waiver or consent by any Holder
of the Notes with respect to any provisions hereof or thereof, the recovery of
any judgment against the Company, any action to enforce the same or any other
circumstance which might otherwise constitute a legal or equitable discharge or
defense of a Guarantor.

      (c) The following is hereby waived: diligence, presentment, demand of
payment, filing of claims with a court in the event of insolvency or bankruptcy
of the Company, any right to require a proceeding first against the Company,
protest, notice and all demands whatsoever.

      (d) This Guarantee shall not be discharged except by complete performance
of the obligations contained in the Notes and the Indenture.

      (e) If any Holder or the Trustee is required by any court or otherwise to
return to the Company, the Guarantors or any custodian, Trustee, liquidator or
other similar official acting in relation to either the Company or the
Guarantors, any amount paid by either to the Trustee or such Holder, this
Guarantee, to the extent theretofore discharged, shall be reinstated in full
force and effect.

      (f) The Guaranteeing Subsidiary shall not be entitled to any right of
subrogation in relation to the Holders in respect of any obligations guaranteed
hereby until payment in full of all obligations guaranteed hereby.

      (g) As between the Guarantors, on the one hand, and the Holders and the
Trustee, on the other hand, (x) the maturity of the obligations guaranteed
hereby may be accelerated as provided in Article 6 of the Indenture for the
purposes of this Guarantee, notwithstanding any stay, injunction or other
prohibition preventing such acceleration in respect of the obligations
guaranteed hereby, and (y) in the event of any declaration of acceleration of
such obligations as provided in Article 6 of the Indenture, such obligations
(whether or not due and payable) shall forthwith become due and payable by the
Guarantors for the purpose of this Guarantee.

      (h) If the Guaranteeing Subsidiary makes a payment or distribution under a
Guarantee, such Guaranteeing Subsidiary shall be entitled to a contribution from
each other Guarantor in a pro rata amount based on the assets of each Guarantor
determined accordance with GAAP. The Guarantors shall have the right to seek
contribution from any non-paying Guarantor so long as the exercise of such right
does not impair the rights of the Holders under the Guarantee.

      (i) Pursuant to Section 11.03 of the Indenture, after giving effect to any
maximum amount and any other contingent and fixed liabilities that are relevant
under any applicable bankruptcy or fraudulent conveyance laws, and after giving
effect to any collections from, rights to receive contribution from or payments
made by or on behalf of any other Guarantor in respect of the obligations of
such other Guarantor under Article 11 of the Indenture, this Guarantee shall be
limited to the maximum amount permissible such that the obligations of such
Guarantor under this Guarantee will not constitute a fraudulent transfer or
conveyance.

      (j) The Obligations of the Guaranteeing Subsidiary under this Guarantee
and pursuant to Article 11 of the Indenture shall be junior and subordinated to
all Senior Indebtedness of such

                                      F-2
<PAGE>

Guaranteeing Subsidiary on the same basis as the Notes are junior and
subordinated to Senior Indebtedness of the Company. For the purposes of the
foregoing sentence, the Trustee and the Holders shall have the right to receive
and/or retain payments by any of the Guarantors only at such times as they may
receive and/or retain payments in respect of the Notes pursuant to the
Indenture, including Article 10 thereof and this Guarantee with respect to
subordination.

      Upon any voluntary or involuntary liquidation or dissolution of the
Guaranteeing Subsidiary or any bankruptcy, reorganization, insolvency,
receivership or similar proceeding relating to such Guaranteeing Subsidiary or
its respective property, all Senior Indebtedness of such Guaranteeing Subsidiary
must be paid in full in cash or Cash Equivalents before any payment or
distribution is made (excluding a distribution of Permitted Junior Securities)
upon principal, interest, premium, if any, and Liquidated Damages, if any, on
the Notes.

      3. EXECUTION AND DELIVERY. Each Guaranteeing Subsidiary agrees that the
Guarantees shall remain in full force and effect notwithstanding any failure to
endorse on each Note a notation of such Guarantee.

      4. GUARANTEEING SUBSIDIARY MAY CONSOLIDATE, ETC. ON CERTAIN TERMS.

      (a) Except as otherwise provided in Section 11.06 of the Indenture, the
Guaranteeing Subsidiary may not sell or otherwise dispose of all or
substantially all of its assets to, or consolidate with or merge with or into
(whether or not such Guarantor is the surviving Person), another Person, other
than the Company or another Guarantor, unless:

      (i) the Person acquiring the property in any such sale or disposition or
the Person formed by or surviving any such consolidation or merger assumes all
the obligations of such Guaranteeing Subsidiary under the Indenture, its
Guarantee and, if it is still in effect, the Registration Rights Agreement
pursuant to a Supplemental Indenture reasonably satisfactory to the Trustee; or

      (ii) such sale, disposition, merger or consolidation is permitted by the
terms of the Indenture and, to the extent required, the Net Cash Proceeds are
applied in accordance with the applicable provisions of the Indenture.

      (b) In case of any such sale of all or substantially all of its assets to,
or consolidation, merger, sale or conveyance and upon the assumption by the
successor Person, by Supplemental Indenture, executed and delivered to the
Trustee and reasonably satisfactory in form to the Trustee, of the Guarantee
endorsed upon the Notes and the due and punctual performance of all of the
covenants and conditions of the Indenture to be performed by the Guaranteeing
Subsidiary, such successor Person shall succeed to and be substituted for the
Guaranteeing Subsidiary with the same effect as if it had been named herein as a
Guarantor. Such successor Person thereupon may cause to be signed any or all of
the Guarantees to be endorsed upon all of the Notes issuable hereunder which
theretofore shall not have been signed by the Company and delivered to the
Trustee. All the Guarantees so issued shall in all respects have the same legal
rank and benefit under the Indenture as the Guarantees theretofore and
thereafter issued in accordance with the terms of the Indenture as though all of
such Guarantees had been issued at the date of the execution of the Indenture.

      (c) Except as set forth in Articles 4 and 5 and Section 11.06 of the
Indenture, and notwithstanding clauses (a) and (b) above, nothing contained in
the Indenture or in any of the Notes shall prevent any consolidation or merger
of the Guaranteeing Subsidiary with or into the Company or another

                                      F-3
<PAGE>

Guarantor, or shall prevent any sale or conveyance of the property of a
Guaranteeing Subsidiary as an entirety or substantially as an entirety to the
Company or another Guarantor.

      5. RELEASES.

      The Guarantee of a Guaranteeing Subsidiary will be released:

      (a) in connection with any consolidation or merger if the Guaranteeing
Subsidiary or surviving Person shall cease to be a Subsidiary of the Company,
and if the consolidation or merger complies with the provisions of the
Indenture;

      (b) in connection with any sale or other disposition of all or
substantially all of the assets of the Guaranteeing Subsidiary (including by way
of merger or consolidation) to a Person that is not (either before or after
giving effect to such transaction) a Subsidiary of the Company, if all of the
conditions in Section 11.06 of the Indenture are satisfied and the sale or other
disposition complies with Section 4.10 of the Indenture;

      (c) if the Guaranteeing Subsidiary is declared to be an Unrestricted
Subsidiary in accordance with the provisions of the Indenture; or

      (d) in connection with any sale of all of the Capital Stock of the
Guaranteeing Subsidiary to a Person that is not (either before or after giving
effect to such transaction) a Subsidiary of the Company, if the sale complies
with Section 4.10 of the Indenture.

      6. RELEASES FOLLOWING SALE OF ASSETS. In the event or a sale or other
disposition of all or substantially all of the assets of the Guaranteeing
Subsidiary, by way of merger, consolidation or otherwise, or a sale or other
disposition of all of the capital stock of such Guaranteeing Subsidiary, then
such Guaranteeing Subsidiary (in the event of a sale or other disposition, by
way of merger, consolidation or otherwise, of all of the capital stock of such
Guaranteeing Subsidiary) or the Person acquiring the property (in the event of a
sale or other disposition of all or substantially all of the assets of such
Guaranteeing Subsidiary) will be released and relieved of any obligations under
its Guarantee; PROVIDED that the Net Cash Proceeds of such sale or other
disposition are applied in accordance with the applicable provisions of the
Indenture, including without limitation Section 4.10 thereof. Upon delivery by
the Company to the Trustee of an Officer's Certificate and an Opinion of Counsel
to the effect that such sale or other disposition was made by the Company in
accordance with the provisions of the Indenture, including without limitation
Section 4.10 thereof, the Trustee shall execute any documents reasonably
required in order to evidence the release of such Guaranteeing Subsidiary from
its obligations under its Guarantee.

      In the event of the defeasance of the Notes in accordance with the terms
of the Indenture, including without limitation Section 8.02 and 8.03 thereof,
and in the event of the designation of any Restricted Subsidiary that is a
Guaranteeing Subsidiary as an Unrestricted Subsidiary in accordance with the
terms of this Indenture, then such Guarantor will be released and relieved of
any obligations under its Guarantee.

      Any Guarantor not released from its obligations under its Guarantee shall
remain liable for the full amount of principal of and interest on the Notes and
for the other obligations of any Guarantor under the Indenture as provided in
Article 11 thereof.

                                      F-4
<PAGE>

      6. NO RECOURSE AGAINST OTHERS. No past, present or future member,
director, officer, employee, incorporator, stockholder or agent of the
Guaranteeing Subsidiary, as such, shall have any liability for any obligations
of the Company or any Guaranteeing Subsidiary under the Notes, any Guarantees,
the Indenture or this Supplemental Indenture or for any claim based on, in
respect of, or by reason of, such obligations or their creation. Each Holder of
the Notes by accepting a Note waives and releases all such liability. The waiver
and release are part of the consideration for issuance of the Notes. Such waiver
may not be effective to waive liabilities under the federal securities laws and
it is the view of the SEC that such a waiver is against public policy.

      7. NEW YORK LAW TO GOVERN. THE INTERNAL LAW OF THE STATE OF NEW YORK SHALL
GOVERN AND BE USED TO CONSTRUE THIS SUPPLEMENTAL INDENTURE BUT WITHOUT GIVING
EFFECT TO APPLICABLE PRINCIPLES OF CONFLICT OF LAWS TO THE EXTENT THAT THE
APPLICATION OF THE LAWS OF ANOTHER JURISDICTION WOULD BE REQUIRED THEREBY.

      8. COUNTERPARTS. The parties may sign any number of copies of this
Supplemental Indenture. Each signed copy shall be an original, but all of them
together represent the same agreement.

      9. EFFECT OF HEADINGS. The Section headings herein are for convenience
only and shall not affect the construction hereof.

      10. THE TRUSTEE. The Trustee shall not be responsible in any manner
whatsoever for or in respect of the validity or sufficiency of this Supplemental
Indenture or for or in respect of the recitals contained herein, all of which
recitals are made solely by the Guaranteeing Subsidiary and the Company.

      11. SUCCESSORS AND ASSIGNS. All agreements of the Company, the
Guaranteeing Subsidiary and the Guarantors in this Supplemental Indenture shall
bind their successors. All agreements of the Trustee in this Supplemental
Indenture shall bind its successors.

      12. SEVERABILITY. In case any provision in this Supplemental Indenture
shall be invalid, illegal or unenforceable, the validity, legality and
enforceability of the remaining provisions shall not in any way be affected or
impaired thereby.

                                      F-5
<PAGE>

      IN WITNESS WHEREOF, the parties hereto have caused this Supplemental
Indenture to be duly executed and attested, all as of the date first above
written.

Dated:  _______________, ____
                                    [GUARANTEEING SUBSIDIARY]

                                    By:
                                       -----------------------------------------
                                       Name:
                                       Title:

                                    PLAYTEX PRODUCTS, INC.

                                    By:
                                       -----------------------------------------
                                       Name:
                                       Title:

                                    THE BANK OF NEW YORK
                                         as Trustee

                                    By:
                                       -----------------------------------------
                                       Name:
                                       Title:

                                      F-6
<PAGE>

                                   SCHEDULE 1

                                 THE GUARANTORS

      The following schedule lists each Guarantor of the Notes as of the date of
the Indenture:

                                                                  State of
Guarantors                                                     Incorporation
----------                                                     -------------
1.      Playtex Sales & Services, Inc.                           Delaware
2.      Playtex Manufacturing, Inc.                              Delaware
3.      Playtex Investment Corp.                                 Delaware
4.      Playtex International Corp.                              Delaware
5.      TH Marketing Corp.                                       Delaware
6.      Smile-Tote, Inc.                                        California
7.      Sun Pharmaceuticals Corp.                                Delaware
8.      Personal Care Group, Inc.                                Delaware
9.      Personal Care Holdings, Inc.                             Delaware
10.     Carewell Industries, Inc.                                New York

Source: [{"source": "alea-institute/alea-institute/kl3m-data-edgar-agreements/train-00026-of-00352.parquet"}, [{"source": "alea-institute/alea-institute/kl3m-data-edgar-agreements/train-00026-of-00352.parquet"}]]